Home

fagor documentation for the 8055 cnc

1. MP1121 Page Chapter 11 Section 16 2D AND 3D POCKETS 2D POCKET PROFILES 11 1 6 PROFILE PROGRAMMING SYNTAX The outside profile and the inside profiles or islands which are programmed must be defined by simple geometrical elements such as straight lines or arcs The first definition block where the external profile starts and the last where the last profile defined ends must be provided with the block label number These label numbers will be those which indicate to the canned cycle the beginning and end of the geometric description of the profiles which make up the pocket Example G66 D100 R200 F300 S400 E500 Definition of irregular pocket N400 GO G90 X300 Y50 Z3 Beginning of geometric description N500 G2 G6 X300 Y50 1150 JO End of geometric description The profile programming syntax must comply with the following rules 1 The external profile must begin in the first definition block of the geometric description of the part profiles This block will be assigned a label number in order to indicate canned cycle G66 the beginning of the geometric description 2 The part surface coordinate will be programmed in this block 3 All the internal profiles which are required may be programmed one after the other Each of these must commence with a block containing the G00 function indicating the beginnin
2. 40 100 200 270 340 GIE 90 eus selects the ZX plane G18 GAB S1 riot turns TCP on G01 X40 ZO BO positions the tool at 40 0 orienting it to 0 XT00 nins movement to 100 0 with the tool oriented at 0 Bz35 xi ds cwekwden orients the tool to 35 X200 Z70 movement to 200 70 with the tool orientated to 35 B90 ree orients the tool to 90 G02 X270 ZO R70 BO circularinterpolationupto 270 0 keeping the tool perpendicular to the path GOL X340 movement to 340 0 with the tool oriented at 0 G48 SO Lose eedieitenus turns TCP on Page Chapter 17 Section 18 COORDINATETRANSFORMATION TCPTRANSFORMATION 17 3 1 CONSIDERATIONS FOR FUNCTION G48 G48 cannot be programmed in the following instances At the 8055 GP CNC model From the PLC channel although it can be programmed from the user channel In order to work with TCP transformation G48 the X Y Z axes must be defined form the active trihedron and be linear The X Y and Z axes may have GANTRY axes coupled or synchronized via PLC associated with them When working with TCP transformation and performing rigid tapping in incline planes all axes gains not only for the Z axis must be adjusted by using the second gains and accelerations TCP transformation is kept active even after turning the CNC off and back on G48 can be programmed while G49 is active
3. GO3 XY IJ CM QG03 XY IJ i sa Bm X The helical interpolation is programmed in a block where the circular interpolation must be programmed by means of functions G02 G03 G08 or G09 G02X Y I J Z G02 XYRZ A G03QI J A B G08 XYZ G09X Y I J Z If the helical interpolation is supposed to make more than one turn the linear movement of another axis must also be programmed one axis only On the other hand the pitch along the linear axis must also be set format 5 5 by means of the I J and K letters Each one of these letters is associated with the axes as follows D for the X U A axes J for the Y V B axes K for the Z W C axes G02X Y I J Z K G02 X YRZ K G03Q I J AT G08 X Y B J G09X Y I J Z K Page Chapter 6 Section 12 PATH CONTROL HELICALINTERPOLATION Example Programming in Cartesian and polar coordinates the starting point being X0 YO ZO 50 f XY K 5 i MN i Cartesian coordinates G03 X0 YO I15 Z50 K5 Polar coordinates G03 Q180 I15 JO Z50 K5 Chapter 6 Section Page PATHCONTROL HELICALINTERPOLATION 13 6 8 TANGENTIAL ENTRY AT BEGINNING OF A MACHINING OPERATION G37 Via function G37 you can tangentially link two paths without having to calculate the intersection points Function G37 is not modal so it should always be programmed if you wish to start a machining operat
4. MP1125 a D C C x MP1126 E LY Page Chapter 11 Section 14 2D AND 3D POCKETS 2D POCKET PROFILES Boolean Intersection MP1127 The profile intersection process is performed according to the order in which the profiles have been programmed This way the result of the intersection between the first two do c 2 The programming sequence for the different profiles is determinant when having an intersection of more than 2 profiles coe will be intersected with the third one and so forth The initial point of the resulting profiles always coincides with the initial point which defined the first profile Examples MP1128 Chapter 11 2D AND 3D POCKETS Section 2D POCKET PROFILES Page 15 11 1 5 3 RESULTING PROFILE Once the profiles of the pocket and islands have been obtained the canned cycle calculates the remaining profiles according to the radius of the roughing tool and the programmed finishing stock It may occur that in this process intersections are obtained which do not appear among the programmed profiles Example MP1120 If there is an area in which the roughing tool cannot pass when the intersection is made between the offset of the profiles several pockets will be obtained as a result all of which will be machined Example
5. 40 90 The programmed path is represented by a solid line and the compensation path by a dotted line Tool radius 10mm Tool number SEL Tool offset number DI G92 X0 YO ZO position coordinate preset G90 G17 S0 5 T1 D1 MO3 tool tool offset spindle start at S100 G41 G01 X40 Y30 F125 activate compensation Y70 X90 Y30 X40 G40 G01 XO YO cancel compensation M30 Page Chapter 8 Section TOOL RADIUS COM oa TOOL COMEENS ATION PENSATION G40 G41 G42 Example of machining with radius compensation MPO0810 The programmed path is represented by a solid line and the compensation path by a dotted line Tool radius 10mm Tool number T1 Tool offset number DI G92 X0 YO ZO coordinate preset G90 G17 G01 F150 S100 T1 D1 M03 tool tool offset spindle G42 X30 Y30 activate compensation X50 Y60 X80 X100Y40 X140 X120Y70 X30 Y30 G40 G00 XO YO cancel compensation M30 Chapter 8 Section Page TOOL RADIUS COM TOOL COMPENSATION PENSATION G40 G41 G42 5 Example of machining with radius compensation The programmed path is represented by a solid line and the compensation path by a dotted line Tool radius 10mm Tool number T1 Tool offset number DI G92 X0 YO ZO coordinate preset G90 G17 G01 F150 S100 T1 D1 M03 tool tool offset spindle G42 X20 Y20 activate compensation X50 Y30 X70 G03 X85 Y45 IO J15 G02 X
6. ERROR 1084 Wrong circular path Itcomes up when any of the paths programmed in the geometry definition of the pocket is wrong ERROR 1277 Wrong profile intersection in an irregular pocket with islands It comes up in the following instances When two plane profiles have a common section drawing on the left When the initial points of two profiles in the main plane coincide drawing on the right x 2 MP1165 Page Chapter 11 Section 20 2D AND 3D POCKETS 2D POCKET ERRORS 11 1 8 PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES Programming example without automatic tool changer TOR1 5 TOI1 0 TOL1 25 TOK1 0 TOR2 3 TOI2 0 TOL2 20 TOK2 0 TOR3 5 TOI3 0 TOL3 25 TOK3 0 GO G17 G43 G90 X0 YO Z25 S800 G66 D100 R200 F300 S400 E500 M30 N100 G81 Z5 I 40 T3 D3 M6 Tool 1 dimensions Tool 2 dimensions Tool 3 dimensions Initial positioning Irregular pocket description End of program Definition of drilling operation N200 G67 B20 C8 I 40 R5 KO V100 F500 T1 D1 M6 Definition of roughing operation N300 G68 BO L0 5 QO V100 F300 T2 D2 M6 N400 GO G90 X 260 Y 190 Z0 G1 X 200 Y30 X 200 Y210 G2 G6 X 120 Y290 I 120 J210 G1 X100 Y170 G3 G6 X220 Y290 I100 J290 G1 X360 Y290 X360 Y 10 G2 G6 X300 Y 70 1300 J 10 G3 G6 X180 Y 190 1300 J 190 G1 X 260 Y 190 GO X230 Y170 G1 X290 Y170 X230 Y50 X150 Y90 G3 G6 X230 Y170 I150 J170 GO X 120 Y90 G1 X20 Y90 X20 Y 50 X 120 Y 50 N500 X 120 Y90
7. Chapter 9 Section Page CANNED CYCLES CIRCULAR POCKET G88 37 I G91 Y 1 l 1 t 1 7 4 I 1 T 77 AL Le Page 38 Chapter 9 CANNED CYCLES Section CIRCULAR POCKET G88 Basic operation 1 Ifthe spindle was in operation previously its turning direction is maintained If it was not in movement it will start by turning clockwise M03 2 Rapid movement G00 of the longitudinal axis from the initial plane to the reference plane 3 First deepening operation Movement of longitudinal axis at the feedrate indicated by V to the incremental depth programmed in B D 4 Milling at the working feedrate of the surface of the pocket in steps defined by means of C as far as a distance L finishing pass from the pocket wall 5 Milling of the L finishing pass with the working feedrate defined in H 6 Once the finishing pass has been completed the tool withdraws at the rapid feedrate G00 to the center of the pocket the longitudinal axis being separated 1 mm 0 040 inch from the machined surface 7 Further milling runs until the total depth of the pocket is reached Movement of the longitudinal axis at the feedrate indicated by V up to a distance B from the previous surface Milling of a new surface following the steps indicated in paragraphs 4 5 and 6 8 Withdrawal at rapid feedrate G00 of
8. TOOL GRAPHICS INSPECTION SINGLE BLOCK np1608 is to be calibrated Nothing else may be programmed in the block defining function G26 Page Chapter 16 Section 10 TRACINGANDDIGITIZING CALIBRATIONOFTHE TRACINGPROBE 16 3 G23 ACTIVATE TRACING Once the tracing function is activated G23 the CNC keeps the probe in contact with the surface of the model until this function is cancelled by G25 When defining G23 it must be indicated the nominal deflection or pressure that the probe must keep while touching the surface of the model The types of tracing available with the G23 function are described next and they are Manual tracing The deflection of the probe depends on the pressure the operator exerts onto the probe One dimensional tracing It is the most common type of tracing The model sweeping axis must be defined Once this type of tracing has been defined the tracing path must be defined by means of the other two axes Two dimensional tracing It contours the model The two axes contouring the profile must be defined Once this type of tracing has been defined only the movements of the other axis can be programmed Three dimensional tracing It contours the model This profile contouring is carried out by the three axes Therefore all three of them must be defined Once this type of tracing has been defined itis not be possible to program the
9. Attention These parameters are global Therefore they can be modified by the user or even by probing cycles of the CNC itself They should be used after executing G49 Otherwise variables TOOROF and TOOROS should be used Page Chapter 17 Section 12 COORDINATETRANSFORMATION MOVEMENTININCLINEPLANE 17 1 5 PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE G49 X0 YO Z100 B 30 Defines incline plane G01 AP298 BP297 Orients main axis B and secondary axis A so the tool is perpendicular to the plane The programming sequence is ABC regardless of which one is the main axis or the secondary G90 G01 Z5 Tool approach to the work plane G90 G01 X20 120 Positioning at the 1st point G Machining at the 1st point G91 G01 Y60 Positioning at the 2nd point G Machining at the 2nd point G91 G01 X1000 Positioning at the 3rd point G Machining at the 3rd point G91 G01 Y 60 Positioning at the last point G Machining at the last point G90 G01 Z 20 Withdraw the tool G49 Cancel incline plane Chapter 17 Section Page COORDINATETRANSFORMATION MOVEMENTININCLINEPL 13 17 2 A47 MEN T ACCORDING TO THE TOOL COORDINATE SYSTEM To move the tool according to the tool coordinate system function G47 must be used when programming a movement of the Z axis G01 G47 Z When using this function a swivel or angled spindle should be utilized general machine parameter XFORM P93 set to 2 or 3 When not usi
10. Page Chapter 9 Section PLC EDIT COPY TO PROGRAM With this option it is possible to copy a block or group of blocks of one program into another program When selecting this option the CNC will request the number of the destination program where the selected block or blocks are to be copied After entering the program number press ENTER Next indicate the first and last blocks to copy by following these steps Position the cursor over the first block to be copied and press the INITIAL BLOCK softkey Position the cursor over the last block to be copied and press the FINAL BLOCK softkey If the last block to be copied is also the last one of the program it can also be selected by pressing the TO THE END softkey Tocopy only one block the initial block and the final block will be the same one Once the first and last blocks are selected the CNC will highlight the selected blocks and will execute the command If the destination program already exists the following options will be displayed Write over the existing program All the blocks of the destination program will be erased and will be replaced by the copied blocks Append add the copied blocks behind the ones existing at the destination program Abortorcancel the command without copying the blocks INCLUDE PROGRAM With this option itis possible to include or merge the contents of another program into the
11. G98 The tool withdraws to the Initial Plane once the pocket has been made G99 The tool withdraws to the Reference Plane once the pocket has been made XY 5 5 These are optional and define the movement of the axes of the main plane to position the tool at the machining point This point can be programmed in cartesian coordinates or in polar coordinates and the coordinates may be absolute or incremental depending on whether the machine is operating in G90 or G91 Page Chapter 9 Section 34 CANNED CYCLES CIRCULARPOCKET GS8 Z 5 5 Defines the reference plane coordinate It can be programmed in absolute coordinates or incremental coordinates and in this case will be referred to the initial plane If this is not programmed the CNC will take the position occupied by the tool at that moment as the reference plane I 5 5 Defines machining depth It can be programmed in absolute coordinates or incremental coordinates and in this case will be referred to the reference plane J 5 5 J with sign J with sign B 5 5 Defines the cutting pass along the longitudinal axis to the main plane If this value is positive the entire cycle will be executed with the same machining pass this being equal to or less than that programmed Ifthis value is negative the entire pocket will be executed with the given pass except for the last pass which will machine the rest C 5 5 Defines the milling pass along th
12. Multi disk digitizing in Floppy Disk Unit Operating manual Chap 8 Date May 1994 Software Version 9 03 and newer FEATURE AFFECTED MANUAL AND CHAPTERS Anticipation time for punching Installation manual Chap 3 9 Appendix Variables TPOS X C TPOSS FL WES Installation manual Chap 10 Appendix M19 speed modification via PLC Installation manual Chap 9 Appendix G75 and G76 moves at 100 of F Programming manual Chap 10 Version history M 3 Date December 1994 Software Version 9 06 and newer FEATURE AFFECTED MANUAL AND CHAPTERS Third work zone Installation manual Chap 10 Appendix Programming manual Chap 3 13 Appendix For easier operation without monitor the default values of parameters PROTOCOL 1 and POWDNC yes have been changed Installation manual Chap 3 Date February 1995 Software Version 9 07 and newer FEATURE AFFECTED MANUAL AND CHAPTERS If while searching coded home the DECEL signal of the axis goes high the homing direction is reversed Installation manual Chap 4 A T function with associated subroutine may be programmed in a motion block Installation manual Chap 3 The TAFTERS parameter indicates whether the T function is executed before or after its associated subroutine Installation manual Chap 3 Function G53 without motion informa
13. 5 3 SPINDLE SELECTION G28 G29 This CNC can govern two spindles the main one and the second one Both can be running at the same time but it can only control one at the time This selection is done by functions G28 and G29 G28 Selects the Second Spindle G29 Selects the Main Spindle Once the desired spindle has been selected it can be acted upon from the keyboard or by means of the following functions M3 M4 M5 M19 Seek G33 G94 G95 G96 G97 Both spindles can work in open and closed loop Functions G28 and G29 are modal and incompatible with each other Function G28 and G29 must be programmed alone in the block No more information can be programmed in that block On power up after executing and M02 M30 or after an EMERGENCY or RESET the CNC assumes function G29 selects the main spindle Operating example for when 2 spindles are used On power up the CNC assumes function G29 selecting the main spindle All the actions upon the keys or functions associated with the spindle will be applied on to the main spindle Example 1000 M3 Main spindle clockwise at 1000 rpm To select the second spindle execute function G28 From this moment on all the actions upon the keys or functions associated with the spindle will be applied on to the second spindle The main spindle keeps turning in its previous status Example 1500 M4 Second spindle counter clockwise at 1500 rpm The main spindle keeps turning cloc
14. CNCRESOURCES PLC RESOURCES RAM Memory Kb U User System 384 EEPROM Memory Kb User System 8 8 RAM Memory Kb EEPROM Memory Kb CAP INS CONFIG IHARDWAR MEMORY PROM USER Ears 5 9 9 83 ee wale Page Chapter 12 DIAGNOSIS Section SYSTEM CONFIGURATION CONFIGURATION OF THE CENTRAL UNIT It indicates the modules making up the new configuration of the central unit of the CNC It also indicates the available options PLC CPU and SERVO CPU The numbers which appear in brackets next to some of the modules and options indicate the logic address assigned to each of them CNC RESOURCES Itindicates the RAM memory used by the system and whatis available for the user This will be given in Kb It also indicates the EEPROM memory shared with the PLC and how much of it is available for user customized pages screens Also given in Kb Machine parameter PAGESMEM indicates the of EEPROM memory dedicated to store user defined pages screens and symbols and machine parameter PLCMEM indicates the of EEPROM memory dedicated to store the PLC program The remaining free EEPROM memory is dedicated to store CNC part programs PLC RESOURCES If the PLC is integrated it will be indicated by saying that the PLC is controlled by the CNC s CPU If on the other hand the PLC has its own CPU it will show the RAM memory available for the PLC gi
15. Chapter 6 Section Page PATHCONTROL MOVE TOHARDSTOP G52 21 6 14 FEEDRATE F AS AN INVERTED FUNCTION OF TIME G32 There are instances when it is easier to define the time required by the various axes of the machine to reach the target point instead of defining a common feedrate for all of them A typical case may be when a linear axis X Y Z has to move together interpolated with a rotary axis programmed in degrees Function G32 indicates that the F functions programmed next set the time it takes to reach the target point In order for a greater value of F to indicate a greater feedrate the value assigned to F is defined as Inverted function of time and it is assumed as the activation of this feature F units 1 min Example G32 X22 F4 indicates that the movement must be executed in 4 minute That is in 0 25 minutes Function G32 is modal and incompatible with G94 and G95 On power up after executing M02 M30 or after an Emergency or Reset the CNC assumes G94 or G95 depending on the setting of general machine parameter IFFED Considerations The CNC variable PROGFIN will show the feedrate programmed as an inverted function of time and variable FEED will show the resulting feedrate in mm min or inches min If the resulting feedrate of any axis exceeds the maximum value set by machine parameter MAXFEED the CNC will apply this maximum value The programmed F is ignored on GOO
16. Section 13 2 13 Variable OPMODE OPMODA OPMODB OPMODC NBTOOL PRGN BLKN GSn GGSA GGSB GGSC GGSD MSn GMS PLANE LONGAX MIRROR SCALE SCALE X C ORGROT ROTPF ROTPS PRBST CLOCK TIME DATE TIMER CYTIME PARTC FIRST KEY KEYSRC ANAIn ANAOn CNCERR PLCERR DNCERR t uw que AAAA A DPAAARAAD A Oe eee ee RAAAAA AAAA ARARAAAD i a a un RAAAAAA AAAA AAARAAAD Operating mode Operating mode when working in the main channel Type of simulation Axes selected by handwheel Number of the tool being managed Number of the program in execution Label number of the last executed block Status of the indicated G function n Status of functions GOO thru G24 Status of functions G25 thru G49 Status of functions G50 thru G74 Status of functions G75 thru G99 Status of the indicated M function n Status of M functions M 0 6 8 9 19 30 41 44 Axes which form the active main plane Axis affected by the tool length compensation G15 Active mirror images Active general Scaling factor R Scaling Factor applied only to the indicated axis Rotation angle G73 of the coordinate system in degrees Abscissa of rotation center Ordinate of rotation center Returns probe status System clock in seconds Time in Hours minutes and seconds Date in Year Month Day format Clock activated by PLC in seconds Time to execute a part in hundredths of a second Part
17. 16 3 2 G23 ACTIVATE ONE DIMENSIONAL TRACING This type of tracing may be selected by part program or in the MDI option the JOG and AUTOMATIC modes Once activated the CNC will approach the probe to the model until ittouches it and it maintains the probe in contact with the surface of the model at all times following the selected path The tracing path may be obtained either by programming it in ISO code or by moving the axes with the JOG keys or with an electronic handwheel It must be borne in mind that once this type of tracing has been activated the sweeping axis may not be programmed or moved If attempted to do so the CNC will issue the corresponding error message SS mp1609 The programming format is as follows axis 1 5 5 G23 axis Ix5 5 N5 5 Defines the axis sweeping the model It may be the X Y or Z axis If no axis is defined the CNC assumes the longitudinal perpendicular axis as the sweeping axis The undefined axes must be used to define the tracing path either by programming itin ISO code or by moving them using the JOG keys or an electronic handwheel Defines the maximum tracing depth of the sweeping axis and it is referred to the position of the probe at the time it is being defined 77 A If part of the workpiece is out of this area zone the tracing function will assign to the sweeping axis the coordinate value of this parameter mpl610 Page 14 Chapter 16
18. ACTIVE WINDOW and ACTIVATE SYMBOLS allow the manipulation of these windows Every time a new window is created the CNC will assign 2 data lines to it in order to display the status of the desired resources There are two types of windows which can be selected with softkeys WINDOW TO DISPLAY TIMERS AND REGISTERS This window is divided into two sections one to display Timers and the other one to display Registers Timer It will show one timer per line showing the following information foreach one of them TG Indicates the logic status of the active trigger input M Indicates the status of the timer S means stopped T means timing and D means disabled TEN Indicates the logic status of the Enable input TRS Indicates the logic status of the Reset input T Indicates the logic status of the status output of the timer ET Indicates the elapsed time TO Indicates the remaining time Key in the command T 1 256 or T 1 256 1 256 to request the data on a timer or group of timers and then press ENTER Register It will display one register per line showing the following information fields for each of them HEX Indicates the hexadecimal value of its contents DEC Indicates the decimal value of its contents with sign Key in R 1 559 or R 1 559 1 559 to request information on one or more registers and then press ENTER Chapter 9 Section Page PLC MONITORING 13 WINDOW TO DISPLAY
19. Block N25 turns TCP off Page Chapter 17 Section 16 COORDINATE TRANSFORMATION TCPTRANSFORMATION Exampleb Circular interpolation keeping the tool perpendicular to the path B 90 3 100 20 170 120 BO 170 90 N30 N31 N32 N33 N34 N35 G18 G90 GO1 X30 Z90 G48 S1 GO1 X100 Z20 G03 X170 Z90 GO1 X170 Z120 G48 SO B 90 70 KO BO Block N30 selects the ZX plane G18 and positions the tool at the starting point 30 90 Block N31 turns TCP on Block N32 positions the tool at 100 20 orienting it to 90 The CNC interpolates the XZB axes executing the programmed linear interpolation while rotating the tool from the starting position 0 to the programmed final orient position 90 Block N33 defines a circular interpolation up to point 170 90 setting the final tool orientation to 0 The CNC interpolates the XZB axes executing the programmed circular interpolation while rotating the tool from the current position 90 to the programmed final orient position 0 Since both orientations are radial the tool stays radially oriented at all times In other words perpendicular to the path Block N34 positions the tool at 170 120 block N35 turns TCP off Chapter 17 Section Page COORDINATE TRANSFORMATION TCPTRANSFORMATION 17 Examplec Machining a profile B 35
20. Page Chapter 2 Section OPERATING MODES HELP SYSTEMS 3 EXECUTE SIMULATE The EXECUTE operating mode allows the execution of part programs in automatic mode or in single block mode The SIMULATE operating mode allows the simulation of part programs in the automatic and single block modes Once one of these options has been selected the CNC will display The CNC s part program directory The program number may be entered directly via keyboard or selected it by moving the cursor on the shown part program directory Once the part program to be executed or simulated has been selected press ENTER Softkeys SERIAL LINE 1 DNC and SERIAL LINE 2 DNC if enabled by machine parameter Whenpressing one of these softkeys the CNC shows the part program directory of the corresponding device computer or FAGOR Floppy Disk Unit The program number must be entered directly via keyboard If it is to be executed several times press the N times softkey and indicate the number of repetitions Once the part program to be executed or simulated has been selected press ENTER In either case the CNC will display the selected program and it will be possible to move the cursor over it To switch to JOG mode once executed or simulated a part program or a section of it the CNC will maintain the machining conditions type of movement feedrates etc selected while executing or simulating it Chapter 3
21. to limit the maximum variation of the feedrate If the general machine parameter PORGMOVE has been selected and a circular interpolation G02 or G03 is programmed the CNC assumes the center of the arc to be a new polar origin Functions G02 and G03 are modal and incompatible both among themselves and with G00 G01 and G33 Functions G02 and G03 can be programmed as G2 and G3 On power up after executing M02 M30 or after EMERGENCY or RESET the CNC assumes code G00 or G01 depending on how general machine parameter IMOVE has been set Page Chapter 6 Section 8 PATHCONTROL CIRCULARINTERPOLATION G02 G03 6 4 CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION BY PROGRAMMING THE CENTER OF THE ARC IN ABSOLUTE COORDINATES G06 By adding function G06 to acircular interpolation block you can program the coordinates of the center of the arc I J or K in absolute coordinates i e with respect to the zero origin and not to the beginning of the arc Function G06 is not modal so it should be programmed any time the coordinates of the center of the arc are required in absolute coordinates G06 can be programmed as G6 Example Various programming modes are analyzed below point X60 Y40 being the starting point Cartesian coordinates G90 G17 G06 G03 X110Y90 160 J90 G06 X160Y40 1160 J90 Polar coordinates G90 G17 G06 G03 QO 160 J90 G06 Q 90 1160 J90 Chapter 6 Section Page CENTER OF THE ARC IN 9 PATH CONTROL
22. ERROR and MSG mnemonics GOTO and RPT mnemonics OPEN and WRITE mnemonics SUB and RET mnemonics CALL PCALL MCALL MDOFF and PROBE mnemonics DSBLK ESBLK DSTOP ESTOP DFHOLD EFHOLD mnemonics IF statement Assignment blocks Mathematical expressions PAGE mnemonic ODW mnemonic DW mnemonic IB mnemonic SK mnemonic WKEY and SYSTEM mnemonics KEYSRC mnemonic WBUF mnemonic SYMBOL mnemonic SYNTAX ASSISTANCE CANNED CYCLES Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page 18 1070 1071 1072 1073 1074 1075 1076 1077 1078 1079 1080 1081 1082 1083 1084 1085 1086 1087 1088 Straight line pattern canned cycle G60 Rectangular pattern canned cycle G61 Grid pattern canned cycle G62 Circular pattern canned cycle G63 Arc pattern canned cycle G64 Arc chord pattern canned cycle G65 Irregular pocket with islands canned cycle G66 Irregular pocket roughing cycle G67 Irregular pocket finishing cycle G68 Complex deep hole drilling cycle G69 Drilling cycle G81 Drilling cycle with dwell G82 Simple deep hole drilling cycle G83 Tapping cycle G84 Reaming cycle G85 Boring cycle with withdrawal in G00 G86 Rectangular pocket canned cycle G87 Circular pocket canned cycle G88 Boring cycle with withdrawal in GO1 G89
23. GO X 40 YO G2 G6 X 40 YO 1 100 JO GO X 180 Y20 G1 X 20 G2 G6 X 20 Y 20 I 20 JO G1 X 180 G2 G6 X 180 Y20 I 180 JO GO X150 Y140 G1 X170 Y110 Y 110 X150 Y 140 X130 Y 110 Y110 X150 Y140 GO X110 YO N500 G2 G6 X110 YO 1150 JO Contour b Contour c Contour e End of contour definition Second island profile definition Contour d Chapter 11 2D AND 3D POCKETS Section 2D POCKET EXAMPLES Page 23 11 2 3D POCKETS The cycle calling function G66 is not modal therefore it must be programmed every time a 3D pocket is to be executed A block containing function G66 may not contain any other function Its format is R 0 9999 amp I 0 9999 C 0 9999 amp J 0 9999 F 0 9999 amp K 0 9999 S 0 9999 amp E 0 9999 Programming example G66 RICJFKSE Label number of the first block R and last block I defining the roughing operation When not setting I only block R is executed When not setting R there is no roughing operation Label number of the first block C and last block J defining the semi finishing operation When not setting J only block c is executed When not setting C there is no semi finishing operation Label number of the first block F and last block K defining the finishing operation When not setting K only block F is executed When not setting F there is no finishing operation Label number of t
24. If R is not equal to 1 the first drilling step will be B the second R B the third R RB and so on i e after the second step the new step will be the product of factor R by the previous step If R is selected with a value other than 1 the CNC will not allow smaller steps than that programmed in L Chapter 9 Section Page ANNED CYCLE COMPLEXDEEPHOLE 9 E MET DRILLING G69 Section COMPLEX DEEPHOLE DRILLING G69 9 Chapter CANNED CYCLES Page 10 Basic operation 1 Ifthe spindle was in operation previously its turning direction is maintained If it was not in movement it will start by turning clockwise M03 2 Rapid movement of the longitudinal axis from the initial plane to the reference plane 3 First drilling operation Movement at working feedrate of the longitudinal axis to the programmed incremental depth in B D 4 Drillingloop Thefollowing steps will be repeateduntil the machining depth coordinate programmed in I is reached 4 1 Dwell K in hundredths of a second if this has been programmed 4 2 Withdrawal of the longitudinal axis in rapid G00 as far as the reference plane if the number of drillings programmed in J were made otherwise it withdraws the distance programmed in H 4 3 Longitudinal axis approach in rapid G00 as far as a distance C ofthe previous drilling step 4 4 Anotherdrilling step Movement
25. If not programmed the CNC will only make one tracing pass at the height indicated by parameter I This parameters must be defined whenever parameter D is defined Defines along the probing axis the distance between two consecutive tracing passes If programmed with a value of 0 the CNC will issue the corresponding error Indicates the tracing direction of the probe after positioning at X Y Z and having come down to the plane where the first tracing pass will be carried out seeking the model Page 40 Chapter 16 Section TRACINGANDDIGITIZING PLANEPROFILETRACING CANNEDCYCLE Towards positive abscissa coordinates Towards negative abscissa coordinates Towards positive ordinate coordinates 3 Towards negative ordinate coordinates 0 1 2 If not programmed the CNC assumes AO This parameter is related to parameter A mp1645 It indicates the maximum distance the probe may move to find the model Indicates the direction used to trace the model 0 1 The probe moves leaving the model to its right The probe moves leaving the model to its left mp1618 If not programmed the CNC assumes a value of S0 Q R 5 5 These parameters must be defined when the contour is not closed mpi647 Define the initial point of the segment which indicates the end of the contour They are referred to part zero The Q coordinate corresponds to the abscissa axis and the R to the ordin
26. On a machine which has linear X and Y axes and rotary C axis all located at point XO YO CO the following movement is programmed G1 G90 X100 Y20 C270 F10000 You get F Ax 10000 x 100 Lies CAXY Ay CAo 100 2042 270 l F 10000 x 20 AY 692 9589 Ax Ay CA c 100 20 270 F Ac 10000 x 270 auis A XY A yH cy 10020942270 Page Chapter 5 Section FEEDRATEFUNCTIONS 4 PROGRAMMINGBYISOCODE G94 G95 Function G94 is modal i e once programmed it stays active until G95 is programmed On power up after executing M02 M30 or following EMERGENCY or RESET the CNC assumes function G94 or G95 according to how the general machine parameter FEED is set 5 2 2 FEEDRATE IN mm rev or inches rev G95 From the moment when the code G95 is programmed the control assumes that the feedrates programmed through F5 5 are in mm rev or inches mm This function does not affect the rapid moves G00 which will be made in mm min or inch min By the same token it will notbe applied to moves made in the JOG mode during tool inspection etc Function G95 is modal i e once programmed it stays active until G94 is programmed On power up after executing M02 M30 or following EMERGENCY or RESET the CNC assumes function G94 or G95 according to the general machine parameter TFEED Chapter 5 Section Page FEEDRATEFUNCTIONS 5 PROGRAMMING BY ISOCODE G94 G95
27. The cursor can also be moved by using the following keystroke combinations SHIFT Positions the cursor at the last column X638 SHIFT Positions the cursor at the first column X1 SHIFT D Positions the cursor at the first row Y0 SHIFT D Positions the cursor at the last row Y334 It is also possible to key in the XY coordinates of the point where the cursor is to be positioned To do this follow these steps Press X or Y The CNC will highlight in the editing parameter display window the cursor position along the selected axis column or row Keyinthe position value corresponding to the point where the cursor is to be placed along this axis The horizontal position is defined as the X value between 1 and 638 and the vertical position as the Y value between 0 and 334 Once these coordinates have been keyed in press ENTER and the CNC will position the cursor at the indicated coordinates Once this option is selected itis possible to modify the editing parameters at any time even while defining the graphic elements This way itis possible to edit shapes of different line and color Press INS to access this menu Once in this mode press the corresponding softkey to modify those parameters Press INS again to quit this mode and return to the previous menu Chapter 10 Section Page GRAPHICEDITOR GRAPHICELEMENTS 11 The possible graphic elements which can be used to creat
28. This parameter must be defined when digitizing a part besides tracing it It indicates the sweeping step or distance between two consecutive digitized points Chapter 16 Section Page TRACINGANDDIGITIZING GRIDPATTERNTRACING 31 CANNEDCYCLE E 5 5 The CNC keeps the probe in constant contact with the surface of the model and it provides the coordinates of a new point after moving in space and along the programmed path the distance indicated by parameter L If not programmed or programmed with a value of 0 the canned cycle will assume that the model is not to be digitized This parameter must be defined when digitizing the model besides tracing it Itindicates the chordal error or maximum difference allowed between the surface of the model and the segment joining two consecutive digitized points Itis given in the selected work units millimeters or inches S 7747 gt Ifnot programmed or programmed with a value of 0 the chordal error will be ignored and anew point will be provided after moving the L distance in space and along the programmed path mp1637 This parameter must be defined when digitizing the model besides tracing it Indicates the storing format for the digitized points in the program selected by means of the OPEN P statement G 0 Absolute format All points will be programmed in absolute coordinates G90 and defined by the X Y and Z axes G 1 Absolute fil
29. G90 G17 G03 Q0 I0 J50 Q 90 150 JO G93 160 J90 defines polar center G03 Q0 G93 1160 J90 defines new polar center Q 90 G90 G17 G03 X110 Y90 R50 X160 Y40 R50 Page Chapter 6 Section 6 PATHCONTROL CIRCULARINTERPOLATION G02 G03 Example Programming of a complete circle in just one block Various programming modes analyzed below point X170 Y80 being the starting Point Cartesian coordinates G90 G17 G02 X170 Y80 I 50 JO or G90 G17 G02 I 50 JO Polar coordinates G90 G17 G02 Q360 I 50 JO or G93 1120 J80 defines polar center G02 Q360 Cartesian coordinates with radius programming A complete circle cannot be programmed as there is an infinite range of solutions Chapter 6 Section Page CIRCULARINTERPOLATION PATHCONTROL G02 G03 T The CNC calculates depending on the programmed arc the radii of the starting point and endpoint Although in theory both points should be exactly the same the CNC enables you to select with the general machine parameter CIRINERR the maximum difference permissable between both radii If this value is exceeded the CNC displays the corresponding error The programmed feedrate F can be varied between 0 and 120 by using the switch located on the Operator Panel of the CNC or by selecting it between 0 and 255 from the PLC via the DNC or from the program The CNC however has general machine parameter MAXFOVR
30. Is directed to people using the optional 8050 DNC communications software Is directed to people wishing to design their own DNC communications software to communicate with the 8055 Is directed to people using the Fagor Floppy Disk Unit and it shows how to use it MANUAL CONTENTS The operating Manual for the Mill model CNC contains the following chapters Index New features and modifications for the Mill Model Introduction Summary of safety conditions Shipping terms Fagor documentation for the 8055 CNC Manual contents Chapter 1 Overview It indicates the layout of the keyboard operator panel and of the information on the monitor Chapter 2 Operating modes Description of the different operating modes of the CNC Chapter 3 Execute Simulate It describes how to operate in the Execution and Simulation modes Both operations may be performed in automatic or single block mode Chapter4 Edit Description of the Edit mode of operation The different ways to edit a part program are in CNC language in Teach in mode using the Interactive editor and the Profile editor Chapter5 Jog Description of the Jog mode of operation This is the operating mode to be used whenever the machine is to be controlled manually to move the axes of the machine as well as to control the spindle Chapter6 Tables Description of the Tables mode of operation Itallows access to the various data tables ofthe CNC Zero offsets Tooloffsets
31. Itis also possible to write the multiple machining definition block in the following ways G61 X700 K8 J60 D4 P2 005 Q9 001 R15 019 G611100 K8 Y180 D4 P2 005 Q9 011 R15 019 Page Chapter 10 Section 10 MULTIPLEMACHINING INAGRIDPATTERN G62 10 4 G63 MULTIPLE MACHINING IN A CIRCULAR BOLT HOLE PATTERN The programming format of this cycle is as follows X 5 5 Y 5 5 I 5 5 K 5 CFPQRSTUV G63 X Y I K Defines the distance from the starting point to the center along the abscissa axis Defines the distance from the starting point to the center along the ordinate axis With parameters X and Y the center of the circle is defined in the same way that I and J do this in circular interpolations G02 G03 Defines the pitch angle between machining operations if G00 or G01 the sign indicates the direction counter clockwise clockwise Defines the number of total machining operations along the circle including the machining definition point It will be enough to program I or K in the multiple machining definition block Nevertheless if K is programmed in a multiple machining operation in which movement between points is made in GOO or G01 machining will be done in the counter clockwise direction MULTIPLEMACHINING G63 Chapter 10 Section Page BOLT HOLE PATTERN 11 C F 5 5 Indicates how movement is made between machining points If
32. N Normal family 0 thru 199 S Special family 200 thru 255 The status is defined as follows A Available E Expired real life greater than nominal life R Rejected by the PLC Once the tool magazine table is selected the operator can move the cursor over the screen line by line with the up down arrow keys and page by page with the page up and page down keys The values of each tool magazine can be edited or modified from the keyboard by using the following options Once any of these functions is selected the CNC shows an editing area on the CRT where the cursor may be moved by using the up down and right left arrow keys Also the up arrow key positions the cursor over the first character of the editing area and the down arrow key positions the cursor over the last character Page Chapter 6 Section 18 TABLES TOOLMAGAZINETABLE EDIT With this option it is possible to edit the information regarding a tool pocket Once this option is selected the softkeys will change their color showing their type of editing option over a white background Also itis possible to get more editing assistance by pressing HELP Press HELP again to exit the editing assistance mode Press ESC to quit the editing mode and leave the original values intact Once the tool pocket data has been edited press ENTER to enter it in the table MODIFY This option permits modifying the values of a selecte
33. The value may be defined by a numeric constant or by any expression Examples X 100 X 10 cos 45 X 20 30 sine 30 X 2 20 30 sine 30 Once all known parameters are set press the VALIDATE softkey and the CNC will show the defined section if possible Ifthere is notenough data to show the section the CNC will show a dotted line indicating Its orientation Example X120 Y1 0 X2 o Y at 60 If there are more than one possibility all the possible options will be shown and the desired one framed in red must be selected using the right and left arrow keys Example XI YI X2 Y2 Ol 60 TANGENCY YES Use the up and down arrow keys to choose whether all the possible options are shown or only the one framed in red Once the desired option is selected press ENTER for the CNC to assume it Page Chapter 4 Section 8 EDIT PROFILE EDITOR 4 1 4 DEFINITION OF A CIRCULAR SECTION When pressing the CLOCKWISE ARC or COUNTER RARA CLOCKWISE ARC softkey the CNC displays the data shown on f X 300 300 the right margin of this page Y 200 200 X1 Y1 Coordinates of the starting point of the arc CLOCKWISE ARC They cannot be modified because they correspond to the last point of the previous section X1 50 000 Yl 60 000 X2 Y2 Coordinates of the end point of the arc X2 Y2 XC YC Coordinates of the arc center as XC YC Radius of the arc E TANGENCY NO
34. XMW YMW ZMW etc Coordinates of part zero ZMR YMR ZMR etc Coordinates of machine reference point REFVALUE Chapter 4 Section Page REFERENCESYSTEMS 1 4 2 MACHINE REFERENCE SEARCH G74 The FAGOR 8055 CNC allows you to program the machine reference search in two ways MACHINE REFERENCE SEARCH OF ONE OR MORE AXES IN A PARTICULAR ORDER G74 is programmed followed by the axes in which you want to carry out the reference search For example G74 X Z C Y The CNC begins the movement of all the selected axes which have a machine reference switch machine axis parameter DECINPUT and in the direction indicated by the axis machine parameter REFDIREC This movement is carried out at the feedrate indicated by the axis machine parameter REFEED1 for each axis until the home switch is hit Next the home search marker pulse or home will be carried out in the programmed order This second movement will be carried out one axis at a time at the feedrate indicated in the axis machine parameter REFEED2 until the machine reference point is reached i e the marker pulse is found MACHINE REFERENCE SEARCH USING THE ASSOCIATED SUBROUTINE The G74 function will be programmed alone in the block and the CNC will automatically execute the subroutine whose number appears in the general machine parameter REFPSUB In this subroutine it is possible to program the machine reference searche
35. 100 X100 Y100 Starting point G00 G90 X400 Y300 Programmed path Itis possible via the general machine parameter RAPIDOVR to establish if the feedrate override switch when working in GOO operates from 0 to 100 or whether it stays constant at 100 When G00 is programmed the last F programmed is not cancelled i e when G01 G02 or G03 are programmed again F is recovered G00 is modal and incompatible with G01 G02 G03 G33 and G75 Function G00 can be programmed as G or GO On power up after executing M02 M30 or after EMERGENCY or RESET the CNC assumes code G00 or G01 depending on how general machine parameter IMOVE has been set Chapter 6 Section Page PATHCONTROL RAPID TRAVEL G00 1 6 2 LINEAR INTERPOLATION G01 The movements programmed after GO1 are executed according to a straight line and at the programmed feedrate F When two or three axes move simultaneously the resulting path is a straight line between the starting point and the final point The machine moves according to this path to the programmed feedrate F The CNC calculates the feedrates of each axis so that the resulting path is the F value programmed Example 4007 a sa i es a a a aa 150mm min 150 150 650 G01 G90 X650 Y400 F150 The programmed feedrate F may vary between 0 and 120 via the switch located on the Control Panel of the CN
36. 9 2 1 G79 MODIFICATION OF CANNED CYCLE PARAMETERS The CNC allows one or several parameters of an active canned cycle to be modified by programming the G79 function without any need for redefining the canned cycle This is possible only inside the influence area of the canned cycle The CNC will continue to maintain the canned cycle active and will perform the following machinings of the canned cycle with the updated parameters The G79 function must be programmed alone in a block and this block must not contain any more information Next 2 programming examples are shown assuming that the work plane is formed by the X and Y axes and that the longitudinal axis perpendicular is the Z axis Page Chapter 9 Section 2 NNE INFLUENCEAREA s case OFCANNEDCYCLE Z 28 14 I T1 M6 GOO G90 XO YO Z60 Starting point G81 G99 G9 X15 Y25 Z 28 I 14 Defines drilling cycle Drills in A G98 G90 X25 Drills in B G79 Z52 Modifies reference plane and machining depth G99 X35 Drills in C G98 X45 Drills in D G79 Z32 Modifies reference plane and machining depth G99 X55 Drills in E G98 X65 Drills in F M30 Tl i M6 G00 G90 X0 YO Z60 Starting point G81 G99 G90 X15 Y25 Z32 II8 Defines drilling cycle Drills in A G98 X25 Drills in B G79 Z52 Modifies reference plane G99 X35 Drills in C G98 X45 Drills in D G79 Z32 Modifies reference plane G99 X55 Drills in E G98 X
37. G02 Q0 I5 JO G03 QO I5 JO Q180I 10 JO N20 G73 Q45 pattern rotation RPT N10 20 N7 repeat blocks 10 thru 20 seven times M30 end of program In a program which rotates the coordinate system if any mirror image function is also active the CNC first applies the mirror image function and then the turn The pattern rotation function can be cancelled either by programming G72 on its own without angle value or via G16 G17 G18 or G19 or on power up after executing M02 M30 or after EMERGENCY or RESET Chapter 7 ADDITIONALPREPARATORY FUNCTIONS Section PATTERNROTATION G73 Page 17 7 8 SLAVED AXIS CANCELLATION OF SLAVED AXIS The FAGOR 8055 CNC enables two or more axes to be coupled together The movement of all axes is subordinated to the movement of the axis to which they were coupled There are three possible ways of coupling axes Mechanical coupling This is imposed by the manufacturer of the machine and is selected via the axis machine parameter GANTRY By means of the PLC This enables the coupling and uncoupling of each axis through logic input on the CNC SYNCHRO1 SYNCHRO2 SYNCHRO3 SYNCHRO and SYNCHROS Each axis is coupled to the one indicated in the axis machine parameter SYNCHRO By means of the program This enables electronic coupling and uncoupling between two or more axes through functions G77 and G78 Page 18 Ch
38. G24 L8 E5 K1 Digitizing definition G27 S1 Q80 R40 J25 KO Open contour definition G25 Deactivate tracing and digitizing Chapter 16 Section Page TRACINGANDDIGITIZING INTRODUCTION 5 Tracing Digitizing canned cycles The tracing digitizing canned cycles offered by this CNC are based on the types of tracing described earlier and they are the following TRACE 1 Tracing digitizing in a grid pattern TRACE 2 Tracing digitizing in an arc pattern TRACE 3 Profile tracing digitizing in the plane TRACE 4 3 D Profile tracing digitizing in space TRACE 5 Tracing digitizing with polygonal sweep They are programmed by means of the high level instruction TRACE The cycle number may be indicated either by a number 1 2 3 4 5 or by an expression whose result is one of these numbers They all have a series of parameters defining the tracing path and the digitizing conditions To just trace the part without digitizing it the digitizing parameters must be set to 0 To digitize the model besides setting the digitizing parameters itis required to open the program storing the digitized data by means of the OPEN P statement Page Chapter 16 Section 6 TRACING ANDDIGITIZING INTRODUCTION 16 1 1 GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS The FAGOR 8055 CNC offers the following preparatory functions to trace digitize parts G26 Calibrate the tracing probe G23 Activate the tracing function G24 Activa
39. Movement in the main work plane up to the cycle s initial point parameters X Y Page Chapter 16 Section 54 TRACINGANDDIGITIZING TRACINGCANNEDCYCLE WITHPOLYGONALSWEEP 16 7 5 1 PROFILE PROGRAMMING RULES When defining a tracing area and its inside islands or not tracing zones the following programming rules must be observed 1 X Alltypes of programmed profiles must be closed The following examples cause a geometry error 2 Noprofile must intersect itself The following examples cause a geometry error 3 The polygon programmed first will be considered by the CNC as the external profile or area to be traced All other polygons if any must be inside this one and they indicate the islands or inside zones which will not be traced 4 Itis not required to program inside profiles Should these be programmed they must be completely inside the external main profile Y OG 5 An inside profile totally contained within another inside profile cannot be programmed In this case only the outermost profile of the two inside ones will be considered mp1659 The CNC verifies all these geometry rules before beginning the execution of the canned cycle adapting the tracing profile to them and displaying the error message when necessary Chapter 16 Section Page TRACING ANDDIGITIZING TRACINGCANNEDCYCLE 55 WITHPOLYGONALSWEEP 16 7 5 2 PROFILE PROGRAMMING SYNTAX The ou
40. Nevertheless it is recommended to keep it away from sources of electromagnetic disturbance such as Powerful loads connected to the same AC power line as this equipment Nearby portable transmitters Radio telephones Ham radio transmitters Nearby radio TC transmitters Nearby arc welding machines Nearby High Voltage power lines Etc Ambient conditions The working temperature must be between 5 C and 45 C 41 F and 113 F The storage temperature must be between 25 C and 70 C 13 F and 158 F Introduction 3 Protections of the unit itsel Power Supply Module It carries two fast fuses of 3 15 Amp 250V to protect the mains AC input Axes module All the digital inputs and outputs have galvanic isolation via optocouplers between the CNC circuitry and the outside They are protected by an external fast fuse F of 3 15 Amp 250V against reverse connection of the power supply Input Output Module All the digital inputs and outputs have galvanic isolation via optocouplers between the CNC circuitry and the outside They are protected by an external fast fuse F of 3 15 Amp 250V against a voltage overload greater than 33 Vdc and against reverse connection of the power supply Input Output and Tracing Module All the digital inputs and outputs have galvanic isolation via optocouplers between the CNC circuitry and the outside They are protected by an external fast fuse F of 3 15 Amp 250
41. ene 9 5 3 G83 s ie Simple deep hole drilling eee 9 5 4 G84 Tapping Cycle cerent eee e ees een 9 5 5 G85 x Re aming cycle oie eere nih Soke 9 5 6 G86 Boring cycle with withdrawal in GOO 9 5 7 G87 i T Rectangular pocket milling cycle ees 9 5 8 G88 2 gt Circular pocket milling cycle eese 9 5 9 G89 TS Boring cycle with withdrawal in GO 9 5 10 G90 Programming in absolute esee 3 4 G91 Programming in incremental eene 3 4 G92 Coordinate preset spindle speed limit 4 4 1 G93 Pol rorigiti preset 2 onset ce ear tret sq eiii on 4 5 G94 F Feedrate in millimeters inches per minute 52 1 G95 Feedrate in millimeters inches per revolution 5 2 2 G96 T Constant cutting point speed sseseee 5 4 1 G97 Constant tool center speed seseeee 5 4 2 G98 T Withdrawal to the starting plane eese 9 5 G99 T Withdrawal to the reference plane ssss 9 5 M means modal i e the G function once programmed remains active while another incompatible G function is not programmed D means BY DEFAULT i e they will be assumed by the CNC when it is powered on after executing M02
42. 11 Manual one two and three dimensional tracing and digitizing cycles Installation manual Programming manual Chap 9 Appendix Chap 5 16 Appendix New tracing digitizing cycles Programming manual Chap 16 Display of deflection and correction factor for the tracing probe Operating manual Chap 3 5 Infinite program execution from a PC Operating manual Chap 8 Multi disk infinite program in Floppy Disk Unit Operating manual Chap 8 Multi disk digitizing in Floppy Disk Unit Operating manual Chap 8 Date May 1994 Software Version 9 03 and newer FEATURE AFFECTED MANUAL AND CHAPTERS Anticipation time for punching Installation manual Chap 3 9 Appendix Variables TPOS X C TPOSS FL WES Installation manual Chap 10 Appendix M19 speed modification via PLC Installation manual Chap 9 Appendix G75 and G76 moves at 100 of F Programming manual Chap 10 Version history M 3 Date December 1994 Software Version 9 06 and newer FEATURE AFFECTED MANUAL AND CHAPTERS Third work zone Installation manual Chap 10 Appendix Programming manual Chap 3 13 Appendix For easier operation without monitor the default values of parameters PROTOCOL 1 and POWDNC yes have been changed Installation manual Chap 3 Date February 1995 Software Version 9 07 and newe
43. 24 Simulation with rapid movement 30 Normalediting 31 User editing 32 TEACH IN editing 33 Interactive editor 34 2 Profile editor 40 Movement in continuous JOG 41 Movement in incremental JOG 42 Movement with electronic handwheel 43 HOME search in JOG 44 Position preset in JOG 45 Toolcalibration MDI in JOG JOG user operation 50 Zero offset table 51 Tool Offset table 52 Tooltable 53 Tool magazine table 54 Global parameter table 55 Local parameter table 60 Utilities 70 DNC 80 Editing PLC files 81 Compiling PLC program 82 PLCmonitoring 83 Active PLC messages Active PLC pages Save PLC program Restore PLC program PLC resources in use mode PLC statistics oo DANN Hon n n 1 OO O0 OO CO Page Chapter 13 Section 24 PROGRAMMINGINHIGH LEVELLANGUAGE OTHER VARIABLES 90 Graphic Editor 100 General machine parameter table 101 Axis machine parameter tables 102 Spindle machine parameter tables 103 Serial port machine parameter tables 104 PLC machine parameter table 105 2 M function table 106 Spindle and cross compensation table 110 Diagnosis configuration 111 Diagnosis hardware test 112 Diagnosis RAM memory test 113 Diagnosis EPROM memory test checksums 114 User diagnosis OPMODA Indicates the operating mode currently selected when working with the main channel Use the OPMODE variable to know a
44. 45 5 V 5 5 F 5 5 S 5 5 T 4 D 4 J R J R FLEA 2 5 ates iai If J is not programmed or J 2 0 BALL END If JR TORIC Corner rounding If J 0 other than 0 and J R Defines the total pocket depth and it is given in absolute coordinates Ifdefined the cycle will take it into account during the finishing operation Ifnot defined and the pocket has a roughing operation the cycle will assume the value defined for the roughing operation If not defined and the pocket has no roughing operation but it has a semi finishing operation the cycle will assume the one define in the semi finishing operation fthepockethas neitherroughing nor semi finishing operation this parameter must be defined Defines the coordinate of the reference plane and it must be given in absolute values Ifdefined the cycle will take it into account during the finishing operation Ifnot defined and the pocket has a roughing operation the cycle will assume the value defined for the roughing operation If not defined and the pocket has no roughing operation but it has a semi finishing operation the cycle will assume the one define in the semi finishing operation fthepockethas neitherroughing norsemi finishing operation this parameter must be defined Defines the tool penetrating feedrate If not programmed or programmed with a value of 0 the CNC will assume 50 of the feed
45. Case A When the machining paths are linear and maintain a certain angle with the abscissa axis It first contours the external profile of the part If the finishing operation has been selected on the cycle call this contouring is performed leaving the finishing stock programmed for the finishing pass MP1102 Next the milling operation with the programmed feed and steps If while milling an island is run into for the first time it will be contoured After the contouring and the remaining times the tool will pass over the island withdrawing along the longitudinal axis to the reference plane and will continue machining once the island has been cleared gt MP1104 Chapter 11 Section Page 2D AND 3D POCKETS 2D POCKETS 3 3 Case B When the machining paths are concentric The roughing operation is carried out along paths concentric to the profile The machining will be done as fast as possible avoiding when possible going over the islands MP1129 Finishing operation Only if it has been programmed This operation can be done on a single pass or on several as well as following the profiles in the programmed direction or in the opposite The CNC will machine both the external profile and the islands making tangential approaches and exits to these with a constant surface speed Attention If the spindle was n
46. Chap Chap 3 4 9 10 and Appendix 5 13 and Appendix 4th work zone Installation Manual Programming Manual Chap Chap 10 and Appendix 13 and Appendix Filter to smooth axis and spindle response Parameter SMOTIME smooth time Installation Manual Chap 2nd acceleration and gain range for axes and spindle Installation Manual Chap Maintain tool offset D on power up Parameter MAINOFFS Installation Manual Chap PLC Marks per axis ELIMINA Indicates whether the axis is displayed or not Installation Manual Chap Display of Gantry axis Installation Manual Chap Action CNCEX is executed without PLC axes Installation Manual Chap New PLC action CNCEX1 Installation Manual Chap Change of directories via DNC Operating Manual Chap Penetration feedrate parameter in pocket cycles Programming Manual Chap 9 and 11 Feedrate F as an inverted function of time Installation Manual Programming Manual Chap Chap 10 and Appendix 6 13 and Appendix New EXEC statement to execute programs Programming Manual Chap 14 and Appendix New parameter DIPLCOF offering different ways to display PLCOFF Installation Manual Chap Better machining of profile intersections Better machine response in Look ahead Interpolation of up to 6 axes simultaneously 6 Version history M INTRODUCTION
47. ELIMINA Indicates whether the axis is displayed or not Installation Manual Chap Display of Gantry axis Installation Manual Chap Action CNCEX is executed without PLC axes Installation Manual Chap New PLC action CNCEX1 Installation Manual Chap Change of directories via DNC Operating Manual Chap Penetration feedrate parameter in pocket cycles Programming Manual Chap 9 and 11 Feedrate F as an inverted function of time Installation Manual Programming Manual Chap Chap 10 and Appendix 6 13 and Appendix New EXEC statement to execute programs Programming Manual Chap 14 and Appendix New parameter DIPLCOF offering different ways to display PLCOFF Installation Manual Chap Better machining of profile intersections Better machine response in Look ahead Interpolation of up to 6 axes simultaneously 6 Version history M INTRODUCTION Introduction 2 SAFETY CONDITIONS Read the following safety measures in order to prevent damage to personnel to this product and to those products connected to it This unit must only be repaired by personnel authorized by Fagor Automation Fagor Automation shall not be held responsible for any physical or material damage derived from the violation of these basic safety regulations Precautions against personal damage Before powering the unit up make sure that it is conne
48. Introduction 2 SAFETY CONDITIONS Read the following safety measures in order to prevent damage to personnel to this product and to those products connected to it This unit must only be repaired by personnel authorized by Fagor Automation Fagor Automation shall not be held responsible for any physical or material damage derived from the violation of these basic safety regulations Precautions against personal damage Before powering the unit up make sure that it is connected to ground In order to avoid electrical discharges make sure that all the grounding connections are properly made Do not work in humid environments In order to avoid electrical discharges always work under 90 of relative humidity non condensing and 45 C 113 F Do not work in explosive environments In order to avoid risks damage do no work in explosive environments Precautions against product damage Working environment This unit is ready to be used in Industrial Environments complying with the directives and regulations effective in the European Community Fagor Automation shall not be held responsible for any damage suffered or caused when installed in other environments residential or homes Install the unit in the right place Itis recommended whenever possible to instal the CNC away from coolants chemical product blows etc that could damage it This unit complies with the European directives on electromagnetic compatibility
49. M06 to make it active S RPM Real speed of the spindle in RPM When working in M19 this indicates the position of the spindle in degrees G All displayable G functions which are active Chapter 3 Section Page EXECUTE SIMULA TE DISPLAY SELECTION 7 PARTC CYTIME TIMER All active M functions Parts counter It indicates the number of consecutive parts executed with the same part program Every time a new program is selected this variable is reset to 0 With this CNC variable PARTC it is possible to modify this counter from the PLC from the CNC program and via DNC Time elapsed during the execution of the part in hours minutes seconds hundredths of a second format Every time a part program execution starts even when repetitive this variable is reset to 0 Time indicated by the PLC enabled clock in hours minutes seconds format Page Chapter 3 Section EXECUTE SIMULATE DISPLAYSELECTION 3 2 1 STANDARD DISPLAY MODE This display mode is assumed by default on power up and after the key sequence SHIFT RESET and it shows the following fields or windows EXECUTION 54 G0 G17 G90 X0 YO Z10 T2 D2 TOR3 2 TOR4 1 G72 80 2 G72 Z1 M6 G66 D100 R200 F300 S400 E500 M30 N100 G81 G98 Z5 I 1 F400 COMMAND ACTUAL TO GO 00172 871 00172 871 00000 000 00153 133 00153 133 00000 000 00004 269 00004 269 00000 000 00071 029 00071 029 00000 000 00011 755
50. Page 2D AND 3D POCKETS 3D POCKETS 27 After cycle conditions Once the canned cycle has ended the active feedrate will be the last one programmed The one corresponding to the roughing or finishing operation On the other hand the CNC will assume functions GOO G40 and G90 Reference coordinates The irregular pocket canned cycle has four coordinates along the longitudinal axis usually perpendicular to the plane selected with G15 which due to their importance are described next MP1132 1 Starting plane coordinate Given by the tool position at the beginning of the cycle 2 Reference plane coordinate It must be programmed in absolute values and it represents a part approaching coordinate 3 Part surface coordinate top Itis programmed in absolute values and in the first profile defining block 4 Machining depth coordinate bottom It must be programmed in absolute values Page Chapter 11 Section 28 2D AND 3D POCKETS 3D POCKETS 11 2 1 ROUGHING OPERATION This is the main operation in the machining of an irregular pocket and its programming is optional It will be programmed in a block which will need to bear a label number in order to indicate to the canned cycle the block where the roughing operation is defined Example G66 R100 C200 F300 S400 E500 Definition of the irregular pocket cycle N100 G67 Definition of the roughing operation The function
51. Page CANNEDCYCLES 1 9 2 CANNED CYCLE AREA OF INFLUENCE Once a canned cycle has been defined it remains active and all blocks programmed after this block are under its influence while it is not cancelled In other words every time a block is executed in which some axis movement has been programmed the CNC will carry out following the programmed movement the machining operation which corresponds to the active canned cycle If inamovement block within the area of influence of a canned cycle the number of times ablock is executed repetitions N is programmed atthe end ofthe block the CNC repeats the programmed positioning and the machining operation corresponding to the canned cycle the indicated number of times Ifanumberofrepetitions times NO is programmed the machining operation corresponding to the canned cycle will not be performed The CNC will only carry out the programmed movement If within the area of influence of a canned cycle there is a block which does not contain any movement the machining operation corresponding to the defined canned cycle will not be performed except in the calling block G81 Definition and execution of the canned cycle drilling G90 G1 X100 The X axis moves to X100 where the hole is to be drilled G91 X10 N3 The CNC runs the following operation 3 times ncremental move to X10 Runsthe cycle defined above G9 X20 NO Incremental move only to X20 no drilling
52. When making changes the CNC will ask whether the page or symbol is to be saved before selecting a new one SAVE With this option it is possible to store in the EEPROM memory the selected page or symbol being displayed Chapter 10 Section Page GRAPHICEDITOR UTILITIES 5 10 2 EDITING CUSTOM SCREENS PAGES AND SYMBOLS In order to edit a page or symbol itis necessary to selected first by means of the EDIT option of the UTILITIES mode of operation To edit or modify a page or symbol use the options GRAPHIC ELEMENTS TEXTS and MODIFICATIONS The information contained in a page or symbol must not occupy more than 4Kb otherwise the CNC will issue the corresponding error message Once the page or symbol has been selected the CNC will display a screen similar to this Es s a TES UE 1E A ESCQEQEQEQEACUEC CAP INS SAHM one The upper left hand side of the screen will show the number of the page or symbol being edited The main window will show the selected page or symbol When it is a new page or symbol the main window will be blank blue background There is also a window at the bottom of the screen which shows the different editing parameters and highlights their selected values Page Chapter 10 Section 6 GRAPHICEDITOR EDITING CUSTOMSCREENS PAGES ANDSYMBOLS The various parameters available are The type of drawing line used when defining the graphic element
53. and by expression 3 row Expression 1 expression 2 and expression 3 may contain a number or any expression which results in a number The CNC allows to display any user defined symbol 0 255 defined at the CNC keyboard in the Graphic Editor mode such as is indicated in the Operating Manual In order to position it within the display area its pixels must be defined 0 639 for columns expression 2 and 0 335 for rows expression 3 IB expression INPUT text format The CNC has 26 data entry variables IBO 1B25 The IB mnemonic displays the text indicated in the data input window and stores the data input by the user in the entry variable indicated by means of anumber or by means of any expression which results in a number Chapter 14 Section Page PROGRAM TROLSTATEMENT SCREEN CUSTOMIZING 15 OG CONTROLS NTS STATEMENTS The wait for data entry will only occur when programming the format of the requested data This format may have a sign integer part and decimal part Ifit bears the minus sign it will allow positive and negative values and if it does not have a sign it will only allow positive values The integer part indicates the maximum number of digits 0 6 desired to the left of the decimal point The decimal part indicates the maximum number of digits 0 5 desired to the right of the decimal point If the numerical format is not programmed for example IB1 ZINPUT text
54. in real or theoretical values according to the setting of the THEODPLY machine parameter and the format defined with the axis machine parameter DFORMAT Each axis has the following fields PART ZERO This field shows the real axis position with respect to part zero MACHINE ZERO This field shows the real axis position with the respect to machine reference zero home 3 2 3 PART PROGRAM DISPLAY MODE Displays a page of program blocks among which the block being executed is highlighted Page Chapter 3 Section 10 EXECUTE SIMULATE DISPLAYSELECTION 3 2 4 SUBROUTINE DISPLAY MODE This display mode shows information regarding the following commands RPT N10 N20 This function executes the program section between blocks N10 thru N20 CALL 25 This function executes subroutine number 25 G87 This function the corresponding canned cycle PCALL 30 This function executes subroutine 30 in a local parameter level When this mode is selected the following must be considered The FAGOR 8055 CNC allows the definition and usage of subroutines which can be called upon from a main program or from another subroutine and this can in turn call upon a second one and so forth upto 15 nesting levels each subroutine call represents a nesting level When the machining canned cycles G66 G68 G69 G81 G82 G83 G84 G85 G86 G87 G88 and G89 are active they use the sixth nesting level of local parameter
55. 101 L 6C 108 E SHIFT 45 069 L SHIFT 4C 076 E CAPS 45 069 L CAPS 4C 076 E SHIFT CAPS 65 101 L SHIFT CAPS 6C 108 F 66 102 M 6D 109 F SHIFT 46 070 M SHIFT 4D 077 F CAPS 46 070 M CAPS 4D 077 F SHIFT CAPS 66 102 M SHIFT CAPS 6D 109 G 67 103 N 6E 110 G SHIFT 47 071 N SHIFT 4E 078 G CAPS 47 071 N CAPS 4E 078 G SHIFT CAPS 67 103 N SHIFT CAPS 6E 110 Key Hexadecimal Decimal Key Hexadecimal Decimal N A5 164 U 75 117 N SHIFT A4 165 U SHIFT 55 085 N CAPS A4 165 U CAPS 55 085 N SHIFT CAPS A5 164 U SHIFT CAPS 75 117 O 6F 111 V 76 118 O SHIFT 4F 079 V SHIFT 56 086 O CAPS 4F 079 V CAPS 56 086 O SHIFT CAPS 6F 111 V SHIFT CAPS 76 118 P 70 112 W 77 119 P SHIFT 50 080 W SHIFT 57 087 P CAPS 50 080 W CAPS 57 087 P SHIFT CAPS 70 112 W SHIFT CAPS 77 119 Q 71 113 X 78 120 Q SHIFT 51 081 X SHIFT 58 088 Q4CAPS 51 081 X4CAPS 58 088 Q SHIFT CAPS 71 113 X SHIFT CAPS 78 120 R 72 114 Y 79 121 R SHIFT 52 082 Y SHIFT 59 089 R CAPS 52 082 Y CAPS 59 089 R SHIFT CAPS 72 114 Y SHIFT CAPS 79 121 S 73 115 Z 7A 122 S SHIFT 53 083 Z SHIFT 5A 090 S CAPS 53 083 Z CAPS 5A 090 S SHIFT CAPS 73 115 Z SHIFT CAPS 7A 122 T 74 116 SP 20 032 T SHIFT 54 084 SP SHIFT 20 032 T CAPS 54 084 SP CAPS 20 032 T SHIFT CAPS 74 116 SP SHIFT CAPS 20 032 12 Key Hexadecimal Decimal Key Hexadecimal Decima
56. 3 10 and Appendix 13 17 and Appendix TCP transformation Installation Manual Programming Manual Chap Chap 9 and Appendix 17 Helical interpolation with several axes in linear interpolation Programming Manual Chap 6 GI with several positioning axes Programming Manual Chap 6 Sercos Installation Manual Chap 1 3 and 9 Tracing Modified algorithm parameter TRASTA trace status Installation Manual Chap 3 Handwheels with resolution amp direction parameters Installation Manual Chap 3 and 4 More data from CNC to PLC Installation Manual Programming Manual Chap Chap 10 and Appendix 13 and Appendix Spindle acceleration in open loop OPLACETI Installation Manual Chap 3 Improvements on tool change positions in irregular pockets with islands Programming Manual Chap 11 Dual spindle Installation Manual Programming Manual Chap Chap 3 4 9 10 and Appendix 5 13 and Appendix 4th work zone Installation Manual Programming Manual Chap Chap 10 and Appendix 13 and Appendix Filter to smooth axis and spindle response Parameter SMOTIME smooth time Installation Manual Chap 2nd acceleration and gain range for axes and spindle Installation Manual Chap Maintain tool offset D on power up Parameter MAINOFFS Installation Manual Chap PLC Marks per axis
57. 65457 CAPS FFF3 65523 CAPS FFBO 65456 SHIFT CAPS SHIFT CAPS FFB 1 65457 ESC IB 027 Downarrow FFB2 65458 ESC SHIFT 1B 027 SHIFT FFB3 65459 ESC CAPS 1B 027 CAPS FFB2 65458 ESC SHIFT CAPS 1B 027 SHIFT CAPS FFB3 65459 MAIN MENU FFF4 65524 Leftarrow FFB4 65460 SHIFT FFF4 65524 SHIFT FFB5 65461 CAPS FFF4 65524 CAPS FFB4 65460 SHIFT CAPS FFF4 65524 SHIFT CAPS FFB5 65461 CL FFAD 65453 Right arrow FFB6 65462 CL SHIFT SHIFT FFB7 65463 CL CAPS FFAD 65453 CAPS FFB6 65462 CL SHIFT CAPS SHIFT CAPS FFB7 65463 INS FFAE 65454 INS SHIFT FFAE 65454 INS CAPS FFAE 65454 INS SHIFT CAPS FFAE 65454 14 Key Hexadecimal Decimal Key Hexadecimal Decimal F1 FCOO 64512 Cycle start FFF1 65521 FI SHIFT FCOO 64512 SHIFT FFF165521 FI CAPS FCOO 64512 CAPS FFF165521 FI SHIFT CAPS FCOO 64512 SHIFT CAPS FFF165521 F2 FCOI 64513 Cycle stop SFFF065520 F2 SHIFT FCOI 64513 SHIFT SFFF065520 F2 CAPS FCOI 64513 CAPS SFFF065520 F2 SHIFT CAPS FCOI 64513 SHIFT CAPS SFFF065520 F3 FC02 64514 F3 SHIFT FC02 64514 F3 CAPS FC02 64514 F3 SHIFT CAPS FC02 64514 F4 FC03 64515 F4 SHIFT FC03 64515 F4 CAPS FC03 64515 F4 SHIFT CAPS FC03 64515 F5 FC04 64516 F5 SHIFT FC04 64516 F5 CAPS FC04 64516 F5 SHIFT CAPS FC04 64516 F6 FC05 64517 F6 SHIFT FC05 64517 F6 CAPS FC05 64517 F6 SHIFT CAPS FC05 64517 F7 FC06 64518 F7 SHIFT FC06 64518 F7 CAPS F
58. 8 AXES AND COORDINATESYSTEMS PROGRAMMING OF COORDINATES Programming example assuming that the Polar Origin is located at the Coordinate Origin P6 B PO Absolute coordinates G90 XO YO Point PO G01 R100 QO Point P1 in a straight line G01 G03 Q30 Point P2 in an arc G03 G01 R50 Q30 Point P3 in a straight line G01 G03 Q60 Point P4 in an arc G03 G01 R100 Q60 Point P5 in a straight line G01 G03 Q90 Point P6 in an arc G03 GO RO Q90 Point PO in a straight line G01 Incremental coordinates G90 XO YO Point PO G91 G01 R100 QO Point P1 in a straight line G01 G03 Q30 Point P2 in an arc G03 G01 R 50 QO Point P3 in a straight line G01 G03 Q30 Point P4 in an arc G03 G01 R50 QO Point P5 in a straight line G01 G03 Q30 Point P6 in an arc G03 G01 R 100 QO Point PO in a straight line G01 The polar origin apart from being able to be preset using function G93 described later can be modified in the following cases On power up after executing M02 M30 EMERGENCY or RESET the CNC 8055 will assume as the polar origin the coordinate origin of the work plane defined by the general machine parameter IPLANE Every time the work plane is changed G16 G17 G18 or G19 the CNC 8055 assumes the coordinate origin of the new work plane selected as the polar origin When executing a circular interpolation G02 or G03 and if the general machine param
59. ABSOLUTE COORDINATES 6 5 ARC TANGENT TO THE PREVIOUS PATH G08 Via function G08 you can program an arc tangential to the previous path without having to program the coordinates I J amp K of the center Only the coordinates of the endpoint of the arc are defined either in polar coordinates or in cartesian coordinates according to the axes of the work plane Example Supposing that the starting point is XO Y40 you wish to program a straight line then an arc tangential to the line and finally an arc tangential to the previous one G90 G01 X70 G08 X90 Y60 arctangential to previous path G08 X110 Y60 arc tangential to previous path Function G08 is not modal so it should always be programmed if you wish to execute an arc tangential to the previous path Function G08 can be programmed as G8 Function G08 enables the previous path to be a straight line or an arc and does not alter its history The same function G01 G02 or G03 stays active after the block is finished Attention When using function G08 it is not possible to execute a complete circle as an infinite range of solutions exists The CNC displays the corresponding error code Page Chapter 6 Section 1 PATHCONTROL ARCTANGENTTOTHE 0 PREVIOUS PATH G08 6 6 ARC DEFINED BY THREE POINTS G09 Through function G09 youcan define an arc by programming the endpoint and an intermediate point the starting point of the arc
60. Before pressing this softkey the tool to be calibrated must be selected The tool calibration will be performed on the selected axis by means of the G15 function as longitudinal axis by default the Z axis When using a probe for tool calibration the following machine parameters must be properly set PRBXMIN PRBXMAX PRBYMIN PRBYMAX PRBZMIN PRBZMAX and PRBMOVE Tool calibration without a probe Follow these steps Press the softkey corresponding to the axis to be calibrated The CNC will request the position value of the known part at the touch point Once this value has been keyed in press ENTER for this value to be assumed by the CNC Jog the tool with the jog keys X X Y Y Z Z 4 4 until touching the part Press the LOAD softkey corresponding to this axis The CNC will perform the necessary calculations and it will assign the new value to the selected tool length offset Tool calibration with a probe It may be done in two ways as described in calibration without a probe or as follows Press the softkey which indicates the direction of the tool calibration along the longitudinal axis The CNC will move the tool at the feedrate indicated by the machine parameter for that axis PRBFEED until touching the probe The maximum distance the tool can move is set by machine parameter PRBMOVE When the tool touches the probe the CNC stops the axis and after making the p
61. C0 5 D2 H2 J4 K100 F500 3000 M3 N120 G81 G99 G91 Z 5 I 30 F400 S2000 T3 D3 M3 N220 G82 G99 G9 Z 5 I 30 K100 F400 S2000 T2 D2 M6 N200 G83 G98 G91 Z 4 I 5 J6 T2 D4 Chapter 11 Section Page 2D AND 3D POCKETS 2D POCKETS DRILLING 5 11 1 2 ROUGHING OPERATION This is the main operation in the machining of an irregular pocket and its programming is optional This operation will be carried out in either square corner G07 or round corner G05 as it is currently selected However the canned cycle will assign the G07 format to the necessary movements It will be programmed in a block which will need to bear a label number in order to indicate to the canned cycle the block where the roughing operation is defined Example G66 D100 R200 F300 S400 E500 Definition of the irregular pocket cycle N200 G67 Definition of the roughing operation The function for the roughing operation is G67 and its programming format G67 ABCIR KVFSTDM A 5 5 Defines the angle which forms the roughing path with the abscissa axis 57 If parameter A is not programmed the roughing operation is carried out following concentric paths It will be machined as fast as possible since it does not have to go over the islands RUNE Fe O A N MP1129 Page Chapter 11 Section 6 2D AND 3D POCKETS 2DPOCKETS ROUGHING B 5 5 Defines the machining pass along the longitudinal axis depth of th
62. COUNTERS AND BINARY DATA This window is divided into two sections one to display Counters and the other one to display Binary Data Counter It will display one counter per line showing the following information fields for each of them CEN Indicates the logic status of the ENABLE input CUP Indicates the logic status of the UP COUNT input CDW Indicates the logic status of the DOWN COUNT input CPR Indicates the logic status of the PRESET input S Indicates the status of the counter 1 when its internal count is 0 and 0 for all other cases C Indicates its count value Key in C 1 256 or C 1 256 1 256 to request information on one or more counter and then press ENTER Binary Data It will show one data line per resource or group of resources requested The instructions available to request information of the various resources are I 1 256 or I 1 256 1 256 It shows the status of the selected input or group ofinputs O 1 256 or O 1 256 1 256 It shows the status of the selected output or group of outputs M 1 5957 or M 1 5957 1 5957 It shows the status of the selected mark or group of marks B 0 31 R 1 559 It shows the status of the selected bit of the indicated register When requesting the status of one or more inputs outputs or marks the CNC will show complete data lines even when all of them have not been requested When using generic denominators I O M to display resources the CNC will display 20 ofth
63. Chapter 16 Section Page TRACING ANDDIGITIZING ACTIVATEDIGITIZING G24 25 E5 5 Indicates the chordal error or maximum difference allowed between the surface of the model and the segment joining two consecutive digitized points Itis given in the selected work units millimeters or inches NEN Lu I mp16937 AE If not programmed or programmed with a value of 0 the chordal error will be ignored providing a new point after moving in space and along the programmed path the distance indicated by parameter L K Indicates the storing format for the digitized points in the program selected by means of the OPEN P statement K 0 Absolute format All points will be programmed in absolute coordinates G90 and defined by the X Y and Z axes K 1 Absolute filtered format All points will be programmed in absolute coordinates G90 but only those axes whose positions have changed with respect to the previous digitized point will be defined K 2 Incremental filtered format All points will be programmed in incremental coordinates G91 and referred to the previous digitized point Only those axes whose positions have changed with respect to the previous digitized point will be defined If not programmed the canned cycle will assume a value of KO Basic concepts Function G24 must be defined just before the block where the digitizing begins Before activating the digitizing function G24 itis necessary to
64. Depending on the type of communication required the serial port machine parameter PROTOCOL should be selected PROTOCOL 0 if the communication is with a peripheral device PROTOCOL 1 if the communication is via DNC 1 1 DNC CONNECTION The CNC offers as optional feature the possibility of working in DNC Distributed Numerical Control enabling communication between the CNC and a computer to carry out the following functions Directory and delete commands Transfer of programs and tables between the CNC and a computer Remote control of the machine The ability to supervise the status of advanced DNC systems Chapter 1 Section Page OVERVIEW 1 1 2 COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL VIA DNC OR PERIPHERAL DEVICE This type of communication enables program and table transfer commands plus the organization of CNC directories such as the Computer Directory for copying deleting programs etc to be done either from the CNC or the computer When you want to transfer files it is necessary to follow this protocol The symbol will be used to start the file followed by the program comment optional of up to 20 characters ee 99 Then and separated by a comma comes the attribute protection each file has reading modifying etc This protection is optional and does not have to programmed To end the file header RETURN RT or LINE FEED LF characters should be sent s
65. E eRRIS VAS ERN TAN RES ERPN URN 3 5 3 Spindle selection 628 QM Leeds p Spo UR ERAN REPRE SEMI a UD a 6 5 4 CGonstentspesd Mnenons G90 OUT semana a A 7 5 4 1 Eonian SAINT SCR speed GIG ea 7 5 4 2 Constant tadbeenter speed OD T Leu iu ascia RI Ere EY rE RR Y URS RNV EAR VREER RD 7 5 5 Conplemeltary TUDCUONS sorasa onia n Ea O Oaa E Sai 8 5 31 Feee e C 8 5 5 2 Spindle spe d aud spindle orientation 8 inier dees aasantnedbiedavehineabeacseedanessnesbieasbe 9 3 25 3 oo WOME em CR ees S 10 5 5 4 Jd ooboltse number ED cai doses m DOES CHAR HR Eu SUDAN EURO OHNE EUR M eee 11 3 35 Nscellaneous Tone GP OIL eacus pm Rr reer rE erro ERA EP RE Ue ee RED VER RE 12 5 5 5 1 MOO Program STOP eiciia aaaea aa EE EEEO O EONAR EN 13 3 5 52 M01 Conditional program STOP ornoen hi ba aaa RES KRba E EERE 13 5 5 5 3 MO End of DUSTIN cione RIS RGREHDANU EI NUSRM ENDO RN IVRINI GR CU RMMIR RM a 13 5 5 5 4 M30 End of program with return to first block iius eee roter been cit rtu nih vn kin 13 5 5 5 5 MOS Clockwise spindle roratiOi sisson see anaa e Aa 13 5 5 5 6 MOA Counterclockwise spindle TOtatiON sicsisiscavesain cennin annann 13 5 5 3 7 MOS SPU STOP EE 13 5 5 5 8 MOG Toal ILU qu 14 5 5 5 9 M19 Spindle OPTRA ION ITO T 14 5 5 5 10 M41 M42 M43 M44 Spindle speed range change ee 15 5 33 11 M45 Auxillary spindie Liye tolius uocis i Fe POSSE nino Na a Ea O EOE Onna 14 Sa
66. F is not programmed the CNC assumes the feedrate to be F0 When working in rapid travel G00 the machine will move at the rapid feedrate indicated by the axis machine parameter GOOFEED apart from the F programmed The programmed feedrate F may be varied between 0 and 255 via the PLC or by DNC or between 0 and 120 via the switch located on the Operator Panel of the CNC The CNC however is equipped with the general machine parameter MAXFOVR to limit maximum feedrate variation If you are working in rapid travel G00 rapid feedrate will be fixed at 100 alternatively it can be varied between 0 and 100 depending on how the machine parameter RAPIDOVR is set When functions G33 electronic threading or G84 tapping canned cycle are executed the feedrate cannot be modified It functions at 10096 of programmed F Page Chapter 5 Section 8 PROGRAMMINGBY DE COMPLEMENTARY S enr C0 FUNCTIONS FE S T D M 5 5 2 SPINDLE SPEED AND SPINDLE ORIENTATION S Code S has two meanings a b TURNING SPEED OF THE SPINDLE The turning speed of the spindle is programmed directly in rpm via code 85 4 The maximum value is limited by spindle machine parameters MAXGEARI MAXGEAR2 MAXGEAR 3 and MAXGEAR4 in each case depending on the spindle range selected It is also possible to limit this maximum value from the program by using function G92 85 4 The programmed turning speed S may be varied f
67. G33 Controlled corner rounding G36 Tangential entry G37 Tangential exit G38 Chamfer blend G39 Dwell Block preparation stop G04 GO4K Round Square corner G05 G07 Mirror image G11 G12 G13 G14 Planes and longitudinal axis selection G15 G16 G17 G18 G19 Work zones G21 G22 Tool radius compensation G40 G41 G42 Tool length compensation G43 G44 Zero offsets Millimeters inches G71 G70 Scaling factor G72 Pattern rotation G73 Machine reference search G74 Probing G75 Slaved axis G77 G78 Absolute incremental programming G90 G91 Coordinate and polar origin preset G92 G93 Feedrate programming G94 G95 G functions associated with canned cycles G79 G80 G98 and G99 Auxiliary function programming F S T and D Auxiliary function M programming SYNTAX ASSISTANCE CNC TABLES Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page 1090 1091 1092 1093 1094 1095 1096 1097 1098 1099 Tool Offset table Tool table Tool magazine table Miscellaneous auxiliary function M table Zero offset table Leadscrew error compensation tables Cross compensation table Machine parameter tables User parameter tables Password table SYNTAX ASSISTANCE HIGH LEVEL Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 1105 1106 1107 1108 1109 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 1115 1116 Page 1117
68. G90 G00 X30 Y50 ZO PCALL 10 P0220 P1 10 or also PCALL 10 A20 B10 G90 G00 X60 Y50 Z0 PCALL 10 P0 10 P1 20 or also PCALL 10 A10 B20 M30 SUB 10 G91 GOI XPO F5000 CALL 11 G91 G01 YP1 CALL 11 G91 G01 X PO CALL 11 G91 G01 Y P1 CALL 11 RET SUB 11 G81 G98 G91 Z 8 I 22 F1000 S5000 T1 D1 Drilling canned cycle G84 Z 8 I 22 K15 F500 S2000 T2 D2 Threading canned cycle G80 RET MCALL expression assignment statement assignment statement By means of the mnemonic MCALL any user defined subroutine SUB integer acquires the category of canned cycle The execution of this mnemonic is the same as the mnemonic PCALL but the call is modal i e if another block with axis movement is programmed at the end of this block after this movement the subroutine indicated will be executed and with the same call parameters If when a modal subroutine is selected a movement block with a number of repetitions is executed forexample X10 N3 the CNC will execute the movement only once X10 and after the modal subroutine as many times as the number of repetitions indicates Should block repetitions be chosen the first execution of the modal subroutine will be made with updated call parameters but not for the remaining times which will be executed with the values which these parameters have at that time If when a subroutine is selected as modal a block containing the MCALL mnemonic is execute
69. Ist Movement along the ordinate axis 2nd Movement of the longitudinal axis the distance 2B Chapter 12 Section Page WORKING WITH A PROBE BOSS MEASURING 33 3 Probing This movement consists of Movementof the probe along the ordinate axis at the indicated feedrate H until the probe signal is received The maximum distance to be travelled in the probing movementis B J 2 If after travelling that distance the CNC does not receive the probe signal it will display the corresponding error code and stop the movement of the axes Return of the probe in rapid G00 the distance indicated in E Movementofthe probe along the ordinate axis atthe indicated feedrate F until the probe signal is received 4 Movement to second approach point This movement of the probe which is made in rapid G00 consists of Withdrawal to the first approach point Movement to a distance B above the boss to the second approach point 5 Second probing movement Same as the first probing 6 Third approach movement Same as above 7 Third probing movement Same as above 8 Fourth approach movement Same as above 9 Fourth probing movement Same as above Page Chapter 12 Section 34 WORKING WITH A PROBE BOSS MEASURING 10 Withdrawal This movement consists of Withdrawal to the fourth approach point Movement of the probe in rapid GOO and at a distance
70. M30 Page Chapter 8 Section 16 TOOL COMPENSATION PENG HCONEENS SON G43 G44 G15 9 e CANNED CYCLES These canned cycles can be performed on any plane the depth being along the axis selected as longitudinal via function G15 or in its absence along the axis perpendicular to this plane The CNC offers the following machining canned cycles G69 Complex deep hole drilling G81 Drilling cycle G82 Drilling cycle with dwell G83 Simple deep hole drilling G84 Tapping cycle G85 Reaming cycle G86 Boring cycle with withdrawal in GOO G87 Rectangular pocket milling cycle G88 Circular pocket milling cycle G89 Boring cycle with withdrawal in GO1 It also offers the following functions that can be used with the machining canned cycles G79 Modification of the canned cycle parameters G98 Return to the starting plane at the end of the canned cycle G99 Return to the reference plane at the end of the canned cycle 9 1 DEFINITION OF A CANNED CYCLE A canned cycle is defined by the G function indicating the canned cycle and its corresponding parameters A canned cycle cannot be defined in a block which has non linear movements G02 G03 G08 G09 or G33 Also a canned cycle cannot be executed while function G02 G03 or G33 is active The CNC will issue the corresponding error message However once a canned cycle has been defined in a block and following blocks functions G02 G03 G08 or G09 can be programmed Chapter 9 Section
71. Max 99999 9999 Tool table Tool offset number 0 NT OFFSET maximum 255 Family code If normal tool 0 n 200 If special tool 200 n 255 Nominallife 0 65535 minutes or operations Reallife 0 99999 99 minutes or 99999 operations Tool magazine table Contents of each magazine position Tool number 1 NTOOL maximum 255 0 Empty 1 Cancelled Position of tool in magazine Position number 1 NPOCKET maximum 255 0 On spindle 1 Not found 2 In change position Read only variables TOOL Returns the active tool number P100 TOOL assigns the number of the active tool to P100 TOD Returns the active tool offset number NXTOOL Returns the next tool number selected but is awaiting the execution of M06 to be active NXTOD Returns the number of the tool offset corresponding to the next tool selected but is awaiting the execution of M06 to be active TMZPn Returns the position occupied in the tool magazine by the indicated tool n Page Chapter 13 Section PROGRAMMINGINHIGH LEVELLANGUAGE VARIABLES FOR TOOLS Read write variables TORn TOLn TOIn TOKn TLFDn TLFFn TLENn TLFRn TMZTn This variable allows the value assigned to the Radius ofthe indicated tool offset n on the tool offset table to be read or modified P110 TOR3 AssignstheR value of tool offset 3 to Parameter 3 TOR3 P111 Assigns the value of parameter P111 to R oftool offset
72. Once the execution or simulation has finished or it has been interrupted the CNC redraws the section view in order to achieve a better color definition and better sense of depth This type of graphics will not show the machining operations performed with the tool positioned along the X or Y axis but only when positioned along the Z axis However when switching to SOLID afterwards all machining operations will be shown SOLID This option shows a three dimensional block which will be machined as the part program is being run Ifno tool has been selected while executing or simulating the part program the CNC will assume a default tool offset value of LO RO With these values the CNC will only show the programmed tool path and the block will not be machined since the tool is assumed to have no radius RO The screen refresh is done periodically depending on the simulation speed and always from left to right regardless of the movement direction of the tool It must be borne in mind that when executing or simulating a new program other than the current one it will be machined over the existing already machined block However a new unmachined block can be obtained by deleting the screen with the CLEAR SCREEN softkey Chapter 3 Section Page EXECUTE SIMULATE GRAPHICS 25 The graphics generated after executing or simulating in SECTION VIEW or SOLID is lost returned to its original stat
73. P statement 4 Once the canned cycle has concluded the probe will return to the starting point This movement consists of Movement of the probe along the Z axis longitudinal perpendicular axis to the position indicated by parameter Z Movement in the main work plane up to the cycle s initial point parameters X Y Page Chapter 16 Section 44 TRACING ANDDIGITIZING PLANE PROFILETRACING CANNEDCYCLE 16 7 4 3 D PROFILE TRACING CANNED CYCLE The programming format for this cycle is as follows X 5 5 Y 5 5 145 5 TRACE 4 X Y Z I A C S Q R J K M N L E G F Absolute theoretical coordinate value along the abscissa axis of the approach point It must be off the model Absolute theoretical coordinate value along the ordinate axis of the approach point It must be off the model Absolute theoretical coordinate value along the probing axis longitudinal perpendicular of the approach point It must be off the model and over it since the first movement to seek the model is carried out in the work plane Defines the maximum tracing depth and itis referred to the coordinate value given to parameter Z If part of the model is out of this area the tracing will assign this maximum depth to the probing axis and will continue executing the tracing cycle without issuing an error If programmed with a value of 0 the CNC will issue the corresponding error Cha
74. PLC may be displayed with the ACTIVE PAGES option of the PLC The various options available in this operating mode are UTILITIES To manipulate symbols and user pages edit copy delete etc GRAPHIC ELEMENTS To include graphic elements in the selected symbol or page TEXTS To include texts in the selected symbol or page MODIFICATIONS To modify the selected symbol or page Page Chapter 10 GRAPHICEDITOR Section 10 1 UTILITIES The various available options are DIRECTORY With this option it is possible to display the directory of user defined screens pages or the user defined symbols The page directory shows the user defined screens stored in the EEPROM memory and their sizes in bytes The symbol directory shows the user defined symbols stored in the EEPROM memory and their sizes in bytes In both cases it indicates the total number of pages or symbols and the free EEPROM memory space COPY With this option it is possible to copy a page or symbol To do so follow these steps Use the corresponding key to select the origin of the page or symbol to be copied PAGE directory SYMBOL directory or one of the two serial ports of the system When selecting PAGE or SYMBOL indicate its number and press the softkey IN Then indicate with the corresponding softkey the destination of the copy A CNC page can be copied in another page or in one of the two ser
75. PLCTn PORGF PORGS POS X C POSS PPOS X C PRBST PRGF PRGFIN PRGFPR PRGFRO PRGN PRGS PRGSL PRGSSO PROBE REPOS RET ROTPF ROTPS RPOSS RPT RTPOSS SCALE SCALE X C SCNCSO SDNCS SDNCSL SDNCSO SFLWES SK SLIMIT SPEED SPLCS SPLCSL SPLCSO SPOSS SPRGS SPRGSL SPRGSO SREAL SRPOSS SRTPOS SSLIMI SSO SSPEED SSREAL SSSO STPOSS SUB SYMBOL SYSTEM SZLO X C SZONE SZUP X C TIME TIMER TLFDn TLFFn TLFNn TLFRn TMZPn TMZTn TOD TOIn TOKn TOLn TOOL TOOROF TOOROS TORn TPOS X C TPOSS TRACE TZLO X C TZONE TZUP X C WBUF WBUF WKEY WRITE Words ending in X C indicate a set of 9 elements formed by the corresponding root followed by X Y Z U V W A B and C ORG X C gt ORGX ORGY ORGZ ORGU ORGV ORGW ORGA ORGB ORGC All the letters of the alphabet A Z are also reserved words as they can make up a high level language word when used alone Page Chapter 13 2 PROGRAMMINGINHIGH LEVELLANGUAGE Section LEXICAL DESCRIPTION 13 1 2 NUMERICAL CONSTANTS The blocks programmed in high level language allow numbers in decimal format which do not exceed the format 6 5 and numbers in hexadecimal format in which case they must be preceded by the sign with a maximum of 8 digits The assignment to a variable of a constant higher than the format 6 5 will bemade by means of arithmetic parameters by means of arithmetic expressions or by means of constants expressed in hexadecimal format Example To assign the value 100000000 to the variable TIME
76. PX DX CAP INS MM JAHTAA The number of points of each of these is defined by means of the axis machine parameter NPOINTS The following is defined for each of these Position of the axis to be compensated Error of this axis in this position Also the current position of the selected axis is displayed and updated as the machine axis moves Page Chapter 11 Section 4 MACHINE PARAMETERS LEADSCREW ERROR COMPENSATION TABLES 11 4 CROSS COMPENSATION TABLES The tables corresponding to cross compensation have the following structure POSITION 0 0000 PR PK PX DX PM DS DS PX PX P P P DX PC DX DX DX DX OX CAP INS MM Pe 9 G3 G3 Gr Gn MO114 The number of points of each table is defined by means of the general machine parameter NPCROSS NPCROSS2 and NPCROSS3 respectively When any of these parameters is set to 0 it means that that particular table is not being used Thus the CNC will not display it One axis cannot be affected by the movement of several axes simultaneously for example A gt C and B gt C but one axis can affect the positioning of several axes for example A gt B and A gt C The following is defined on each one of the tables The position of the axis causing the error general machine parameter MOVAXIS MOVAXIS2 and MOVAXIS3 The error suffered by the axis indicated in general machine parameter COMPAXIS COMAX
77. Position the cursor at the final point of calculation and press the MARK END softkey to validate it The CNC will display in the message window the time difference between those two points It will be given in milliseconds This feature can prove very useful to calculate exactly the rise and fall times of a signal times between two signals times between the trigger of a signal and the beginning of a cycle etc Modify Time Base This option permits the Time Base to be modified The status area is divided into several vertical sections Each of these sections represents a time pitch determined by the Time Base constant The relationship between the Time Base and the signal resolution is inversely proportional in such way that the smaller the time base the greater the signal resolution and vice versa When pressing this softkey the CNC will request the new value for the time base This value must be given in milliseconds Chapter 9 Section Page PLC LOGICANALYZER 37 I 0 GRAPHIC EDITOR In this operating mode it is possible to create up to 256 PAGES or screens customized by the user and which are stored in the EEPROM memory Also up to 256 SYMBOLS can be created which can be used to create the user customized screens or pages These symbols are also stored in the EEPROM memory The information contained in a page or symbol must not occupy more than 4Kb otherwise the CNC will issue the
78. Programming manual Chap 13 and Appendix Date July1996 Software Version 9 11 and newer FEATURE AFFECTED MANUAL AND CHAPTERS Machine parameter EXTMULT to be used when the feedback system has coded marker pulses Io Installation manual Chap 3 4 Version history M Date May 1996 Software Version 11 01 and newer FEATURE AFFECTED MANUAL AND CHAPTERS CPU TURBO Installation manual Chap 1 and 3 Look Ahead Programming manual Chap 5 7 and Appendix 3D Irregular pockets with islands Programming manual Chap 11 Possibility to choose beginning and end Installation manual Chap 3 of tool radius compensation Programming manual Chap 8 Anticipation signal for each axis Installation manual Chap 3 9 and Appendix High level block execution from PLC Installation manual Chap 11 Non rollover rotary axis now possible Installation manual Chap 3 Line graphics on GP models Optional Profile Editor on GP models Date February 1997 Software Version 11 04 and newer FEATURE AFFECTED MANUAL AND CHAPTERS Par metro general MACELOOK P79 Installation manual Chap 3 m xima aceleraci n en Look ahead Date April 1997 Software version 11 05 and newer FEATURE AFFECTED MANUAL AND CHAPTERS Definition of the delay associated with the digital Installation manual Chap 3 10 amp Appendix probe Programming m
79. SO Closed contour definition G25 Deactivate tracing and digitizing Example of an open contour X G23 XY 160 J20 NO 8 Two dimensional tracing definition G24 L8 E5 K1 Digitizing definition G27 SO Q10 R25 J15 KO Opencontour definition G25 Deactivate tracing and digitizing Page Chapter 16 Section 4 TRACINGANDDIGITIZING INTRODUCTION Three dimensional Tracing Digitizing The profile contouring is carried out by three axes which are controlled by the CNC There must always be a surface for the probe to touch The maximum slope of this sweeping surface depends on the sweeping feedrate and the nominal deflections The greater the sweeping feedrate the flatter the surface must be The contour defined by function G27 may be either closed where the initial and final points are the same or open where the initial and final points are not the same With this option it is possible to carry out a continuous digitizing of the model which will be controlled by the CNC depending on the values assigned to the digitizing parameters Function G24 Example of a closed contour N mp1626 G23 XYZ I8 J50 K75 NO 8 MO 5 Three dimensional tracing definition G24 L8 E5 K1 Digitizing definition G27 S1 Closed contour definition G25 Deactivate tracing and digitizing Example of an open contour M G23 XYZ 120 J50 K45 NO 8 MO 5 Three dimensional tracing definition
80. Section TRACINGANDDIGITIZING ACTIVATE ONE DIMENSIONAL TRACING G23 mp1612 N 5 5 Nominal Deflection Indicates the pressure kept by the probe while sweeping the surface of the model The deflection is given in the selected work units mm or inches and its value is usually comprised between 0 3mm and 1 5mm The tracing quality depends upon the amount of deflection being used the tracing feedrate and the geometry of the model In order to prevent the probe from separating from the model it is advised to use a profile tracing feedrate of about 1000 times the deflection value per minute For example for a deflection value of 1mm the tracing feedrate would be 1 m min Application example on the X Y and Z axes SO G23 X IN mpi611 N gt lt Programming example The tracing area is delimited between X100 YO and X150 Y 50 the probe being on the Z axis G90 G01 X100 YO Z80 F1000 G23 ZI IONI 2 Tracing ON N10 G91 X50 Defines the sweep Y5 X 50 N20 Y5 i RPT N10 N20 NA X50 G25 Tracing OFF M30 Chapter 16 Section Page TRACING ANDDIGITIZING ACTIVATE ONE DIMENSIONAL 15 TRACING G23 16 3 3 G23 ACTIVATE TWO DIMENSIONAL TRACING With this type of tracing it is possible to perform two dimensional contouring This type of tracing may be selected by part program or in the MDI option the JOG and AUTOMATIC modes Once activated the CNC will move the probe
81. Section EXECUTE SIMULATE TOOLINSPECTION TABLES Allows access to any of the CNC tables associated with part programs Zero offsets Tool offsets Tools Tool magazine Global and Local Parameters Once the desired table has been selected all editing commands will be available for its verification and modification In order to return to the previous menu the ESC key must be pressed REPOSITIONING Positions the axes at the point where tool inspection started Once this option is selected the CNC will show the axes to be repositioned and will request the order in which they will move The PLANE softkey will appear for the main plane movements and another softkey for each one of the rest of the axes to be repositioned Once repositioning has been completed the key is pressed to continue with the execution of the rest of the program Chapter 3 Section Page EXECUTE SIMULATE TOOLINSPECTION 19 3 5 GRAPHICS With this function it is possible to select the type of graphic to be used as well as to define all the parameters for the corresponding graphic display Todo so the CNC must NOT be executing or simulating a part program otherwise it must be interrupted Once the type of graphics has been selected and its parameters defined this function can be accessed even during the execution or simulation of a part program should the type of graphic or any graphic parameters be changed After selec
82. Special family 200 thru 255 The status is defined as follows A Available E Expired real life greater than nominal life R Rejected by the PLC Once the tool table is selected the operator can move the cursor around the screen with the up down arrow keys and page up and page down keys The fields of each tool may be edited or modified in this mode from the keyboard by means of the various options described next Once any of these functions is selected the CNC shows an editing area on the CRT where the cursor may be moved by using the up down and right left arrow keys Also the up arrow key positions the cursor over the first character of the editing area and the down arrow key positions the cursor over the last character Chapter 6 Section Page TABLES TOOLTABLE 13 EDIT With this option it is possible to edit the desired tool Once this option is selected the softkeys will change their color showing their type of editing option over a white background Also itis possible to get more editing assistance by pressing HELP Press HELP again to exit the editing assistance mode Press ESC to quit the editing mode and leave the original values intact Once the tool offset has been edited press ENTER to enter it in the table MODIFY This option permits modifying the values assigned to the selected tool Before pressing this softkey select the tool to be modified with the cursor Once this o
83. Spheric coordinates Defines the incline plane resulting from rotating around the Z axis first then around the Y axis and again around the Z axis the amounts indicated by Q R S respectively X Y Z Define the coordinate origin of the incline plane They indicate the X Y Z coordinates with respect to the current coordinate origin X Y Z d Q R S Define the incline plane resulting from Having rotated around the Z axis first the amount indicated by Q The new coordinate system resulting from this transformation is called X Y Z because the X and Y axes have been rotated Then it must be rotated around the Y axis the amount indicated by R The new coordinate system resulting from this transformation is called X Y Z because the X and Z axes have been rotated Finally rotate around the Z the amount indicated by S Chapter 17 Section Page COORDINATE TRANSFORMATION MOVEMENTININCLINEPL 9 G49 TX YZS Defines a new work plane perpendicular to the orientation of the tool Is it a good idea to have a swivel or angled spindle machine parameter XFORM P93 set to 2 or 3 when using this type of definition T Indicates that one wishes to select a work plane perpendicular to the orientation of the tool X Y Z Define the coordinate origin of the incline plane Indicate the X Y Z coordinates with respect to the current origin z S Lets rotate the coordinates around the new Z corresponding to
84. TIMER 000000 00 00 CONTINUOUS JOG MOVE CAP INS MM REFERENCE PRESET TOOL MDI USER DISPLAY MM SEARCH CALIBRAT SELECTION INCHES C G9 9 9 9 C Cr Chapter 5 JOG Section DISPLAY SELECTION Page FOLLOWING ERROR When selecting this option the CNC will show the following error difference between the theoretical and real positions of the axes foreach axis and the spindle Also when having the tracing option this mode shows to the right of the screen a window with the values corresponding to the tracing probe P000662 N FOLLOWING ERROR X 00000 00Z2 Y 00000 003 Z 00000 003 U 00000 001 V 00000 00Z2 S 00000 000 DEFLECTIONS FACTORS X 00000 000 Y 00000 000 Z 00000 000 X 00001 000 Y 00001 000 Z 00001 000 D 00000 000 F03000 0000 96100 00000 0000 100 T0000 D000 NT0000 ND000 S 0000 RPM G00 G17 G54 PARTC 000000 CY TIME 00 00 00 00 TIMER 000000 00 00 MOVEMENT IN CONTINUOUS JOG CAP INS BLOCK STOP DISPLAY SELECTION CONDITION SELECTION INSPECTION TOOL GRAPHICS SINGLE BLOCK mp1603 The display format is determined by the axis machine parameter DFORMAT The correction factors of the probe do not depend on the work units The display format for the probe deflections on each axis X Y Z as well as the total deflection D is set by axis machine par
85. The FAGOR 8055 CNC reads up to 20 blocks ahead of the one it is executing with the aim of calculating in advance the path to be followed When the CNC works with compensation it needs to know the next programmed movement to calculate the path to be followed For this reason no more than 17 consecutive blocks can be programmed without movement 8 1 3 CANCELLING TOOL RADIUS COMPENSATION Tool radius compensation is cancelled by using function G40 It should be remembered that cancelling radius compensation G40 can only be done in a block in which a straight line movement is programmed G00 or G01 If G40 is programmed while functions G02 or G03 are active the CNC displays the corresponding error message The following pages show different cases of cancelling tool radius compensation in which the programmed path is represented by a solid line and the compensated path with a dotted line Chapter 8 Section Page TOOLCOMPENSATION TOOL RADIUS COM 9 PENSATION G40 G41 G42 STRAIGHT STRAIGHT path MP087 COMPTYPE O COMPTYPE 1 Page Chapter 8 Section TOOL RADIUS COM TOOLCOMPENSATION PENSATION G40 G41 G42 CURVED STRAIGHT path MPO88 COMPTYPE O COMPTYPE 1 Chapter 8 Section Page TOOLCOMPENSATION UR CE u PENSATION G40 G41 G42 Example of machining with radius compensation 70 30 4
86. Values assigned to parameters Q R S Every time G49 is programmed the CNC updates the values of the parameters that have been defined For example when programming G49 XYZ ABC the CNC Updates variables ORGROX Y Z A B C Variables ORGROQ R S maintain their previous values Read Write variables updated by the CNC once G49 has been executed When using a swivel or angled spindle general machine parameter XFORM P93 set to 2 or 3 the CNC shows the following information TOOROF Indicates the position to be occupied by the spindle s main rotary axis to orient the tool perpendicular to the indicated incline plane TOOROS Indicates the position to be occupied by the spindle s secondary rotary axis to orient the tool perpendicular to the indicated incline plane When accessing variable TOOROF or TOOROS the CNC interrupts block preparation and it waits for that command to be executed before resuming block preparation 17 1 4 PARAMETERS ASSOCIATED WITH FUNCTION G49 Once G49 has been executed the CNC updates global parameters P297 and P298 P297 Indicates the position to be occupied by the spindle s main rotary axis to orient the tool perpendicular to the indicated incline plane Itis the same value as shown by the TOOROF variable P298 Indicates the position to be occupied by the spindle s secondary rotary axis to orient the tool perpendicular to the indicated incline plane It is the same value as shown by the TOOROS variable
87. a new page or symbol the CNC assumes the default value of 8 Chapter 10 Section Page EDITING CUSTOMSCREENS 7 SKSEBICEDITOR PAGES ANDSYMBOLS TYPE OF LINE With this option itis possible to select the type of line used to define the graphic elements Follow these steps after pressing this softkey 1 Use the right and left arrow keys to select the desired type of line The currently selected line type will be highlighted 2 Press ENTER to validate the selected step or ESC to quit this mode leaving the previous selection intact When editing a new page or symbol the CNC assumes the fine line by default It is not possible to use the thick line to draw polylines or polygons They are always drawn in fine line TEXT SIZE With this option it is possible to select the size of the letters used to write the texts to be inserted in the pages or symbols Three sizes are available Normal size All the characters of the keyboard numbers signs upper and lower case letters can be written in this size Double and triple sizes Only capital letters A thru Z numbers 0 thru 9 the n a EUG abt Me TSN a signs and the special characters in o WAN n D pr a be written in these sizes When selecting lower case letters for these sizes the CNC will convert them automatically into upper case Follow these steps to select the text size after pressing this softkey 1 Use the right and l
88. after each drilling step until the withdrawal begins Should this notbe programmed the CNC will take a value of KO Basic operation R Defines the type of tapping cycle to be performEd normal if RO and rigid if R 1 29 To perform a rigid tapping cycle the spindle must be installed so it can work in closed loop i e with encoder and servo drive During rigid tapping the CNC interpolates the longitudinal axis with the spindle rotation Chapter 9 Section Page CANNED CYCLES TAPPINGCANNEDCYCLE 19 G 84 ap GO w M03 wa M04 AE ER G98 a z Af We M04 y RS If the spindle was in operation previously its turning direction is maintained If it was not in movement it will start by turning clockwise M03 2 Rapid movement of the longitudinal axis from the initial plane to the reference plane 3 Movement of the longitudinal axis and at the working feedrate to the bottom of the machined section producing the threaded hole The canned cycle will execute this movementandalllater movements at 100 of F feedrate and the programmed S speed If rigid tapping is selected parameter R 1 the CNC will activate the general logic output RIGID M5521 to indicate to the PLC that a rigid tapping block is being executed 4 Spindle stop M05 This will only be performed when the spindle meachine parameter 4 SREVMOS is selected and parameter K has a value other than 0 5 Dwell if para
89. an Se a Depth profile G90 GO X30 Z9 IN500 GT X35 720 i ee Ree eee End of the pocket geometry definition Chapter 11 Section Page 2D AND 3D POCKETS 3D POCKETS 41 EXAMPLES 11 2 6 COMPOSITE PROFILES A 3D Composite Profile is a 3D contour with more than one depth profile different horizontal cross sections or vertical outlines It is defined by the intersection of several contours The plane profile will be formed by the intersection of the plane profiles of each element Drs MP1158 Every wall of the resulting profile must have its own depth profile defined 2 3 EX EI Z m 1 2 3 MP1159 To define the plane profile one must define the profile of the largest surface of each element that of the base while following these intersection rules 1 At a profile intersection each contour is divided into several lines which could be grouped as Lines external to the other contour Lines internal to the other contour The starting point of each contour determines the group of lines to be selected Page Chapter 11 Section 42 2D AND 3D POCKETS 3D POCKETS COMPOSITE PROFILES The following example shows the selection process using a solid line for the lines external to the other contour and a dotted line the internal ones The starting point of each contour appear as an x d CI E J U MP1124 Profile
90. and must be defined every time they are used as they are not modal Itisabsolutely essential forthe machining which itis required to repeat to be active In other words these functions will only make sense if they are under the influence of a canned cycle or under the influence of a modal subroutine To perform multiple machining follow these steps 1 Move the tool to the first point of the multiple machining operation 2 Define the canned cycle or modal subroutine to be repeated at all the points 3 Define the multiple operation to be performed All machining operations programmed with these functions will be done under the same working conditions T D F S which were selected when defining the canned cycle or modal subroutine Once the multiple machining operation has been performed the program will recover the history it had before starting this machining even when the canned cycle or modal subroutine will remain active Now feedrate F corresponds to the feedrate programmed for the canned cycle or modal subroutine Likewise the tool will be positioned at the last point where the programmed machining operation was done If multiple machining of a modal subroutine is performed in the Single Block mode this subroutine will be performed complete not block by block after each programmed movement A detailedexplanationis given on the next page of multiple machining operations assuming in each case that the work plane is forme
91. as follows Press the button located on the back of the handwheel The CNC will select the first axis Every time this button is pressed the next axis will be selected starting again from the first one if the currently selected one is the last one fthebuttonis kept pressed for more than 2 seconds the CNC will deselect the currently selected axis The axis will move in either direction as the handwheel is turned in either direction It may happen that depending on the handwheel position and how fast is being turned it may demand from the CNC an axis feedrate greater than what has been set by machine parameter GOOFEED The CNC will move the axis the indicated distance but limiting its feedrate to this parameter value Chapter 5 Section Page JOG JOGGING WITH 11 ELECTRONIC HANDWHEEL 5 2 MANUAL CONTROL OF THE SPINDLE Itis possible to control the spindle by means of the following Operator Panel keys without the need to execute M03 M04 or MOS is similar to executing MO3 It starts the spindle clockwise and it displays M03 in the history of machining conditions is similar to Executing M04 It starts the spindle counter clockwise and it displays M04 in the history of machining conditions is similar to executing MOS It stops the spindle and vary the programmed spindle speed between the set in spindle machine parameters MINSOVR and MAXSOVR with incremental steps set in spindle machin
92. at the CNC Spindle Speed Override selected by program Spindle Speed Override selected via DNC Spindle Speed Override selected via PLC Spindle Speed Override selected from front panel Spindle speed limit in rpm active at the CNC Spindle speed limit selected via DNC Spindle speed limit selected via PLC Spindle speed limit selected by program Real Spindle position Between 999999999 ten thousandths Real Spindle position Between 0 and 360 in ten thousandths Theoretical Spindle position real lag Between 999999999 ten thousandths of a degree Theoretical Spindle position real lag Between 0 and 360 in ten thousandths of a degree spindle following error in Closed Loop M19 in degrees VARIABLES ASSOCIATED WITH THE PLC Section 13 2 11 Variable PLCMSG PLCIn PLCOn PLCMn PLCRn PLCTn PLCCn Number of the active PLC message with the highest priority 32 PLC inputs starting from n 32 PLC outputs starting from n 32 PLC marks starting from n Indicated n Register Indicated n Timer s count Indicated n Counter s count Variable Section 13 2 12 GUPn LUP a b CALLP Global parameter n 100 P299 Local parameter b and its nesting level a PO P25 Indicates which local parameters have been defined by means of a PCALL or MCALL instruction calling a subroutine OTHER VARIABLES
93. be programmed alone in the block Once TCP is on it is possible to combine spindle orientation with linear and circular interpolations To orient the spindle one must program the target angular position for the main rotary axis and for the secondary axis of the spindle The example described next an angled spindle is being used XFORM Z XFORM1 0 M Chapter 17 Section Page COORDINATETRANSFORMATION TCPTRANSFORMATION 15 Examplea Circular interpolation while maintaining a fixed tool orientation N20 G18 G90 G01 X30 Z90 N21 G48 51 N22 GO1 X100 ZZO B 60 N23 GO3 X170 Z90 I7O KO N23 GO1 X170 Z120 BO N25 G48 SO Block N20 selects the ZX plane G18 and positions the tool at the starting point 30 90 Block N21 turns TCP on Block N22 positions the tool at 100 20 orienting it to 60 The CNC interpolates the XZB axes executing the programmed linear interpolation while rotating the tool from the starting position 0 to the programmed final orient position 60 Block N23 does a circular interpolation up to point 170 90 maintaining the same tool orientation for the whole movement Block N24 positions the tool at 170 120 orienting it to 0 The CNC interpolates the XZB axes executing the programmed linear interpolation while rotating the tool from the current position 60 to the programmed final orient position 0
94. by placing the main color rectangle inside the rectangle corresponding to the background color being selected 2 Press ENTER to validate the selected color or ESC to quit this mode leaving the previous selection intact When editing a new page or symbol the CNC assumes a blue background color by default Chapter 10 Section Page EDITINGCUSTOMSCREENS 9 ee PAGES ANDSYMBOLS MAIN COLOR With this option it is possible to select the color used to draw and write texts on the page screen or symbol One of the color rectangles shown has another rectangle in it The inside rectangle indicates the selected main color and the outside rectangle indicates the selected background color To select the main color follow these steps 1 Use the right and left arrow keys to select the desired color among the 16 shown The CNC will show the main color being selected by placing a white inside rectangle It will also display the rectangle containing both the selected background color and the main color being selected here 2 Press ENTER to validate the selected color or ESC to quit this mode leaving the previous selection intact When editing a new page or symbol the CNC assumes white as the main color by default GRID This softkey superimposes a grid over the screen in order to facilitate the lay out of the different components of the page or symbol being created or modified This grid is formed by white or black
95. canned cycle allows the use of the following functions for the definition of profiles G01 G02 G03 G06 G08 G09 G36 G39 G53 G70 G71 G90 G91 G93 Linear interpolation Clockwise circular interpolation Counter clockwise circular interpolation Arc center in absolute coordinates Arc tangent to previous path Arc defined by three points Controlled corner rounding Chamfer Programming with respect to machine reference zero home Programming in inches Programming in millimeters Absolute programming Incremental programming Polar origin preset Page 18 Chapter 11 Section 2D AND 3D POCKETS 2D POCKET PROFILES 11 1 7 ERRORS The CNC will issue the following errors ERROR 1023 G67 Tool radius too large When selecting a wrong roughing tool ERROR 1024 G68 Tool radius too large When selecting a wrong finishing tool ERROR 1025 A tool of no radius has been programmed When using a tool with 0 radius while machining a pocket ERROR 1026 A step greater than the tool diameter has been programmed When parameter C of the roughing operation is greater than the diameter of the roughing tool ERROR 1041 A mandatory parameter not programmed in the canned cycle It comes up in the following instances When parameters I and R have not been programmed in the roughing operation When not using a roughing operation and not programming the I and R parameters for the finishing oper
96. cde pn bbpr Ra tin RIA UR EEDH GR ME PHA IHE S RH RR eR E bra TAN ER M MRpr E daia 6 Tob S nd eeprom contents ford prag EEICHOEF cg eco ecrie espere UEM ere ned NENO O 7 T3 Dodo eere 8 7 4 RENOME Mem 9 T PPE eas aha ca toa toro ap REM e EEE EEA TAE T 10 tod User ERIS SITET PTT THE 11 TORNA OR PEM acci A iod asa O E loqui aeu ose ai uis Baca O e MAU Ip dga ds 11 poe ly 0i Pe 12 7 6 R T e A E PTS 14 p c uII Pony Me pp 14 7 8 Op ration Wit eeprom memory 12i cared eiie sd RR GETREIAER A nEn RR D AE PRAS EN MAM EN KE 2 Rd AS 15 Tod Move apart program to eeprom mietfl OEy on decet ties Deb Ib niinen iiie 15 78 2 Move a part program from eeprom memory sisssisiissisissisdeisioniisisssnsieidivuiisisasieieidiseeis 15 Chapter 8 DNC 8 1 Operating modes via serial D Usss jechcanieeicinonaiehdebseechinexambaunanielanismbien e DR C EI Pad dE dp E 3 ES Chapter 9 PLC 9 BEdbossesc pcc un padded E E A A E ET Maui as Na Corpi 10 9 3 WTC Lacan EA E cU ivi ES A ATE E E else E AEA pL IRE ET 11 9 3 1 Monitoring with the PLC in operation and with the PLC stopped 18 9 4 POI UO a a di equat dope be ud de AEE Eat dtu iE RED EE dated 20 95 Jolie pares POECIE entratenar DIE AUPI a DIES ERE eee Iame aE 20 9 6 Due OUR E core as niaene dan A bbb SI M Dra M M E pra bte T Un pepe bo poA A 20 97 RESO ric IPM TC 21 9 8 BESONEPUUE NES acu pateat ipetred DT Hebe E pa pd A nae D Edd ever Een
97. center of the tool In this manner working in function G97 the speed of the cutting point on the inside or outside curved sections is reduced keeping the speed of the center of the tool constant Function G97 is modal i e once programmed it is active until G96 is programmed On power up after executing M02 M30 or following EMERGENCY or RESET the CNC assumes function G97 Chapter 5 Section Page SPEED FUNCTIONS 7 PROGRAMMINGBYISOCODE G96 G97 5 5 COMPLEMENTARY FUNCTIONS The FAGOR 8055 CNC is equipped with the following complementary functions Feedrate F Spindle speed S Tool number T Tool offset number D Miscellaneous function M This order should be maintained in each block although it is not necessary for each block to hold all the information 5 5 1 FEEDRATE F The machining feedrate can be selected from the program It remains active until another feedrate is programmed It is represented by the letter F Depending on whether it is working in G94 or G95 itis programmed in mm minute inches minute or in mm revolution inches revolution It s programming format is 5 5 in mm and 4 5 in inches The maximum operating feedrate of the machine limited on each axis by the axis machine parameter MAXFEED may be programmed via code FO or by giving F the corresponding value The programmed feedrate F is effective working in linear G01 or circular G02 G03 interpolation If function
98. coordinate of the corner and the theoretical programmed coordinate P299 Error detected along the ordinate axis Difference between the real coordinate of the corner and the theoretical programmed coordinate Page Chapter 12 Section RKI ITH A PROBE INSIDE CORNER i e iil e MEASURING 12 8 ANGLE MEASURING CANNED CYCLE A probe placed in the spindle will be used which must be previously calibrated by means of canned cycles Canned cycle for calibrating tool length Canned cycle for calibrating probe The programming format for this cycle is PROBE 6 X Y Z B F X 5 5 Theoretical coordinate along the X axis of the angle to be measured Y 5 5 Theoretical coordinate along the Y axis of the angle to be measured Z4 5 5 Theoretical coordinate along the Z axis of the angle to be measured B5 5 Defines the safety distance Must be programmed with a positive value and over 0 The probe must be placed with respect to the point to be measured at a distance greater than double this value when the cycle is called F5 5 Defines the probing feedrate in mm min or inch min Chapter 12 Section Page WORKING WITH A PROBE ANGLE MEASURING 21 Basic operation 1 Approach Movement of the probe in rapid G00 from the point where the cycle is called to the first approach point situated at a distance B from the programmed vertex and at 2B from the face to be probed The ap
99. corresponding error message The EEPROM memory available to store user pages and symbols is indicated in the DIAGNOSTICS and System Configuration mode of operation as one of the CNC Resources The user pages screens stored in the EEPROM memory may be usedinthe screen customizing programs as described next displayed on power up page 0 instead of the FAGOR logo Activated from the PLC The PLC has 256 marks with their corresponding mnemonic to select the user screens pages They are M4700 PICO M4701 PICI M4702 PIC2 M4953 PIC253 M4954 PIC254 M4955 PIC255 When one of these marks is set to 1 the corresponding page is activated Used to complete the help system for the M functions pages 250 thru 255 Whenever helpis requested when programming an M function by pressing HELP the CNC will show the corresponding internal page screen Chapter 10 Section Page GRAPHICEDITOR 1 When user screen 250 is defined it will also display the symbol vluchindicdtes that more helping pages are available By pressing this key the CNC will show user page 250 The CNC will keep showing that symbol whenever more user defined help pages are available 250 thru 255 These pages must be defined in a sequential order always starting from page 250 Also the CNC will assume that there are no more pages when one of them is not defined The user pages customized screens activated from the
100. cycle Irregular pocket canned cycle Irregular pocket roughing Irregular pocket finishing G69 Complex deep hole drilling G70 Programming in inches G71 programming in millimeters G72 General and specific scaling factor G73 Pattern rotation G74 Machine reference search G75 Probing until touching G76 Probing while touching G77 Slaved axis G78 Slaved axis cancellation Xo X X X X X X Xx X Xo X X X X R9 E G79 Canned cycle parameter modification G80 G81 G82 G83 G84 G85 G86 G87 G88 Canned cycle cancellation Drilling cycle Drilling cycle with dwell Simple deep hole drilling Tapping cycle Reaming cycle Boring cycle with withdrawal in GOO Rectangular pocket milling cycle Circular pocket milling cycle Boring cycle with withdrawal in G01 Programming in absolute G91 Programming in incremental G92 Coordinate preset spindle speed limit G93 Polar origin preset Feedrate in millimeters inches per minute Feedrate in millimeters inches per revolution G96 Constant cutting point speed G97 Constant tool center speed G98 Withdrawal to the starting plane Withdrawal to the reference plane x x X 0X X x X X X SO 0 O0 19 1910 00 000 NNER HLMUUX X Uh tata ntn tn tn tn n o i9 6000 IP PP io Do 0o Ga 71 momMmUuUANAWNH Xo 0X 0X X X X X X X X X M means MODAL i e thatonce programmed the G function remains active as long as another incompatible G function is not
101. definition FILLED RECTANGLE After pressing this softkey follow the steps as in the RECTANGLE option but in this case after completing the definition of the rectangle it will be filled with the color used for its definition Chapter 10 Section Page GRAPHICEDITOR GRAPHICELEMENTS 15 10 4 TEXTS Before accessing this option it is necessary to select the page or symbol to be edited or modified by means of the EDIT option of the UTILITIES mode of operation With this option it is possible to include texts in the selected page or symbol The CNC displays a screen 80 columns wide 640 pixels for X coordinate by 21 rows high 336 pixels for Y coordinate When editing a new page the CNC will position the cursor in the center of the screen and when editing a new symbol it will position it at the upper left hand corner The cursor is white and can be moved around with the up and down arrow keys and the left and right arrow keys The cursor can also be moved by using the following keystroke combinations SHIFT D Positions the cursor at the last column X638 SHIFT Positions the cursor at the first column X1 SHIFT D Positions the cursor at the first row Y0 SHIFT Positions The cursor at the last row Y334 It is also possible to key in the XY coordinates of the point where the cursor is to be positioned To do this follow these steps Press X or Y The CNC will highlight in the ed
102. distance from its outermost surface Defines the maximum tracing depth and itis referred to the coordinate value given to parameter Z If part of the model is out of this area the tracing will assign this maximum depth to the probing axis and will continue executing the tracing cycle without issuing an error If programmed with a value of 0 the CNC will issue the corresponding error Chapter 16 Section Page TRACING ANDDIGITIZING GRIDPATTERN TRACING 29 CANNEDCYCLE J 5 5 Defines the length of the grid along the abscissa axis The positive sign indicates that the grid is located to the right of the point X Y and the negative sign that it is to the left of that point K 5 5 Defines the length of the grid along the ordinate axis The positive sign indicates that the gridis located above the point X Y and the negative sign that itis below that point AS 5 Defines the angle of the sweeping path EET TOUT LLL It must be comprised between 0 included and 90 not included If not programmed the canned cycle will assume a value of AO mp1632 te C 5 5 Defines the distance which will be maintained between two tracing passes Ifprogrammed witha positive value the tracing operation will be carried out along the abscissa axis and the distance will be taken along the ordinate axis On the other hand if programmed with a negative value the tracing operation will be carried out along the ord
103. each axis These coordinate values must be referred to part zero This maximum and minimum coordinate assignment will be done in the windows displayed to the right of the screen which show their current values Use the up and down arrow keys to select the desired field whose value is to be changed Once the desired values for all the desired fields have been keyed in press ENTER to validate them To quit this mode without making any changes press ESC While SOLID GRAPHICS or SECTION VIEW is selected it must be borne in mind that if anew display area is defined the CNC will reset the graphic representation returning to its initial status unmachined Chapter 3 Section Page EXECUTE SIMULATE GRAPHICS 27 3 5 3 ZOOM In order to use this option the CNC must not be executing or simulating a part program If so it must be interrupted This option cannot be used in either COMBINED VIEW or SECTION VIEW types of graphics The lower right hand side of the screen shows two cubes or two rectangles depending on the selected point of view Thecube whose sides are colored indicates the graphic area currently selected and the one drawn only with lines shows the size of display area being selected When the point of view shows a single cube side or when the selected type of graphics corresponds to one of the XY XZ or YZ planes the CNC will display two rectangles indicating the graphic area colored rectangle and t
104. error occurred if any Chapter 8 Section Page DNC 1 Also the following softkeys appear at the bottom of the screen for each serial line currently activated by machine parameter DNC ON Activates the DNC mode in the corresponding serial channel DNC OFF Deactivates the DNC mode which is active in the corresponding serial channel The activation deactivation of this operating mode is made dynamically therefore if when deactivating the DNC mode you are transmitting via this channel the CNC aborts the transmission and deactivates the DNC Irrespective of this operating mode the machine parameter of the PWONDNC serial lines allows you to select whether the DNC mode will be active or not after power up in the corresponding serial channel RS232C or RS422 Page Chapter 8 Section 2 DNC 8 1 OPERATING MODES VIA SERIAL LINES From the CNC and through the serial lines itis possible to perform the following operations Display onthe CNC screen the PC program directory orthatof the Fagor Floppy Disck Unit Select the Utilities operating mode and press the next softkeys sequence DIRECTORY SERIAL L Copy programs from a PC or a Floppy Disk Unit into CNC memory Select the Utilities operating mode and press the next softkeys sequence DIRECTORY SERIAL L The CNC will display the directory of the external device Then press the
105. following keystroke sequence COPY SERIAL L IN PROGRAM Program Nr ENTER Copy a CNC part program into a PC or a Fagor Floppy Disk Unit Select the Utilities operating mode and press the next softkeys sequence DIRECTORY SERIAL L The CNC will display the directory of the external device Then press the following keystroke sequence COPY SERIAL L IN PROGRAM Program Nr ENTER Execute or simulat a program located in a PC or a Fagor Floppy Disk Unit Select the Execute operating mode and press the SERIAL L sofkey The CNC will display the directory of the external device Then press the following keystroke sequence Program Nr ENTER Whenthe size ofthe PC program to be executed is greater than the one available at the CNC for data transmission it is referred to as execution of infinite program The CNC will request more data as it needs it when executing the infinite program If the program to be executed is stored in thus occupies several floppy disks it is referred to as execution of multi disk infinite program The CNC will request new disks to be inserted as it needs them when executing the program Digitize a part and generate the resulting program into a PC or Fagor Floppy Disk Unit When using a Fagor Floppy Disk Unit and the disk is full the CNC will requ
106. green line and the trigger position red line Trigger Type Indicates the type of trigger selected The texts shown and their meanings are the following Before The trigger is positioned at the beginning of the trace After The trigger is positioned at the end of the trace Center The trigger is positioned at the center of the trace Default When no trigger condition has been specified 4 Editing window It is the standard CNC editing window It is used for all the processes requiring data entry 5 Message window The CNC uses this window to display a warning or error message Page Chapter 9 Section 26 PLC LOGICANALYZER 9 10 2 SELECTION OF VARIABLES AND TRIGGER CONDITIONS Before requesting a trace itis necessary to define the variables to be analyzed the trigger type and conditions and the time base to be used to display the captured data To do this the following softkey options are available VARIABLE SELECTION TRIGGER CONDITION and TIME BASE 9 10 2 1 VARIABLE SELECTION With this option it is possible to select up to 8 variables to be analyzed later It displays a cursor over the variable area and it can be slid up and down by means of the up and down arrow keys The following softkey options will appear EDIT With this option it is possible to edit a new variable or modify one of the currently defined variables Before pressing this softkey we must select with the cursor
107. in the program selected by means of the OPEN P statement G 0 Absolute format All points will be programmed in absolute coordinates G90 and defined by the X Y and Z axes G 1 Absolute filtered format All points will be programmed in absolute coordinates G90 but only those axes whose positions have changed with respect to the previous digitized point will be defined G 2 Incremental filtered format All points will be programmed in incremental coordinates G91 and referred to the previous digitized point Only those axes whose positions have changed with respect to the previous digitized point will be defined If not programmed the canned cycle will assume a value of GO H5 5 Defines the feedrate for the incremental paths It is programmed in mm min or inches min H Page Chapter 16 Section 38 TRACINGANDDIGITIZING ARCPATTERNTRACING CANNEDCYCLE If not programmed the canned cycle will assume the F value feedrate for the sweeping paths F5 5 Defines the sweeping feedrate It is given in mm min or inches min BASIC OPERATION 1 The probe positions at the point set by parameters X Y and Z 2 The CNC approaches the probe to the model until it touches it 3 The probe keeps in constant contact with the surface of the model following it along the programmed path Ifit is to be digitized parameters L and E it will generate a new block per every digitized point in the program previousl
108. in two stages Ist Movement along the ordinate plane 2nd Movement along the abscissa axis 5 Second probing Movement of the probe along the abscissa axis at the indicated feedrate F until the probe signal is received The maximum distance tobe travelled in the probing movementis 3B If aftertravelling thatdistance the CNC does notreceive the probe signal it will display the corresponding error code and stop the movement of the axes 6 Withdrawal Movement of the probe in rapid G00 from the point where it probed to the second point of approach 7 Third approach Movement of the probe in rapid G00 from the second approach point to the third situated at a distance B from the previous point 8 Third probing Movement of the probe along the ordinate axis at the indicated feedrate F until the probe signal is received The maximum distance to be travelled in the probing movementis 4B If after travelling thatdistance the CNC does notreceive the probe signal it will display the corresponding error code and stop the movement of the axes Page Chapter 12 Section 26 WORKING WITH A PROBE OUTSIDE CORNER AND ANGLE MEASURING 9 Withdrawal Movement of the probe in rapid G00 from the third probing point to the point where the cycle was called The withdrawal movement is made in three stages 1st 2nd 3rd Movement along probing axis to the third approach point Movement along the longitudi
109. intersection examples Boolean addition fe g P e Boolean subtraction s qu x crp D MP1125 C C x b nE LL UP D MP1126 Boolean intersection do c p i The programming order of the various profiles is a determining factor when caring out an intersection of 3 or more profiles MP1127 The profile intersecting process is done according the order sequence followed when programming the profiles This way after doing the intersection of the two profiles programmed first the resulting profile will be intersected with the third one and so on Chapter 11 Section Page 2D AND 3D POCKETS 3D POCKETS 43 COMPOSITE PROFILES The starting point of the resulting profiles always coincides with the starting point used to define the first profile Examples MP1128 ZN r 4 7 N 7 N lt z gt N t 3N 7 x x2 3 B beta Page Chapter 11 Section 44 2D AND 3D POCKETS 3D POCKETS COMPOSITE PROFILES 11 2 6 1 EXAMPLE OF A COMPOSITE 3D POCKET MP1167 In this example the sides defining the plane profile have two types of depth profile The A and C sides have the same vertical profile and the B and D sides have the same curved profile A contour for each side may be defined or the sides having the same profile may be grouped together Def
110. is contained between these lines KKK ese se K K K K K K K K K K K K K eek Ifa profile cannot be solved due to lack of data the CNC will issue the corresponding error message Attention When pressing the FINISH softkey the CNC quits the profile editor and adds to the program the ISO code corresponding to the profile just edited To quit the profile editor without changing the part program press ESC and the CNC will request confirmation of this command Page Chapter 4 Section 12 EDIT PROFILE EDITOR 4 1 48 EXAMPLES OF PROFILE DEFINITION YA 120 150 130 x 20 80 140 Profile definition without rounding chamfers tangential entries or exits Abscissa and ordinate of the starting point X 280 Y 220 Section 1 Section 2 Section 3 Section 4 Section 5 Section 6 Section 7 Section 8 STRAIGHT LINE X 80 Y 60 STRAIGHT LINE X 140 Y 60 STRAIGHT LINE Qt 90 CLOCKWISE ARC XC 150 YC 130 Radius 40 The CNC shows the possible intersections between sections 3 and 4 Select the correct one STRAIGHT LINE X 20 Y 120 QM 180 The CNC shows the possible intersections between sections 4 and 5 Select the correct one STRAIGHT LINE X 20 Y 60 STRAIGHT LINE X 80 Y 60 STRAIGHT LINE X 80 Y 20 Adapt the image to the screen Select the DISPLAY AREA option and press the OPTIMUM AREA softkey Definition of roundings chamfers and tangential entries
111. keys and pressing ENTER The CNC shows the values used to define that element Modify the desired values Press the VALIDATE softkey DELETE LAST ONE To delete the last profile element An intermediate element cannot deleted All the elements starting at the last one must be deleted until the desired one is deleted ROUNDING To adda rounding to any of the corners of the profile Select the corner using the left right and up down arrow keys and pressing ENTER Enter the rounding radius and press ENTER CHAMFER To add a chamfer to any of the corners of the profile Select the corner using the left right and up down arrow keys and pressing ENTER Enter the chamfer radius and press ENTER TANGENTIAL ENTRY To machine a path with tangential tool entry Select the corner using the left right and up down arrow keys and pressing ENTER Key in the radius of the tool path so it enters tangent to the next path and press ENTER TANGENTIAL EXIT To machine a path with tangential tool exit Select the corner using the left right and up down arrow keys and pressing ENTER Key inthe radius of the tool path so it exits tangent to the previous section and press ENTER ADDITIONAL TEXT To add an additional text to any section of the profile Select the element using the left right and up down arrow keys and pressing ENTER The editing area of the CRT shows the ISO code for that sect
112. movement consists of Movement of the probe along the Z axis longitudinal perpendicular axis to the position indicated by parameter Z Movementin the main work plane up to the cycle s initial point parameters X Y Chapter 16 Section Page TRACING ANDDIGITIZING GRIDPATTERNTRACING 33 CANNEDCYCLE 16 7 2 ARC PATTERN TRACING CANNED CYCLE The programming format for this cycle is as follows TRACE 2 X Y Z I J K A B C D R N L E G H F mpi1639 X 5 5 Theoretical absolute coordinate of the arc center along the abscissa axis Y 5 5 Theoretical absolute coordinate of the arc center along the ordinate axis Z 5 5 Theoretical coordinate along the probing axis longitudinal perpendicular where the probe is to be positioned before starting the tracing operation Itis giveninabsolute values and it must be off the model at a safety distance from its outermost surface 1 5 5 Defines the maximum tracing depth and itis referred to the coordinate value given to parameter Z If part of the model is out of this area the tracing will assign this maximum depth to the probing axis and will continue executing the tracing cycle without issuing an error Page Chapter 16 Section 34 TRACINGANDDIGITIZING ARCPATTERNTRACING CANNEDCYCLE J 5 5 K5 5 A 5 5 B 5 5 C 5 5 mp1631 If programmed with a value of 0 the CNC will issue the corresponding error Defines the radiu
113. movements All the movements will be carried out at the feedrate set by axis machine parameter GOOFEED When programming FO the movement will be carried out at the feedrate set by axis machine parameter MAXFEED Function G32 may be programmed and executed in the PLC channel Function G32 is canceled in JOG mode G32 is canceled when tracing If it is programmed while tracing is active the CNC will issue an error message Page Chapter 6 Section PATHCONTROL FEEDRATEAS ANINVERTED a FUNCTION OF TIME G32 7 1 7 ADDITIONAL PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS INTERRUPTION OF BLOCK PREPARATION G04 The FAGOR 8055 CNC reads up to 20 blocks ahead of the one it is executing with the aim of calculating beforehand the path to be followed Each block is evaluated in its absence at the time it is read but if you wish to evaluate it at the time of execution of the block you use function G04 This function holds up the preparation of blocks and waits for the block in question to be executed in order to start the preparation of blocks once more A case in point is the evaluation of the status of block skip inputs which is defined in the block header Example G04 interrupts block preparation 1 G01 X10 Y20 block skip condition 1 Function G04 is not modal so it should be programmed whenever you wish to interrupt block preparation It should be programmed on its own and in the block previous to the one in
114. next block to be edited The default value is 0 When setting both parameters select the STEP first and then the STARTING block number Example STEP 12 STARTING 56 generated blocks N56 N68 N80 Attention N This function will not number the already existing blocks Chapter 4 Section Page EDIT EDITOR PARAMETERS 25 4 10 2 AXES SELECTION FOR TEACH IN EDITING Remember that in the TEACH IN editing mode the following feature is available When the block being edited has no information editing area empty the ENTER key can be pressed In this case the CNC will generate a new block with the current position values of the axes The option described here permits the selection of the axes whose position values will be automatically entered in said block After pressing the TEACH IN AXES softkey the CNC shows all the axes of the machine The operator must eliminate pressing the corresponding softkeys the axis or axes not desired Every time a softkey is pressed the CNC will eliminate the corresponding axis displaying only the selected ones To end this operation press ENTER The CNC will assume from now on and whenever editing in TEACH IN the selected axes To change those values access this option again and select the new axes Page Chapter 4 Section 24 EDIT EDITOR PARAMETERS 2 Joc This mode of operation will be used whenever the manual cont
115. on the status of the general logic input LATCHMAN f the PLC sets this mark low the axes will be jogged while pressing the corresponding Jog key If the PLC sets this mark high the axes will be jogged from the time the corresponding Jog key is pressed until the key is pressed or another jog key is pressed In this case the movement will be transferred to the axis corresponding to the new jog key If while jogging an axis the W key is pressed the axis will move at the feedrate established by machine parameter GOOFEED for this axis as long as this key stays pressed When releasing this key the axis will recover the previous feedrate with its override Chapter 5 JOG Section CONTINUOUS JOG Page 5 1 2 INCREMENTAL JOG It allows to jog the selected axis in the selected direction an incremental step selected by the Feedrate Override switch and at the feedrate indicated by machine Parameter for that axis JOGFEED The available positions are 1 10 100 1000 and 10000 corresponding to display resolution units Example Display format 5 3 in mm or 4 4 in inches Switch position Movement 1 0 001 mm or 0 0001 inch 10 0 010 mm or 0 0010 inch 100 0 100 mm or 0 0100 inch 1000 1 000 mm or 0 1000 inch 10000 10 000 mm or 1 0000 inch The maximum permitted step is 10 mm or 1 inch regardless of the selected display format for example 5 2 in mm or 4 3 in inches After sele
116. one currently selected Once this option is selected the CNC will request the number of the source program to be merged After keying in that number press ENTER Next indicate with the cursor the block after which the source program will be included Finally press the START OPERATION softkey to execute the command Chapter 9 Section Page PLC EDIT 9 9 2 COMPILE With this option it is possible to compile the PLC source program PLC PRG The PLC program must be stopped in order to compile it otherwise the CNC will ask if it is desired to stop it Once the source program compiled the CNC will generate the executable PLC program object program If while compiling some errors are detected the CNC will not create the object program and the detected errors up to 15 will appear on the screen Ifthe errors do not affect the proper program execution such as non referenced labels etc the CNC will display the corresponding warning messages but it will generate the object program After a successful compilation the CNC will ask whether the PLC program must be started or not Page Chapter 9 Section 10 PEC COMPILE 9 3 MONITORING With this option it is possible to display the PLC program and analyze the status of the different PLC resources and variables Once this option has been selected the CNC will show the source program that corresponds to the executab
117. open by means of the OPEN P statement the program which will store the digitized points Page Chapter 16 Section 26 TRACING ANDDIGITIZING ACTIVATEDIGITIZING G24 If instead of storing the digitized points ina CNC program it is desired to store them in a peripheral device or PC via DNC it must be so indicated when defining the OPEN P statement When communicating via DNC if the data transmission rate is lower than the data acquisition capture speed the resulting tracing operation will be slower During the digitizing of the model the CNC only controls the movements of the X Y Zaxes Therefore the generated program blocks will only contain some or all of these axes No points will be generated while the probe is seeking the model or when it is off the surface of the model The CNC takes into account the deflections of the probe when calculating the coordinates of the new digitized point To deactivate the digitizing function program G25 The digitizing function is also cancelled deactivated when deactivating the tracing function G23 and consequently in the following instances When selecting a new work plane G16 G17 G18 G19 When selecting a new longitudinal perpendicular axis G15 After executing an end of program M02 M30 After an EMERGENCY or RESET Programming example G17 Selects the Z axis as longitudinal perpendicular G90 G01 X65 YO F1000 Positi
118. part program A screen customizing program The PLC program The PLC message file The PLC error file When the type selected corresponds to a part program or a screen customizing program the CNC will request the program number After keying in that number press the TO softkey Then select with the softkey the field to be changed New number After pressing this softkey key in the desired new number and press ENTER The PLC program as well as the error and message files cannot be renamed If the new program number already exists the CNC will show a warning message offering the choice to continue the operation by pressing ENTER deleting the existing program or to cancel it by pressing ESC leaving the existing program intact New comment Enter the new comment and press the END OF TEXT softkey Example To assign the new comment GEAR to program 14 follow this keystroke sequence RENAME PROGRAM 14 TO NEW COMMENT GEAR ENDOFTEXT Chapter 7 UTILITIES Section RENAME Page 7 5 PROTECTIONS The following types of protections are available in order to prevent unauthorized access to some CNC programs and commands USER Permission With this option it is possible to display all USER generated programs and select their attributes OEM Permission With this option itis possible to display all USER and OEM generated program
119. perpendicular to the incline plane rotate the spindle rotary axes to the indicated position From this moment on the X Y axes movements will be carried out along the selected incline plane and the Z axis movement will be perpendicular to it Chapter 17 Section Page COORDINATE TRANSFORMATION MOVEMENTININCLINEPL 7 17 1 1 INCLINE PLANE DEFINITION G49 Function G49 defines the coordinate transformation or another words the incline plane resulting from that transformation There are several ways to define G49 G49 X Y Z A BC Defines the incline plane resulting from rotating around the X axis first and around the Z axis last the amounts indicated in A B C respectively X Y Z Define the coordinate origin of the incline plane Indicate the X Y Z coordinates with respect to the current coordinate origin A B C Define the incline plane resulting from Having rotated around the X axis first the amount indicated by A The new coordinate system resulting from this transformation is called X Y Z because the Y and Z axes have been rotated Then it must be rotated around the Y axis the amount indicated by B The new coordinate system resulting from this transformation is called X Y Z because the X and Z axes have been rotated Finally rotate around the Z axis the amount indicated by C Page Chapter 17 Section 8 COORDINATETRANSFORMATION MOVEMENTININCLINEPLANE G49 X Y ZQRS
120. program which is selected with the general machine parameter USERDIAG in the user channel To quit its execution and return to the previous menu press ESC Page Chapter 12 Section 10 DIAGNOSIS USER 12 6 INTERESTING NOTES The CNC carries out a series of sequential tests If the result obtained is not correct it may stop axes feed and spindle rotation by cancelling their analog voltages and Enables as well as stopping the execution of the PLC program or activating the external EMERGENCY output 01 The following table shows these tests as well as how often they are run and what happens if the result obtained in each of them is not the required one Type of TEST CNC RAM memory CNC EEPROM memory PLC RAM memory PLC EEPROM memory External Emergency 11 OR M5000 AXES and I O board voltage PLC not ready Temperature Low battery WARNING MESSAGE PLC WATCHDOG PLC user errors Performed during CNC start up CNC start up CNC start up CNC start up EXEC SIM EXEC SIM EXEC SIM Always Always If PLC RUN Always Stops Axes Spindle Activates EMERGENCY output Chapter 12 DIAGNOSIS Section INTERESTING NOTES Page 11 FAGOR 8055 M CNC PROGRAMMING MANUAL Ref 9806 in FAGOR AUTOMATION S Coop keeps informed all those customers who request it about new features implemented onto the FAGOR 8055 CNC This way the customer may requ
121. quit this option deleting the complete polyline Repeat these steps to draw more polylines and if no more polylines are desired press ESC to return to the previous menu Chapter 10 GRAPHICEDITOR Section GRAPHICELEMENTS Page 13 SYMBOL This option allows a symbol to be drawn in the page or symbol being edited After pressing this softkey the following steps will be taken 1 Enter the number of the symbol to include in the page or symbol being edited and press the ENTER key to validate it The CNC will show the cursor situated at the reference point corresponding to the symbol upper left hand corner of the symbol 2 Move the cursor to the position where it is required to place the symbol In this move only the cursor will move and not the symbol 3 Press the ENTER key to validate it or the ESC key if you wish to quit Once the symbol has been validated the CNC will show it in the place indicated 4 To include more symbols repeat the above operations 5 Press the ESC key to quit and go back to the previous menu Ifasymbolis being edited this symbol cannot be included in itself Therefore if symbol 4 is being edited any symbol can be included except symbol 4 Attention Ifasymbol is deleted by means of the DELETE option in UTILITIES this will disappear from the EEPROM memory but all the calls to it pages or symbols in which it was included will remain active Therefore w
122. r5 i Window showing the graphic representation of the profile being edited Editing window showing the new generated block in CNC language Area for editing messages Display area Indicates the area of the plane shown in the graphic representation of the profile Indicated by the maximum and minimum position values of each axis The way to select this display are is described later on Display area for the profile section currently selected for editing or modifying It may be the starting block straight line a clockwise arc or a counter clockwise arc Display area for additional information It shows a series of parameters for internal use and whose meanings are Et Total elements of the profile Ec Complete elements Ni Number of data entered Nr Number of required data Chapter 4 Section Page EDIT PROFILE EDITOR 5 4 1 4 1 OPERATION WITH THE PROFILE EDITOR In order to edit a profile these steps must be followed 1 2 3 Select a point of the profile as its beginning point Break the profile into straight and curve sections Ifthe profile has corner roundings chamfers tangential entries or exits take one of the following actions Treat them as individual sections when having enough information to define them Ignore them when defining the profile and once done defining the whole profile select the corners showing those characteristics and enter the corresponding radius
123. res PII ouis Ree Iber aonar orna N i nar OER AOE A a 9 D gp oo e 11 E Programming assistance system Pa Ges aue ecd ie ALL Ib AUR Ib RAM NEN M a ie aaa a 16 VERSION HISTORY Date June 1992 Mill model Software Version 7 01 and newer FEATURE AFFECTED MANUAL AND CHAPTERS GP Model All Manuals lst page Reception of Autocad drawings Dedicated Manual Supplied with the software Auxiliary Spindle Live tool Installation Manual Programming Manual Chap 3 Chap 9 Appendix Chap 5 Chap 13 Tracing Installation Manual Program Manual Chap 1 Chap 3 Chap 5 Chap 14 Chap 16 Appen Profile Editor Operating Manual Chap 4 Interactive Editor Operating Manual Chap 4 TEACH IN Editing Operating Manual Chap 4 Software for 4 or 6 axes Installation Manual Programming Manual Chap 4 Chap 9 Chap 10 Appen Chap 3 Chap 13 Axes Controlled from the PLC Installation Manual Chap 3 Chap 11 Storing of EEPROM memory contents into an EPROM memory Operating Manual Chap 7 Tool calibration with a probe in JOG mode Installation Manual Operating Manual Chap 3 Chap 5 Interruption Subroutines 4 inputs Installation Manual Chap 3 Chap 9 Appendix Logic Analyzer for the PLC Installation Manual Operating Manual Chap 7 Chap 9 AC forward Installation Manual Chap 3 PLC Monitoring in JOG mode Operat
124. right when that softkey is pressed so the receiving unit must be ready before pressing this key Press the ABORT softkey to cancel the transmission in mid run Page Chapter 6 Section 16 TABLES TOOLTABLE 64 TOOL MAGAZINE TABLE This table contains information regarding the tool magazine and it indicates the available tools as well as the magazine positions pockets they occupy It also indicates the tool currently active as well as the next tool to be used This tool will be placed at the spindle after executing the miscellaneous M06 function corresponding to a tool change MAGAZINE POSITION ACTIVE TOOL NEXT TOOL T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T CAP INS MM ee Led G3 GJ G3 G3 Cr The length of this table number of tool pockets in the magazine is determined by the general machine parameter NPOCKET Chapter 6 Section Page TABLES TOOLMAGAZINETABLE 17 Each magazine position has the following fields That position pocket may be An empty pocket indicated by the letter T A position occupied by a tool indicated by the letter T followed by the corresponding tool number A cancelled position indicated by the characters T The status of the tool in that pocket which will be defined by its size and its status The size of the tool depends on the number of pockets that it occupies in the magazine and it is defined as follows
125. selected in the EXECUTION or SIMULATION modes and before pressing the key cycle start on the Operator Panel in order for the CNC to execute it the following operations will be available BLOCK SELECTION It allows selecting the block in which the execution or the simulation of the program will start STOP CONDITION It allows selecting the block in which the execution or the simulation of the program will stop DISPLAY SELECTION It allows the display mode to be selected MDI It allows any type of block ISO or high level to be edited with programming assistance by means of softkeys Once a block has been edited and after pressing the key cycle start the CNC will execute this block without leaving this operating mode TOOL INSPECTION Once the execution of the program has been interrupted this option allows the tool to be inspected and changed should this be necessary GRAPHICS This option carries out a graphic representation of the part during the execution or simulation of the selected part program It also allows selecting the type of graphic the area to be displayed the viewpoint and graphic parameters SINGLE BLOCK Allows the part program to be executed one block at a time or continuously Chapter 3 Section Page EXECUTE SIMULATE 3 3 1 BLOCK SELECTION AND STOP CONDITION The CNC will start to execute the required block from the first line of the program and will finish it when one of
126. shown on two lines of 10 characters each If the text selected has less than 10 characters the CNC will center it on the top line but if it has more than 10 characters the programmer will center it Examples v p v 99 HELP MAXIMUM CO SK 1 HELP SK 2 MAXIMUM COORDINATE DEDIT MAXIMUM SK 1 FEEDRATE SK 2 _ MAXIMUM COORDINATE FEEDRATE COORDINATE Attention If while a standard CNC softkey menu is active one or more softkeys are selected via high level language statement SK the CNC will clear all existing softkeys and it will only show the selected ones If while auser softkey menu is active one or more softkeys are selected via high level language statement SK the CNC will only replace the selected softkeys leaving the others intact WKEY The mnemonic WKEY stops execution of the program until the key is pressed The pressed key will be recorded in the KEY variable Example WKEY Wait for key 8IF KEY EQ FC00 GOTO N1000 If key F1 has been pressed continue in N1000 Page Chapter 14 Section 18 PROGRAMCONTROLSTATEMENTS SCREEN CUSTOMIZING STATEMENTS WBUF text expression The WBUF statement can only be used when editing a program in the user channel This mnemonic may be programmed in two ways WBUF text expression This statement adds the text and value of the expression once this has been evaluated to
127. shows the possible solutions for section 10 Select the correct one Adapt the image to the screen Select the DISPLAY AREA option and press the OPTIMUM AREA softkey Rounding definition Select the MODIFY option and define ROUNDING Select the A corner and press ENTER ROUNDING Select the B corner and press ENTER ROUNDING Select the C corner and press ENTER ROUNDING Select the D corner and press ENTER Press ESC to quit the Modify option End of the editing process With Radius 10 With Radius 5 With Radius 20 With Radius 8 Select the FINISH softkey The CNC quits the profile editing mode and shows the ISO coded program that has been generated Page Chapter 4 14 EDIT Section PROFILE EDITOR 4 2 MODIFY This option permits modifying the contents of a selected program block Before pressing this softkey select with the cursor the block to be modified Once this option is selected the softkeys will change their color showing their type of modifying option over a white background Also it is possible to get more editing assistance by pressing HELP Press HELP again to exit the editing assistance mode By pressing ESC the information corresponding to that block and which was shown in the editing area will be cleared It will then be possible to modify its contents again To quit the block modifying mode press CL or ESC to clear the editing window and then press ESC again This way the sel
128. softkeys Directory It shows all user generated part programs including the invisible ones with the H attribute besides all visible part programs screen customizing programs and PLC programs without the H attribute Program With this option itis possible to select a user generated program and assign an attribute to it To do so key in the program number and press ENTER Once the program has been selected it will be possible to change its attributes by means of the softkeys H Hidden or invisible M gt Modifiable and X executable After selecting the new attributes press ENTER to validate them 7 5 2 OEM PERMISSION When selecting this option the CNC shows the following option softkeys Directory It shows all CNC programs including the invisible ones with the H attribute Program With this option itis possible to select any CNC program and assign an attribute toit To do so key in the program number and press ENTER Once the program has been selected it will be possible to change its attributes by means of the softkeys O gt OEM H gt Hidden or invisible M gt Modifiable and X gt executable After selecting the new attributes press ENTER to validate them PLC program messages and errors With these options it is possible to select the desired PLC program and assign the corresponding attributes Once the program has been selected t
129. the mnemonic will only display the indicated text without waiting for the data to be entered ODW expression 1 expression 2 expression 3 The mnemonic ODW defines and draws a white window on the screen with fixed dimensions 1 row and 14 columns Each mnemonic has an associated number which is indicated by the value of expression 1 once this has been evaluated Likewise its position on screen is defined by expression 2 row and by expression 3 column Expression 1 expression 2 and expression 3 may contain a number or any expression which results in a number The CNC allows 26 windows 0 25 to be defined and their positioning within the display area providing 21 rows 0 20 and 80 columns 0 79 Page 16 Chapter 14 Section PROGRAM CONTROLSTATEMENTS SCREENCUSTOMIZING STATEMENTS DW expression 1 expression 2 DW expression 3 expression 4 The mnemonic DW displays in the window indicated by the value for expression 1 expression 3 once they have been evaluated the numerical data indicated by expression 2 expression 4 Expression 1 expression 2 expression 3 may contain a number or any expression which may result in a number The following example shows a dynamic variable display ODW 1 6 33 Defines data window 1 ODW 2 14 33 Defines data window 2 N10 DW1 DATE DW2 TIME _ Displays the date in window 1 and the time in 2 GOTO N10 The CNC allows d
130. the block which is being edited and within the data input window Expression may contain a number or any expression which results in a number It will be optional to program the expression but it will be required to define the text If no text is required must be programmed WBUF Enters into memory adding to the program being edited and after the cursor position the block being edited by means of WBUF text expression Italso clears the editing buffer in order to edit a new block This allows the user to edit a complete program without having to quit the user editing mode after each block and press ENTER to enter it into memory Example WBUF PCALL 25 Adds PCALL 25 to the block being edited IB12INPUT Parameter A 5 4 Request of Parameter A WBUF A 1IB1 Adds A value entered to the block being edited IB22INPUT Parameter B 5 4 Request of Parameter B WBUF B IB2 Adds B value entered to the block being edited WBUF Adds to the block being edited WBUF Enters the edited block into memory After executing this program the block being edited contains PCALL 25 A 23 5 B 2 25 SYSTEM The mnemonic SYSTEM stops execution of the user customized program and returns to the corresponding standard menu of the CNC Chapter 14 Section Page SCREEN CUSTOMIZING 19 PROGRAM CONTROLSTATEMENTS STATEMENTS Customizing prog
131. the cursor will be positioned over it The editing area will be cleared thus allowing other parameters to be edited Press ESC to quit this mode Page Chapter 11 Section 6 MACHINE PARAMETERS OPERATION WITH PARAMETER TABLES MODIFY With this option it is possible to modify the selected parameter Before pressing this softkey the desired parameter must be selected When selecting this option the softkeys will change their color to a white background and they will show the various editing options By pressing ESC the information displayed in the editing window corresponding to the selected parameter will be cleared From this point on a new value can be entered To quit this option first clear the editing window using the CL key or the ESC key and then press ESC again The selected parameter will not be modified Once this modification has concluded press the ENTER key to validate it FIND The beginning or end of the table or the parameter whose number is indicated by positioning the cursor on the required parameter BEGINNING Whenpressing this softkey the cursor positions over the first parameter of the table quitting this option END When pressing this softkey the cursor positions over the last parameter of the table quitting this option PARAMETER When pressing this softkey the CNC will request the number of the parameter to be found Key in that number and press ENTER The cursor will be po
132. the following keys Left arrow Right arrow Previous page Next page Moves the cursor one pixel to the left While keeping this key pressed the cursor will advance automatically one pixel at a time and increasing its speed If the cursor is positioned at the left end the trace will be shifted to the right while the cursor stays in the same position Moves the cursor one pixel to the right While keeping this key pressed the cursor will advance automatically one pixel at a time and increasing its speed If the cursor is positioned at the right end the trace will be shifted to the left while the cursor stays in the same position Moves the cursor one screen to the left Moves the cursor one screen to the right The CNC will show at all times in the information window the cursor position vertical green line with respect to the trigger position vertical red line This information will appear as Cursor Offset and it will be given in milliseconds Chapter 9 Section Page LOGICANALYZER 35 9 10 4 ANALYZE TRACE Once the data capture is done the CNC besides displaying the status window will enable the ANALYZE TRACE softkey With this option it is possible to position the cursor vertical green line at the beginning of the trace at the end of it or at a specific point along the trace It is also possible to change the time base for the trace or calculate the time difference betwe
133. the following ways REPOS C X Y Z REPOSC X Z REPOS C Y Z If the REPOS statement is detected while executing a subroutine not activated by an interruption input the CNC will issue the corresponding error message Page Chapter 14 Section 12 PROGRAM CONTROLSTATEMENTS SUBROUTINESTATEMENTS 14 6 PROGRAM STATEMENTS With this CNC from a program in execution one can Execute another program ccccccceeeeseesnnteeeeeeeeeeeeees Statement EXEC P Generate a NeW program cuida pecie ee oe cine Statement OPEN P Add blocks to an existing program eeeees Statement WRITE EXEC P expression DNC1 2 The EXEC P statement executes the part program given by a number or any expression resulting in a number DNC1 2 is optional and is used for executing a program from a peripheral device or PC by indicating the serial line utilized for the communication DNC1 or DNC2 If this parameter is not defined it will assumed that that a program of the CNC itself is to be executed OPEN P expression DNC1 2 A D program comment This statement starts editing a part program whose number will be given by any number or expression resulting in a number This feature is useful when digitizing parts because with it it is possible to generate a program from another one in execution depending on the values taken by the program in execution Ofall the f
134. the longitudinal axis to the initial or reference plane depending on whether G98 or G99 has been programmed Chapter 9 Section Page CANNED CYCLES CIRCULARPOCKET GS 88 39 Programming example assuming that the work plane is formed by the X and Y axes that the longitudinal axis is the Z axis and that the starting point is XO YO ZO a Breen sees x Z0 Z 4 1 90 B D 14 k B 12 l B 12 X ya 80 z e 4 X 90 TOR1 6 TOT1 0 T1 D1 M6 GO G90 X0 Y OZ wishes e em ott T Starting point G88 G98 G00 G90 X90 Y80 Z 48 I 90 J70 B12 C10 D2 H100 L5 V100 F300 S1000 TI D1 MO3 Canned cycle definition e EC Canned cycle cancellation G90 X0 YO tO ERCHRIOINRUS Re RERO Positioning MBO vey dev deces End of program Page Chapter 9 Section 40 CANNED CYCLES CIRCULAR POCKET G88 9 5 10 G89 BORING CYCLE WITH WITHDRAWAL AT WORKING FEEDRATE G01 This cycle bores at the point indicated until the final programmed coordinate is reached It is possible to program a dwell at the bottom of the machined hole Working in cartesian coordinates the basic structure of the block is as follows G98 G99 XY 5 5 Z 5 5 I 5 5 K5 G89 G98 G99 X Y ZIK The tool withdraws to the Initial Plane once the hole has been bored The tool withdraws to the Reference Plane once the hole has been bore
135. the new work plane The new work plane will be perpendicular to the orientation of the tool The Z axis keeps the same orientation as the tool The orientation ofthe X Y axesinthe new work plane depends on the spindle type and on how its rotary axes are oriented Whensetting the machine up it must be setas the spindle s resting position when the tool is parallel to the Z axis of the machine Later every time the spindle is rotated the relative tool coordinates will also rotate Mes Slee On the two machines on the left only the main rotary axis has rotated But on the one on the right both main and secondary rotary axes have rotated in order to achieve the same tool orientation On the machine on the right to orient the X and Y axes as in the other 2 cases one must program G49 T XYZ S 90 Programming S 90 means rotating 90 around the new Z corresponding to the new work plane and this way compensate for the rotation of the main rotary axis Page Chapter 17 Section 10 COORDINATETRANSFORMATION MOVEMENTININCLINEPLANE 17 1 2 CONSIDERATIONS FOR FUNCTION G49 G49 cannot be programmed in the following instances At the 8055 GP model CNC From the PLC channel although it can be programmed from the user channel Within a profile definition for pockets or other cycles In order to work withcoordinate transformation G49 the X Y Z axes must be defined form the active trihedron and be lin
136. the program as soon as the theoretical interpolation of the current block has concluded It does not wait for the axes to physically reach the programmed position The distance prior to the programmed position where the CNC starts executing the next block depends on the actual axis feedrate Example 100 Ts 304 MPO72 G91 G01 G05 Y50 F100 X90 Via this function round corners can be obtained as shown in the figure The difference between the theoretical and real profiles depends on the programmed feedrate value F The higher the feedrate the greater the difference between both profiles Function G05 is modal and incompatible with G07 and G50 Function G05 can be programmed as G5 On power up after executing M02 M30 or after EMERGENCY or RESET the CNC assumes code G05 or G07 depending on how the general machine parameter CORNER is set Chapter 7 Section Page SQUARECORNER G07 5 ROUND CORNER G05 G50 7 3 3 CONTROLLED ROUND CORNER G50 When working in G50 controlled round corner once the theoretical interpolation of the current block has concluded the CNC waits for the axis to enter the area defined by machine parameter INPOSW2 and it then starts executing the following block of the program Example YA INPOSW2 lt lt 100 m 30 H 50 140 MPO72A R G91 G01 G50 Y50 F1
137. the program end functions M02 or M30 is executed If itis required to modify one of these conditions the BLOCK SELECTION and STOP CONDITION functions must be used BLOCK SELECTION With this option itis possible to indicate the beginning block of the selected program execution or simulation This cannot be used when the CNC is already executing or simulating the selected program Whenthis optionis selected the CNC will show the selected program since the initial block must always belong to this program The operator must select with the cursor the block where the execution or simulation of the program will be started To do this the cursor can be moved line by line with the up and down arrow keys or page by page with the page up and page down keys The find softkey options are also available BEGINNING By pressing this key the cursor will position at the first line of the program END By pressing this key the cursor will position at the last line of the program TEXT With this function it is possible to search for a text or character sequence starting at the current cursor position When this softkey is pressed the CNC requests the character sequence to be found Once this text has been keyed in press the END OF TEXT softkey and the cursor will position over the first occurrence of the keyed text The found text will be highlighted and it will be possible to continue by pressing ENTER with the search all a
138. the resulting path is not the desired one and therefore it is recommended to avoid the use of this type of variable in sections requiring tool compensation Chapter 13 Section Page PROGRAMMINGINHIGH LEVELLANGUAGE VARIABLES 5 13 2 1 GENERAL PURPOSE PARAMETERS OR VARIABLES The FAGOR 8055 CNC has two types of general purpose variables local parameters PO P25 and global parameters P100 P299 Programmers may use general purpose variables when editing their own programs Later and during execution the CNC will replace these variables with the values assigned to it at that time Example GPO XP1 Y100 gt G1 X 12 5 Y100 IF P100 P101 EQ P102 GOTO N100 gt IF 2 5 EQ 12 GOTO N100 The use of these global purpose variables will depend on the type of block in which they are programmed and the channel of execution In block programmed in ISO code parameters can be associated with all fields G X C F STD M The block label number will be defined with a numerical value If parameters are used in blocks programmed in high level language these can be programmed within any expression Programmes which are executed in the user channel may contain any global parameter but may not use local parameters The CNC will update the parameter table after processing the operations indicated in the block which is in preparation This operation is always done before executing the block and for this reason the values shown in
139. the tool orientation without changing the position of its tool tip part coordinates Obviously the CNC must move several axes of the machine in order to maintain the tool tip position Ea OG C48 Function G48 as described lateron is modal and itindicates when the TCP transformation becomes active and when it is canceled Function G48 TCP transformation may be used together with function G49 movement in the Incline Plane and G47 movement along the tool axes Page Chapter 17 Section 6 COORDINATETRANSFORMATION 17 1 MOVEMENT IN THE INCLINE PLANE An incline plane is any plane resulting from a coordinate transformation of the X Y and Z axes With this CNC any plane in space may be selected and any machining performed in it The coordinates are programmed as if it were a regular XY plane but the program will be executed in the indicated incline plane To work with incline planes always proceed as follows 1 Define with G49 the incline plane corresponding to the machining operation G49 is described later on in this chapter 2 The CNC variables TOOROF TOOROS and parameters P297 P298 show the position to be occupied by the spindle rotary axes main and secondary spindle respectively in order to orient the tool perpendicular to the indicated incline plane 3 To work with the tool
140. these functions is selected the CNC shows an editing area on the CRT where the cursor may be moved by using the up down and right left arrow keys Also the up arrow key positions the cursor over the first character of the editing area and the down arrow key positions the cursor over the last character Chapter 6 Section Page TABLES TOOLOFFSET TABLE 7 EDIT With this option it is possible to edit a tool offset Once this option is selected the softkeys will change their color showing their type of editing option over a white background Also itis possible to get more editing assistance by pressing HELP Press HELP again to exit the editing assistance mode Press ESC to quit the editing mode and leave the original values intact Once the tool offset has been edited press ENTER to enter it in the table MODIFY This option permits modifying the values of a selected tool offset Before pressing this softkey select with the cursor the tool offset to be modified Once this option is selected the softkeys will change their color showing their type of modifying option over a white background Also itis possible to get more editing assistance by pressing HELP Press HELP again to exit the editing assistance mode Press ESC or use the CL key to delete the text shown in the editing window which corresponded to the selected tool offset will be cleared so it can be re edited Press ESC again to quit the modifying m
141. to the corresponding memory O K or Error Page Chapter 12 Section 8 DIAGNOSIS MEMORY TEST 12 4 EPROM TEST This option checks the status of the EPROM memory of the CNC These memories store the current software versions for the CNC and the PLC The PLC program must be stopped otherwise the CNC will show the corresponding message asking whether it is to be stopped or not Once this option is selected the following screen will appear LANGUAGE EPROM 1 O K EPROM2 3 3 K O K EPROM3 K 3 3 O K EPROMA O K 5C35 5C35 OK PLC IDENTIFICATION EPROMI 0388 0388 O K 9E8A8D9496 EPROM2 44F0 44F0 OK 999E98908D CAP INS CONFIG HARDWARH MEMORY PROM USER URATION TEST TEST TEST woi24 CNC Itindicates each EPROM checksum corresponding to the current CNC software version installed Once the test is completed it will show O K or Error nextto the new calculated checksums depending on whether they match the expected ones or not PLC Itindicates each EPROM checksum corresponding to the current PLC software version installed Once the test is completed it will show O K or Error next to the new calculated checksums depending on whether they match the expected ones or not Chapter 12 Section Page DIAGNOSIS EPROMTEST 9 12 5 USER This option will execute the
142. to the approach point I J indicated when defining function G23 It then moves the probe until it touches the model and it maintains the probe in contact with the surface of the model at all times following the selected path S Ge3xYIJN f WN gt Dp 22s Z mpi64 It must be borne in mind that once this type of tracing has been activated the sweeping axes may not be programmed or moved If attempted to do so the CNC will issue the corresponding error message The contouring path must be defined by means of function G27 tracing contour definition as described in this chapter or by moving the other axis the one not following the profile with the JOG keys or with an electronic handwheel mp1613 The programming format is as follows G23 axis1 axis2 Ix5 5 J 5 5 N5 5 axisl axis2 Define the axes sweeping the model Two of the X Y and Z axes must be defined and in the indicated order 1 5 5 Defines the approach coordinate for axis1 and it is referred to part zero J 5 5 Defines the approach coordinate for axis2 and it is referred to part zero Page Chapter 16 Section 16 TRACING ANDDIGITIZING ACTIVATE TWO DIMENSIONAL TRACING G23 N 5 5 Nominal Deflection Indicates the pressure kept by the probe while sweeping the surface of the model The deflection is given in the selected work units mm or inches and its value is usually comprised between 0 3mm and 1 5mm The t
143. typed text will remain in the editing window and the cursor will be positioned in the main window 4 Position the rectangle by moving the cursor 5 Press ENTER to validate this command and the text will replace the rectangle on the screen Observe that once the text has been entered neither its size nor its color can be modified Therefore these options must be selected before pressing ENTER Attention This application may be useful when the pages or symbols being edited are to be shown in other languages since the CNC will translate them into the chosen language Usually when the texts are to be shown in one single language it is more practical to simply write them up instead of searching them ina list of more than 1500 predetermined messages However should anyone desire the printout of these predetermined texts feel free to request it from Fagor Automation Page Chapter 10 Section 18 GRAPHICEDITOR TEXTS 10 5 MODIFICATIONS Before accessing this option it is necessary to select the page or symbol to be edited or modified by means of the EDIT option of the UTILITIES mode of operation With this option it is possible to include texts in the selected page or symbol The CNC displays a screen 80 columns wide 640 pixels for X coordinate by 21 rows high 336 pixels for Y coordinate When editing a new page the CNC will position the cursor in the center of the screen and when edit
144. value When done editing the profile the CNC will show the code of the part program The section of the ISO coded program corresponding to the edited profile will be framed between lines Attention Do not delete or modify the comment associated with these blocks Itis additional information needed by the CNC in order to be able to edit the profile again Page Chapter 4 Section EDIT PROFILE EDITOR 4 1 4 SETTING THE STARTING POINT When accessing the Profile Editor the CNC selects the XY plane by default and point 0 0 as the starting point To select another plane use the ABSCISSA AXIS and ORDINATE AXIS softkeys For example to select the YZ plane ABSCISSA AXIS Y ORDINATE AXIS Z To change the starting point use the softkeys of the corresponding axis For example if when working in the XY plane the new desired starting point is 20 50 X 20 ENTER Z 50 ENTER The value of the ABSCISSA and the ORDINATE may be set by means of a numeric constant or by means of any expression Examples X 100 X 10 cos 45 X 20 4 30 sine 30 X 2 20 30 sine 30 Once the starting point has been set press the VALIDATE The CNC will show a filled circle in the graphics area to indicate the starting point of the profile Also the softkeys will show the following options STRAIGHT LINE To edit a straight section CLOCKWISE ARC To edit a clockwise a
145. when the CNC detects that there is no more room for the other ones it issues the corresponding error message SAVE With this option itis possible to send the tool magazine table out to a peripheral device or computer To do so press the softkey corresponding to the desired serial communications line The data transmission will start right when that softkey is pressed so the receiving unit must be ready before pressing this key Press the ABORT softkey to cancel the transmission in mid run Chapter 6 Section Page TABLES TOOLMAGAZINETABLE 21 6 5 GLOBAL AND LOCAL PARAMETER TABLE The FAGOR 8055 CNC has two types of general purpose arithmetic variables local parameters PO thru P25 7 levels and global parameters P100 thru P299 The CNC updates the values of these parameters after performing the operations indicated in the program block being prepared read thus the values shown in the parameter table might not coincide with the blocks being executed The CNC reads prepares 20 blocks ahead of the one being executed When quitting the executing mode after interrupting the program execution the CNC will update the parameter table with the values corresponding to the block which was being executed at the time The parameter values in the local and global parameter table may be displayed using decimal notation 4127 423 or scientific notation 0 23476 E 3 The CNC generates a new nesting level eve
146. which the evaluation in execution is required Function G04 can be programmed as G4 Every time G04 is programmed active radius and length compensation are cancelled For this reason care needs to be taken when using this function because if it is introduced between machining blocks which work with compensation unwanted profiles may be produced Chapter 7 Section Page ADDITIONALPREPARATORY FUNCTIONS G04 AND G04K 1 Example The following program blocks are executed in a section with G41 compensation N10 X50 Y80 N15 G04 1 N17 M10 N20 X50 Y50 N30 X80 Y50 Block N15 holds back the preparation of blocks so that the execution of block N10 ends up at point A Once the execution of block N15 has been carried out the CNC continues preparing blocks starting from block N17 Page Chapter 7 Section 2 ADDITIONAL PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS G04 AND GO4K Given that the next point corresponding to the compensated path is point B the CNC moves the tool to this point executing path A B As you can see the resulting path is not the required one so we recommend avoiding the use of function G04 in sections which work with compensation 7 2 DWELL G04 K Timing can be programmed via function G04 K The timing value is programmed in hundredths of a second via format K5 0 99999 Example G04 K50 Timing of 50 hundredths of a second 0 5 seconds G04 K200 Timing of
147. will be shown in the editing window thus being possible to continue editing new variables To quit this option the editing area must be empty If itis not empty delete its contents by pressing ESC and then press ESC again DELETE Use this option to delete a variable Before pressing this softkey use the cursor to select the variable to be deleted To delete more variables repeat these steps for each one of them CLEAR ALL This option deletes all variables from the status window Page Chapter 9 Section 28 PEC LOGICANALYZER 9 10 2 2 SELECTION OF TRIGGER CONDITION The trigger condition as defined is that around which the data capture takes place This data capture can be done before after or both before and after having met the selected trigger condition With this option it is possible to select the trigger type and condition of the logic analyzer To do this the following softkey options appear EDIT With this option it is possible to edit the trigger condition around which the data capture will take place Once this option is selected the softkeys will change their background color to white and they will show the information corresponding to the editing type possible Itis possible to analyze logic expressions formed with one or more consultations which must follow the syntax and rules used to write the PLC equations Examples of expressions and trigger conditions M100 The trigger occurs when
148. 0 To select the editing parameters automatic numbering and axes for Teach in editing Chapter 4 Section Page EDIT 1 4 1 EDIT With this option it is possible to edit new lines or blocks of the selected program Select with the cursor the block after which the new ones will be added and press the softkey corresponding to one of the available editing modes CNCE LANGUAGE ooo cicceiccticccsdecsestscecseousdeussecscocseoescorseetseedsuedseets See section 4 1 1 The program is edited in ISO code or high level language TEACH IN ERENSRUSS TR ENCSPETPSNUSSRIESNUNERTRERCRERTRERURENTNNRUNDNERENUNCRTRERONERERSNUREN See section 4 1 2 The machine is jogged to the desired position and then the new axis position may be assigned to the block INTERACTIVE e aeceie ccece eee ctxeeheexFecesee Que ee esxex eoe Cue pebue aep epk See section 4 1 3 Editing mode assisted by the CNC PROFILES eee ne E E ote Eee Eee pee eo ERE E QE stoe o HEN sste scires ostes PRRAE See section 4 1 4 To edit a new profile After defining the known profile data the CNC generates its corresponding ISO coded program PROFILE SELECTION To modify an existing profile The CNC requests the first and last blocks of the profile Once they are both defined the CNC will show the corresponding graphics Section 4 1 4 describes how to operate with the profile USER When selecting this option the CNC will execute in the user channel the customizin
149. 0 G90 XQ0 Y 0 Z0 tert ERRORIS OUR Starting point G87 G98 G00 G90 X90 Y60 Z 48 I 90 J52 5 K37 5 B12 C10 D2 H100 L5 V100 F300 S1000 T1 D1 MO3 Canned cycle definition e AME Cancels canned cycle G90X0 YQ eani eee er ror DP REPRE Positioning M30 uas estie costs cobs ehe cho esee cous sua ecelesie rei dene End of program Page Chapter 9 Section 32 CANNED CYCLES RECTANGULARPOCKET G87 Programming example assuming that the starting point is X0 YO ZO TOR1 6 TOT1 0 T1 D1 M6 G0G90 X0 YOZO iuste entere Starting point jeu Et Work plane N10 G87 G98 G00 G90 X200 Y 48 Z0 1 90 J52 5 K37 5 B12 C10 D2 H100 L5 V50 F300 ee Canned cycle definition IN20 873 045 3 iom E eL eue Seu sm Turn RPTNAIO4N20 NA a Mabe iad rere Repeat 7 times BO mE Canned cycle Cancellation 390 X0 Y Onset eink e e ctr e Positioning UE End of program Chapter 9 Section Page CANNED CYCLES RECTANGULARPOCKET G87 33 9 5 9 G88 CIRCULAR POCKET CANNED CYCLE This cycle executes a circular pocket at the point indicated until the final programmed coordinate is reached Itis possible to program in addition to milling step and feedrate a final finishing pass with its corresponding milling feedrate Working in cartesian coordinates the basic structure of the block is as follows G88 G98 G99 X Y ZIJBCDHL V
150. 00 X90 Function G50 assures that the difference between the theoretical and actual paths stays smaller than what was set by machine parameter INPOSW2 On the other hand when working in GOS the difference between the theoretical and real profiles depends on the programmed feedrate value F The higher the feedrate the greater the difference between both paths Function G50 is modal and incompatible with G07 G05 and G51 On power up after executing M02 M30 or after EMERGENCY or RESET the CNC assumes code G05 or G07 depending on how the general machine parameter ICORNER is set Page Chapter 7 Section ADDITIONALPREPARATORY FUNCTIONS SQUARE CORNER G07 j ROUND CORNER G05 G50 7 4 LOOK AHEAD G51 Usually a program consisting of very small movement blocks CAM digitizing etc run very slowly With this feature high speed machining is possible for this type of programs It is recommended to have the CPU TURBO feature when using LOOK AHEAD because the CNC has to analyze the machining path ahead of time up to 50 blocks in order to calculate the maximum feedrate for each section of the path The programming format is G51 A E A 0 255 Is optional and it defines the percentage of acceleration to be applied Whennot programmedor programmed with a 0 value the CNC assumes the acceleration value set by machine parameter for each axis E 5 5 Maximum contouring error allowed Param
151. 00 E500 Definition of the irregular pocket cycle N300 G67 Definition of the finishing operation The function for the finishing operation is G68 and it cannot be executed independently from the G66 Its programming formatis G68 BLQJIRVFSTDM B 5 5 Defines the pass in the plane between two 3D paths of the finishing operation It must be defined and with a value other than 0 RT L 5 5 Defines the value of the finishing stock on the side walls of the pocket left by the roughing and semi finishing operations MP1139 There is no finishing stock left on top of the islands nor on the bottom of the pocket L L If not programmed the cycle assumes LO M MIS Q Indicates the direction of the finishing pass Q 1 All the passes will be inward from the top of the pocket to its bottom Q 2 Allthe passes will be outward from the bottom of the pocket to the top Q 0 Alternating direction for every 2 consecutive paths Any other value will generate the corresponding error If parameter Q is not programmed the cycle assumes QO J 5 5 Indicates the tool tip radius and therefore the type of finishing tool being used Depending on the radius assigned to the tool in the tool offset table of the CNC variables TOR TOI and the value of assigned to this parameter three tool types may be defined Page Chapter 11 Section 34 2D AND 3D POCKETS 3D POCKETS FINISH I 45 5 R
152. 00011 755 00000 000 F00000 0000 120 S00000 0000 96100 T0000 D000 NT0000 ND000 S 0000 RPM G00 G17 G54 PARTC 000000 CY TIME 00 00 00 00 TIMER 000000 00 01 CAP INS BLOCK STOP DISPLAY MDI TOOL GRAPHICS SINGLE SELECTION CONDITION SELECTION INSPECTION BLOCK A group of program blocks The first of them is the block being executed The axis coordinates in real or theoretical values according to the setting of the THEODPLY machine parameter and the format defined with the axis machine parameter DFORMAT Each axis is provided with the following fields COMMAND Indicatesthe programmed coordinate or position value which the axis must reach ACTUAL Indicates the actual current position of the axis TO GO Indicates the distance which is left to run to the programmed coordinate Chapter 3 Section Page EXECUTE SIMULATE DISPLAY SELECTION 9 3 2 2 POSITION DISPLAY MODE This display mode shows the position values of the axes This display mode shows the following fields or windows EXECUTION PART ZERO REFERENCE ZERO 00100 000 00172 871 00150 000 00153 133 00004 269 00004 269 00071 029 00071 029 00011 755 00011 755 F00000 0000 96120 S00000 0000 96100 T0000 D000 NTO000 ND000 S 0000 RPM G00 G17 G54 PARTC 000000 CY TIME 00 00 00 00 TIMER 000000 00 0 CAP INS BLOCK STOP DISPLAY MDI TOOL GRAPHICS SINGLE SELECTION CONDITION SELECTION INSPECTION BLOCK The axis coordinates
153. 1 is active Chapter 7 Section Page ADDITIONAL PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS LOOK AHEAD G51 7 G23 G26 G27 Tracing G33 Electronic threading G52 Movement against hardstop G74 Home search G75 G76 Probing G95 Feedrate per revolution Xo X X X X X Function G51 mustbe programmed alone in a block and there must be no more information in that block On power up after executing an M02 M30 of after an EMERGENCY or RESET the CNC will cancel G51 if it was active and it will assume G05 or G07 according to the setting of general machine parameter ICORNER Page Chapter 7 Section 8 ADDITIONALPREPARATORY FUNCTIONS LOOKAHEAD GS1 7 5 MIRROR IMAGE G10 G11 G12 G13 G14 G10 cancel mirror image G11 mirror image on X axis G12 mirror image on Y axis G13 mirror image on Z axis G14 mirror image on any axis X C or in several at the same time up to 6 axes Examples G14 W GIAXZAB When the CNC works with mirror images it executes the movements programmed in the axes which have mirror image selected with the sign changed Example The following subroutine defines the machining of part a G91 G01 X30 Y30 F100 Y60 X20 Y 20 X40 G02 XO Y 4010 J 20 G01 X 60 X 30 Y 30 Chapter 7 Section Page ADDITIONALPREPARATORY FUNCTIONS MIRRORIMAGE G10G14 9 The programming of all parts would be 6699 Execution of subroutine machines a G11 mir
154. 100Y60 I15 JO G01 Y70 X55 G02 X25 Y70 I 15 JO G01 X20 Y20 G40 GOO XO YO M5 cancel compensation M30 Page Chapter 8 Section TOOL RADI M E TOODCOMEBNSA TION PENSATION 440 641 642 8 2 TOOL LENGTH COMPENSATION G43 G44 G15 With this function it is possible to compensate possible differences in length between the programmed tool and the tool being used The tool length compensation is applied on to the axis indicated by function G15 or in its absence to the axis perpendicular to the main plane If G17 tool length compensation on the Z axis If G18 tool length compensation on the Y axis If G19 tool length compensation on the X axis Whenever one of functions G17 G18 or G19 is programmed the CNC assumes as new longitudinal axis upon which tool length compensation will be applied the one perpendicular to the selected plane On the other hand if function G15 is executed while functions G17 G18 or G19 are active the new longitudinal axis selected with G15 will replace the previous one The function codes used in length compensation are as follows G43 Activate tool length compensation G44 Cancelling tool length compensation Function G43 only indicates that a longitudinal compensation is to be applied The CNC starts applying it when the longitudinal perpendicular axis starts moving Example G92 X0 YO Z50 Preset G90 G17 G01 F150 S100 T1 D1 M03 Tool Tool offset etc G43 X20 Y20 Selects compe
155. 13 2 3 Variables associated With Zero offsets e ouis ue sup po op rRRe e EUR M Rer SURE RR EUR AR Up iaai 10 13 2 4 Variables associated with function O49 uu eter rere a 11 13 2 5 Variables associated with machine parameters asc 2sscsanesasschzensassieaaseanneannedeeraanennnstansveca 12 13 2 6 Variables associated witht Work ZONES sis ieccciccavaceracavanasacavecanacpnannrecavccaracnieuiacaieanenreues 13 ur Variables associated with Ted Tales 25 5 dues CI RCR CR RR EUR QU DN SPERM SURG EM DHM CUN 14 13 2 8 Variables associated with cOOPUIDAD S Liu ce tere ttn kr ihn sube in 16 13 2 9 Napabl es associated with the dus spindles su cocos sube torch npn dedo pekhr ab p UR daba UR DR Ra dEMA 18 13 2 10 Vahabl s associated with tbe 2nd spindle Liuius ace ep entero tubo stb hm tup Shu bs Rn an 20 13 2 11 Variables associated with Ure PLG su ue poca Rp Ro SUR Rae ER ERR SER HARI EUR iaai 22 13 2 12 Variables associated with local Dat am feye iuuenes rk a rb qi Ea REe RR ps URP XR ERU 23 13 2 13 di TEC E S LOST 24 13 3 eii e 31 13 4 M cri M 31 13 5 Ii qu s ri c m 33 13 5 1 AUTO EU C SE DEOSBIONE aa iure itia robe een aes iba UN iS rebas UM due en eee iene adie 33 13 5 2 Relational expe sadi id ais genii ko kp QAGRRPVERUS ERIS ead cavemen aaa ama REIS 34 Chapter 14 PROGRAM CONTROLSTATEMENTS 14 1 PORTS ment SEDENS oaa etna oe obruta pati anima aoc atrawtn
156. 2 With the longitudinal axis of the work plane If this is not programmed the canned cycle will take the value of KO Defines the probing feedrate in mm min or inches min Indicates where the probing cycle must finish 0 Will return to the same point where the call to the cycle was made 1 The cycle will finish over the measured point returning the longitudinal axis to the cycle calling point If this is not programmed the canned cycle will take the value of CO Definesthe number of the tool offsetto be corrected once the measurement cycle is completed If this is not programmed or is programmed with a value of 0 the CNC will understand that it is not required to make this correction Defines the tolerance which will be applied to the error measured It will be programmed with an absolute value and the tool offset will be corrected only when the error exceeds this value If this is not programmed the canned cycle will take the value of 0 Page 12 Chapter 12 Section WORKING WITH A PROBE SURFACE MEASURING Basic operation 1 4 5 MP127 Approach Movement of the probe in rapid G00 from the point where the cycle is called to the approach point This point is to be found opposite the point where it is wished to measure at a safety distance B from this and along the probing axis K The approaching movement is made in two stages IstMovement in the main work plane
157. 200 hundredths of a second 2 seconds Function G04 K is not modal so it should be programmed whenever timing is required Function G04 K can be programmed as G4 K Timing is executed at the beginning of the block in which it is programmed Chapter 7 ADDITIONAL PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS Section G04 AND GO4K Page 7 3 WORKING WITH SQUARE G07 AND ROUND G05 G50 CORNERS 7 3 1L SQUARE CORNER G07 When working in G07 square corner the CNC does not start executing the following program block until the position programmed in the current block has been reached The CNC considers that the programmed position has been reached when the axis is within the INPOSW in position zone or dead band from the programmed position Example YA 100 30 MPO71 v G91 G01 G07 Y70 F100 X90 The theoretical and real profile coincide obtaining square corners as seen in the figure Function G07 is modal and incompatible with G05 and G50 Function G07 can be programmed as G7 On power up after executing M02 M30 or after EMERGENCY or RESET the CNC assumes code G05 or G07 depending on how the general machine parameter ICORNER is set Page Chapter 7 Section 4 ADDITIONALPREPARATORY FUNCTIONS SQUARE CORNER G07 ROUND CORNER G05 G50 7 3 2 ROUND CORNER G05 When working in G05 round corner the CNC starts executing the following block of
158. 21 9 9 viris ze 2 9 10 IE ID ee S PP eT c cr 24 9 1 1 Daschptiom or th Work SPESE ariimon HIE IIR DIR DIES DRE ARTA ONS 24 9 10 2 Selection of variables and trigger conditions eese 27 OA C406 ss armiran E e N 2I 9 010222 Selection of wieger COURIR uiaieui edo abbr eerie ted urbt bri Sa MEME IHE EH seeedspedsteaanedinedepeasieas 29 SM MEE i ccu vga di vm NN 31 9 10 3 EXSOHDS dOE o ep HO EE ENTE verry rehire cr verre HE p ERE REP TEE EHE 32 OAD eS MEEP UT i ea N EA 33 MOR NIGHGS DE operat Oih us asses trbbkL Ep aEV Face bras be FHMR REDE MEER EUH EL I ERbUCU POEM eI EIXUI EIN QRMUME 34 9 10 3 3 IrsbegsprescH abba osea cione obe pU hber Libo ba Cni e EIN EL ME Plat s PEDI OHIPPDIN OM ENS OHAPNDIER HDI du 35 9 10 4 PGI Se a e e E A A E A E 36 Section E B XC P 4 Chapter 10 GRAPHICEDITOR 10 1 Dd T Mcr 3 10 2 Editing custom screens pages and Simbols 1 od aisi tata tra c brke ode prie khi Ra 6 10 3 oA quc D HH 11 10 4 TUS nu od bed E E tcc E E rer Teme norte PvE CU EDO 16 10 5 uberi mer TH 19 eri WACHINEPARAMETERS Chapter 11 MACHINEPARAMETERS 11 1 Machine parameter ables iievoeseconns cte pe ON IER CISR HER IRR ERES GINRORES E E 2 11 2 Nrrneellanecns uncupem Tales eod acia E ba in Euer bea uli to ord a ule e yin ei oap ls 3 11 3 Leadsetew eror compensation Tables iuis citra ocn bte DIRE DU Re RE Uta IRE DI Ra bla ra VE e dubl 4 11 4 ARR Come DO COSE oasocda
159. 25 to 1 M 1 5957 0 1 Alters the status 0 1 ofthe indicated mark For example M330 0 sets Mark M330 to 0 M 1 5957 1 5957 0 1 Alters the status 0 1 of the indicated group of marks For example M400 403 1 sets marks M400 thru M403 to 1 TEN 1 256 0 1 Alters the status 0 1 of the ENABLE input of the indicated timer For example TEN12 1 sets the Enable input of timer T12 to 1 Chapter 9 Section Page PLC MONITORING 11 TRS 1 256 0 1 TGn 1 256 n 0 1 CUP 1 256 0 1 CDW 1 256 0 1 CEN 1 256 0 1 CPR 1 256 n 0 1 C 1 256 n B 0 31 R 1 559 0 1 R 1 559 n R 1 559 1 559 n Alters the status 0 1 of the RESET input of the indicated timer For example TRS2 0 sets the reset input of timer T2 to 0 Alters the status 0 1 of the trigger input TGn of the indicated timer 1 thru 256 assigning the desired time constant n to it For example TG1 22 1000 sets the trigger input 1 of timer T22 to one andit assigns a time constant of 1000 10 seconds Alters the status 0 1 of the UP count input of the indicated counter For example CUP 33 0 sets the status of the UP input of counter C33 to 0 Alters the status 0 1 of the DOWN count input of the indicated counter For example CDW 32 1 sets the status of the UP input of counter C32 to 1 Alters the status 0 1 of the enable input of the indicated counter For example CEN 12 0 sets the enable input of co
160. 2nd Movement along the longitudinal axis Probing Movement of the probe along the selected axis K at the indicated feedrate F until the probe signal is received The maximum distance to be travelled in the probing movementis 2B If after travelling that distance the CNC does notreceive the probe signal it will display the corresponding error code and stop the movement of the axes Once probing has been made the CNC will assume as their theoretical position the real position of the axes when the probe signal is received Chapter 12 Section Page WORKING WITH A PROBE SURFACE MEASURING 13 3 Withdrawal Movement ofthe probe in rapid G00 from the point where it probed to the point where the cycle was called The withdrawal movement is made in three stages lst Movement along the probing axis to the approach point 2nd Movement along the longitudinal axis to the coordinate of the point along this axis from where the cycle was called 3rd When CO is programmed movement is made in the main work plane to the point where the cycle is called Once the cycle has been completed the CNC will return the real values obtained after measurement in the following global arithmetic parameters P298 Real surface coordinate P299 Error detected Difference between the real coordinate of the surface and the theoretical programmed coordinate If the Tool Offset Number D was selected the CNC will modify the values o
161. 3 This variable allows the value assigned to the Length ofthe indicated tool offset n to be read or modified on the tool offset table This variable allows the value assigned to the radius wear I of the indicated tool offset n to beread or modified on the tool offset table This variable allows the value assigned tothe length wear K ofthe indicated tool offset n to beread or modified on the tool offset table This variable allows the tool offset number of the indicated tool n to be read or modified on the tool table This variable allows the family code of the indicated tool n to be read or modified on the tool table This variable allows the value assigned as the nominal life of the indicated tool n to be read or modified on the tool table This variable allows the value corresponding to the real life of the indicated tool n to be read or modified on the tool table This variable allows the contents of the indicated position n to be read or modified on the tool magazine table Chapter 13 Section Page PROGRAMMINGINHIGH LEVELLANGUAGE VARIABLES FORTOOLS 9 13 2 3 VARIABLES ASSOCIATED WITH ZERO OFFSETS These variables are associated with the zero offsets and may correspond to the table values or to those currently preset either by means of function G92 or manually in the JOG mode The zero offsets which are possible in addition to the additive offset indicated by the PLC are G54 G55 G56 G5
162. 3 4 T a AE A AA E E TE Lu TS 18 33 peru c E E AE T 20 3 3 1 gee VTE Gla Ihc cu baud E uin Dolo udi yore ic cedi ede quud ba debe eun IE Ed 21 25 Display m 27 3 5 3 Voc P P O 28 3 5 4 bi qi IP 30 3 5 5 E TE E EO A POO PAT HE 31 3 5 6 E e E E E E A 33 2 9 7 ee a t LI e T TT TTE DT 33 3 5 8 DUE cun m erm p 34 3 6 y Ld gl CLG emm I TR TN 35 Section el Chapter 4 EDIT 4 1 ELGG c 2 4 1 1 Editing n ENC A ein cc anccstins EE 2 4 1 2 BH FT edine socana aeaea M 3 4 1 3 Titeiacti ve Cdi et TE 4 4 1 4 ELAR i Qe e a A E AES 3 4 1 4 1 Operation wath the profile Ed IEoE iua isvatviedoiesieanadiiadomenineenediedbeadedekedeeanenbeedais 6 4 1 4 2 SCLIN the sarine corri RH 7 4 1 4 3 D finition of Sp t SECTOR Lecce deep SIDE po SUE PR HABE H REOR E EE EEEa 8 4 1 4 4 Denionor circular SECT uas d ere tae Rta qb Rua S Ke aiaa qu ES Maa RE RES 9 4 1 4 5 BUG gr E 10 4 1 4 6 Display s m 11 4 1 4 7 lr mt ER 12 4 1 4 8 Bxanmples of peolile def WOllOdl aee re rre rea itt a ska up SOR Ra EK a a cava whos 13 4 2 BIGUI V iua rabie iore Pp einen eh eee M aM etam a Maen 15 4 3 Ian A 16 44 Di ro 17 4 5 IR Ail que 18 4 6 Move P aec EET 19 4 7 dev dins qe 20 4 8 COPY tO PI
163. 360 2qR is applied to a rotary axis R being the radius of the cylinder on which you wish to machine this axis can be considered linear and any figure with tool radius compensation can be programmed on the cylindrical surface X Chapter 7 Section Page ADDITIONALPREPARATORY FUNCTIONS SCALINGFACTOR G72 15 7 7 PATTERN ROTATION G73 Function G73 enables you to turn the system of coordinates taking either the coordinates origin or the programmed rotation center as the active rotation center The format which defines the rotation is the following G 73 Q 5 5 145 5 J 5 5 In which Q LJ indicates the angle of rotation in degrees are optional and define the abscissa and ordinate respectively of the rotation center If they are not defined the coordinate origin will be taken as the rotation center Values I and J are defined in absolute coordinates and referred to the coordinate origin of the work plane These coordinates are affected by the active scaling factor and mirror images G73 Q90 20 G73 Q90 I20 J30 You should remember that G73 is ipcremental i e the different Q values programmed add up i Page Chapter 7 Section 16 ADDITIONALPREPARATORY FUNCTIONS PATTERNROTATION G73 Function G73 should be programmed on its own in a block Example Assuming that the starting point is X0 YO you get N10 G01 X21 YO F300 positioning at starting point
164. 4 Z 10 J 3 KO OTT iei eie C type contour GO X70 YZL Plane profile G1 Y40 X75 Y20 X70 Y31 GI6 X dies clita Depth profile G0 X70 Z 20 N500 G1 X65 Z 10 End of pocket geometry definition Chapter 11 Section Page 2D AND 3D POCKETS 3D POCKETS 55 EXAMPLES Example 4 MP1164 5 contours are used to define the island A type B type C type D type and E type contour Page Chapter 11 Section 56 2D AND 3D POCKETS 3D POCKETS EXAMPLES MP1164G oO ZA 0 30 Y 0 140 ijs JN TOR124 TOI1 0 TOR2 2 5 TOI2 0 G17 GO G43 G90 Z25 S1000 M3 G66 R200 C250 F300 S400 E500 33D pocket definition M30 N200 G67 B5 C7 I 30 R5 V100 F700 TIDI M6 Roughing operation N250 G67 B2 5 I 28 RS V100 F850 TIDI M6 Semi finishing operation N300 G68 B1 5 L0 75 QO I 30 R5 V100 F500 T2D2 M6 Finishing operation IN400 G17 aite eese e br Rete deut Beginning of pocket geometry definition G90 GO0 XO Y0 ZO eet dee Outside contour plane profile G1 X140 Y110 X0 YO CEP Sul eee t pet ee tees A type contour G90 G0 X30 Y95 cce em rte detener Plane profile G1 X130 Y35 X10 Y95 X30 GIO YZ rere T a Aa edi Depth profile G90 G0 Y95 Z 30 G3 Y65 Z0 J 30 KO GUD siepe ee RR R
165. 5 5 Defines machining depth When programmed in absolute coordinates it will be referred to the part zero and when programmed in incremental coordinates it will be referred to the starting plane P P J 5 5 Defines the distance from the center to the edge of the pocket according to the abscissa axis The sign indicates the pocket machining direction J with sign J with sign K5 5 Defines the distance from the center to the edge of the pocket according to the ordinate axis Chapter 9 Section Page CANNEDCYCLES RECTANGULAR POCKET G87 27 B 5 5 Defines the cutting depth according to the longitudinal axis Ifthis is programmed with a positive sign the entire cycle will be executed with the same machining pass this being equal to or less than that programmed Ifthis is programmed with a negative sign the entire pocket will be executed with the given pass except for the last pass which will machine the rest C 5 5 Defines the milling pass along the main plane Ifthe value is positive the entire cycle will be executed with the same milling step this being equal to or less than that programmed Ifthe value is negative the entire pocket will be executed with the given step except for the last step which will machine whatever remains Ifthisis not programmed the CNC will assume 3 4 ofthe diameter ofthe diameter of the selected tool If programmed witha value greater than the
166. 6 G24 Actirate dieiiZiNgE GT 25 16 7 Tracing and digitizing canned CYC 6R us ooa en o RM HRE an ona a UE 28 16 7 1 Grid pattern tracing canned Cyel uou oae km rro ba Rove dra tna b vpn cba ER paa In Ela KS 29 16 7 2 Are pateri tracing canned cycle seisseen a e EROS MR M PEE MADE 34 16 73 Profile tracing canned cycle alone 8 plane sesno 40 16 7 4 I D Prolue tracing canned Vele uan cep p p ninia aaa ai 45 16 7 3 Tracing canned cycle with polygonal SWeEp sicicccssccsssepicossovavecnssutianatevevccassuinanatersvschne 50 1675 Fronlepiogrammmine miles icii aa nE aR Rie 55 16 732 Profileprogrammine SHIEK secunna eaaa E A RRE 56 Se Chapter 17 COORDINATE TRANSFORMATION 17 1 Movement inthe TC INS plaut eoe poto b a HIR EUER NU Od QU URN NR Hd QD 7 17 1 1 Misi plane DINI ESD EU 8 17 1 2 Considerations for finction O40 sananen ara E ERRE 11 17 1 3 Vanables associated with function GAO csc ssccesicxuncuers wateicnancenieuetnaienamraumemlousnenans 12 17 1 4 Parameters associated with function O49 sisien aa 12 17 1 5 PROS a POX 1117 PH US 13 17 2 Movement according to the tool coordinate system G47 esee 14 17 3 TOP Translation CHE D cou dM EUR EMRHUDIEHEE Oa 15 17 3 1 Considerations for finction Giu topic cvovars china vetcukbovavncnesvivauabevavccksauiuauibevevethies 19 APPENDIX A JSC ONS pr tinier ene Spesa nupt du due MM M pau e eke aun 2 B Mtema CNE Vanablegu ciisccinicconiminctapiamin nsec ian eon 4 Co EDshlevel
167. 65 Drills in F M30 Chapter 9 Section ANNED INFLUENCEAREA Nee OFCANNEDCYCLE Page 9 3 CANNED CYCLE CANCELLATION A canned cycle can be cancelled via Function G80 which can be programmed in any block After defining a new canned cycle This will cancel and replace any other which may be active After executing M02 M30 or after EMERGENCY or RESET When searching home with function G74 Selecting a new work plane via functions G16 G17 G18 or G19 Page Chapter 9 Section 9 4 GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS 1 Acannedcyclecan be defined at any point in a program i e it can be defined both in the main program and in a subroutine 2 Calls to subroutines can be made from a block within the influence of a canned cycle without implying the cancellation of the canned cycle 3 Theexecution of a canned cycle will not alter the history of previous G functions 4 Nor will the spindle turning direction be altered A canned cycle can be entered with any turning direction M03 or M04 leaving in the same direction in which the cycle was entered Should a canned cycle be entered with the spindle stopped it will start in a clockwise direction M03 and maintain the same turning direction until the cycle is completed 5 Should it be required to apply a scaling factor when working with canned cycles it is advisable that this scale factor be common to all the axes involved 6 The
168. 7 G58 and G59 The values for each axis are given in the active units If G70 in inches Max 3937 00787 If G71 in millimeters Max 99999 9999 If rotary axis in degrees Max 99999 9999 Although there are variables which refer to each axis the CNC only allows those referring to the selected axes in the CNC Thus if the CNC controls axes X Y Z U and B it only allows the variables ORGX ORGY ORGZ ORGU and ORGB in the case of ORG X C Read only variables ORG X C Returns the value of the active zero offset in the selected axis The value of the additive offset indicated by the PLC is not included in this value P100 ORGX assigns to P100 the X value of the part zero active for the X axis This value could have been set either by means of function G92 or by the variable ORG X C n PORGF Returns the abscissa value of the polar coordinate origin with respect to the Cartesian origin PORGS Returns the ordinate value ofthe polar coordinate origin with respect to the cartesian origin Read write variables ORG X C n This variable allows the value of the selected axis to be read or modified on the table corresponding to the indicated zero offset n P110 ORGX55 Assigns the value of X to parameter P110 0n the table corresponding to zero offset G55 ORGY 54 P111 Assigns the value of parameter P111 to the Y axis on the table corresponding to G54 zero offset PLCOF X C This variable allows the value o
169. 7 Section 4 UTILITIES SUBROUTINE DIRECTORY 7 1 4 CHANGE DIRECTORY OF THE SERIAL LINE DNC When selecting this operating mode the CNC lets the user move through the different work directories of the PC without affecting the operation of the PC The operator can select the work directory of the PC via DNC using the cursor moving keys and or page up down keys of the CNC Once the desired directory has been selected and after pressing ENTER all the operations carried out from the CNC via DNC will affect that directory However the directory active for all the operations via DNC carried out from the PC will remain the same In other words when working via DNC it will be possible to select a work directory at the PC and another different PC directory at the CNC This new feature is available in version 12 1 and later of the 8055 M CNC and version 5 1 and later of the DNC50 Chapter 7 Section Page UTILITIES SUBROUTINE DIRECTORY 5 7 2 COPY With this option it is possible to copy a program into another one or send the data stored in EEPROM to an EEPROM programming device 7 2 1 COPY A PROGRAM INTO ANOTHER To copy a program into another choose the type of program to be copied by using the corresponding softkey A part program A screen customizing program The PLC program The PLC message file The PLC error file A program from serial port 1 A Program from serial port 2 Ifthe selec
170. 84 Tool radius G40 G41 G42 Profile editor iii INDEX Section Version History TRODUCTION SAEY C UI ICT RIT tm E Reiter taal Renmaine TENIS doa eate e yea SURE DH Rb LUKE IH RB RUE brat Ae E IH REALE LHA AMA Miel MedcEd 5 Fagor Documentation for the 8035 CMC ciucinssorccinsteteese secs ern oed GM UE XM S ON PUE tU UE 6 Tufenaca E COMERS aen Stach asleep cath ex E Ud pi UI EFU E Ud QU OMM pU EUIES UI MRNA UNE EU E Mr pu tU ERU 7 EE O OVERVIEW Chapter 1 OVERVIEW 14 DNG connechiOm srsti n o 0 D 0 00S 1 1 2 Communication protocol via DNC or PERIPHERAL DEVICE eene EN e gRFATINGAPROGRAM 7 Chapter 2 CREATING A PROGRAM 2 1 Creanne a procitam Nihe E NES uocatis Ead HE Ha S ERR a cd toe debe cQ E 1 Ziel a A EE E O E Creer rene rer te rr er Conn PEN REL 2 2 1 2 Programi DUG dem 3 2 12 1 ILS DD T M 3 2 1 2 2 High level Bno tage REEL o NT 3 2 1 2 Ed olo aceite uve bep EA UR pP DE verve rr Serre epa ea E PL diae 4 E 1 AXxESANDCOORDINATESYSTEMS Chapter 3 AXES AND COORDINATESYSTEMS Ad Nairienclature Gf DEAKES qe rmm 1 cam E TS ARES AE E E UE LP EEE E EAT EE EET AE PN bt 2 3 2 Plans seleenon qi IT LOBOS seisboteptiui ub Ec GIU DECR DIDI GIRO UP POI DII nup 3 3 3 Part dimensioning Millimeters G71 or inches G70 sese 3 3 4 Absolute incremental programming G90 G91 iiu ases certae tte etae titt ae cdd eere taped 6 3 5 Programming Of COGFWIBEE
171. 99 9999 If rotary axis in degrees Max 99999 9999 PPOS X C POS X C TPOS X C DPOS X C FLWE X C DEFLEX DEFLEY DEFLEZ ae v Returns the programmed theoretical coordinate of the selected axis P100 PPOSX assigns to P100 the programmed theoretical position of the X axis Returns the real coordinate of the selected axis referred to machine reference zero home Returns the theoretical coordinate real following error of the selected axis referred to machine reference zero home The CNC updates this variable whenever probing operations are carried out same as with G75 G76 functions and probing cycles Probe Digit When the digital probe and the CNC communicate with each other viainfrared beams there could be a delay of afew milliseconds from when the probe touches the part until the moment the CNC receives the probe signal TPOS r in DPOS a ji Ln E Although the probe keeps moving until the CNC receives the probe signal the CNC assumes the value assigned to general machine parameter PRODEL and provides the following information vari ables associated with coordinates TPOS Actual position of the probe when the CNC receives the probe signal DPOS Theoretical position of the probe when it touched the part Returns the amount of following error of the selected axis They return the current deflection of the Renishaw probe SP2 al
172. AL SWEEP With this option it is possible to delimit the tracing area by means of simple geometric elements straight lines and arcs It is also possible to define some zones inside the main tracing area which are not to be traced These inside zones will be referred to as islands The programming format for this cycle is as follows TRACE 5 A Z I C D N L E G H F P U Ax5 5 Defines the angle of the sweeping paths with respect to the abscissa axis If not programmed the CNC assumes a value of AO Z 5 5 Absolute theoretical coordinate along the probing axis longitudinal perpendicular where the probe is to be positioned before starting to trace It must be off the model and at a safety distance from its outermost surface 1 5 5 Defines the maximum tracing depth and it will be referred to the coordinate value set by parameter Z Page Chapter 16 Section 50 TRACING ANDDIGITIZING TRACING CANNED CYCLE WITHPOLYGONALSWEEP mpl N 5 5 If part of the model is out of this area the tracing will assign this maximum depth to the probing axis and will continue executing the tracing cycle without issuing an error If programmed with a value of 0 the CNC will issue the corresponding error Defines the distance between two consecutive tracing passes If programmed with a value of 0 the CNC will issue the corresponding error Indicates how the grid is followed according to the follow
173. AND COORDINATESYSTEMS ROTARY AXES 3 7 WORK ZONES The FAGOR 8055 CNC provides four work zones or areas and also limits the tool movement in each of these 3 71 DEFINITION OF THE WORK ZONES Within each work zone the CNC allows you to limit the movement of the tool in all 6 axes with upper and lower limits being defined in each axis G20 Defines the lower limits in the desired zone G21 Defines the upper limits in the desired zone The format to program these functions is G20 K X C 5 5 G20 K X C 5 5 In which K Indicates the work zone you wish to define 1 2 3 or 4 X C Indicates the coordinates upper or lower with which you wish to limit the axes These coordinates will be programmed with reference to machine zero home It is not necessary to program all the axes so only defined axes will be limited Example YA G20 K1 X20 Y20 G21 K1 X100 Y50 Chapter 3 Section Page AXES ANDCOORDINA TESYSTEMS WORK ZONES 13 3 72 USING WORK ZONES Within each work zone the CNC allows you to restrict the movement of the tool either prohibiting its exit from the programmed zone no exit zone or its entry into the programmed zone no entry zone e 7 S No entry zone S 2 No exit zone The CNC will take the dimensions of the tool into account at all times tool offset table to avoid it exceeding the programmed limits The presetting of work zones is don
174. B above the boss to the real center calculated of the boss Should CO be programmed the probe will be moved to the point where the cycle was called 1st Movement along the longitudinal axis to the coordinate of the point along this axis from where the cycle was called 2nd Movement on the main work plane to the point where the cycle was called Once the cycle has been completed the CNC will return the real values obtained after measurement in the following global arithmetic parameter P294 P295 P296 P297 P298 P299 Boss diameter Boss diameter error Difference between the real diameter and programmed diameter Real coordinate of the center along the abscissa axis Real coordinate of the center along the ordinate axis Error detected along the abscissa axis Difference between the real coordinate of the center and the programmed theoretical coordinate Error detected along the ordinate axis Difference between the real coordinate of the center and the programmed theoretical coordinate WORKING WITH A PROBE BOSS MEASURING 35 Chapter 12 Section Page I 3 e PROGRAMMING IN HIGH LEVEL LANGUAGE The FAGOR 8055 CNC has a series of internal variables which can be accessed from the user program from the PLC program or through DNC Access to these variables from the user program is gained with high level commands Each of the system variables which can be accessed will be referred to by mea
175. C or by selecting between 096 and 25596 from the PLC or via the DNC or the program Nevertheless the CNC has general machine parameter MAXFOVR to limit maximum variation of the feedrate With this CNC it is possible to program a positioning only axis in a linear interpolation block The CNC will calculate the feedrate for this positioning only axis so it reaches the target coordinate at the same time as the interpolating axes Function G01 is modal and incompatible with G00 G02 G03 G33 and G75 Function G01 can be programmed as G1 On power up after executing M02 M30 or after EMERGENCY or RESET the CNC assumes code G00 or G01 depending on how general machine parameter IMOVE has been set Page Chapter 6 Section 2 PATHCONTROL LINEARINTERPOLATION 63 CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION G02 G03 There are two ways of carrying out circular interpolation G02 Clockwise circular interpolation G03 Counter clockwise circular interpolation Movements programmed after G02 and G03 are executed in the form of a circular path and at the programmed feedrate F Clockwise G02 and counter clockwise G03 definitions are established according to the system of coordinates shown below This system of coordinates refers to the movement of the tool on the part Circular interpolation can only be executed on a plane The form of definition of circular interpolation is as follows Chapter 6 Section Page CIR
176. C does notreceive the probe signal it will display the corresponding error code and stop the movement of the axes Withdrawal Movement of the probe in rapid G00 from the point where it probed to the approach point Second probing Movement of the probe along the abscissa axis at the indicated feedrate F until the probe signal is received The maximum distance to be travelled in the probing movementis 2B If after travelling that distance the CNC does notreceive the probe signal it will display the corresponding error code and stop the movement of the axes Chapter 12 Section Page INSIDE CORNER WORKING WITH A PROBE MEASURING 19 5 Withdrawal Movement of the probe in rapid G00 from the point where it probed for the second time to the point where the cycle was called The withdrawal movement is made in three stages Ist Movement along the probing axis to the approach point 2nd Movementalong the longitudinal axis to the coordinate of the point corresponding to this axis where the cycle is called 3rd Movement in the main work plane to the point where the cycle is called Once the cycle has been completed the CNC will return the real values obtained after measurement in the following global arithmetic parameters P296 Real coordinate of the corner along the abscissa axis P297 Real coordinate of the corner along the ordinate axis P298 Error detected along the abscissa axis Difference between the real
177. C to return to the previous menu Page Chapter 10 Section 12 GRAPHICEDITOR GRAPHICELEMENTS ARC Follow these steps after pressing this softkey 1 Place the cursor at one of the arc s ends and press ENTER to validate it 2 Move the cursor to the other end of the arc the CNC will show a line joining both ends and press ENTER to validate it The cursor is now positioned automatically at the center of that line 3 Move the cursor to define the curvature The line will become an arc passing through 3 points the two ends and the cursor point 4 Press ENTER to validate it or ESC to cancel it Repeat these steps to draw more arcs If no more arcs are desired press ESC to return to the previous menu POLYLINE A polyline consists of several lines where the last point of one of them is the beginning point for the next one Follow these steps after pressing this softkey 1 Place the cursor at one of the ends of the polyline and press ENTER to validate it 2 Move the cursor to the end of the first line which will be the beginning of the next one The CNC will continuously show the line being drawn Press ENTER to validate the line or ESC to quit this option which will delete the complete polyline 3 Repeat steps and 2 for the rest of the lines Note that the maximum number of lines in a polyline is 127 Once the polyline is drawn press ENTER again to validate it or ESC to
178. C06 64518 F7 SHIFT CAPS FC06 64518 APPENDIX E PROGRAMMING ASSISTANCE SYSTEM PAGES These pages can be displayed by means of the high level mnemonic PAGE They all belong to the CNC system and are used as help pages for their respective functions GLOSSARY HELP Page 1000 Preparatory functions G00 G09 Page 1001 Preparatory functions G10 G19 Page 1002 Preparatory functions G20 G44 Page 1003 Preparatory functions G53 G59 Page 1004 Preparatory functions G60 G69 Page 1005 Preparatory functions G70 079 Page 1006 Preparatory functions G80 G89 Page 1007 Preparatory functions G90 G99 Page 1008 Miscellaneous auxiliary functions M Page 1009 Miscellaneous M functions with the symbol for next page Page 1010 Coincides with 250 of the directory if it exists Page 1011 Coincides with 251 of the directory if it exists Page 1012 Coincides with 252 of the directory if it exists Page 1013 Coincides with 253 of the directory if it exists Page 1014 Coincides with 254 of the directory if it exists Page 1015 Coincides with 255 of the directory if it exists Page 1016 High level language listing from A to G Page 1017 High level language listing from H to N Page 1018 High level language listing from 0 to S Page 1019 High level language listing from T to Z Page 1020 High level accessible variables 1st part Page 1021 High level accessible variables 2nd part Page 1022 High level accessible variables 3r
179. CSSO Returns the real main spindle turning speed in revolutions per minute P100 SREAL assigns to P100 the real turning speed of the main spindle If this variable is accessed block preparation is interrupted and the CNC waits for this command to be executed to resume block preparation Returns in revolutions per minute the main spindle speed selected at the CNC This turning speed can be indicated by program by the PLC or DNC and the CNC selects one of these the one with the highest priority being that indicated by DNC and the one with the lowest priority that indicated by program Returns the turning speed in revolutions per minute selected by DNC If this has a value of 0 it means that it is not selected Returns the turning speed in revolutions per minute selected by PLC If this has a value of 0 it means that it is not selected Returns the turning speed in revolutions per minute selected by program Returns the Override of the main spindle speed selected at the CNC This will be given by an integer between 0 and MAXSOVR maximum 255 This spindle speed percentage may be indicated by the PLC by DNC or from the front panel and the CNC will select one of them the order of priority from highest to lowest being by program by DNC by PLC and from the front panel Returns the main spindle speed percentage selected by DNC If this has a value of 0 it means that it is not selected Returns the main sp
180. CULARINTERPOLATION PATH CONTROL GO2 G03 3 a CARTESIAN COORDINATES The coordinates of the endpoint of the arc and the position of the center with respect to the starting point are defined according to the axes of the work plane The center coordinates which should always be programmed even if they have 0 value are defined by the letters I J or K each one of these being associated to the axes as follows A Axes X U A gt I Axes Y V B gt J ee leh Axes Z W C gt K Programming format J X Y Plane XY G02 G03 X 5 5 Y 5 5 I 5 5 J 5 5 Plane ZX G02 G03 X 5 5 Z 5 5 145 5 K 5 5 2 Px Plane YZ G02 G03 Y 5 5 Z 5 5 J 5 5 K 5 5 m The programming order of the axes is always maintained regardless of the plane selected as are the respective center coordinates Plane AY G02 G03 Yx5 5 A 5 5 J 5 Plane XU G02 G03 X 5 5 U 5 5 I 5 b POLAR COORDINATES It is necessary to define the angle to be travelled Q and the distance from the starting point to the center optional according to the axes of the work plane The center coordinates are defined by the letters I J or K each one of these being associated to the axes as follows Axes X U A gt I Axes Y V B gt J Axes Z W C gt K If the center of the arc is not defined the CNC will assume it that this coincides with the current polar origin Programming format Plane XY G02 G03 Q 5 5 Ix5 5 J 5 5 Plane Z
181. Chapter 14 Section Page ENABLING DISABLING 3 PROGRAM CONTROLSTATEMENTS STATEMENTS 14 4 FLOW CONTROL STATEMENTS GOTO N expression The mnemonic GOTO causes a jump within the same program to the block defined by the label N expression The execution of the program will continue after the jump from the indicated block The jump label can be addressed by means of a number or by any expression which results in a number Example G00 X0 YO Z0 T2 D4 X10 GOTON22 Jump statement X15 Y20 Is not executed Y22 Z50 Is not executed N22 G01 X30 Y40 Z40 F10000 Continues execution in this block G02 X20 Y40 I 5 J 5 RPT N expression N expression The mnemonic RPT executes within the same program the part of the program which exists between the blocks defined by means of the labels N expression Both labels can be indicated by means of a number or by any expression which results in a number The part of the program selected by means of the two labels must belong to the same program by first defining the initial block and then the final block Theexecution ofthe program will continue in the block following the one in which the mnemonic RPT was programmed once the selected part of the program has been executed Example N10 G00 X10 Z20 G01 X5 G00 ZO N20 X0 N30 RPT N10 N20 N3 N40 GO X20 M30 When reaching block N30 the program will execute section N10 N20 three times Once this has be
182. Chapter 16 Section Page TRACING ANDDIGITIZING ACTIVATE THREE 19 DIMENSIONAL TRACING G23 16 4 G27 TRACING CONTOUR DEFINITION Whenever a two dimensional or three dimensional tracing function is activated it is necessary to define the tracing contour by means of function G27 The tracing probe starts moving around the model keeping in constant contact with it in the indicated direction It is possible to define a closed contour where the initial and final points are the same or an open contour where the initial and final points are not the same Example of a closed contour In the case of an open contour it is necessary to define the end of the contour by means of a segment parallel to the axes The tracing pass will end when the probe crosses this segment Page Chapter 16 Section 20 TRACING ANDDIGITIZING TRACING CONTOUR DEFINITION The programming format is the following S G27 S Qt5 5 R 5 5 J5 5 K Indicates the direction of the sweep 0 1 The probe moves leaving the model to its right The probe moves leaving the model to its left mp1618 If not programmed the CNC assumes a value of S0 Q R 5 5 These parameters must be set when defining an open contour where the initial 45 5 and final points are not the same They define the initial point of the segment that indicates the end of the contour They must be referred to part zero The Q coordinate corre
183. Chapter 6 PATH CONTROL 6 1 api ay OG Se uo et ce tee ee oats 1 6 2 Lincar Wet ata DOR auus cy eens EPUM A 2 6 3 CuculoranterpolatiemoGOS CLESIAE RUINIS ANH ROREM ERR ARIPAER REM RR ANS 3 6 4 Circular interpolation by programming the center of the arc in absolute DOORS POUR coco Qe ERR UR REC RD UR eam E RE UV pe UR CREE eee 9 6 5 Arc tangent to the previous path OUS cease eo poit RURAL RC iodo Reena 10 6 6 Arc denied by three pointe OUO ius qoin tm hio ba MpHk PS RES NREA S RIEXRES RES UR PN RR REN RUE 11 6 7 Helical imeno lAnon s a a AR a A 12 6 8 Tangential entry at the beginning of a machining operation G37 14 6 9 Tangential exit at the end of a machining operation G38 sss 16 6 10 Automati radins DIOE G Oei pias e er eee ME RU EUR ARER RS RU DARRI 18 6 11 Automatic ehamiter Blend 6339 cete DEE EUR CERE CRUSEERGU aaa 19 5 12 Kc EiRolU e 20 6 13 Moyet hardstop S2 Ree 21 6 14 F edrate F asan inverted function of tiime O9 3 saiciasaasscnncavciavetavstaiaciieiavevanstniorane 22 Section Chapter 7 ADDITIONALPREPARATORY FUNCTIONS T Tutecraptiotor block preparation CDI see oed sre rh eb apes pK ra dedu RE 1 Ta Ib cup ego qM 3 1 3 Working with square G07 and round G05 G50 corners ssssssesss 4 had SNe Corner OOF h qe T 4 alee Ut Meat IW vce M HS 3 7 3 3 Controlled PON Coler OSU usui PER UE SUPERAR a ibl p HR Eo c UM BE MES 6 7 4 Dok ahead 6D Dy pene ea
184. DIDDII TTT DNDN NNDDD CY TE US Ee A TA T ARARRRRRRARRARRRERRRRRRAR CAP INS MM Led G3 EJ G3 GT Cr The length of this table number of tool offsets is defined by the general machine parameter NTOFFSET Page Chapter 6 Section 6 TABLES TOOLOFFSETTABLE The various fields of each tool offset are Tool radius It is given in work units indicated by the INCHES parameter following the R 5 5 format Tool length It is given in work units indicated by the INCHES parameter following the L 5 5 format Tool radius wear It is given in work units indicated by the INCHES parameter following the I 5 5 format The CNC will add this value to the nominal radius value to calculate the real tool radius value R I Tool length wear It is given in work units indicated by the INCHES parameter following the K 5 5 format The CNC will add this value to the nominal length value to calculate the real tool length value L K Once the tool offset table is selected the operator can move the cursor over the screen line by line with the up down arrow keys and page by page with the page up and page down keys The values of each tool offset can be edited or modified from the keyboard from the PLC and from the part program by using the high level variables associated with the tools To edit or modify those values use the following options Once any of
185. Definition of finishing operation Definition of pocket profiles External profile First island profile definition Second island profile definition End of contour definition Chapter 11 2D AND 3D POCKETS Section Page 2D POCKETEXAMPLES 21 Programming example with automatic tool changer The x of the figure indicate the initial points of each profile T N100 N200 N300 N400 MP1123 TOR1 9 TOII20 TOL1 25 TOK1 0 Tool 1 dimensions TOR2 3 6 TOI2 0 TOL2 20 TOK2 0 Tool 2 dimensions TOR3 9 TOI3 0 TOL3 25 TOK3 0 Tool 3 dimensions GO G17 G43 G90 X0 YO Z25 S800 Initial positioning G66 D100 R200 F300 S400 E500 Irregular pocket description M30 End of program G81 Z5 I 40 T3 D3 M6 Definition of drilling operation G67 B10 C5 I 40 R5 K1 V100 F500 TI D1 M6 _ Definition of roughing operation G68 BO L0 5 Q1 V100 F300 T2 D2 M6 Definition of finishing operation GO G90 X 300 Y50 Z3 Definition of pocket profiles G1 Y190 External profile G2 G6 X 270 Y220 I 270 J190 G1 X170 X300 Y150 Y50 G3 G6 X300 Y 50 I300 JO G1 G36 R50 Y 220 X 30 G39 R50 X 100 Y 150 X 170 Y 220 X 270 G2 G6 X 300 Y 190 I 270 J 190 Gl Y 50 X 240 Y50 X 300 GO X 120 Y80 First island contour definition G2 G6 X 80 Y80 I 100 J80 Contour a G1 Y 80 G2 G6 X 120 Y 80 I 100 J 80 G1 Y80 Page 22 Chapter 11 Section 2D AND 3D POCKETS 2D POCKETEXAMPLES
186. E 9 LOAD With this option it is possible to load the tool offset table with the values received via any of the serial communications ports RS232C or RS422 To do so select the desired communications line by pressing its corresponding softkey The data transmission will start right when that softkey is pressed Press the ABORT softkey to cancel the transmission in mid run When the length of the received table is not the same as that of the current one general machine parameter NTOFFSET the CNC will act in the following manner The received table is shorter than the current one The received tool offset values are modified and the remaining ones keep their original values Thereceived table is longer than the current one All current values are replaced and when the CNC detects that there is no more room for the other ones it issues the corresponding error message SAVE With this option it is possible to send all the tool offsets of the table out to a peripheral device or computer To doso press the softkey corresponding to the desired serial communications line The data transmission will start right when That softkey is pressed so the receiving unit must be ready before pressing this key Press the ABORT softkey to cancel the transmission in mid run MM INCHES This softkey changes the display of the measuring units for the linear axes from mm to inches or vice versa The selected
187. EN P statement G 0 Absolute format All points will be programmed in absolute coordinates G90 and defined by the X Y and Z axes G 1 Absolute filtered format All points will be programmed in absolute coordinates G90 but only those axes whose positions have changed with respect to the previous digitized point will be defined Chapter 16 Section Page TRACING ANDDIGITIZING PLANE PROFILETRACING 43 CANNEDCYCLE G 2 Incremental filtered format All points will be programmed in incremental coordinates G91 and referred to the previous digitized point Only those axes whose positions have changed with respect to the previous digitized point will be defined If not programmed the canned cycle will assume a value of GO H5 5 Defines the feedrate for the incremental paths It is programmed in mm min or inches min mp1649 If not programmed the canned cycle will assume the F value feedrate for the sweeping paths F5 5 Defines the sweeping feedrate It is given in mm min or inches min BASIC OPERATION 1 The probe positions at the point set by parameters X Y and Z 2 The CNC approaches the probe to the model until it touches it 3 The probe keeps in constant contact with the surface of the model following it along the programmed path Ifitisto be digitized parameters L and E it will generate a new block per every digitized point in the program previously opened by means of the OPEN
188. EPARATORY FUNCTIONS SLAVED AXIS 19 7 8 2 SLAVED AXIS CANCELLATION G78 Function G78 enables you to uncouple all the axes which are coupled slaved or only uncouple indicated axes G78 Uncouples all slaved axes G78 lt Axis 1 gt lt Axis 2 gt lt Axis 3 gt lt Axis 4 gt Only uncouples indicated axes Example G77 X Y U slaves Y and U axes to X axis G77 V Z slaves Z axis to V axis G78 Y uncouples Y axis but U stays slaved to X and Z to V G78 uncouples all axes Page Chapter 7 Section 20 ADDITIONALPREPARATORY FUNCTIONS SLAVED AXIS e TOOL COMPENSATION The FAGOR 8055 CNC has a tool offset table its number of components being defined via the general machine parameter NTOFFSET The following is specified for each tool offset Tool radius in work units in R 5 5 format Tool length in work units in L 5 5 format Wear of tool radius in work units in I 5 5 format The CNC adds this value to the theoretical radius R to calculate the real radius R I Wear of tool length in work units in K 5 5 format The CNC adds this value to the theoretical length L to calculate the real length L K When tool radius compensation is required G41 or G42 the CNC applies the sum of R I values of the selected tool offset as the compensation value When tool length compensation is required G43 the CNC applies the sum of L K values of the selected tool offset a
189. ET RET BET Example G90 G00 X30 Y20 Z10 CALL 10 Y G90 G00 X60 Y20 Z10 CALL 10 M30 SUB 10 G91 G01 X20 F5000 CALL 11 Drilling and threading G91 G01 Y10 CALL 11 Drilling and threading G91 G01 X 20 CALL 11 Drilling and threading G91 G01 Y 10 CALL 11 Drilling and threading RET SUB 11 G81 G98 G91 Z 8 I 22 F1000 S5000 T1 DI Drilling canned cycle G84 Z 8 I 22 K15 F500 S2000 T2 D2 Threading canned cycle G80 RET Chapter 14 Section PROGRAM CONTROLSTATEMENTS SUBRUTINESTATEMENTS Page PCALL expression assignment statement assignment statement The mnemonic PCALL calls the subroutine indicated by means of a number or any expression which results in a number In addition it allows up toa maximum of 26 local parameters of this subroutine to be initialized These local parameters are initialized by means of assignment statements Example PCALL 52 A3 B5 C4 P10 20 In this case in addition to generating a new subroutine nesting level a new local parameter nesting level will be generated there being a maximum of 6 levels of local parameter nesting within the 15 levels of subroutine nesting Both the main program and each subroutine which is found on a parameter nesting level will have 26 local parameters PO P25 Example Zn MP143 Page Chapter 14 Section PROGRAM CONTROLSTATEMENTS SUBRUTINESTATEMENTS
190. ETS i SYNTAX 6 Profiles are described as programmed paths it being possible to include corner rounding chamfers etc following the syntax rules defined for this purpose 7 Mirror images scaling factor changes rotation of coordinate system zero offsets etc cannot be programmed in the description of profiles 8 Nor is it possible to program blocks in high level language such as jumps subroutine calls or parametric programming 9 Other canned cycles cannot be programmed In addition to the GOO function which has a special meaning the irregular pocket canned cycle allows the use of the following functions for the definition of profiles G01 Linear interpolation G02 Clockwise circular interpolation G03 Counter clockwise circular interpolation G06 Arc center in absolute coordinates G08 Arc tangent to previous path G09 Arc defined by three points Gl6 Main plane section by two directions G17 Main plane X Y and longitudinal Z perpendicular G18 Main plane Z X and longitudinal Y perpendicular G19 Main plane Y Z and longitudinal X perpendicular G36 Automatic radius blend controlled corner rounding G39 Chamfer G53 Programming with respect to machine reference zero home G70 Programming in inches G71 Programming in millimeters G90 Absolute programming G9 Incremental programming G93 Polar origin preset Chapter 11 Section Page 3D POCKETS 2D AND 3D POCKETS SYNTAX 49 11 2 9 EXA
191. ETS 3D POCKETS 39 EXAMPLES Profile definition examples Pyramid Island Plane profile G17 G0 G90 X17 Y4 G1 X30 G1 Y30 G1 X4 Gl Y4 Gl X17 Depth profile G16 YZ G0 G90 Y4 ZA Gl Y17 Z35 Conic Island Plane profile G17 G0 G90 X35 Y8 G2 X35 Y8 I0 J27 Depth profile G16 YZ G0 G90 Y8 Z14 G1 Y35 Z55 Semi spherical Island Plane profile 35 G17 G0 G90 X35 Y8 ET ex G2 X35 Y8 10 J27 R Depth profile z G16 YZ r i DA G0 G90 Y8 Z14 yg G2 Y35 Z41 R27 x ee NU Page Chapter 11 Section 3D POCKETS 40 2D AND 3D POCKETS EXAMPLES Example of a 3D pocket with islands L Liz X 10 15 30 35 45 90 6570 TOR122 5 TOL1220 TOI120 TOK 120 G17 GO G43 G90 Z50 S1000 M4 G5 G66 R200 C250 F300 S400 E500 33D pocket definition M30 N200 G67 B5 C4 I 25 R5 V100 F400 TIDI M6 Roughing operation N250 G67 B2 I 23 R5 V100 F550 T2DI M6 Semi finishing operation N300 G68 B1 5 L0 75 QO I 25 R2 V50 F275 T3D1 M6 Finishing operation INA00 CT a tert rt edem tet opens Beginning of the pocket geometry definition G90 GO X10 Y30 Z24 see Outside contour plane profile G1 Y50 X70 Y10 X10 Y30 GTO XT ie fs chr cnet ete nit entem et cette tt ud Depth profile GO X10 Z724 G1 X15 Z9 Ol et suadet Island definition G90 G0 X30 Y30 ise ette Plane profile G2 X30 Y30 110 KO GIG Xora eset ole eh
192. FAGOR 8055 M CNC OPERATING MANUAL Ref 9806 in FAGOR AUTOMATION S Coop keeps informed all those customers who request it about new features implemented onto the FAGOR 8055 CNC This way the customer may request anynew features he may wish to integrate into his own machine To do this simply send us your full company address as well as the reference numbers model and serial number of the various CNC models you have Please note that some of the features described in this manual might not be implemented in the software version that you just obtained The features dependent on the software version are Tool life monitoring Probing canned cycle DNC Profile editor Software for 4 or 6 axes Irregular pockets with islands Digitizing Solid graphics Rigid Tapping Tracing due to technical modifications FAGOR AUTOMATION S Coop Ltda reserves the right to modify the contents of the manual without prior notice When purchasing aFAGOR 8055 GP CNC the following considerations must taken This model is based on the FAGOR 8055 M CNC Mill model tis missing some of the features available at the FAGOR 8055 M CNC The list below indicates those features missing with respect to the Mill model CNC as well as the software options available for this model GP Features not available Software options Electronic threading G33 Software for 4 or 6 axes Tool magazine management DNC Mach
193. G Returns the number of the active PLC message with the highest priority and will coincide with the number displayed on screen 1 128 If there is none it returns 0 P100 PLCMSG assigns to P100 the number of the active PLC message with the highest priority Read write variables 22 PLCIn This variable allows 32 PLC inputs to be read or modified starting with the one indicated n The value of the inputs which are used by the electrical cabinet cannot be modified as their values are determined by it Nevertheless the status of the remaining inputs can be modified PLCOn This variable allows 32 PLC outputs to be read or modified starting from the one indicated n Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 6 543210 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 11 Output 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 PLCMn This variable allows 32 PLC marks to be read or modified starting from the one indicated n PLCRn This variable allows the status of 32 register bits to be read or modified starting from the one indicated n PLCTn This variable allows the timer count to be read or modified starting from the one indicated n PLCCn This variable allows the counter count to be read or modified starting from the one indicated n Page Chapter 13 Section PROGRAMMINGINHIGH LEVELLANGUAGE VARIABLESFORTHEPLC 13 2 12 VARIABLES ASSOCIATED
194. G72 13 Section Page 7 6 2 SCALING FACTOR APPLIED TO ONE OR MORE AXES The programming format is G72 X C 5 5 After G72 the axis or axes and the required scaling factor are programmed All blocks programmed after G72 are treated by the CNC as follows The CNC calculates the movement of all the axes in relation to the programmed path and compensation It then applies the scaling factor indicated to the calculated movement of the corresponding axis or axes If the scaling factor is applied on one or more axes the CNC will apply the scaling factor indicated both to the movement of the corresponding axis or axes and to their feedrate If within the same program both scaling factor types are applied the one applied to all the axes and the one for one or several axes the CNC applies a scaling factor equal to the product of the two scaling factors programmed for this axis to the axis or axes affected by both types Function G72 is modal and will be cancelled when the CNC is turned on after executing M02 M30 or after an EMERGENCY or RESET Example Application of the scaling factor to a plane axis working with tool radius compensation As it can be observed the tool path does not coincide with the required path as the scaling factor is applied to the calculated movement Page Chapter 7 Section 14 ADDITIONALPREPARATORY FUNCTIONS SCALINGFACTOR G72 However if a scaling factor equal to
195. HAPTERS Tool base or tool tip position display Installation manual Chap 3 Measurement in graphics via cursor Operating manual Chap 3 Two ways for tool calibration manual and probe Operating manual Chap 5 Treatment of coded Io signals Installation manual Chap 3 Possibility to store PLC errors and messages in EEPROM memory Installation manual Operating manual Chap 3 Chap 7 Program in EEPROM indicator Operating manual Chap 7 Program in execution indicator Operating manual Chap 7 G50 Controlled corner rounding Installation manual Programming manual Chap 3 Chap 11 Chap 5 7 Appendix Feedrate per revolution G95 for axes controlled via PLC Installation manual Chap 11 Concentric roughing of irregular pockets with islands Programming manual Chap 11 G93 when defining the profile of an irregular pocket Programming manual Chap 11 Manual one two and three dimensional tracing and digitizing cycles Installation manual Programming manual Chap 9 Appendix Chap 5 16 Appendix New tracing digitizing cycles Programming manual Chap 16 Display of deflection and correction factor for the tracing probe Operating manual Chap 3 5 Infinite program execution from a PC Operating manual Chap 8 Multi disk infinite program in Floppy Disk Unit Operating manual Chap 8
196. IS2 and COMAXIS3 at this point Also the current position of the selected axis is displayed and updated as the machine axis moves Chapter 11 Section Page MACHINE PARAMETE CROSS COMPENSATION 5 i TABLES 11 5 OPERATION WITH PARAMETER TABLES Once one of the tables has been selected the cursor can be moved over the screen line by line by means of the up and down arrow keys or move from page to page by means of the page up and page down keys In addition the user has an area of the screen for editing it being possible to move the cursor over the screen by means of the right arrow key and left arrow key The CNC offers the following softkey options for each table EDIT The desired parameter When selecting this option the softkeys will change their colorto a white background and they will show the various editing options In those tables corresponding to leadscrew and cross compensation the position values of the axis must be edited as follows Movethe axis and when the erroris found large enough to be considered press the softkey corresponding to this axis The CNC will include in the editing area the name of the axis followed by the position value corresponding to that point This value can be modified if so desired Pressthe softkey corresponding to the error and key in its value Once the parameter is edited press ENTER This new parameter will be included in the table and
197. Indicates the minimum coordinate occupied by the probe along the Y PRBYMAX Indicates the maximum coordinate occupied by the probe along the Y PRBZMIN Indicates the minimum coordinate occupied by the probe along the Z PRBZMAX Indicates the maximum coordinate occupied by the probe along the Z axis Z Y Y X Y PRBYMAX PRBXMIN PRBXMAX If it is the first time that the tool length has been calibrated it is advisable to include an approximate value of its length L in the tool offset table The programming format for this cycle is as follows PROBE 1 B I F B5 5 Defines the safety distance It must be programmed with a positive value and greater than 0 I Indicates how the calibration canned cycle will be executed Page Chapter 12 Section 4 WORKING WITH A PROBE TOOLLENGTH CALIBRATION 0 Tool calibration on its center 1 Tool calibration on its end 9n rol IO Il If this is not programmed the cycle will take the IO value R 7 F5 5 Defines probing feedrate in mm min or inch min Basic operation 1 Approach AU a 7 A B i I P Z Chapter 12 Section Page WORKING WITH A PROBE TOOLLENGTH 5 CALIBRATION 3 Movement of the probe in rapid G00 from the point where the cycle is called to the approach point This point is to be found opposite the point where it is wished to measure at a safety distance B from it and along the longitudinal axis The
198. L G86 1 Ifthe spindle was in operation previously its turning direction is maintained If it was not in movement it will start by turning clockwise M03 2 Rapid movement of the longitudinal axis from the initial plane to the reference plane 3 Movement at the working feedrate G01 of the longitudinal axis to the bottom of the machined hole and boring 4 Spindle stop M05 5 Dwell if parameter K has been programmed 6 Withdrawal at rapid feedrate G00 of the longitudinal axis as far as the initial plane or the reference plane depending on whether G98 or G99 has been programmed 7 Whenspindle withdrawal has been completed it will startin the same direction in which it was turning before Programming example assuming that the work plane is formed by the X and Y axes that the longitudinal axis is the Z axis and that the starting point is XO YO ZO TI M6 50 G90 XO YU ZO aiite oett iei teorie Starting point G86 G98 G9 X250 Y350 Z 98 I 22 K20 F100 S500 Canned cycle definition Gl m EETE AARMDS Canned cycle cancellation ETa LO E E EE E E EN E E TESE Positioning MUS Loi peers eu ER MAR EU nosed sina Ee pua in HUP ER b Ud End of program Chapter 9 Section Page CANNEDCYCLES BORING WITH RAPID 25 WITHDRAWAL G86 9 5 8 G87 RECTANGULAR POCKET CANNED CYCLE This cycle executes a rectangular pocket at the point indicated until the final programmed coordinate i
199. LOCK SELECTION When selecting this function the CNC will show the selected program as end of execution or simulation By default the CNC will show the program to be executed or simulated except when another program has been selected previously by means of the PROGRAM SELECTION function The operator must select with the cursor the block where the execution or simulation of the program will end To do this the cursor can be moved line by line with the up and down arrow keys or page by page with the page up and page down keys The find softkey options are also available BEGINNING By pressing this key the cursor will position at the first line of the program END By pressing this key the cursor will position at the last line of the program LINE NUMBER Afterpressing this key the CNC will request the number of the line to be found Key in the desired line number and press ENTER The cursor will then be positioned at the desired line Once the desired final block has been selected press ENTER to validate it Chapter 3 Section Page EXECUTE SIMULATE PEOGRSTT E i haa 5 NUMBER OF TIMES This function will be used to indicate that the execution or simulation of the selected program must stop after executing the end block a specific number of times When selecting this function the CNC will request the number of times to be executed or simulated If a canned cycle or a call to a subroutine
200. M100 1 NOT M100 The trigger occurs when M100 0 CPS R100 EQ 1 The trigger occurs when R100 1 NOT DO AND I5 The trigger occurs when the expression is true Itis not possible to use more than 16 flank edge detecting instructions DFU and DFD among all the selected variable definitions and trigger conditions By pressing the ESC key the trigger condition being edited will be deleted From this point on that condition can be edited again Once the trigger condition has been edited press ENTER The new trigger condition will appear at the information window If no trigger condition has been specified the system assumes one by default and it displays the message Trigger type DEFAULT in the information window Besides it will not permit the selection of any other possible types of trigger before center or after TRIGGER BEFORE The CNC starts the data capture once after the selected trigger condition is met Then once the trace has been executed the trigger vertical red line will be positioned at the beginning of the trace Chapter 9 Section Page PLC LOGICANALYZER 29 TRIGGER AFTER The CNC starts the data capture at the very instant the user selects the option to execute the trace before the trigger condition is met The trace will be considered done when the selected trigger condition is met The trigger vertical red line will be positioned at the end of the trace TRIGGER CENTER T
201. M30 or after EMERGENCY or RESET In those cases indicated by V means that the G code is displayed next to the current machining conditions in the it should be understood that the DEFAULT of these G functions depends on the setting of the general machine parameters of the CNC execution and simulation modes Chapter 5 Section Page PROGRAMMING BY ISOCODE PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS 3 5 2 FEEDRATE FUNCTIONS G94 G95 The FAGOR 8055 CNC allows programming the feedrate of the axes in mm minute and mm revolution when working in millimeters or in inches minute and inches revolution when working in inches 5 2 1 FEEDRATE IN mm min or inches min G94 From the moment the code G94 is programmed the control takes that the feedrates programmed through F5 5 are in mm min or inches mm If the movement corresponds to a rotary axis the CNC interprets the feedrate as being programmed in degrees min If an interpolation is made between a rotary and a linear axis the programmed feedrate is taken in mm min or inches min and the movement of the rotary axis programmed in degrees will be considered programmed in millimeters or inches The relationship between the feedrate of the axis component and the programmed feedrate F is the same as that between the movement of the axis and the resulting programmed movement Feedrate F x Movement of axis Feedrate component Resulting programmed movement Example
202. MPLES Example 1 Pocket without islands 7 K y 02 222272227 X 10 20 70 90 90 ls MP1161 In this example the island has 3 types of depth profiles A B and C A B C A 3 contours are used to define the island A type contour B type contour and C type contour o ZN Kos 2N B C 9 N N A Page Chapter 11 Section 50 2D AND 3D POCKETS 3D POCKETS EXAMPLES TOR 1 2 5 TOL1 20 TOI 0 TOK1 0 G17 GO G43 G90 Z50 1000 M4 G5 G66 R200 C250 F300 S400 E500 33D pocket definition M30 N200 G67 B5 C4 I 20 R5 V100 F400 TIDI M6 Roughing operation N250 G67 B2 1 18 R5 V100 F550 T2DI M6 Semi finishing operation N300 G68 B1 5 L0 75 QO I 20 R2 V80 F275 T3D1 MG Finishing operation N400 Cr17 2 eiie Beginning of pocket geometry definition G0 G90 X50 Y90 ZO A type contour Plane profile G1 X0 Y10 X100 Y90 X50 G16 Y Zi tei Depth profile G0 G90 Y90 ZO G1 Z 20 GI uusnsusseueuiiies B type contour G0 G90 X10 Y50 Plane profile G1 Y100 X 10 YO X10 Y50 GIO XZ aan ads Depth profile G0 G90 X10 ZO G1 X20 Z 20 GL oic ue C type contour G0 G90 X90 Y50 Plane profile G1 Y100 X110 YO X90 Y50 G16 XZ eien Depth profile G0 G90 X90 ZO N500 G2 X70 Z 20 I 20 KO End of pocket geometry definition Chapter 11 Section Page 2D AND 3D POCKETS 3D POCKETS 51 EXAMPLE
203. NHIGH LEVELLANGUAGE OTHER VARIABLES CYTIME Returns in hundredths of a second the time it has taken to make the part Possible values 0 4294967295 If this variable is accessed block preparation is interrupted and the CNC waits for this command to be executed to resume block preparation FIRST Indicates whether it is the first time that a program has been run It returns a value of 1 if it is the first time and O for the remainder of times A first time execution is considered as being one made After turning on the CNC After pressing the Shift Reset keys Every time a new program is selected ANAIn Returns in volts and in 1 4 format values 5 Volts the status of the analog input indicated n it being possible to select one among eight 1 8 analog inputs If this variable is accessed block preparation is interrupted and the CNC waits for this command to be executed to resume block preparation Read write variables TIMER This variableallows time in seconds indicated by the clock enabled by the PLC to be read or modified Possible values 0 4294967295 If this variable is accessed block preparation is interrupted and the CNC waits for this command to be executed to resume block preparation PARTC TheCNC hasa part counter whose count increases every time M30 or M02 is executed and this variable allows it value to be read or modified which will be given by a number between 0 and 4294967295 If
204. OSAN E 21 4 9 TAS POO SPAN eee virt bre nackinvevaciuwns bea RD MENU UR UR UR PLUR UN MED MA DURS RR LIUM ER UR Du M P URL MADE 22 4 10 Us drugs S TP HT 23 4 10 1 FN DENTIA I0 re 23 4 10 2 Axes selectiod Tor teach in editinga Ls aues oe Hber SI PER BPERR Oc REI BPPIRMP RU CRM AEA iii 24 NENNEN Chapter 5 JOG 34 FS CNG BREE C 9 KAMI ECCE MD CA E a o D 1 DOES TRIER 9 3 1 2 T ct mental 106 uon m tarea ie dae a roe quu d a MUR uro Mu eee 10 2 13 Joseinp sut electtonie handwh el siiani idaran anaana aaia aia 11 Sd Manual control of th spindle aniren an IRIS ERES A MIPRRY VR ERR MNA MEER RS RUN 12 Ooo Chapter 6 TABLES 6 1 VEA 2 01 EEEE EE E A A E EA 2 6 2 i o Ds in P 6 6 3 Tool table m 11 6 4 To lmatazine table uani a A A A A 17 6 5 Global and local parameter table aee pibe toph bbs Reda bekbpe sepa EP aU neiaie 22 Section Chapter 7 UTILITIES 7 1 JR luci S MNT Hr rrr 2 7 1 1 Programidireciory m 2 7 1 2 DUbLONDS CUBOLOES as ae da pr debe A I da Ebro Mau T MA RM UP CMM INE CA TTT 4 74 3 Directory of the senal communications port ONC 1 uiiscceee setti tette etae recie ks 4 7 1 4 Change directory of the serial line DNC Lue eer rtetat estt Rok pine nd 9p 4 IR ERSA Ren 3 Pon CORY Em 6 Tall Cops d program into AMOET iore
205. P9 10 99 Analyzes if the clock count is less than P9 10 99 At the same time these conditions can be joined by means of logic operators IF P8EQ12 8 OR ABS SIN P24 GT SPEED AND CLOCK LT P9 10 99 The result of these expressions is either true or false Page Chapter 13 Section 34 PROGRAMMINGINHIGH LEVELLANGUAGE EXPRESSIONS 14 PROGRAM CONTROL STATEMENTS The control statements available to high level programming can be grouped as follows Programming statements consisting of Assignment statements Display statements Enable disable statements Flow control statements Subroutine statements Statements for generating programs Screen customizing statements Screen customizing statements Only one statement can be programmed in each block and no other additional information may be programmed in this block 14 1 ASSIGNMENT STATEMENTS This is the simplest type of statement and can be defined as target arithmetic expression A local or global parameter or aread write variable may be selected as target The arithmetic expression may be as complex as required or a simple numerical constant P102 FZLOY ORGY 55 ORGY 54 P100 In the specific case of designating a local parameter using its name A instead of PO for example and the arithmetic expression being a numerical constant the statement can be abbreviated as follows P0z13 7 gt A 13 7 gt A13 7 Withi
206. PF Returns the abscissa value of the rotation center with respect to the cartesian coordinate origin It is given in the active units If G70 in inches Max 3937 00787 If G71 in millimeters Max 99999 9999 ROTPS Returns the ordinate value of the rotation center with respect to the cartesian coordinate origin It is given in the active units If G70 in inches Max 3937 00787 If G71 in millimeters Max 99999 9999 PRBST Returns the status of the probe 0 The probe is not touching the part 1 The probe is touching the part CLOCK Returns in seconds the time indicated by the system clock Possible values 0 4294967295 If this variable is accessed block preparation is interrupted and the CNC waits for this command to be executed to resume block preparation TIME Returns the time in hours minutes seconds format P150 TIME assigns hh mm ss to P150 For example if the time is 18h 22m 34 sec P150 will contain 182234 If this variable is accessed block preparation is interrupted and the CNC waits for this command to be executed to resume block preparation DATE Returns the date in year month day format P151 DATE assigns year month day to P151 Forexample if the date is April 25th 1992 P151 will contain 920425 If this variable is accessed block preparation is interrupted and the CNC waits for this command to be executed to resume block preparation Page Chapter 13 Section 28 PROGRAMMINGI
207. Press ESC to cancel this option and the previous menu will be displayed 3 Press ENTER once the text has been correctly typed in The typed text will remain in the editing window and the cursor will be positioned in the main window 4 Position the rectangle by moving the cursor 5 Press ENTER to validate this command and the text will replace the rectangle on the screen Note that once the text has been entered neither its size nor its color can be modified Therefore these options must be selected before pressing ENTER Chapter 10 Section Page GRAPHICEDITOR TEXTS 17 TEXT NUMBER With this option itis possible to select a text used by the CNC itself in its various operating modes and insert it into the current page or symbol To insert one of these predetermined texts follow these steps 1 Press the corresponding softkey The CNC will show a screen area to indicate the text number The cursor may be moved within this area with the right and left arrow keys 2 Indicate the desired number by keying it in from the keyboard and press ENTER The CNC will display the text corresponding to this number and the rectangle indicating the screen space it occupies If another text is desired key in the other number and press ENTER again Press ESC to quit this option without inserting the text and the CNC will show the previous menu 3 Once the desired text has been selected press ENTER The
208. Press ESC to quit this color selection mode without making any changes to the original settings Page Chapter 3 Section EXECUTE SIMULATE GRAPHICS 3 5 6 CLEAR SCREEN In order to use this function no part program may be in execution or simulation If this is the case it must be interrupted Erases the screen or graphic representation shown Ifthe solid graphic mode is selected it will return to its initial status showing the unmachined part 3 5 7 DEACTIVATE GRAPHICS Itallowsthe graphic representation to be deactivated at any time even during execution or simulation of a part program To activate this function again the GRAPHICS softkey must be pressed again To do this the CNC must not be executing or simulating a part program If this is the case it must beinterrupted Chapter 3 Section Page EXECUTE SIMULATE GRAPHICS 33 3 5 8 MEASURE To use this function a Line Graphics planes XY XZ or YZ must be selected and the CNC must not be executing or simulating the part program If it is it must be interrupted Once this function is selected the CNC shows the following information on the screen P000110 N0010 11 25 35 00034 311 00151 538 00333 099 00151 538 00367 409 00367 409 00000 000 1 4296 CAP INS M0037 The center of the CRT shows a dotted line with two cu
209. R It can be done in one of the following ways TIMER 5F5E100 TIMER 10000 10000 P100 10000 10000 TIMER P100 When the CNC is working in metric system mm resolution is in tenths of a micron and figures are programmed in the format 5 4 positive or negative with 5 integers and 4 decimals and if the CNC is operating in inches resolution is in 0 00001 inches figures being programmed with the format 4 5 positive or negative with 4 integers and 5 decimals For the convenience of the programmer this control always allows the format 5 5 positive or negative with 5 integers and 5 decimals adjusting each number appropriately to the working units every time they are used 13 1 3 SYMBOLS The symbols used in high level language are O Chapter 13 Section Page PROGRAMMINGINHIGH LEVELLANGUAGE LEXICAL DESCRIPTION 3 13 2 VARIABLES The internal CNC variables which can be accessed by high level language are grouped in tables and can be read only or read write variables There is a group of mnemonics for showing the different fields of the table of variables In this way ifitis required to access an element from one of these tables the required field will be indicated by means of the corresponding mnemonic for example TOR and then the required element TOR3 The variables available at the FAGOR 8055 CNC can be classified in the following way General purpose paramete
210. R5 V100 F400 TIDI M6 Roughing operation N250 G67 B2 1 23 R5 V100 F550 T2DI M6 Semi finishing operation N300 G68 B1 5 L0 75 QO I 25 R2 V100 F275 T3D1 M6 Finishing operation Chapter 11 Section Page 2D AND 3D POCKETS 3D POCKETS 59 EXAMPLES N400 N500 G17 G90 G0 X5 Y 26 Z0 G1 Y25 X160 Y 75 X5 Y 26 G17 G90 GO X30 Y 6 G1 Y 46 X130 Y 6 X30 G16 XZ GO X30 Z 25 G1 Z 20 G2 X39 Z 11 19 KO G17 G90 GO X80 Y 16 G2 10J 10 G16 YZ GO Y 16Z 11 G1 Y 16Z 5 G3 Y 21 Z0 J 5 KO Beginning of pocket geometry definition Outside contour plane profile Low contour A type Plane profile Depth profile High contour B type Plane profile Depth profile End of pocket geometry definition Page 60 Chapter 2D AND 3D POCKETS 11 Section 3D POCKETS EXAMPLES 11 2 10 ERRORS The CNC will issue the following errors ERROR 1025 A tool of no radius has been programmed When using a tool with 0 radius while machining a pocket ERROR 1026 A step greater than the tool diameter has been programmed When parameter C of the roughing operation is greater than the diameter of the roughing tool ERROR 1041 A mandatory parameter not programmed in the canned cycle It comes up in the following instances When parameters I and R have not been programmed in the roughing operation When not u
211. REPARATORY FUNCTIONS Section SCALING FACTOR G72 Page 11 7 6 1 SCALING FACTOR APPLIED TO ALL AXES The programming format is as follows G72 85 5 Following G72 all coordinates programmed are multiplied by the value of the scaling factor defined by S until a new G72 scaling factor definition is read or the definition is cancelled Programming example starting point X 30 Y10 The following subroutine defines the machining of the part G90 X 19 YO GO XO Y10 F150 G02 XO Y 1010 J 10 G01 X 19YO The programming of the parts would be Execution of subroutine machines a G92 X 79 Y 30 coordinate preset zero offset G72 S2 applies scaling factor 2 Execution of subroutine machines b G72 S1 cancels scaling factor M30 end of program Page Chapter 7 Section 12 ADDITIONAL PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS SCALING FACTOR G72 MP076 Examples of application of the scaling factor G90 G00 x0 YO N10 G91 G0 X20 YIO Y10 X 10 N20 X 10 Y 20 G72 S0 5 RPT N10 20 M30 N10 N20 G90 G00 X20 Y20 G91 G01 X 10 X 10 Y 20 X20 Y10 Y10 G72 S0 5 scaling factor RPT N10 20 repeats from block 10 to block 20 M30 Function G72 is modal and is cancelled when another scaling factor with a value of S1 is programmed or on power up after executing M02 M30 or after EMERGENCY or RESET Chapter 7 ADDITIONALPREPARATORY FUNCTIONS SCALINGFACTOR
212. RESUME REEERE 48 11 2 9 is ciu M 50 Msi fce atm 61 HEN Chapter 12 WORKING WITH A PROBE 12 1 Frobine G73 G TOV PT 2 12 2 Probing cammed tyle m M 3 12 3 Tool Ieagib calibration canned CMCIE dssicucswstcnuncuerswatusicnuncseicusedeasexaprmaiaumemlcasntuans 4 12 4 Probe calibrating canned cycle uie ae eto n bte pas A 7 12 5 Surface measure canbed CHE IO uiae ioo pasen niic hoe baba Ue aa aeaaeae MM B aa aaa 11 12 6 Outside comer measuring camied Cycle snc 15 12 7 l sue comer measuring canned cyele osinissccvorcxsscxanonsscwasancsencssiausesnsnetancaeisunemeacasecmens 18 12 8 Angele m asnring conned qvele one te tu RUE ES 21 12 9 Outside comer and angle measuring canned cycle uui e cete nire tarte tb eiie tha 24 12 10 Hole dmegsarng canned OG ai soa cas ee ria qe a RES NRI RA KERN RES M RHN AREE AREE AEG 28 12 11 Boss mes sure canned OCI siainen PLA I RUIN RE ONR RUMP miedo 32 Section EE PEAREN TEE os COT Chapter 13 PROGRAMMING IN HIGH LEVEL LANGUAGE 13 4 Lexical description M 1 13 1 1 Reserved WOS Ae T eT 2 13 12 Mineri COR MM pana ee ere eee RRRS 3 13 1 3 giro e 3 12 2 PR A me aaa E E nea eee reese ee vane ea ae cane eee eee 4 eae General purpose parameters or variables au ee dose shvedsnaduiedsnenine dene dubedanensondecedee 6 123 22 X aribles associated Wil HONS aiiis er RPM EUR REPE UM EXER ARE EERR RRR 8
213. RM P93 with a value of 2 or3 the CNC shows the following information TOOROF Indicates the position to be occupied by the main rotary axis of the spindle in order for the tool to be positioned perpendicular to the indicated incline plane TOOROS Indicates the position to be occupied by the secondary rotary axis of the spindle in order for the tool to be positioned perpendicular to the indicated incline plane By accessing variable TOOROF or TOOROS the CNC interrupts block preparation and waits for that command to be executed before resuming block preparation Chapter 13 Section Page PROGRAMMINGINHIGH LEVELLANGUAGE VARIABLES 11 13 2 5 VARIABLES ASSOCIATED WITH MACHINE PARAMETERS Variables associated with machine parameters are read only variables In order to become familiar with the values returned itis advisable to consult the installation and start up manual Values 1 0 correspond to the parameters which are defined with YES NO and ON OFF The coordinate and feedrate values are given in the active units If G70 in inches Max 3937 00787 If G71 in millimeters Max 99999 9999 If rotary axis in degrees Max 99999 9999 Read only variables MPGn Returns the value assigned to the general machine parameter n P110 MPG 8 assigns the value of the general machine parameter INCHES to parameter P110 if millimeters P110 0 and if inches P110 1 MP X C n Returns the value which was assi
214. Returns the main spindle theoretical position value Its value will be given in 0 0001 degree units between 0 and 360 Returns the spindle following error when it is operating in closed loop M19 Whenaccessing one ofthese variables POSS RPOSS TPOSS RTPOSS or FLWES block preparation is interrupted and the CNC waits for that command to be executed before resuming block preparation Read write variables PRGSSO This variable allows the percentage of the main spindle speed selected by program to be read or modified This will be given by an integer between 0 and MAXSOVR maximum 255 If this has a value of 0 it means that it is not selected P110 PRGSSO assigns to P110the of the main spindle speed selected by program PRGSSO P111 sets the value indicating the main spindle speed seleceted by program to the value of arithmetic parameter P111 Chapter 13 Section Page PROGRAMMINGINHIGH LEVELLANGUAGE VARIABLES FOR 19 THEMAINSPINDLE 13 2 10 VARIABLES ASSOCIATED WITH THE 2nd SPINDLE In these variables associated with the spindle their values are given in revolutions per minute and the 2nd spindle override values are given in integers from 0 to 255 Read only variables SSREAL SSPEED SDNCS SPLCS SPRGS SSSO SDNCSO SPLCSO SCNCSO Returns the real 2nd spindle turning speed in revolutions per minute P100 SRSEAL assigns to P100 the real turning speed of the 2
215. S Example 2 In this example the island has 3 types of depth profiles A B and C 3 contours are used to define the island A type contour B type contour and C type contour A B B C A TOR1 7 5 TOIM 0 TOR2 5 TOI2 0 TOR3 2 5 TOI3 0 G17 GO G43 G90 Z50 S1000 M4 G5 G66 R200 C250 F300 S400 E500 3D pocket definition M30 N200 G67 B7 C14 I 25 R3 V100 F500 TIDI M6 Roughing operation N250 G67 B3 I 22 R3 V100 F625 T2D2 M06 Semi finishing operation N300 G68 B1 L1 QO JO I 25 R3 V100 F350 T3D3 M6 Finishing operation Page Chapter 11 Section 52 2D AND 3D POCKETS 3D POCKETS EXAMPLES N400 G7 2 nnne Beginning of pocket geometry definition G0 G90 X0 YO ZO Outside contour plane profile G1 X150 Y100 X0 YO GIOX Z neina Depth profile G0 G90 X0 Z0 G1 X10 Z 10 Z 25 CET tee E AAA A type profile G0 G90 X50 Y30 Plane profile G1 X70 Y70 X35 Y30 X50 GIO YZ aunen eniinn Depth profile G0 G90 Y30 Z 25 G2 Y50 Z 5 120 KO CIE sons dete a B type profile G0 G90 X40 Y50 Plane profile G1 Y25 X65 Y75 X40 Y50 GIG XZ c esee e Depth profile G0 G90 X40 Z 25 G1Z 5 GIT so sees estie ef C type profile G0 G90 X80 Y40 Plane profile G1 X96 Y60 X60 Y40 X80 GIG Ys te ete Depth profile G0 G90 Y40 Z 25 N500 G2 Y50 Z 15 J10 KO End
216. S Liens pris edle PR IKE LIH RRENEE PARARE LIH IRUT E ELAR MAT HR ATE bian 7 3 Cartesian COOCT INGLES T D 7 3002 Palat cgo De aeucuc eer te epa Mey Hol EE KE pP x Hiit ub bl vd iplb did obey d prae 8 320 E v lithe seal COU MATES Locis REDIERE RI UE dU RU EA EDIDI PAID Po DPA PEN ERE OI 10 3 5 4 Angle and oue cartesian COOKIE ies ie setae pra Ira Re RR pt E PHAR In EBIH BARI E DIAM MEA I HER LE nisi 11 3 6 Rokay ori ferr 12 d blo 42 MEC PE 13 34 Detimition of the work ZONES Pr M 13 EXON LUCUS DES STRUD TENTI ITO T DE 14 Page Section a Chapter 4 REFERENCESYSTEMS 4 1 Eefer nos polls scious atc ce a eee 1 4 2 Machine reference search OTI uio cissiccarstizedanciuhciunctexeuasaehidancianedasnaabiauscaaneaaneueeians 2 4 3 Programming with tesp ct tomachine zero 353 4iisassssekre chao tta Mk Rn CRY MEN RES RES CRUS 3 4 4 Piesethap or coordinates and Zero OL Sela isi cccccsscxansuesaucceusicnuncesicuvesmecdancsasaumeeneledsncubin 4 4 4 1 Coordinate preset and limitation of the S value GU esce het te 6 4 4 2 MAUI LEO NK HH E ET A E E E E E T E 7 4 5 Polar Orie preset GIT aae AA E R eines 9 NENNEN Chapter 5 PROGRAMMING BY ISO CODE 5 1 Froparotory DC oaa ara EE ERA MORIR neues 2 52 Eeedtate TUNG HIS FEI GISI srenti E A OS Kn HUNGER MO US wee eas 4 31 Feedrate in mm min or inches min O94 Liuius ee rrr abra r tabe kt HEP IAN RUE E MERE 4 dua d Feedrate in qum rev or moles mes GIS Liege RR ERPUC
217. STATEMENTS SCREENCUSTOMIZING STATEMENTS CYCLE 2 Displays page 12 and defines 3 data entry windows N20 PAGE 12 ODW 1 10 60 ODW 2 13 60 ODW 3 16 60 Editing WBUF PCALL 2 Adds PCALL 2 to the block being edited IB 1 INPUT A 6 5 Requests the value of A DW 1 IB1 Data window I shows the entered value WBUF A IB1 Adds A entered value to the block being edited WBUF 5 Adds to the block being edited IB 2 INPUT B 6 5 Requests the value of B DW 2 IB2 Data window 2 shows the entered value WBUF B IB2 Adds B entered value to the block being edited WBUF 5 Adds to the block being edited IB 3 INPUT C 6 5 Requests the value of C DW 3 IB3 Data window 3 shows the entered value WBUF C IB3 Adds C entered value to the block being edited WBUF 9 Adds to the block being edited WBUF Enters the edited block into memory Example PCALL 2 A3 B1 C3 GOTONO0 Chapter 14 Section Page PROGRAMCONTROLSTATEMENTS SCREEN CUSTOMIZING 21 STATEMENTS 15 DIGITIZING CYCLES This CNC offers the following digitizing cycles 1 Digitizing cycle in a grid pattern 2 Digitizing cycle in an arc pattern These cycle must be programmed by means of the High Level Language instruction DIGIT and its programming format is DIGIT expression assignment statement This statement calls upon the indicated digitizi
218. SZONE Returns the status of work zone 2 SZLO X C Returns the value of the lower limit of Zone 2 according to the selected axis X C SZUP X C Returns the value of the upper limit of Zone 2 according to the selected axis X C TZONE Returns the status of work zone 3 TZLO X C Returns the value of the lower limit of Zone 3 according to the selected axis X C TZUP X C Returns the value of the upper limit of Zone 3 according to the selected axis X C FOZONE Returns the status of work zone 4 FOZLO X C Returns the value of the lower limit of Zone 4 according to the selected axis X C FOZUP X C Returns the value of the upper limit of Zone 4 according to the selected axis X C Chapter 13 Section Page VARIABLES FOR PROGRAMMINGINHIGH LEVELLANGUAGE WORK ZONES 13 13 2 7 VARIABLES ASSOCIATED WITH FEEDRATES Read only variables associated with the actual feedrate FREAL Returns the real feedrate of the CNC in mm min or inches min P100 FREAL Assigns the real feedrate value of the CNC to parameter P100 Read only variables associated with function G49 FEED DNCF PLCF PRGF Returns the feedrate selected in the CNC by means of the G94 function This will be in mm minute or inches minute This feedrate can be indicated by program by the PLC or DNC and the CNC selects one of these the one with the highest priority being that indicated by DNC and the one with the lowest priority tha
219. Section Page EXECUTE SIMULATE 1 When simulating a part program the CNC will ask for the type of simulation desired offering the following Options THEORETICAL PATH Simulates the execution of the program without moving the axes without taking tool radius compensation into consideration and without executing the auxiliary M S T functions G FUNCTIONS Simulates the execution of the program without moving the axes by executing the programmed G functions and without executing the auxiliary M S T functions G M S T FUNCTIONS Simulates the execution of the program without moving the axes by executing the G functions and programmed auxiliary M S T functions MAIN PLANE Thisoption executes the selected part program moving only the axes forming the main plane and executing the programmed M S T and G functions The axes movement will be carried out at top FO feedrate regardless of the FO value programmed This feedrate can be modified by means ofthe feedrate override switch RAPID Verifies the execution of the program by moving the axes executing the G functions and the programmed auxiliary M S T functions Movements of the axes will be executed at the maximum feedrate permitted FO regardless of the programmed F feedrates thus allowing this feedrate to be varied by means of the FEEDRATE OVERRIDE switch Page Chapter 3 Section 2 EXECUTE SIMULATE Once the required program has been
220. TABLE EDIT With this option it is possible to edit the desired parameter Once this option is selected the softkeys will change their color showing their type of editing option over a white background Also itis possible to get more editing assistance by pressing HELP Press HELP again to exit the editing assistance mode Press ESC to quit the editing mode and leave the original values intact Once the tool offset has been edited press ENTER to enter it in the table FIND This option is used to carry out a search in a table When selecting this option the softkeys will show the following options BEGINNING This softkey positions the cursor over the first parameter which can be edited or modified in this mode and it quits the find mode END This softkey positions the cursor over the last parameter which can be edited or modified in this mode and it quits the find mode PARAMETER This softkey searches the desired parameter and positions the cursor over it After pressing this softkey the CNC requests the number of the parameter to be found Once the number is keyed in press ENTER INITIALIZE With this option it is possible to initialize all the parameters of the table resetting them to Chapter 6 Section Page GLOBAL ANDLOCAL 23 cod PARAMETERTABLE LOAD With this option it is possible to load the tool offset table with the values received via any of the serial communicati
221. TANGENCY Indicates whether the arcto be drawn is tangent to Et 0 the previous section or not Er 0 Ni 2 All these parameters need not be defined but all the known ones Nr 2 should be defined To define a parameter press the corresponding softkey key in the desired value and press ENTER The value may be defined by a numeric constant or by any expression Examples X 100 X 10 cos 45 X 20 30 sine 30 X 2 20 30 sine 30 Once all known parameters are set press the VALIDATE softkey and the CNC will show the defined section if possible Ifthere are more than one possibility all the possible options will be shown and the desired one framed in red must be selected using the right and left arrow keys Example X1 240 Y2 l XC YC RA 20 l TANGENCY YES Use the up and down arrow keys to choose whether all the possible options are shown or only the one framed in red If there is not enough data to show the section the CNC waits for more data in order to solve the profile Once the desired option is selected press ENTER for the CNC to assume it Chapter 4 Section Page EDIT PROFILE EDITOR 9 4 1 4 5 MODIFY When pressing the MODIFY softkey the CNC shows the following options MODIFY ELEMENT To modify the data of any profile element It is not possible to swap elements a straight line for an arc or vice versa Select the element using the right left and up down arrow
222. TERN G64 15 Basic operation 1 Multiple machining calculates the next point of those programmed where it is wished to machine 2 Movement programmed by C G00 G01 G02 or G03 to this point 3 Multiple machining will perform the canned cycle or modal subroutine selected after this movement 4 The CNC will repeat steps 1 2 3 until the programmed path has been completed After completing multiple machining the tool will be positioned atthe last point along the programmed path where machining was performed Programming example assuming that the work plane is formed by the X and Y axes that the longitudinal axis is Z and that the starting point is XO YO ZO G81 G98 G01 G91 X280 Y130 Z 8 I 22 F100 S500 Canned cycle positioning and definition G64 X200 Y200 B225 K6 C3 F200 P2 Defines multiple machining G80 Cancels canned cycle G90 X0 YO Positioning M30 End of program Itis also possible to write the multiple machining definition block in the following ways G64 X200 Y200 B225 K6 C3 F200 P2 Page Chapter 10 Section 16 MULTIPLEMACHINING IN AN ARC PATTERN G64 10 6 G65 MACHINING PROGRAMMED BY MEANS OF AN ARC CHORD This function allows activated machining to be performed at a point programmed by means of an arc chord Only one machining operation will be performed its programming format being X 5 5 Y 5 5 A 5 5 1 4 5 5 C F 5 5 Ee s I D
223. Tool table tool magazine and global and local arithmetic parameters Chapter 7 Utilities Description of the Utilities mode of operation It allows access to the directory of part programs subroutines and to the part program directory of the PC or peripheral device connected to the CNC It is also possible to copy delete move or rename part programs It indicates the protections that could be assigned to a part program Itshows the various ways to operate with the EEPROM memory Chapter 8 DNC Description of the DNC mode of operation It indicates how to operate via serial interfaces Chapter9 PLC Description of the PLC mode of operation It shows how to edit and compile the PLC program It is possible to verify how the PLC program works and the status of its numerous variables It shows the date the PLC program was edited its memory size and the execution times cycle times for its different modules It offers a detailed description of the logic analyzer Introduction 7 Chapter 10 Graphic Editor Description of the Graphic Editor mode of operation It indicates how to create user defined pages screens and symbols to create user screens It shows how to use user pages in customizing programs how to display a user page on power up and how to activate user pages from the PLC Chapter 11 Machine parameters Description of the Machine parameters mode It is possible to access and operate with the tables for machine param
224. URE CAP INS CONFIG HARDWARE MEMORY PROM USER URATION TEST TEST TEST SUPPLY VOLTAGE This section indicates the voltages corresponding to the lithium battery and those provided by the power supply module The voltages provided by the power supply module for the internal use of the CNC are 5V 5V 15V 15V GND Logic 0V GNDA analog OV The range allowed maximum and minimum values and the real value will be shown for each of them If a measured voltage is not within the permitted range the text Error will be shown Chapter 12 Section Page DIAGNOSIS HARDWARETEST 5 BOARD VOLTAGES It indicates whether the AXES module the tracing module I O TRACING and the Inputs Outputs modules are supplied with 24 V or not If any of these voltages is not present the text Error will be shown The absence of the 24 V supply may be due to the fact that the connectors have not have been supplied or that the protection fuse of the corresponding module has blown INSIDE TEMPERATURE It indicates the internal temperature of the CNC The range allowed maximum and minimum values and the recommended value will also be shown Page Chapter 12 Section 6 DIAGNOSIS HARDWARETEST 12 3 MEMORY TEST This option checks the status of the internal memory of the CNC The PLC program must be stopped otherwise the CNC will show the corresponding message asking whether it is to be st
225. V against a voltage overload greater than 33Vdc and against reverse connection of the power supply Fan Module It carries 1 or 2 external fuses depending on model The fuses are fast F of 0 4 Amp 250V to protect the fans Monitor The type of protection fuse depends on the type of monitor See the identification label of the unit itself Precautions during repair Do not manipulate the inside of the unit Only personnel authorized by Fagor Automation may manipulate the inside of this unit Do not manipulate the connectors with the unit connected to AC power Before manipulating the connectors inputs outputs feedback etc make sure that the unit is not connected to AC power Safety symbols Symbols which may appear on the manual WARNING symbol Ithas an associated text indicating those actions oroperations may hurt people or damage products ymbols that may be carried on the product WARNING symbol Ithas an associated text indicating those actions oroperations may hurt people or damage products Electrical Shock symbol Itindicates that point may be under electrical voltage Ground Protection symbol It indicates that point must be connected to the main ground point of the machine as protection for people and units Introduction 4 MATERIAL RETURNING TERMS When returning the Monitor or the Central Unit pack it in its original package and with its original packaging material If not available pack it as
226. WITH LOCAL PARAMETERS The CNC allows 26 local parameters PO P25 to be assigned to a subroutine by using mnemonics PCALL and MCALL In addition to performing the required subroutine these mnemonics allow local parameters to be initialized Read only variables CALLP Allows us to know which local parameters have been defined and which have not in the call to the subroutine by means of the PCALL or MCALL mnemonic The information will be given in the 26 least significant bits bits 0 25 each of these corresponding to the local parameter of the same number as well as bit 12 corresponding to P12 Each bit will indicate if the corresponding local parameter has been defined 1 or not 0 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 65432 10 ojo ojo oro vreje eje Example PCALL 20 P0220 P223 P325 Call to subroutine 20 SUB 20 Beginning of subroutine 20 P100 CALLP In parameter P100 the following will be obtained LSB Chapter 13 Section Page PROGRAMMING INHIGH LEVELLANGUAGE VARIABLES FOR 23 LOCALPARAMETERS 13 2 13 OTHER VARIABLES Read only variables OPMODE Returns the code corresponding to the selected operating Mode 0 Mainmenu 10 Automatic execution 11 Single block execution 12 2 MDI in EXECUTION 13 Toolinspection 20 Theoretical pathmovement simulation 21 Gfunctions simulation 22 G M S and T functions simulation 23 Simulation with movement on main plane
227. Watchdog PERIODIC MODULE TIMES ms Installed Free Object Program Date Size 65536 44654 11 04 1991 16034 Minimun Cycle Maximun Cycle Average Cycle Cycle Time Watchdog EEPROM MEMORY bytes STATUS Installed Free Program Saved Date Size 16384 16270 09 04 1991 102 Execution Compiled Integrated in CPU CNC GENERAL CYCLE This section shows the time maximum minimum and average it takes the PLC to execute a program cycle This cycle includes Updating the resources with the values of the physical inputs and internal CNC variables SOURCE PROGRAM Date Sie 11 04 1991 20789 CAP INS ee ee ee ee s Executing both the main cycle PRG and the periodic module Updating the internal CNC variables and the physical outputs with the resource variables Copying the resources into their corresponding images This section also shows the watchdog time selected by the PLC machine parameter WDGPRG Page Chapter 9 22 PLC Section STATISTICS PERIODIC MODULE This section shows the time maximum minimum and average that it takes to execute the periodic module of the PLC Italso shows the period assigned to this module by means of the directive instruction PE t This period indicates how frequently the periodic module will be executed every t mi
228. X G02 G03 Q 5 5 Ix5 5 K 5 5 Plane YZ G02 G03 Q 5 5 J 5 5 K 5 5 Page Chapter 6 Section CIRCULARINTERPOLATION 4 PATHCONTROL G02 G03 c CARTESIAN COORDINATES WITH RADIUS PROGRAMMING The coordinates of the endpoint of the arc and radius R are defined Programming format Nn Plane XY G02 G03 X 5 5 Y 5 5 R 5 5 Plane ZX G02 G03 X 5 5 Z 5 5 R 5 5 Plane YZ G02 G03 Y 5 5 Y 5 5 R 5 5 Nn If a complete circle is programmed with radius programming the CNC will show the corresponding error as infinite solutions exist If an arc is less than 180 the radius is programmed with a plus sign and a minus sign if itis more than 180 i gt Jn v 7 P s PO OMS If PO is the starting point and P1 the endpoint there are 4 arcs which have the same value passing through both points Depending on the circular interpolation G02 or G03 and on the radius sign the relevant arc is defined Thus the programming format of the sample arcs is as follows Arc 1 G02 X Y R Arc 2 G02 X Y R Arc 3 G03 X Y R Arc 4 G03 X Y R Chapter 6 Section Page CIRCULARINTERPOLATION PATH CONTROL G02 G03 Programming example Various programming modes are analyzed below point X60 Y40 being the starting point Cartesian coordinates G90 G17 G03 X110 Y90 I0 J50 X160 Y40 I50 JO Polar coordinates or Cartesian coordinates with radius programming
229. Y300 Z 8 I 22 F100 S500 Canned cycle positioning and definition G60 A30 X1200 1100 P2 003 Q6 R12 Defines multiple machining G80 Cancels canned cycle G90 X0 YO Positioning M30 End of program Itis also possible to write the multiple machining definition block in the following ways G60 A30 X1200 K13 P2 003 Q6 R12 G60 A301100 K13 P2 003 Q6 R12 Page Chapter 10 Section 4 MULTIPLEMACHINING INASTRAIGHTLINE PATTERN G60 10 2 G61 MULTIPLE MACHINING IN A RECTANGULAR PATTERN The programming format of this cycle is as follows A 5 5 B 4 5 5 X 5 5 1 5 5 K 5 Y 5 5 J 5 5 YJ YD JD PQRSTUV XK IK XI Defines the angle formed by the machining path with the abscissa axis It is expressed in degrees and if not programmed the value A 0 will be taken Defines the angle formed by the two machining paths It is expressed in degrees and if not programmed the value B 90 will be taken Defines the length of the machining path according to the abscissa axis Defines the pitch between machining operations according to the abscissa axis Defines the number of total machining operations in the abscissa axis including the machining definition point Due to the fact that machining may be defined according to the abscissa axis with any two points of the X I K group the CNC allows the following definition combinations XL XK IK Nevertheless if format XI is defined care sh
230. ZOOM or changing the point of view or when simulating or executing a program other than the current one the new graphic will be drawn over the existing one superimposed Nevertheless the existing graphic can be deleted by using the CLEAR SCREEN softkey SOLID GRAPHICS This type of graphics offer the same information in two different ways as a three dimensional solid SOLID or as a section view of the part SECTION VIEW Whensimulating or executing a program in any of these modes it is possible to display its graphics in either mode The section view is usually drawn faster than the solid view therefore itis recommended to first run the program in section view and then switch to solid graphics The end result will be the same Page Chapter 3 Section 24 EXECUTE SIMULATE GRAPHICS SECTION VIEW This option displays a section view of the part on the XY plane drawn in different shades of gray which indicate the depth of the part The other plane views are also shown XZ and YZ which correspond to the sections indicated by the vertical and horizontal indicator lines These vertical and horizontal indicator lines can be moved left and right or up and down respectively by means of the corresponding arrow keys These indicator lines can be moved at any time even while executing or simulating the part program and the CNC will display live the new sections corresponding to the new indicator line positions
231. a normal block SUB14 Page Chapter 7 Section 6 UTILITIES COPY 7 2 2 SEND EEPROM CONTENTS TO A PROGRAMMER To send the contents of the EEPROM memory to an EEPROM programmer device press the softkey EEPROM TO PROGRAMMER The CNC will send all the data stored in the EEPROM custom pages and symbols CNC part programs and the PLC program to the EEPROM memory programmer This data will be sent in the MOTOROLA S3 format via the RS232C serial port Chapter 7 Section Page UTILITIES COPY 7 73 DELETE With this option it is possible to delete one or several CNC programs as well as those of the selected peripheral device Once this option is selected choose the type of program to be deleted by using the corresponding softkey Press ENTER after keying in the program number When attempting to delete the CNC s complete memory only those programs with the M A part program A screen customizing program The PLC program The PLC message file The PLC error file CNC s complete memory A program from serial port 1 A program from serial port 2 attribute modifiable will be deleted Page Chapter 7 UTILITIES Section DELETE 7 4 RENAME With this option it is possible to assign anew number or comment to the selected program Once this option is selected choose the type of program to be renamed by using the corresponding softkey A
232. a value of 0 the CNC will display the corresponding error Defines the distance between the reference plane and the surface of the part where the drilling is to be done In the first drilling this amount will be added to B drilling step If it is not programmed a value of 0 will be taken Distance which the longitudinal axis will withdraw in rapid GOO after each drilling step If this is not programmed the longitudinal axis will withdraw to the reference plane If programmed with a value of 0 the CNC will display the corresponding error Defines after how many drilling steps the tool withdraws to the reference plane in GOO A value of between 0 and 9999 can be programmed If this is not programmed or is programmed with a value of 0 a value of 1 will be taken i e it will return to the reference plane after each drilling step Defines the dwell time in hundredths of a second after each drilling step until the withdrawal begins Should this notbe programmed the CNC will take a value of KO Defines the minimum value which the drilling step can acquire This parameter is used with R values other than 1mm 0 040 inch If this is not programmed or programmed with a value of 0 a value of 1 will be taken Factor which reduces the drilling step B If this is not programmed or programmed with a value of 0 a value of 1 will be taken IfR equals 1 all the drilling steps will be the same and the programmed value B
233. able for the selected tool T Functions G41 and G42 are modal and incompatible to each other They are cancelled by G40 G04 interruption of block preparation G53 programming with reference to machine zero G74 home search machining canned cycles G81 G82 G83 G84 G85 G86 G87 G88 G89 and also on power up after executing M02 M30 or after EMERGENCY or RESET Page Chapter 8 Section 2 TOOL RADIUS COM TOOL COMPENSATION PENSATION G40 G41 G42 81 1 ACTIVATING TOOL RADIUS COMPENSATION Once the plane in which tool radius compensation has been selected via G16 G17 G18 or G19 functions G41 or G42 must be used to activate it G41 Compensation of tool radius compensation to the left G42 Compensation of tool radius compensation to the right In the same block or a previous one in which G41 or G42 is programmed functions T D or only T must be programmed so that the tool offset value to be applied can be selected from the tool offset table If no tool offset is selected the CNC takes DO with RO LO IO KO When the new selected tool has an M06 associated to it and this M06 in turn has a subroutine associated to it the CNC will activate the tool radius compensation at the first movement block of that subroutine If that subroutine has a G53 programmed in a block position values referred to Machine Reference Zero home the CNC will cancel any tool radius compensation G41 or G42 selected pre
234. ain plane indicates the shape of the contour Since a 3D contour has an infinite number of different profiles 1 per each depth coordinate the following must be programmed For the outside contour of the pocket the one corresponding to the surface coordinate or top of the part 1 For the inside contours the one corresponding to the base or bottom 2 2 The profile in the plane must be closed same starting and end points and it must not intersect itself Examples AY 7 The following examples cause a geometry error QD INSVES 3 The depth profile vertical cross section must be programmed with any of the axes of the active plane If the active plane is the XY and the perpendicular axis is the Z axis one must program G16XZ or G16YZ MP1149 MP1145 MP1146 All profiles plane and depth must start with the definition of the plane containing it Example GIG XY osissa Beginning of the outside profile definition plane profile definition G16 XZ depth profile definition GLIOXY qc Beginning of the island definition plane profile definition G16 XZ anes depth profile definition Chapter 11 Section Page 2D AND 3D POCKET 3D POCKETS 37 puis ji PROGRAMMING RULES 4 5 The depth profile must be defined after having defined the plane profile The beginning points of the plane profile and depth profile must be the same one Nevertheless the dep
235. al Chap 3 WBUF programmable without parameters Programming Manual Chap 14 Date July 1993 Software Version 7 07 and newer FEATURE AFFECTED MANUAL AND CHAPTERS The GP model offers optional Tool radius compensation G40 G41 G42 Logic outputs of the key status Installation manual Chap 9 2 Version history M Date January 1994 Software Version 9 01 and newer FEATURE AFFECTED MANUAL AND CHAPTERS Tool base or tool tip position display Installation manual Chap 3 Measurement in graphics via cursor Operating manual Chap 3 Two ways for tool calibration manual and probe Operating manual Chap 5 Treatment of coded Io signals Installation manual Chap 3 Possibility to store PLC errors and messages in EEPROM memory Installation manual Operating manual Chap 3 Chap 7 Program in EEPROM indicator Operating manual Chap 7 Program in execution indicator Operating manual Chap 7 G50 Controlled corner rounding Installation manual Programming manual Chap 3 Chap 11 Chap 5 7 Appendix Feedrate per revolution G95 for axes controlled via PLC Installation manual Chap 11 Concentric roughing of irregular pockets with islands Programming manual Chap 11 G93 when defining the profile of an irregular pocket Programming manual Chap
236. allows you to incorporate any kind of information into all blocks in the form of a comment The comment is programmed at the end of the block and should begin with the character 5 Ifa block begins with all its contents will be considered as a comment and it will not be executed Empty blocks are not permitted They should contain at least one comment Page Chapter 2 Section CREATING A PROGRAM 3 AXES AND COORDINATE SYSTEMS Given that the objective of the CNC is to control the movement and positioning of axes it is necessary to determine by means of coordinates the position of the point to be reached The 8055 CNC allows you to use absolute relative or incremental coordinates throughout the same program 3 1 NOMENCLATURE OF THE AXES The axes are named according to DIN 66217 Characteristics of the system of axes X amp Y main movements on the main work plane of the machine Z parallel to the main axis of the machine perpendicular to the main XY plane U V W auxiliary axes parallel to X Y Z respectively A B C rotary axes on each of the X Y Z axes Chapter 3 Section Page NOMENCLATURE 1 AXES AND COORDINA TESYSTEMS OETHEAXES The drawing below shows an example of the nomenclature of the axes on a milling profiling machine with a tilted table 3 1 1 SELECTION OF THE AXES Of the 9 possible axes which can exist the FAGOR 8055 CNC all
237. along the probing axis until touching the part 3 The CNC will generate a new block in the program previously opened with the OPEN P statement This block will indicate the position values of the X Y and Z axes at this point 4 The probe will follow the part along the programmed path generating a new block every time the probe touches the part 5 Once the cycle is finished the probe will return to the starting point This move consists of The probe returns to the axis position indicated by the Z parameter along the probing digitizing axis The probe returns to the work plane position indicated by the X and Y parameters Page Chapter 15 Section 4 DIGITIZING CYCLES DIGITIZING CYCLE IN A GRID PATTERN 15 2 DIGITIZING CYCLE IN AN ARC PATTERN The programming format is as follows DIGIT 2 X Y Z I J K A B C F Chapter 15 DIGITIZING CYCLES Section DIGITIZING CYCLE IN AN ARC PATTERN Page X 5 5 Theoretical position value of the arc s center along the abscissa axis It must be defined in absolute coordinates Y 5 5 Theoretical position value of the arc s center along the ordinate axis It must be defined in absolute coordinates Z 5 5 Theoretical position value along the probing axis where the probe will be positioned before starting to digitize It must be defined in absolute coordinates When defining this position value both the maxim
238. ameter DFORMAT Page Chapter 5 JOG Section DISPLAY SELECTION ACTUAL AND FOLLOWING ERROR When selecting this option the CNC will show both the actual axes positions and their following errors 11 50 14 ACTUAL FOLLOWING ERROR X 00100 000 X 00000 002 Y 00150 000 Y 00000 003 Z 00004 269 Z 00000 003 U 00071 029 U 00000 001 V 00011 755 V 00000 002 F03000 0000 96100 00000 0000 100 T0000 D000 NT0000 ND000 S 0000 RPM G00 G17 G54 PARTC 000000 CY TIME 00 00 00 00 TIMER 000000 00 00 CONTINUOUS JOG MOVE CAP INS MM REFERENCE PRESET TOOL MDI USER DISPLAY MM SEARCH CALIBRAT SELECTION INCHES Chapter 5 Section Page JOG DISPLAY SELECTION 7 MM INCHES This softkey toggles the display units for the linear axes from millimeters to inches and vice versa The lower right hand window will indicate which units are selected at all times Note that this switching obviously does not affect the rotary axes which are shown in degrees Page Chapter 5 Section 8 JOG MM INCHES 5 1 JOGGING THE AXES 5 1 1 CONTINUOUS JOG Once the override of the jogging feedrate indicated by axis machine parameter JOGFEED has been selected with the switch at the Operator Panel press the jog keys corresponding to the desired axis and to the desired jogging direction X X Y Y Z Z 4 4 etc The axes can be jogged one at a time and in different ways depending
239. amming order Example Ifthe CNC controls the X Y Z U B C axes and is selected in the ZX plane G18 P122 PLANE assigns value 31 to parameter P122 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0011 0001 LSB Returns the number 1 to 6 according to the programming order corresponding to the longitudinal axis This will be the one selected with the G15 function and by default the axis perpendicular to the active plane if this is XY ZX or YZ Example If the CNC controls the X Y Z U B C axes and the U axis is selected P122 LONGAX assigns the value 4 to parameter 122 Returns in the 6 least significant bits in a group of 32 bits the status of the mirror image of each axis in the case of being active and 0 if not LSB Axis Axis 2 Axis 3 Axis 4 Axis 5 Axis 6 The name of the axis corresponds to the number 1 to 6 according to their programming order Example If the CNC controls axes X Y Z U B C Axis 1 X Axis2 Y Axis3 Z Axis4 U Axis5 B Axis6 C Chapter 13 Section Page PROGRAMMING INHIGH LEVELLANGUAGE OTHER VARIABLES 27 SCALE Returns the general scaling factor applied SCALE X C Returns the specific scaling factor of the axis indicated X C ORGROT Returns the turning angle of the coordinate system selected with the G73 function Its value is given in degrees Max 99999 9999 ROT
240. and exits Select the MODIFY option and define CHAMEFER Select corner 2 3 and press ENTER With Radius 10 ROUNDING Select corner 5 6 and press ENTER With Radius 10 CHAMEFER Select corner 6 7 and press ENTER With Radius 10 TANGENTIAL ENTRY Select corner 1 2 and press ENTER With Radius 5 TANGENTIAL EXIT Select corner 7 8 and press ENTER With Radius 5 Press ESC to quit the Modify option End of the editing process Press the FINISH softkey The CNC quits the profile editing mode and the shows the ISO coded program that has been generated Chapter 4 Section Page EDIT PROFILE EDITOR 13 85 68 o B L KOVO a lis 80 140 Profile definition without rounding Abscissa and ordinate of the starting point X 0 Y 68 Section 1 STRAIGHT LINE Xz0 Y 0 Section2 STRAIGHT LINE Xz30 Y 0 Section 3 STRAIGHT LINE Qt 90 Section 4 CLOCKWISE ARC RA 12 Tangent Yes Section 5 STRAIGHT LINE X 80 Y 6 35 Tangent Yes The CNC shows the possible solutions for sectio Section6 STRAIGHT LINE Section7 STRAIGHT LINE Section 8 COUNTER CLOCKWISE ARC Yes 5 4 Select the correct one X 140 Y 0 Ol 120 RA 25 Tangent Section9 CLOCKWISE ARC XC 85 YC 50 RA 20 Tangent Yes The CNC shows the possible solutions for section 8 Select the correct one Section 10 COUNTER CLOCKWISE ARC Section 11 STRAIGHT LINE Xz0 Y 68 RA 15 Tangent Yes 180 Tangent Yes The CNC
241. and vice versa To cancel TCP program G48 SO or G48 without parameters Itis also canceled after a home search G74 While TCP is on it is possible to Apply zero offsets G54 G59 Rotate the pattern coordinate system G73 Preset G92 G93 JOG in continuous or incremental moves and by electronic handwheel But it is not possible to Perform tracing operations G23 a G27 Probe G75 Do corner rounding or chamfering because in these instances tool orientation has to be maintained Compensate for tool length G43 because TCP already implies a particular length compensation CAD CAM programs usually program the coordinates of the spindle base Special care must be taken when turning G48 on and off When G48 is on the CNC shows the coordinates of the tool tip When G48 is off the CNC shows the coordinates of the tool base or theoretical tip unturned tool 2 3 COZ Y X Y Z X Y Z X Y Z xc 1 G48 off The CNC shows the coordinates of the tool tip 2 G48 is turned on The CNC still shows the coordinates of the tool tip 3 The tool is turned Since G48 is already on the CNC still shows the coordinates of the tool tip 4 G48 is turned off The CNC shows the coordinates of the theoretical tip unturned tool Chapter 17 Section Page COORDINATE TRANSFORMATION TCP TRANSFORMATION 19 When working with incline planes and TCP transformation the following programming o
242. angent ATAN which returns the result between 90 and ARG given between 0 and 360 Other functions ABS absolute value P1 ABS 8 gt P128 LOG decimallogarithm P2 LOG 100 gt P2 2 SORT square root P3 SQRT 16 gt P3 4 ROUND rounding up a number P4 ROUND 5 83 gt P4 6 FIX integer P5 FIX 5 423 gt P5 5 FUP if integer takes integer P6 FUP 7 gt P6 7 if not takes entire part 1 P6 FUP 5 423 gt P6 6 BCD converts given number to BCD P7 BCD 234 gt P7 564 0010 0011 0100 BIN converts given number to binary P8 BIN AB gt P8z171 1010 1011 Conversions to binary and BCD are made in 32 bits it being possible to represent the number 156 in the following formats Decimal 156 Hexadecimal 9C Binary 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 1001 1100 BCD 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0001 0101 0110 Page Chapter 13 Section 32 PROGRAMMINGINHIGH LEVELLANGUAGE OPERATORS 13 5 EXPRESSIONS An expression is any valid combination between operators constants and variables All expressions must be placed between brackets but if the expression is reduced to an integer the brackets can be removed 13 5 1 ARITHMETIC EXPRESSIONS These are formed by combining functions and arithmetic binary and trigonometric operators with the constants and variables of the language The way to operate with these expressions is established by operator priorities and t
243. anual Chap 12 13 amp Appendix Date February 1998 Software version 11 09 and newer FEATURE AFFECTED MANUAL AND CHAPTERS Cross compensation for an axis due to several axes Version history M 5 Date February 1998 Software version 13 01 and newer FEATURE AFFECTED MANUAL AND CHAPTERS Improved profile editor Operating Manual Chap 4 Machining in incline plane Installation Manual Programming Manual Chap Chap 3 10 and Appendix 13 17 and Appendix TCP transformation Installation Manual Programming Manual Chap Chap 9 and Appendix 17 Helical interpolation with several axes in linear interpolation Programming Manual Chap 6 GI with several positioning axes Programming Manual Chap 6 Sercos Installation Manual Chap 1 3 and 9 Tracing Modified algorithm parameter TRASTA trace status Installation Manual Chap 3 Handwheels with resolution amp direction parameters Installation Manual Chap 3 and 4 More data from CNC to PLC Installation Manual Programming Manual Chap Chap 10 and Appendix 13 and Appendix Spindle acceleration in open loop OPLACETI Installation Manual Chap 3 Improvements on tool change positions in irregular pockets with islands Programming Manual Chap 11 Dual spindle Installation Manual Programming Manual
244. approaching movement is made in two stages Ist Movement in the main work plane 2nd Movement along the longitudinal axis Probing Movement of the probe along the longitudinal axis at the indicated feedrate F until the probe signal is received The maximum distance to be travelled in the probing movementis 2B If after travelling that distance the CNC does notreceive the probe signal it will display the corresponding error code and stop the movement of the axes Withdrawal Movement ofthe probe in rapid G00 from the point where it probed to the point where the cycle was called The withdrawal movement is made in two stages lst Movementalong the longitudinal axis to the coordinate of the point along this axis from where the cycle was called 2nd Movement in the main work plane to the point where the cycle is called Once the cycle has been completed the CNC will have updated the tool offset selected at the time on the tool offset table value L and initialized the value of K to 0 it also returns the value ofthe global arithmetic parameter P299 Error detected Difference between the measured tool length and the one assigned to it in the table Page Chapter 12 Section RKI ITH A PROBE TOOLLENGTH Posen e CALIBRATION 12 44 PROBE CALIBRATING CANNED CYCLE This is used to calibrate the probe situated in the spindle This probe which previously must be calibrated in length will be the one used
245. apter To define the contours of a 2D pocket the plane profile 3 and the depth profile 4 for all the contours must be defined even if they are vertical The call function for a 2D or 3D irregular pocket canned cycle is G66 The machining of a pocket may consist of the following operations Drilling operation prior to machining Only on 2D pockets Roughing Operation eaae certe ie anhand et racha 2D and 3D pockets Semi finishing operation eeeeee Only on 3D pockets Finishing Operation ei decere eet pecie edges 2D and 3D pockets Chapter 11 Section Page 2D AND3DPOCKETS 1 11 1 2D POCKETS The G66 function is not modal therefore it must be programmed whenever it is required to perform a 2D pocket Ina block defining an irregular pocket canned cycle no other function can be programmed its structure definition being G66 DH RIFKSE D 0 9999 amp H 0 9999 Label number of the first block D and last block H defining the drilling operation When not setting H only block D is executed When not setting D there is no drilling operation R 0 9999 amp I 0 9999 Label number of the first block R and last block I defining the roughing operation When not setting I only block R is executed When not setting R there is no roughing operation F 0 9999 amp K 0 9999 Label number of the first block F and last block K defining the finishing op
246. apter 7 Section ADDITIONALPREPARATORY FUNCTIONS SLAVED AXIS 7 8 1 SLAVED AXIS G77 Function G77 allows the selection of both the master axis and the slaved axis axes The programming format is as follows G77 lt Axis 1 gt lt Axis 2 gt lt Axis 3 gt lt Axis 4 gt lt Axis 5 gt In which lt Axis 2 gt lt Axis 3 gt lt Axis 4 gt lt Axis 5 indicate the slave axes you wish to couple to the master axis lt Axis 1 gt You have to define lt Axis 1 gt and lt Axis 2 gt the programming of the rest of the axes being optional Example G77 X YU couples Y and U axes to X axis The following rules should be observed when doing electronic axis couplings You may use one or two different electronic couplings G77 XY U couples Y and U axes to X axis G77 V Z couples Z axis to V axis You cannot couple one axis to two others at the same time G77 V Y couples Y axis to V axis G77 X Y gives an error signal because Y axis is coupled to V axis You can couple several axes to one in successive steps G77 X Z couples Z axis to X axis G77 XU couples U axis to X axis gt Z U coupled to X G77 X Y couples Y axis to X axis Y Z U coupled to X A pair of axes which are already coupled to each other cannot be coupled to another axis G77 Y U couples U axis to Y axis GT X Y gives an error signal because Y axis is coupled to U axis Chapter 7 Section Page ADDITIONALPR
247. arameter PRODEL Page Chapter 12 Section 10 WORKING WITH A PROBE PROBE CALIBRATION 12 5 SURFACE MEASURING CANNED CYCLE A probe placed in the spindle will be used which must be previously calibrated by means of canned cycles Canned cycle for calibrating tool length Canned cycle for calibrating probe This cycle allows correcting the value of the tool offset of the tool which has been used in the surface machining process This correction will be used only when the measurement error exceeds a programmed value The programming format for this cycle is PROBE 3 X Y Z B K F C D L X 5 5 Theoretical coordinate along the X axis of the point over which it is required to measure Y 5 5 Theoretical coordinate along the Y axis of the point over which it is required to measure Z 5 5 Theoretical coordinate along the Z axis of the point over which it is required to measure B5 5 Definesthe safety distance Must be programmed with a positive value and over 0 The probe must be placed with respect to the point to be measured at a distance greater than this value when the cycle is called Chapter 12 Section Page WORKING WITH A PROBE SURFACE MEASURING 11 F5 5 D4 L5 5 Defines the axis with which it is required to measure the surface and will be defined by means of the following code 0 With the abscissa axis of the work plane 1 With the ordinate axis of the work plane
248. area for displaying DNC or user program messages and always displays the last message received irrespective of where it has come from Example MSG Check tool Page Chapter 14 Section 2 PROGRAM CONTROLSTATEMENTS DISPLAY STATEMENTS 14 3 ENABLING DISABLING STATEMENTS ESBLK and DSBLK After executing the mnemonic ESBLK the CNC executes all the blocks which come after as if it were dealing with a single block This single block treatment is kept active until itis cancelled by executing the mnemonic DSBLK In this way should the program be executed in the SINGLE BLOCK operating mode the group of blocks which are found between the mnemonics ESBLK and DSBLK will be executed in a continuous cycle i e execution will not be stopped at the end of a block but will continue by executing the following one Example G01 X10 Y10 F800 T1 D1 ESBLK Start of single block G02 X20 Y20 I20 J 10 G01 X40 Y20 G01 X40 Y40 F10000 G01 X20 Y40 F8000 DSBLK Cancellation of single block G01 X10 Y10 M30 ESTOP and DSTOP After executing the mnemonic DSTOP the CNC enables the Stop key as well as the Stop signal from the PLC Itwill remain disableduntilitis enabled once again by means ofthe mnemonic ESTOP EFHOLD and DFHOLD After executing the mnemonic DFHOLD the CNC enables the Feed Hold input from the PLC It will remain disabled until it is enabled once again by means of the mnemonic EFHOLD
249. assume a value of GO H5 5 Definesthefeedrate for the incremental paths It is given in mm min or inches min If not programmed the canned cycle assumes the F value sweeping feedrate F5 5 Defines the sweeping feedrate It is given in mm min or inches min P 0 9999 Defines the label number of the block where the geometric description of the various profiles of the part starts U 0 9999 Defines the label number of the block where the geometric description of the various profiles of the part ends All the programmed profiles outside and islands must be closed The profile programming rules as well as the programming syntax are described later on Chapter 16 Section Page TRACING ANDDIGITIZING TRACING CANNEDCYCLE 53 WITHPOLYGONALSWEEP BASIC OPERATION 1 The probe positions at the point set by parameters X Y and Z 2 The CNC approaches the probe to the model until it touches it 3 The probe keeps in constant contact with the surface of the model following it along the programmed path Ifitisto be digitized parameters L and E it will generate a new block per every digitized point in the program previously opened by means of the OPEN P statement 4 Once the canned cycle has concluded the probe will return to the starting point This movement consists of Movement of the probe along the Z axis longitudinal perpendicular axis to the position indicated by parameter Z
250. ate axis If these parameters are not defined the CNC performs the tracing of a closed contour Figure on the left Chapter 16 Section Page TRACINGANDDIGITIZING PLANEPROFILETRACING 41 CANNEDCYCLE A oes N 5 5 L5 5 This parameter must be defined when the contour is not closed In other words when Q and R have been defined It defines the length of the segment which indicates the end of the contour K2 1 Y QR K1 KO mp1648 K3 If not programmed the CNC assumes an infinite value This parameter must be defined when the contour is not closed In other words when Q and R have been defined It defines the direction of the segment which indicates the end of the contour 0 Towards positive abscissa coordinates Towards negative abscissa coordinates Towards positive ordinate coordinates Towards negative ordinate coordinates 1 2 3 If not programmed the CNC assumes KO Nominal Deflection Indicates the pressure kept by the probe while sweeping the surface of the model The deflection is given in the selected work units mm or inches and its value is usually comprised between 0 3mm and 1 5mm The tracing quality depends upon the amount of deflection being used the tracing feedrate and the geometry of the model In order to prevent the probe from separating from the model it is advised to use a profile tracing feedrate of about 1000 times the deflection value per minute For e
251. ate selected via PLC Feedrate selected by program Variables associated with function G32 PRGFIN Feedrate selected by program In 1 min Variables associated with Feedrate Override FRO PRGFRO DNCFRO PLCFRO CNCFRO Feedrate Override 26 active at the CNC Feedrate Override selected by program Feedrate Override selected by DNC Feedrate Override selected by PLC Feedrate Override selected from the front panel knob VARIABLES ASSOCIATED WITH POSITION VALUES Section 13 2 8 Variable E Q z A PPOS X C POS X C TPOS X C FLWE X C DEFLEX DEFLEY DEFLEZ DIST X C SU NE US QS AAAAAAA Theoretical programmed position value coordinate Real position value of the indicated axis Theoretical real lag position value of the indicated axis R Following error of the indicated axis Probe deflection along the X axis Mill model Probe deflection along the Y axis Mill model Probe deflection along the Z axis Mill model Distance travelled by the indicated axis VARIABLES ASSOCIATED WITH THE MAIN SPINDLE Section 13 2 9 Variable Q SREAL SPEED DNCS PLCS PRGS SSO PRGSSO DNCSSO PLCSSO CNCSSO SLIMIT DNCSL PLCSL PRGSL POSS RPOSS TPOSS RTPOSS FLWES m ON og iocus m W dica a aod ird E a m ON M d M da z Q Real spindle speed
252. ating that this key can be pressed to access the following page or the amp indicating that itis possible to press this key to access the previous page The following help is available OPERATING HELP Thisis accessed from the operating mode menu or when one of these has been selected but none of the options shown have been selected In all these cases the softkeys have a blue background color It offers information on the operating mode or corresponding option While this information is available on screen it is not possible to continue operating the CNC via the softkeys it being necessary to press the HELP key again to recover the information which was on the main screen before requesting help and continuing with the operation of the CNC The help system can also be abandoned by pressing the ESC key orthe MAIN MENU key EDITING HELP This is accessed once one of the editing options has been selected part programs PLC program tables machine parameters etc In all these cases the softkeys have a white background It offers information on the corresponding option While this information is available it is possible to continue operating with the CNC If the HELP key is pressed again the CNC analyzes if the present editing status corresponds to the same help page or not If another page corresponds to it it displays this instead of the previous one and if the same one corresponds it recovers the information
253. ation ERROR 1042 Wrong canned cycle parameter value It comes up in the following instances When parameter Q of the finishing operation has the wrong value When parameter B of the finishing operation has a 0 value When parameter J of the finishing operation has been programmed with a value greater than the finishing tool radius ERROR 1044 The plane profile intersects itself in an irregular pocket with islands Itcomes up when any ofthe plane profiles of the programmed contours intersects itself ERROR 1046 Wrong tool position prior to the canned cycle Itcomes up when calling the G66 cycle if the tool is positioned between the reference plane and the depth coordinate bottom of any of the operations ERROR 1047 Open plane profile in an irregular pocket with islands Itcomes up when any of the programmed contours does not begin and end at the same point It may be because G1 has not been programmed after the beginning with GO on any of the profiles ERROR 1048 The part surface coordinate top has not been programmed in an irregular pocket with islands It comes up when the first point of the geometry does not include the pocket top coordinate ERROR 1049 Wrong reference plane coordinate for the canned cycle It comes up when the coordinate of the reference plane is located between the part s top and bottom in any of the operations Chapter 11 Section Page 2D AND 3D POCKETS 2D POCKET ERRORS 19
254. ation is optional It will be programmed in a block which will need to bear a label number in order to indicate to the canned cycle the block where the roughing operation is defined Example G66 R100 C200 F300 S400 E500 Definition of the irregular pocket cycle N200 G67 Definition of the semi finish operation The function for the semi finishing operation is G67 and it cannot be executed independently from the G66 Both the roughing and the semi finishing operations are defined with G67 but in different blocks It is function G66 who indicates which is which by means of parameters R and n Its programming formatis G67 BIR VFS TDM B 45 5 Defines the machining step along the longitudinal axis semi finishing pass It must be programmed and with a value other than 0 Otherwise the semi finishing operation will be canceled i Ifprogrammed with a positive sign the whole semi finish operation will be carried out with the same machining pass and the canned cycle will calculate a pass equal or smaller than the one programmed Ifprogrammed with a negative sign the whole semi finish operation will be run with the programmed pass The canned cycle will adjust the last pass to obtain the total programmed depth I x5 5 Defines the total pocket depth and it is programmed in absolute coordinates If there is a roughing operation and it is not programmed the CNC tak
255. axes using the JOG keys or the electronic handwheel This option permits digitizing the model continuously as opposed to point by point It will be controlled by the CNC depending on the values assigned to digitizing parameters Function G24 Example The tracing zone is delimited between X100 YO and X150 Y50 the Z axis being the probing axis mp1612 G90 G01 X100 YO Z80 F1000 OPEN P234 Program receiving the data WRITE G90 G01 G05 F1000 G23 ZI 10N1 2 Tracing ON G24 L8 ES K1 Digitizing ON N10 G91 X50 Define the sweeping path pattern Y5 X 50 N20 Y5 RPT N10 N20 N4 X50 i G25 Tracing and digitizing OFF M30 Chapter 16 Section Page TRACING ANDDIGITIZING INTRODUCTION 3 Two dimensional Tracing Digitizing It contours the model To do this it is necessary to define the 2 axes which being controlled by the CNC follow the profile The contour defined by function G27 may be either closed where the initial and final points are the same or open where the initial and final points are not the same With this option it is possible to carry out a continuous digitizing of the model which will be controlled by the CNC depending on the values assigned to the digitizing parameters Function G24 Example of a closed contour cl Mrr lt w PS lo t mpi624 X G23 XY I50 J8 NO 8 Two dimensional tracing definition G24 L8 E5 K1 Digitizing definition G27
256. between 25 C and 70 C 13 F and 158 F Introduction 3 Protections of the unit itsel Power Supply Module It carries two fast fuses of 3 15 Amp 250V to protect the mains AC input Axes module All the digital inputs and outputs have galvanic isolation via optocouplers between the CNC circuitry and the outside They are protected by an external fast fuse F of 3 15 Amp 250V against reverse connection of the power supply Input Output Module All the digital inputs and outputs have galvanic isolation via optocouplers between the CNC circuitry and the outside They are protected by an external fast fuse F of 3 15 Amp 250V against a voltage overload greater than 33 Vdc and against reverse connection of the power supply Input Output and Tracing Module All the digital inputs and outputs have galvanic isolation via optocouplers between the CNC circuitry and the outside They are protected by an external fast fuse F of 3 15 Amp 250V against a voltage overload greater than 33 Vdc and against reverse connection of the power supply Fan Module It carries 1 or 2 external fuses depending on model The fuses are fast F of 0 4 Amp 250V to protect the fans Monitor The type of protection fuse depends on the type of monitor See the identification label of the unit itself Precautions during repair Do not manipulate the inside of the unit Only personnel authorized by Fagor Automation may manipulate the ins
257. bles and variables as their value cannot be altered with a program 13 4 OPERATORS An operator is a symbol which indicates mathematical or logic manipulations which must bemade The 8055 CNC has arithmetic relational logic binary trigonometric operators and special operators Arithmetic operators add P1 3 4 P1 7 subtraction also to indicate P2 5 2 gt P2 3 a negative number P3 2 3 gt P3 6 multiplication P4 2 3 gt P4 6 division P5 9 2 gt P5 4 5 MOD module remainder of a division P6 7 MOD 4 gt P6 3 EXP exponential P7 2 EXP 3 gt P7 8 Relational operators EQ equal NE different GT greater than GE greater than or equal to LT less than LE less than or equal to Logic or binary operators NOT OR AND XOR act as logic operators between conditions and as binary operators between variables and constants IF FIRST AND GS1 EQ 1 GOTO N100 P5 P1 AND NOT P2 OR P3 Chapter 13 Section Page PROGRAMMINGINHIGH LEVELLANGUAGE CONSTANTS AND 31 OPERATORS Trigonometric functions SIN sine P1 SIN 30 gt P1 0 5 COS _ cosine P2 COS 30 gt P2 0 8660 TAN tangent P3 TAN 30 gt P3 0 5773 ASIN arc sine P4 ASIN 1 gt P4 90 ACOS arc cosine P5 ACOS 1 gt P5 0 ATAN arc tangent P6 ATAN 1 gt P6 45 ARG ARG x y arc tangent y x P7 ARG 1 2 gt P7 243 4349 There are two functions for calculating the arc t
258. c is selected the CNC recovers all the graphic conditions zoom graphic parameters and display area which were active during the last type of graphic selected The selected type of graphics will display the following information to the right of the screen EXECUTION P000662 N 00172 871 00153 133 00004 269 03000 000 Chapter 3 EXECUTE SIMULATE Section GRAPHICS Page 21 The current real axes position The tool position values will indicate the position of the tool tip The axes feedrate F and the spindle speed S currently selected The active tool T and tool offset D The point of view used for the graphic display It is defined by the X Y Z axes and it can be modified by means of the VIEWPOINT softkey Two cubes or rectangles depending on the type of point of view selected The cube whose sides are colored indicates the graphic area currently selected and the one drawn only with lines shows the size of display area being selected When the point of view shows a single cube side or when the selected type of graphics corresponds to one of the XY XZ or YZ planes the CNC will display two rectangles indicating the graphic area colored rectangle and the display area being selected non colored rectangle Page Chapter 3 Section EXECUTE SIMULATE GRAPHICS This CNC will display all machining operations performed with the tool along either the X Y or Z axi
259. canned cycle will assume a KO value Both types of intersection are described later on Defines the tool penetrating feedrate Ifnot programmed or programmed with a value of 0 the CNC will assume 50 of the feedrate in the plane F Optional Defines the machining feedrate in the plane Optional Defines the spindle speed Defines the tool used for the roughing operation It must be programmed Optional Defines the tool offset number Optional Up to 7 miscellaneous M functions can be programmed This operation allows M06 with an associated subroutine to be defined and the tool change is performed before beginning the roughing operation Chapter 11 Section Page 2D AND 3D POCKETS 2D POCKETS FINISHING 11 11 1 4 PROFILE PROGRAMMING RULES When outside and inside profiles of an irregular pocket are programmed the following programming rules must be followed l All types of programmed profiles must be closed The following examples cause a geometry error No profile must intersect itself The following examples cause a geometry error MP1111 When more than one outside profile has been programmed the canned cycle assumes the one occupying the largest surface ar It is not required to program inside profiles Should these be programmed they must be partially or totally internal with respect to the outside profile Some examples are given below y Go cr MP1113 MP1114 An inte
260. ce Must be programmed with a positive value and over 0 The probe must be placed with respect to the point to be measured at a distance greater than double this value when the cycle is called F5 5 Defines the probing feedrate in mm min or inch min Page Chapter 12 Section RKI ITH A PROBE OUTSIDE CORNER AND Ne Ne UN ANGLE MEASURING Basic operation MP1814 1 Approach Movement of the probe in rapid GOO from the point where the cycle is called to the first approach point situated at a distance B from the first face to be probed The approaching movement is made in two stages Ist Movement in the main work plane 2nd Movement along the longitudinal axis 2 Probing Movement of the probe along the abscissa axis at the indicated feedrate F until the probe signal is received The maximum distance to be travelled in the probing movementis 3B If after travelling that distance the CNC does notreceive the probe signal it will display the corresponding error code and stop the movement of the axes 3 Withdrawal Movement of the probe in rapid G00 from the point where it probed to the first approach point Chapter 12 Section Page WORKING WITH A PROBE S ENGLEMEASURING 25 4 Second approach Movement of the probe in rapid G00 from the first approach point to the second situated at a distance 2B from the second face to be probed The approaching movement is made
261. cetua vimcd ane 1 14 2 BUDD SRM gs sets OO OT 0 E TOOL 2 14 3 Enabling ddisablinyg SUUTOHMETIEO Lise eere tnra Peck ES Re pA ER Ye ars O OAAR ERN AEEA 3 14 4 BLOW COME statements 12 reo aM Eoo ERIS AME BEP REISEN RM aa Oaa 4 14 5 SDr NE SCREEN ao re npe RR RP Re O ERU Qr URN E one rere ene URP 6 14 5 1 Interruption subroutine SPAN CHME a WEE o 1 12 14 6 Statements for generatine programis aneneen a aa A ERAR 13 14 7 Screen customizing statements graphic editor i cccsssicasscantasneopsvsisasncmnateseomienncasaeeans 15 EN Chapter 15 DIGITIZING CYCLES 15 1 Din uzin Cy Cle in grid DAS uu aped be Ib bre rt BUR RUN aaa 2 15 2 Digitizing cycle inan are DOUGEIU casicainiertancaincevacaveunsdcans na ERER ERER EREEREER 5 Section Page Le Chapter 16 TRACING AND DIGITIZING 16 1 DE ey ee ee eee ee ee ee eee te eee 1 16 1 1 General COUSIICIAN ONG sincsinirstenie 0 1 0 Riemer i 16 2 26 Calibration of the traciue DIO BS isa ier i iba RE RES E a IRR IR VR MENO KE ERN XR UG 9 16 3 EUER Verb Utd M sss cd T o 0 D oT 11 16 3 1 G23 Activate Manual TACNE aeuum etos rk E ER Pa a e EARS 12 16 3 2 323 Aetv te ca esdonensional tating serniciiueni innsinn dees 14 16 3 3 023 Activate two dimensional GOGH sninen 16 16 3 4 323 Activate thr dimensional tracing sueco eoSEpRRP e RUpC RR SPPARUP ERE aaie 18 16 4 G27 Tracing contour definito socordia thes qao sta v kn qua ta Mme ERE quiae Va son RE MES 20 16 5 G2 Deac VALS AiE iiie D o 0 1 D 0 0 0 S 24 16
262. closed In other words when Q and R have been defined Page Chapter 16 Section 46 TRACINGANDDIGITIZING 3 DPROFILETRACING CANNEDCYCLE M5 5 N 5 5 L 5 5 It defines the direction of the segment which indicates the end of the contour 0 Towards positive abscissa coordinates 1 Towards negative abscissa coordinates 2 Towards positive ordinate coordinates 3 Towards negative ordinate coordinates If not programmed the CNC assumes KO Nominal deflection of the probing axis longitudinal perpendicular If not programmed the canned cycle will assume the value of 1mm 0 03937 Nominal deflection of the axes forming the plane M and N indicate the pressure kept by the probe while sweeping the surface of the model The deflection is given in the selected work units mm or inches and its value is usually comprised between 0 3mm and 1 5mm Thetracing quality depends upon the amount of deflection being used the tracing feedrate and the geometry of the model In order to prevent the probe from separating from the model it is advised to use aprofile tracing feedrate of about 1000 times the deflection value per minute For example for a deflection value of 1mm the tracing feedrate would be 1 m min If not programmed the canned cycle will assume the value of 1mm 0 03937 This parameter must be defined when digitizing a part besides tracing it It indicates the sweeping step of distance betw
263. continuous execution no message will appear and if SINGLE BLOCK it will display the message SINGLE BLOCK Chapter 3 Section EXECUTE SIMULATE SINGLEBLOCK Page 35 4 EDIT This operating mode will be used to edit modify or look at a part program Enterthe program number up to 6 digits from the keyboard or by selecting it with the cursor from the CNC s part program directory and then pressing ENTER Move the cursor on the screen line by line with the up and down arrow keys or page by page with the page up and page down keys Once the program number has been entered the CNC will display the softkeys for the following options EDIT See section 4 1 To edit new lines in the selected program MODIFY See section 4 2 To modify an existing line of the program FIND See section 4 3 To search a string of characters within a program REPLACE See section 4 4 To replace a string of characters with another DELETE BLOCK See section 4 5 To delete a block or group of blocks MOVE BLOCK See section 4 6 To move a block or group of blocks within a program COPY BLOCK See section 4 7 To copy a block or group of blocks to another program position COPY TO PROGRAM See section 4 8 To copy a block or group of blocks into a different program INCLUDE PROGRAM See section 4 9 To insert the contents of another program into the one currently selected EDITOR PARAMETERS See section 4 1
264. coordinates of the axes are programmed via the letter of the axis X Y Z U V W A B C always in this order followed by the coordinate value The values of the coordinates are absolute or incremental depending on whether it is working in G90 or G91 and its programming format is 5 5 Y Chapter 3 Section Page PROGRAMMING 7 AXES AND COORDINATESYSTEMS OFCOORDINATES 3 5 2 POLAR COORDINATES In the event of the presence of circular elements or angular dimensions the coordinates of the different points on the plane 2 axes at the same time it may be easier to express them in polar coordinates The reference point is called Polar Origin and this will be the origin of the Polar Coordinate System A point on this system would be defined by Y The RADIUS R the distance between the polar origin and the point The ANGLE Q formed by the abscissa axis and the line which joins the polar origin with the point in degrees The values R and Q are absolute or incremental depending on whether you are working with G90 or G91 and their programming format will be R 5 5 Q 5 5 The R values may be negative when programming in incremental coordinates but the resulting value assigned to the radius must always be positive If a Q value over 3600 is programmed the module will be taken after dividing it by 360 Thus Q420 is the same a Q60 and Q 240 is the same as Q 60 Page Chapter 3 Section
265. counter of the CNC Flag to indicate first time of program execution keystroke code Keystroke source 0 keyboard 1 PLC 2 DNC Voltage in volts of the indicated analog input n Voltage in volts to apply to the indicated output n Active CNC error number Active PLC error number Number of the error generated during DNC communications Attention The KEY variable can be written at the CNC only via the user channel APPENDIX C HIGH LEVEL PROGRAMMING DISPLAY STATEMENTS Section 14 2 ERROR whole number error text Stops execution of program and displays indicated error MSG message Displays indicated message ENABLING DISABLING STATEMENTS Section 14 3 ESBLK and DSBLK The CNC executes all the blocks which are found between ESBLK and DSBLK as if they were a single block ESTOP and DSTOP Enable ESTOP and disable DSTOP of the Stop key and the external Stop signal PLC EFHOLD and DFHOLD Enable EFHOLD and disable DFHOLD of the Feed Hold input PLC FLOW CONTROLLING STATEMENTS Section 14 4 GOTO N expression Causes a jump within the same program to the block defined by label N expression RPT N expression N expression Repeats the execution of the part of a program existing between two blocks defined by means of labels N expression IF condition lt action1 gt ELSE lt action2 gt Analyzesthe
266. creen as well as the status of the program being executed This can be used in any operating mode In order to recover the previous display it is necessary to press the keys using the same sequence Chapter 1 Section Page OVERVIEW KEYBOARD LAYOUT 5 1 3 OPERATOR PANEL LAYOUT According to the utility which the different parts have it can be considered that the Operator Panel of the CNC is divided in the following way SPINDLE Gece Be m 3 AMAA A 1 Position of the emergency button or electronic handwheel 2 Keyboard for manual movement of axes 3 Selector switch with the following functions Select the multiplication factor of the number of pulses from the electronic handwheel 1 10 or 100 Select the incremental value of the movement of the axes in movements made in the JOG mode Modify the programmed axis feedrate between 0 and 120 4 Keyboard whichallows the spindle to be controlled it being possible to activate itin the desired direction stop it or vary the programmed turning speed between percentage values established by means of spindle machine parameters MINSOVR and MAXOVR with an incremental step established by means of the spindle machine parameter SOVRSTEP 5 Keyboard for CYCLE START and CYCLE STOP of the block or program to be executed Page Chapter 1 Section 6 OVERVIEW OPERATOR PANEL LAYOUT 2 e OPERATING MODES After turning
267. cremental coordinates G90 X0 YO Point PO G91 X150 5 Y200 Point Pl X149 5 Point P2 X 300 Y 200 Point PO On power up after executing M02 M30 or after an EMERGENCY or RESET the CNC will assume G90 or G91 according to the definition by the general machine parameter ISYSTEM Page Chapter 3 Section 6 AXES AND COORDINATESYSTEMS ABSOEE TE INCREMENTAL G91 3 5 PROGRAMMING OF COORDINATES The FAGOR 8055 CNC allows the selection of up to 6 of the 9 possible axes X Y Z U V W A B C Each of these may be linear linear to position only normal rotary rotary to position only or rotary with hirth toothing positioning in complete degrees according to the specification in the machine parameter of each AXISTYPE axis With the aim of always selecting the most suitable coordinate programming system the CNC has the following types Cartesian coordinates Polar coordinates Cylindrical coordinates Angle and one Cartesian coordinate 3 5 1 CARTESIAN COORDINATES The Cartesian Coordinate System is defined by two axes on the plane and by three four or five axes in space The origin of all these which in the case of the axes X Y Z coincides with the point of intersection is called Cartesian Origin or Zero Point of the Coordinate System The position of the different points of the machine is expressed in terms of the coordinates of the axes with two three four or five coordinates The
268. cted the variables and trigger conditions desired press the EXECUTE TRACE softkey to indicate to the CNC to begin the data capture When the selected trigger condition is met the trigger line displayed at the information window will change its color While the trace is being executed the information window will display the message Trace Status CAPTURING The trace will be completed when the internal memory buffer dedicated to this function is full or it is interrupted by pressing the STOP TRACE softkey At this point the information window will show the message Trace Status COMPLETE Page Chapter 9 Section 32 PLC LOGICANALYZER 9 10 3 1 DATA CAPTURE The data capture takes place at the beginning of each cycle PRG and PE after reading the physical inputs and updating the marks corresponding to the CNC logic outputs and just before starting the PLC program execution Use this instruction to carry out another data capture while executing the PLC cycle This instruction permits the data capture of signals changing at frequencies greater than the cycle time as well as of those changing status during the execution of the cycle while keeping it the same at the beginning and at the end of the cycle Example of how to use the TRACE instruction PRG TRACE Data capture TRACE Data capture TRACE Data capture END PES TRACE Data capture END The data capture in the execution
269. cted to ground In order to avoid electrical discharges make sure that all the grounding connections are properly made Do not work in humid environments In order to avoid electrical discharges always work under 90 of relative humidity non condensing and 45 C 113 F Do not work in explosive environments In order to avoid risks damage do no work in explosive environments Precautions against product damage Working environment This unit is ready to be used in Industrial Environments complying with the directives and regulations effective in the European Community Fagor Automation shall not be held responsible for any damage suffered or caused when installed in other environments residential or homes Install the unit in the right place Itis recommended whenever possible to instal the CNC away from coolants chemical product blows etc that could damage it This unit complies with the European directives on electromagnetic compatibility Nevertheless it is recommended to keep it away from sources of electromagnetic disturbance such as Powerful loads connected to the same AC power line as this equipment Nearby portable transmitters Radio telephones Ham radio transmitters Nearby radio TC transmitters Nearby arc welding machines Nearby High Voltage power lines Etc Ambient conditions The working temperature must be between 5 C and 45 C 41 F and 113 F The storage temperature must be
270. cting the desired incremental move at the switch if a jog key is pressed X X Y Y Z Z 44 4 etc the corresponding axis will move the selected distance in the selected direction If while jogging an axis the key is pressed the axis will move at a feedrate established by machine parameter GOOFEED for this axis as long as this key stays pressed When releasing this key the axis will recover the previous feedrate with its override 46 Page Chapter 5 Section 10 JOG INCREMENTAL JOG 5 1 3 JOGGING WITH ELECTRONIC HANDWHEEL Itis possible to use the electronic handwheel to jog the axes To do this select one of the Handwheel positions indicated by A at the feedrate override switch of the Operator Panel The handwheel positions available are 1 10 and 100 which indicate the multiplying factor for the pulses generated by the handwheel This way after applying the multiplying factor to the handwheel pulses the jogging units are obtained for the axis These units correspond to the display resolution units Example Display format 5 3 in mm or 4 4 in inches Switch position Distance per turn 1 0 100 mm or 0 0100 inch 10 1 000 mm or 0 1000 inches 100 10 000 mm or 1 0000 inches Next press the desired jog key to move the axis The letter of the selected axis will appear highlighted on the screen Ifa FAGOR handwheel with axis selector button is used the axis will be selected with such button
271. ctivated via PLC PORGF Abscissa coordinate value of polar origin PORGS Ordinate coordinate value of polar origin ORG X C n Zero offset n value of the selected axis PLCOF X C Value of the additive Zero Offset activated via PLC VARIABLES ASSOCIATED WITH FUNCTION G49 Section 13 2 4 Variables associated with the definition of function G49 Variable ORGROX ORGROY ORGROZ ORGROA ORGROB ORGROC ORGROQ ORGROR ORGROS AAA AAAAAA AAAAAAAAA AAA AA AAAA X coordinate of the new part zero with respect to home Y coordinate of the new part zero with respect to home Z coordinate of the new part zero with respect to home Value assigned to parameter A Value assigned to parameter B Value assigned to parameter C Value assigned to parameter Q Value assigned to parameter R Value assigned to parameter S Variables updated by the CNC once G49 has been executed Position to be occupied by the spindle s main rotary axis Position to be occupied by the spindle s secondary rotary axis Variable MPGn MP X C n MPSn MPSSn MPASn MPLCn AAADAAD AAAAAD Value assigned to general machine parameter n Value assigned to machine parameter n of the axis X C Value assigned to machine parameter n of the main spindle Value assigned to machine parameter n of the second spindle Value assigned to machine parameter n of the au
272. current PLC PRG source program As indicated above the source program does not even have to be in the CNC directory Page Chapter 9 Section 2 PLC 9 1 EDIT Once this option is selected indicate with the corresponding softkey the PLC program to be edited The PLC program PLC PRG The PLC error file PLC ERR The PLC message file PLC MSG The cursor can be moved line by line with the up and down arrow keys or page by page with the page up and page down keys The cursor position or line number will be displayed in a white window inside the communications window bottom of the screen next to the CAP INS indicator window This operating mode offers various options which are described next Once any of these functions is selected the CNC shows an editing area on the CRT where the cursor may be moved by using the up down and right left arrow keys Also the up arrow key positions the cursor over the first character of the editing area and the down arrow key positions the cursor over the last character EDIT With this option it is possible to edit new lines or blocks of the selected program Before pressing this softkey the block after which the new ones will be added must be selected with the cursor The program will be edited written a block at a time and each block can be written in ISO language High Level language or it can be just a program comment Once this option is selected the
273. cute function G23 G25 or to define the tracing path since it is already taken care of by the canned cycle itself When copying machining while tracing it is not possible to compensate for probe deflection Therefore itis recommended to use a machining tool whose radius is equal to or smaller than the radius of the probe tip ball minus the amount of stylus deflection being applied For example When using a 9 mm diameter ball 4 5 mm radius with a maximum deflection of 2mm a 5mm diameter 2 5 mm radius tool should be used Chapter 16 Section Page TRACINGANDDIGITIZING CONSIDERATIONS 7 About digitizing Digitizing consists in taking capturing points coordinates of the machine during the tracing process and send them to a file previously opened with the OPEN P statement In order to digitize a model it is necessary to either execute one of the tracing digitizing canned cycles TRACE or define the path to be followed by the probe on the surface of the model once the tracing G23 and digitizing G24 functions have been activated The CNC captures points on the model surface depending on the parameters indicated when defining function G24 or in the JOG mode whenever the operator presses the external push button or corresponding softkey During the digitizing of the model the CNC only controls the movements of the X Y and Z axes Therefore the generated program blocks will only contain the information on so
274. cution of the program If when executing the M miscellaneous function this is not defined in the M functions table the programmed function will be executed at the beginning of the block and the CNC will wait for the AUX END to continue the execution of the program Some of the miscellaneous functions are assigned an internal meaning in the CNC If while executing the associated subroutine of an M miscellaneous function there is a block containing the same M this will be executed but not the associated subroutine Attention All the miscellaneous M functions which have an associated subroutine must be programmed alone in a block Page Chapter 5 Section 12 PROGRAMMING BY ISO CODE COMPLEMENTARY FUNCTIONS FS T D M 5 5 5 1 M00 PROGRAM STOP When the CNC reads code MOO in a block it interrupts the program To start up again press CYCLE START We recommend that you set this function in the table of M functions in such a way that it is executed at the end of the block in which it is programmed 5 5 5 2 M01 CONDITIONAL PROGRAM STOP This is identical to MOO except that the CNC only takes notice of it if the signal MOI STOP from the PLC is active high logic level 5 5 5 3 M02 END OF PROGRAM This code indicates the end of program and carries out a General Reset function of the CNC returning it to original state It also carries out the MO5 function It is recommen
275. d These are optional and define the movement of the axes of the main plane to position the tool at the machining point This point can be programmed in cartesian coordinates or in polar coordinates and the coordinates may be absolute or incremental along whether the machine is operating in G90 or G91 Defines the reference plane coordinate It can be programmed in absolute coordinates or incremental coordinates and in this case will be referred to the initial plane Ifthisis not programmed the CNC will take the position occupied by the tool at that moment as the reference plane Defines boring depth Itcan be programmed in absolute coordinates or incremental coordinates and in this case will be referred to the reference plane Defines the dwell time in hundredths of a second after each boring step until the withdrawal begins Should this not be programmed the CNC will take a value of KO MP0934 Chapter 9 Section Page CANNED CYCLES BORINGWITHWITHDRAWAL 41 ING01 G89 Basic operation 1 Ifthe spindle was in operation previously its turning direction is maintained If it was not in movement it will start by turning clockwise M03 2 Rapid movement of the longitudinal axis from the initial plane to the reference plane 3 Movement at the working feedrate G01 of the longitudinal axis to the bottom of the machined hole and boring 4 Spindle stop M05 5 Withdrawal at working feedrate of th
276. d the present subroutine will lose its modal quality and the new subroutine selected will be changed to modal Chapter 14 Section Page PROGRAM CONTROLSTATEMENTS SUBRUTINESTATEMENTS 9 MDOFF The mnemonic MDOFF indicates that the modal quality acquired by the subroutine with the MCALL mnemonic finishes in this block The use of modal subroutines simplifies programming Zh Example G90 G00 X30 Y50 Z0 PCALL 10 P0220 P1210 G90 G00 X60 Y50 Z0 PCALL 10 PO 10 P1220 M30 SUB 10 G91 G01 XPO F5000 MCALL 11 G91 G01 YP1 G91 G01 X P0 G91 G01 Y P1 MDOFF RET SUB 11 G81 G98 G91 Z 8 I 22 F1000 S5000 T1 D1 G84 Z 8 I 22 K15 F500 S2000 T2 D2 G80 RET PROBE expression assignment statement assignment statement The mnemonic PROBE calls the probe cycle indicated by means of a number or any expression which results in a number In addition it allows the local parameters of this subroutine to be initialized by means of assignment statements This mnemonic also generates a new level of subroutine nesting Page 10 Chapter 14 Section PROGRAMCONTROLSTATEMENTS SUBRUTINESTATEMENTS DIGIT expression assignment statement assignment statement The mnemonic DIGIT calls the digitizing cycle by means of a number or any expression which results in a number It also allows resetting the local parameters of such cycle by means of the assignment state
277. d by X and Y axes Chapter 10 Section Page MULTIPLEMACHINING 1 10 1 G60 MULTIPLE MACHINING IN A STRAIGHT LINE PATTERN The programming format of this cycle is as follows G60 A X IPORSTUV X K I K A 5 5 Defines the angle which forms the machining path with the abscissa axis It is expressed in degrees and if not programmed the value A 0 will be taken X 5 5 Defines the length of the machining path 1 5 5 Defines the pitch between machining operations K 5 Definesthe number oftotal machining operations in the section including the machining definition point Due to the fact that machining may be defined with any two points of the X I K group the CNC allows the following definition combinations XL XK IK Nevertheless if format XI is defined care should be taken to ensure that the number of machining operations is an integer number otherwise the CNC will show the corresponding error code Page Chapter 10 Section 2 MULTIPLEMACHINING INASTRAIGHTLINE PATTER G60 P Q R S T U V These parameters are optional and are used to indicate at which points or between which those programmed points it is not required to machine Thus programming P7 indicates that it is not required to do machining at point 7 and programming Q10 013 indicates that machining is not required from point 10 to 13 orexpressed in another way that no machining is required at points 10 11 12 and 13 When i
278. d every time you wish to indicate the coordinates referred to machine zero This function temporarily cancels radius and tool length compensation Example YA A BO ee ene BO peers p G90 G1 X30 Y20 10 esee G90 G53 G1 X100 Y70 45 10 30 w X S 100 M Machine Reference Zero home W Part Zero Chapter 4 Section Page REFERENCESYSTEMS 3 4 4 PRESETTING OF COORDINATES AND ZERO OFFSETS The CNC allows you to carry out zero offsets with the aim of using coordinates related to the plane of the part without having to modify the coordinates of the different points of the part at the time of programming The zero offset is defined as the distance between the part zero point of origin of the part and the machine zero point of origin of the machine Z M Machine zero W Part zero This zero offset can be carried out in one of two ways Via Function G92 coordinate preset The CNC accepts the coordinates of the programmed axes after G92 as new axis values Via the use of zero offsets G54 G55 G56 G57 G58 G59 The CNC accepts as a new part zero the point located relative to machine zero at the distance indicated by the selected table s Both functions are modal and incompatible so if one is selected the other is disabled There is moreover another zero offset which is governed by the PLC This offset is always added to the zero offset selected and is used among other thi
279. d part Page 1023 High level accessible variables 4th part Page 1024 High level accessible variables 5th part Page 1025 High level accessible variables 6th part Page 1026 High level accessible variables 7th part Page 1027 High level accessible variables 8th part Page 1028 High level accessible variables 9th part Page 1029 High level accessible variables 10th part Page 1030 Highlevel accessible variables 11th part Page 1031 Highlevelaccessible variables 12th part Page 1032 Arithmetic operators 16 SYNTAX ASSISTANCE ISO LANGUAGE Page Page Page Page Page 1033 1034 1035 1036 1037 Page 1038 Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page 1039 1040 1041 1042 1043 1044 1045 1046 1047 1048 1049 1050 1051 1052 1053 1054 1055 1056 1057 1058 1059 1060 1061 1062 1063 1064 1065 1066 1067 Program block structure Positioning and linear interpolation G00 G01 1st part Positioning and linear interpolation G00 G01 2nd part Circular helical interpolation G02 G03 1st part Circular helical interpolation G02 G03 2nd part Circular helical interpolation G02 G03 Arc tangent to previous path G08 1st part Arc tangent to provious path G08 2nd part Arc defined by three points G09 1st part Arc defined by three points G09 2nd part Threadcutting
280. d the colors used to draw the tool paths The modifications made to any parameter are immediately assumed by the CNC and can be made during the execution or simulation of the part program The softkey options displayed by the CNC are SIMULATION SPEED With this option it is possible to modify the percentage of the speed used by the CNC to execute the part programs in the simulation modes The CNC will display a window at the top right hand side of the screen indicating the current of simulation speed This value can be modified by using the right and left arrow keys Once the desired value is selected press ENTER to validate the new value Press ESC to quit this function without making any changes to this field PATH COLORS With this option it is possible to modify the colors used to draw the various tool paths in the execution and simulation modes They can only be used in line graphics XZ The available parameters are The color for representing rapid moves The color for representing path without compensation The color for representing path with compensation The color for representing threading The color for representing canned cycles The CNC will show a series of windows for the definition of graphics parameters Among the various colors to choose from there is a black or transparent one If this one is chosen for a particular path this path will not be displayed on the screen If any of them is to be modified fi
281. d throughout this chapter the following definitions are provided Tracing The probe moves following the indicated path and keeping its stylus in contact with the model surface at all times Copying Itrequires a machine with a second spindle or with a copying arm where the tracing probe is mounted while the machining tool goes on the main spindle Copying consists in machining a part while tracing a model The machined part will be a copy of the traced model Digitizing Consists in capturing the machine coordinates of the part while being traced and send them to a file previously opened by means of the OPEN P instruction In order to digitize the tracing function G23 must be activated whether the partis going to be copied or not The model can be traced and digitized in two ways Manually It allows the operator to move the probe by hand on and along the surface of the model Automatically The probe movements are controlled by the CNC which offers the following choices By activating one of these canned cycles TRACE 1 Tracing Digitizing in a grid pattern TRACE 2 Tracing Digitizing in an arc pattern TRACE 3 Profile Tracing Digitizing in the plane TRACE 4 3 D Profile Tracing Digitizing in space TRACE 5 Profile Tracing Digitizing with polygonal sweep By activating the tracing G23 and digitizing G24 functions In this case the path to be followed by the probe must be defined The available options are One dimensional t
282. d tool pocket Before pressing this softkey select with the cursor the tool pocket to be modified Once this option is selected the softkeys will change colors and they will appear against a white background showing the information relative to each field On the other hand it is possible to get HELP on any editing commands by pressing the HELP key To quit this mode press the HELP key again By pressing ESC the text appearing in the editing window will disappear corresponding to the selected magazine pocket From this instant on the desired pocket may be edited again To quit the modify mode delete the information shown in the editing zone by using the CL or the ESC key and then press ESC The table will keep the previous values Once the selected magazine pocket has been changed press ENTER so the new table values are assumed Chapter 6 Section Page TABLES TOOLMAGAZINETABLE 19 FIND This option is used to carry out a search in a table When selecting this option the softkeys will change their color to a white background and the following options will appear BEGINNING This softkey positions the cursor over the first table position and it quits the find mode END This softkey positions the cursor over the last table position and it quits the find mode POSITION This softkey searches the desired tool pocket and positions the cursor over it After pressing this softkey t
283. ded to set this function in the table of M functions in such a way that it is executed at the end of the block in which it is programmed 5 5 5 4 M30 END OF PROGRAM WITH RETURN TO FIRST BLOCK Identical to M02 except that the CNC returns to the first block of the program 5 5 5 5 M03 CLOCKWISE SPINDLE ROTATION This code represents clockwise spindle start As explained in the corresponding section the CNC automatically executes this code in the machining canned cycles It is recommended to set this function in the table of M functions so that it is executed at the beginning of the block in which it is programmed 5 5 5 6 M04 COUNTER CLOCKWISE SPINDLE ROTATION This code represents counter clockwise spindle start We recommend that you set this function in the table of M functions so that it is executed at the beginning of the block in which it is programmed 5 5 5 7 M05 SPINDLE STOP It is recommended to set this function in the table of M functions so that it is executed at the end of the block in which it is programmed Chapter 5 Section Page COMPLEMENTARY 13 5 5 5 8 M06 TOOL CHANGE If the general machine parameter TOFFMO06 indicating that it is a machining center is active the CNC sends instructions to the tool changer and updates the table corresponding to the tool magazine It is recommended to set this function in the table of M functions so that the subroutine corresponding to the
284. defined by three points G36 Automatic radius blend controlled corner rounding G39 Chamfer G53 Programming with respect to machine reference zero home G70 Inch programming G71 Metric programming G90 Absolute programming G9 Incremental programming G93 Polarorigin preset 6 The profile description does notallow mirrorimage scaling factors pattern rotation zero offsets etc 7 Itis not possible eitherto program blocks in high level language such as jumps calls to subroutines or parametric programming 8 No other canned cycles can be programmed Page Chapter 16 Section 56 TRACINGANDDIGITIZING TRACINGCANNEDCYCLE WITHPOLYGONALSWEEP Programming example TRACE 5 A Z I C D N L E G H F P400 U500 N400 X 260 Y 190 Z4 5 N500 X 120 Y90 Beginning of first outside profile Beginning of an inside profile Beginning of another inside profile End of geometric description Chapter 16 TRACINGANDDIGITIZING Section TRACINGCANNEDCYCLE WITHPOLYGONALSWEEP Page 57 I 7 e COORDINATE TRANSFORMATION The description of the general coordinate transformation is divided into three basic features Movement in the incline plane G49 Tool movement according to the tool coordinate system G47 TCP transformation Tool Center Point G48 For a better understanding of coordinate transformation three machine coordinate systems will be considered in the f
285. dius blend eene 6 10 G37 Tangential entry uoce Rer Ee 6 8 G38 Tangential exit 5n outer E ER Pet 6 9 G39 Automatic chamfer blend see 6 11 G40 s Cancellation of tool radius compensation 8 1 G41 Right hand tool radius compensation 8 1 G42 3 b Left hand tool radius compensation esses 8 1 G43 i Tool length compensation eeeeeeeeeeene 8 2 G44 T Cancellation of tool length compensation 8 2 G47 Tool movement acoording tool coordinate system 17 2 G48 TCP transformation eese 17 3 G49 Incline plane definition ee 17 1 G50 T Controlled corner rounding eee 7 3 3 G51 x LOOk ANE ad EE E 7 4 G52 Movement until making contact eee 6 13 G53 Program coordinates with respect to home 4 3 Page Chapter 5 Section 2 PROGRAMMING BY ISO CODE PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS Function M D V Meaning Section G54 T Absolute zero offset Lanssens arinei iens 4 4 2 G55 B Absolute zero offset 2 sesssseeeeeeeme 4 4 2 G56 Absolute zero offset 3 sessseeseseeeeee 4 4 2 G57 Absolute zero offset 4 esssessseeeeee 4 4 2 G58 i Additive zero offset 1 sursei sese 4 4 2 G59 X t Additive zero off
286. ds The physical outputs will be updated every 10 milliseconds with the real values of the corresponding O resources The PLC will attend to all requests and modifications of its internal variables Chapter 9 Section Page PLC MONITORING PLCIN 19 OPERATIONPLCSTOPPED 9 4 ACTIVE MESSAGES When selecting this option the CNC will display a page or screen showing dynamically all the active messages generated by the PLC These messages will be listed by priority always starting from the one with the smallest number highest priority The operator can move the cursor a line at a time with the up and down arrow keys or page by page with the page up and page down keys To delete one of the displayed messages select it with the cursor and press the DELETE MESSAGE softkey Note that the CNC dynamically updates the active messages 9 5 ACTIVE PAGES SCREENS When selecting this option the CNC will show the active page with the lowest number To delete a page or access the other active pages the CNC will display the following softkey options NEXT PAGE Press this softkey to display the next active page PREVIOUS PAGE Press this softkey to display the previous active page CLEAR PAGE Press this softkey to deactivate the page being displayed Note that the CNC dynamically updates the active pages 9 6 SAVE PROGRAM Press this softkey to save the PLC program into the EEPROM memory The PLC program mu
287. e When trying to jog or move with an electronic handwheel one of the axes set as sweeping axes the CNC will issue the corresponding error message Page 12 Chapter 16 Section TRACING ANDDIGITIZING ACTIVATEMANUAL TRACING G23 mp1606 mp1607 mpi608 mp1805 Z Examples G23XYZ This option is very interesting to perform roughing operations or 3 D contouring Theoperator may move the probe by hand in all directions t is not possible to jog the X Y Z axes or move them with an electronic handwheel G23 X Y G23 X Z G23 YZ Withthis optionitis possible to perform two dimensional contouring or parallel tracing passes The operator may move the probe by hand alongtheselected axes Y andZinthe example of parallel tracing passes tis only possible to move by using the JOG keys or an electronic handwheel the axis not selected X in the example of parallel tracing passes Tomake parallel tracing passes the other axis must be moved by using the JOG keys or an electronic handwheel G23X G23 Y G23Z With this option it is possible to take capture data on specific points of the model The operator may move the probe by hand only along the selected axis The other two axes must be moved using the JOG keys or an electronic handwheel Chapter 16 TRACING ANDDIGITIZING Section Page ACTIVATEMANUALTRACING 13 G23
288. e F until the probe signal is received The maximum distance to be travelled in the probing movementis 2B If after travelling that distance the CNC does notreceive the probe signal it will display the corresponding error code and stop the movement of the axes 6 Withdrawal Movement of the probe in rapid G00 from the point where it probed for the second time to the point where the cycle was called The withdrawal movement is made in three stages Ist Movement along the probing axis to the second approach point 2nd Movementalong the longitudinal axis to the coordinate ofthe point corresponding to this axis where the cycle is called 3rd Movement in the main work plane to the point where the cycle is called Once the cycle has been completed the CNC will return the real values obtained after measurement in the following global arithmetic parameters P296 Real coordinate of the corner along the abscissa axis P297 Real coordinate of the corner along the ordinate axis P298 Errordetectedalong the abscissa axis Difference between the real coordinate of the corner and the theoretical programmed coordinate P299 Error detected along the ordinate axis Difference between the real coordinate of the corner and the theoretical programmed coordinate Chapter 12 Section Page OUTSIDE CORNER WORKING WITH A PROBE MEASURING 17 12 7 INSIDE CORNER MEASURING CANNED CYCLE A probe placed in the spindle will be us
289. e a page or symbol are selected with the softkeys and are the following LINE Follow these steps after pressing this softkey 1 Place the cursor at the beginning of the line and press ENTER to validate it 2 Move the cursor to the end of the line the CNC will continuously show the line being drawn 3 Press ENTER to validate the line or ESC to cancel it Repeat the preceding steps to draw more lines If no more lines are desired press ESC to return to the previous menu RECTANGLE Follow these steps after pressing this softkey 1 Place the cursor on one of the corners of the rectangle and press ENTER to validate it 2 Move the cursor to the opposite corner The CNC will continuously show the rectangle being drawn 3 Press ENTER to validate the rectangle or ESC to cancel it Repeat these steps to draw more rectangles Ifno more rectangles are desired press ESC to return to the previous menu CIRCLE Follow these steps after pressing this softkey 1 Place the cursor at the center of the circle and press ENTER to validate it 2 Move the cursor in order to define the radius As the cursor moves the CNC will show the circle corresponding to that radius 3 Press ENTER to validate the circle or ESC to cancel it Once the circle is validated the cursor is positioned at its center in order to facilitate the drawing of concentric circles Repeat these steps to draw more circles If no more circles are desired press ES
290. e canned aT qe Met 6 03 1 369 Complex deep hole drilling CYL esac csssivstaiainsgnaincavstauscnoacaiacatoearnnneuniocatonamepretien 8 9 5 2 oS DN canned yele ertt Td Em 12 93 3 G82 Drilling canned cycle with dwell ette nanninannan 14 9 5 4 53 Simple deep hole dull uuu ior hi ba RUP Ure ERE DUI MUN MER Ra RUM MM ELM aaa 16 05 5 384 Tapping canned 49616 acaso esent hom RES MUS ARES cave RR ER E ERER RERE RRRS 19 9 5 6 E d rounded ER 22 ESI G86 Boring cycle with withdrawal in rapid G00 eese 24 9 5 8 G87 Rectangular pocket cann d Cvele suu aerae snbe tare she bt duke lapeata REN Ap eda AUN RE Ra MA 26 55 9 088 Cucular pocketeaned eye lessan irren RIS ERR EY AES RES ERPS S Po RES alana GRE URN 34 9 5 10 G89 Boring cycle with withdrawal at working feedrate G01 sss 41 Section Page NENNEN Chapter 10 MULTIPLE MACHINING 10 1 G60 Multiple machining in a straight line pattern eeeeeeene 2 10 2 G61 Multiple ma lumnp in a r ctangular pattern s si cicaanensncdersvsenincnsiecersssensnenbseiaen 5 10 3 G02 Multiple machining un grid Patt rn 1 25 ueuoocic te rre chao ba Mex De XR n REY RES Rn RES 8 10 4 563 Multiple machining in circular pattern 2p p ctp tb RM HRU RC RE Rr RUP aa 11 10 5 G64 Multiple machining in an Are patteri auci e creber eve cra rk bna kin voe iEn 14 10 6 G65 Machining programmed by means of an arc chord sees
291. e deflection value per minute For example for a deflection value of 1mm the tracing feedrate would be 1 m min If not programmed the canned cycle will assume the value of 1mm 0 03937 This parameter must be defined when digitizing a part besides tracing it It indicates the sweeping step of distance between two consecutive digitized points NNNNNN mp1636 The CNC keeps the probe in constant contact with the surface of the model and it provides the coordinates of a new point after moving in space and along the programmed path the distance indicated by parameter L If not programmed or programmed with a value of 0 the canned cycle will assume that the model is not to be digitized This parameter must be defined when digitizing a part besides tracing it It indicates the chordal error or maximum difference allowed between the surface of the model and the segment joining two consecutive digitized points Itis given in the selected work units millimeters or inches Chapter 16 Section Page TRACING ANDDIGITIZING ARCPATTERNTRACING 37 CANNEDCYCLE MN 7797 Yn 4 If not programmed or programmed with a value of 0 the chordal error will be ignored and a new point will be provided after moving the L distance in space and along the programmed path mp1637 G This parameter must be defined when digitizing the model besides tracing it Indicates the storing format for the digitized points
292. e is a part of a program which being properly identified can be called from any position of a program to be executed A subroutine can be kept in the memory of the CNC as an independent part of a program and be called one or several times from different positions of a program or different programs SUB integer The mnemonic SUB defines the set of program blocks which are programmed after this block as a subroutine by identifying this subroutine with an integer between 0 and 9999 which is specified after it There can not be two subroutines with the same identification number in the CNC memory even when they belong to different programs RET The mnemonic RET indicates that the subroutine which was defined by the mnemonic SUB finishes in this block Example SUB 12 Definition of subroutine 12 G91 G01 XPO F5000 YPI X PO Y P1 RET End of subroutine CALL expression The mnemonic CALL makes a call to the subroutine indicated by means of a number or by means of any expression which results in a number As a subroutine may be called from a main program or a subroutine from this subroutine to a second one from the second to a third etc the CNC limits these calls to amaximum of 15 nesting levels it being possible to repeat each of the levels 9999 times Page Chapter 14 Section 6 PROGRAMCONTROLSTATEMENTS SUBRUTINESTATEMENTS SUB 1 SUB 2 SUB 3 CALL 1 CALL2 CALL3 R
293. e length of the machining path according to the ordinate axis J 5 5 Defines the pitch between machining operations according to the ordinate axis Page Chapter 10 Section 8 MULTIPLEMACHINING INA GRID PATTERN G62 D 5 Defines the number of total machining operations in the ordinate axis including the machining definition point Due to the fact that machining may be defined according to the ordinate axis with any two points of the Y J D group the CNC allows the following definition combinations YJ YD JD Nevertheless if format YJ is defined care should be taken to ensure that the number of machining operations is an integer number otherwise the CNC will show the corresponding error code P Q R S T U V These parameters are optional and are used to indicate at which points or between which of those programmed points it is not required to machine Thus programming P7 indicates that it is not required to do machining at point 7 and programming Q10 013 indicates that machining is not required from point 10 to 13 or expressed in another way that no machining is required at points 10 11 12 and 13 When it is required to define a group of points Q10 013 care should be taken to define the final point with three digits as if Q10 13 is programmed multiple machining understands Q10 130 The programming order for these parameters is P Q R S T U V it also being necessary to maintain the order in which the po
294. e longitudinal axis to the reference plane 6 Withdrawal at rapid feedrate G00 of the longitudinal axis as far as the initial plane if G98 has been programmed Programming example assuming that the work plane is formed by the X and Y axes that the longitudinal axis is the Z axis and that the starting point is XO YO ZO T1 M6 GO GOU X0 YD ZO arcte te lana ers aeaeaei Starting point G89 G98 G9 X250 Y350 Z 98 I 22 K20 F100 S500 Canned cycle definition GSO TEE Canned cycle cancellation 390 X0 Y e ee veste tees eere be teed oes Ue beer eese Positioning IM SU c bec Pete ub E ties De NE pertes Eae Epio bes BURG dps End of program Page Chapter 9 Section 42 CANNED CYCLES BORINGWITHWITHDRAWAI ING01 G89 I 0 MULTIPLE MACHINING Multiple functions are defined as a series of functions which allow a machining operation to be repeated along a given path The programmer will select the type of machining which can be a canned cycle or a subroutine which must be programmed as a modal subroutine defined by the user Machining subroutines are defined by the following functions G60 multiple machining in a straight line pattern G61 multiple machining in a rectangular pattern G62 multiple machining in a grid pattern G63 multiple machining in a circular pattern G64 multiple machining in an arc pattern G65 multiple machining in an arc chord pattern These functions can be performed on any work plane
295. e main plane Chapter 9 Section Page CANNED CYCLES CIRCULAR POCKET G88 35 Ifthe value is positive the entire cycle will be executed with the same milling pass this being equal to or less than that programmed Ifthe value is negative the entire pocket will be executed with the given pass except for the last pass which will machine whatever remains If this is not programmed the CNC will assume 3 4 of the diameter of the diameter of the selected tool If programmed with a value greater than the tool diameter the CNC will issue the corresponding error If programmed with a value of 0 the CNC will show the corresponding error D5 5 Defines the distance between the reference plane and the surface of the part where the pocket is to be made During the first deepening operation this amount will be added to incremental H 5 Defines the working feedrate during the finishing pass If this is not programmed or is programmed with a value of 0 the value of the working feedrate for machining will be taken Page Chapter 9 Section 36 CANNED CYCLES CIRCULARPOCKET G88 L5 5 V 5 5 Defines the value of the finishing pass along the main plane If this is not programmed or is programmed with a value of 0 no finishing pass will be made Defines the tool penetrating feedrate Ifnot programmed or programmed with a value of 0 the CNC will assume 50 of the feedrate in the plane F
296. e messages the CNC will always display the one with the highest priority which is the message with the smallest number In this way MSG1 will have the highest priority and MSG128 will have the lowest Page Chapter 1 Section 2 OVERVIEW MONITOR INFORMATION LAYOUT In this case the CNC will display the character plus sign indicating that there are more messages activated by the PLC it being possible to display them if the ACTIVE MESSAGE option is accessed in the PLC mode In this window the CNC will also display the character asterisk to indicate that at least one of the 256 user defined screens is active The screens which are active will be displayed one by one if the ACTIVE PAGES option is accessed in the PLC mode 5 Main window Depending on the operating mode the CNC will show in this window all the information necessary When a CNC or PLC error is produced the system displays this in a superimposed horizontal window The CNC will always display the most important error and it will show The downarrow key to indicate that another less important error has also occurred and to press this key to view its message The up arrow key to indicate that another more important error has also occurred and to press this key to view its message 6 Editing window In some operating modes the last four lines of the main window are used as editing area 7 CNC communications window errors detected i
297. e parameter SOVRSTEP Itis recommended to define the spindle speed before selecting the turning direction in order to avoid an abrupt start Page Chapter 5 Section 12 JOG MANUAL CONTROL OF THE SPINDLE 6 TABLES In order to select a new tool tool offset or zero offset it is necessary that those values be previously stored at the CNC The tables available at the CNC are Xo X xXx X xXx Zero offset table Tool offset table Tool table Tool magazine table Global and local parameter table Chapter 6 TABLES Section Page 6 1 ZERO OFFSET TABLE This table contains the values assigned to each one of the zero offsets part zeros to be used during the execution of a part program Each field represents a zero offset or in other words the coordinate values corresponding to the new part zero to be selected These coordinates correspond to each one of the axes and they are referred to machine reference zero home This table has the following fields or zero offsets ZERO OFFSET PLC X 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 Additive zero offset established by the PLC CAP INS MM e C1 63 D Cd C Itis used for example to compensate for deviations caused by machine dilatations It can be controlled by the PLC and from the part program by using the high level variable PLCOF X C Whenever the value assigned to this offs
298. e parameter and in the format determined by the axis machine parameter DFORMAT Each axis is provided with the following fields COMMAND Indicates the programmed coordinate or position which the axis must reach ACTUAL Indicates the actual current position of the axis TO GO Indicates the distance which is left to run to the programmed coordinate Chapter 3 Section Page EXECUTE SIMULATE DISPLAY SELECTION 13 3 2 5 FOLLOWING ERROR DISPLAY MODE This display mode shows the following error difference between the theoretical value and the real value of their position of the axes and the spindle Also when having the tracing option this mode shows to the right of the screen a window with the values corresponding to the tracing probe EXECUTION P000662 N 11 50 14 X 00000 002 S 00000 000 Y 00000 003 Z 00000 003 X 00000 000 X 00001 000 U 00000 0071 2 coon con 32 00001000 V 00000 002 D 00000 000 F03000 0000 96100 S00000 0000 100 T0000 D000 NTO000 ND000 S 0000 RPM G00 G17 G54 PARTC 000000 CY TIME 00 00 00 00 TIMER 000000 00 00 MOVEMENT IN CONTINUOUS JOG CAP INS BLOCK STOP DISPLAY MDI TOOL GRAPHICS SINGLE ELECTION ONDITION SELECTION INSPECTION BLOCK mpi1608 The display format is determined by the axis machine parameter DFORMAT The correction factors of the probe do not depend on the work units The display format for the probe deflections on each axis X Y Z a
299. e roughing pass It must be defined and it must have a value other than 0 otherwise the roughing operation will be cancelled If programmed with a positive sign all the roughing will be performed with the same machining pass and the canned cycle calculates a pass equal to or smaller than the programmed pass If programmed with a negative sign all the roughing will be performed with the programmed pass and the canned cycle will adjust the last pass to obtain the total programmed depth MP1106 C 5 5 Defines the milling pass in roughing along the main plane the entire pocket being performed with the given pass and the canned cycle adjusts the last milling pass If it is not programmed or is programmed with either a value of 0 it will assume a value of 3 4 the diameter of the selected tool If programmed with a value greater than the tool diameter the CNC will issue the corresponding error I 5 5 Defines the total depth of the pocket and is programmed in absolute coordinates It must be programmed R 5 5 Defines the reference plane coordinate and is programmed in absolute coordinates It must be programmed Chapter 11 Section Page 2D AND 3D POCKETS 2D POCKETS ROUGHING 7 K 1 Defines the type of profile intersection to be used 0 Basic profile intersection 1 Advanced profile intersection If not program
300. e te dte ete ere x e a tee te tees End of program Chapter 9 Section Page CANNEDCYCLES TAPPING rod CYCLE 21 9 5 6 G85 REAMING CYCLE This cycle reams at the point indicated until the final programmed coordinate is reached Itis possible to program a dwell at the bottom of the machined hole Working in cartesian coordinates the basic structure of the block is as follows G98 G99 XY 5 5 1 5 5 K5 G85 G98 G99 X Y ZIK The tool withdraws to the Initial Plane once the hole has been reamed The tool withdraws to the Reference Plane once the hole has been reamed These are optional and define the movement of the axes of the main plane to position the tool at the machining point This point can be programmed in cartesian coordinates or in polar coordinates and the coordinates may be absolute or incremental according to whether the machine is operating in G90 or G91 Defines the reference plane coordinate It can be programmed in absolute coordinates or incremental coordinates and in this case will be referred to the initial plane If this is not programmed the CNC will take the position occupied by the tool at that moment as the reference plane Defines reaming depth It can be programmed in absolute coordinates or incremental coordinates and in this case will be referred to the reference plane Defines the dwell time in hundredths of a second after each drilling step until the withdrawal begins Should
301. e to be selected 3 Group of keys which due to their characteristics and importance are detailed below Page Chapter 1 Section 4 OVERVIEW KEYBOARD LAYOUT ENTER HELP RESET ESC Used to validate CNC and PLC commands generated in the edition Window Allows access to the help system in any operating mode Used for initializing the history of the program in execution by assigning it the values defined by machine parameters Itis necessary for the program to be stopped for the CNC to accept this key Allows going back to the previous operating option shown on the monitor MAIN MENU When this key is pressed we can access the main CNC menu directly 4 SOFTKEYS or function keys which allow different operating options to be selected and which are shown on the monitor In addition there are the following special keyboard sequences SHIFT RESET The result of this keystroke sequence is the same as if the CNC is turned SHIFT CL SHIFT off and turned back on This option must be used after modifying the machine parameters of the CNC for these to be effective With this keystroke sequence the display onthe CRT screen disappears To restore the normal state just press any key If when the screen is off an error is produced or a message from the PLC or CNC is received the normal status of the screen will be restored This allows the position of the axes to be displayed on the right hand side of the s
302. e via Function G22 the programming format being G22 K S In which K Indicates the work zone you wish to define 1 2 3 or 4 S Indicates the enabling disabling of the work zone S 0 disabled Sz enabled as a no entry zone S22 enabled as a no exit zone On power up the CNC 8055 will disable all work zones However upper and lower limits for these zones will not undergo any variation and they can be re enabled through the G22 function Page Chapter 3 Section 14 AXES AND COORDINATESYSTEMS WORKZONES 4 REFERENCE SYSTEMS 4 1 REFERENCE POINTS A CNC machine needs the following origins and reference points defined Machine Reference Zero or home This is set by the manufacturer as the origin of the machine s coordinate system Part zero or point of origin of the part This is the point of origin which is set for programming the measurements of the part It can be freely selected by the programmer and its value with respect to machine zero can be set by the zero offset Machine Reference point This is a point on the machine established by the manufacturer around which the synchronization of the system is done The control positions the axis on this point instead of moving it as far as the Machine Reference Zero taking at this point the reference coordinates which are defined via the axis machine parameter REFVALUE M Machine reference zero W Part zero R Machine reference point
303. ear The X Y and Z axes may have GANTRY axes coupled or synchronized via PLC associated with them When working with coordinate transformation and performing rigid tapping in incline planes all axes gains not only for the Z axis must be adjusted by using the second gains and accelerations The parameters associated with G49 are optional When programming G49 without parameters the active coordinate transformation is canceled G49 is modal and must be programmed alone in the block Coordinate transformation is kept active even after turning the CNC off and back on To cancel it G49 must be programmed without parameters It is also canceled after a home search G74 When canceling G49 the CNC recovers the part zero active before G49 was activated Zero offsets G54 G59 pattern rotation G73 and presets G92 G93 are possible while coordinate transformation is active But the following cannot be done Program anew coordinate transformation without previously canceling the previous one Perform tracing operations G23 through G27 Probing G75 Movement against hardstop G52 Chapter 17 Section Page COORDINATE TRANSFORMATION MOVEMENTININCLINEPL 11 17 1 3 VARIABLES ASSOCIATED WITH FUNCTION G49 Read only variables associated with the definition of G49 ORGROX ORGROY ORGROZ New part zero coordinates with respect to home ORGROA ORGROB ORGROC Values assigned to parameters A B C ORGROQ ORGROR ORGROS
304. ected block will not be modified Once the block contents have been modified press ENTER so the new contents replace the old ones Chapter 4 EDIT Section MODIFY Page 15 43 FIND This option is used to find a specific text within the selected program When selecting this option the softkeys will show the following options BEGINNING This softkey positions the cursor over the first program block which is then selected quitting the find option END This softkey positions the cursor over the last program block which is then selected quitting the find option TEXT With this function it is possible to search a text or character sequence starting from the block indicated by the cursor When this key is selected the CNC requests the character sequence to be found When the text is defined press the END OF TEXT softkey and the cursor will be positioned over the first occurrence of that text The search will begin at the current block The text found will be highlighted being possible to continue with the search or to quit it Press ENTER to continue the search up to the end of the program It is possible to search as many times as wished and when the end of the program is reached it will start from the first block Press the EXIT softkey or the ESC key to quit the search mode The cursor will be positioned where the indicated text was found last LINE NUMBER _Afterpressi
305. ed and press ENTER Clear all passwords With this option it is possible to delete all passwords The CNC will request confirmation press ENTER to delete them Chapter 7 Section Page UTILITIES PASSWORDS 13 7 6 COMPRESS This option is available in those CNC with 128Kb of user RAM to store part programs It is possible to compress the memory of the CNC to optimize the unused space No CNC program must be in execution simulation or transmission when compressing the memory 7 7 CHANGE DATE With this option it is possible to change the date and time of the system clock First the date will be shown in the day month year 12 04 1992 format Press ENTER after keying in the new date or ESC if it is not to be changed Next the time will be displayed in hour min sec 08 30 00 format Press ENTER after keying in the new time or ESC if it is not to be changed Page Chapter 7 Section 14 UTILITIES COMPRESS CHANGE DATE 7 8 OPERATION WITH EEPROM MEMORY This CNC offers two softkey options to operate with the EEPROM memory These options are being described next 7 8 1 MOVE A PROGRAM TO EEPROM MEMORY To accomplish this press the softkey MOVE TO EEPROM The CNC will show the following options to be selected by softkeys PROGRAM With this option it is possible to save a program in EEPROM memory Key in the desired program number and press ENTER PLC MESSAGES When selecting this op
306. ed which must be previously calibrated by means of canned cycles Canned cycle for calibrating tool length Canned cycle for calibrating probe The programming format for this cycle is X 5 5 Y 5 5 Z 5 5 PROBE 5 X Y Z B F Theoretical coordinate along the X axis of the corner to be measured Theoretical coordinate along the Y axis of the corner to be measured Theoretical coordinate along the Z axis of the corner to be measured The probe must be placed within the pocket before calling the cycle B5 5 Defines the safety distance Must be programmed with a positive value and over 0 The probe must be placed with respect to the point to be measured at a distance greater than this value when the cycle is called F5 5 Defines the probing feedrate in mm min or inch min Page Chapter 12 Section RKI ITH A PROBE INSIDE CORNER ii No Ne UN e MEASURING Basic operation 1 Approach Movement of the probe in rapid G00 from the point where the cycle is called to the first approach point situated at a distance B from both faces to be probed The approaching movement is made in two stages IstMovement in the main work plane 2nd Movement along the longitudinal axis Probing Movement of the probe along the abscissa axis at the indicated feedrate F until the probe signal is received The maximum distance to be travelled in the probing movementis 2B If aftertravelling thatdistance the CN
307. ed before the trigger occurs a trace will be shown with data but without the trigger position vertical red line The data capture begins the instant the user presses the EXECUTE TRACE softkey The CNC will enable half the trace buffer to store the data corresponding to the trace prior to the trigger and the other half for the data corresponding to the trace after the trigger The trace is completed when its buffer is full or when itis interrupted by pressing the STOP TRACE softkey If interrupted before the trigger occurs a trace will be shown with data but without the trigger position vertical red line The CNC carries out this type of trace when no trigger condition has been specified The data capture begins the instant the EXECUTE TRACE softkey is pressed The trace is completed when interrupted by pressing the STOP TRACE showing atrace with data but without the trigger position vertical red line Page 34 Chapter 9 Section PLC LOGICANALYZER 9 10 3 3 TRACE REPRESENTATION Once the data capture is done the CNC will display graphically in the status window the status of the signals based on the trace calculated for the analyzed variables Also a vertical red line indicating the trigger position and a vertical green line indicating the cursor position will appear superimposed on the trace The cursor position vertical green line can be slid along the trace by means of
308. ed from the front panel Page 20 Chapter 13 Section PROGRAMMING INHIGH LEVELLANGUAGE VARIABLES FOR THE 2nd SPINDLE SSLIMI SDNCSL SPLCSL SPRGSL SPOSS SRPOSS TPOSS SRTPOS SFLWES Returns in revolutions per minute the value established for the 2nd spindle speed limit selected at the CNC This limit can be indicated by program by the PLC or DNC and the CNC selects one of these the one with the highest priority being that indicated by DNC and the one with the lowest priority that indicated by program Returns the 2nd spindle speed limit in revolutions per minute selected by DNC If this has a value of 0 it means that itis not selected Returns the 2nd spindle speed limit in revolutions per minute selected by PLC If this has a value of 0 it means that itis not selected Returns the 2nd spindle speed limit in revolutions per minute selected by program Returns the 2nd spindle real position value when it is in closed loop M19 Its value will be given in 0 0001 degree units between 3 999999999 Returns the 2nd spindle real position value Its value will be given in 0 0001 degree units between 0 and 360 Returns the 2nd spindle theoretical position value Its value will be given in 0 0001 degree units between 3999999999 Returns the 2nd spindle theoretical position value Its value will be given in 0 0001 degree units between 0 and 360 Returns the spindle follo
309. ee detis B type contour G90 GO X12 5 Y65 ia oes em erem Plane profile G1 Y120 X127 5 Y30 X97 5 Y100 X42 5 Y30 Chapter 11 Section Page 2D AND 3D POCKETS 3D POCKETS 57 EXAMPLES N500 X12 5 CHO X ata sis eda denda Depth profile G90 G0 X12 5 Z 30 Gl Z0 GI ette e tee e rte toe rts C type contour 390 G0 X70 Y 90 3 ie Roten Plane profile GI X105 Y40 X35 Y90 X70 GIG Y xot e Depth profile G90 GO Y90 Z 30 G3 Y65 Z 5 J 25 KO GY s cete eR es E type contour G90 GO X40 Y20 istos perte Plane profile G1 Y45 X100 Y10 X40 Y20 GIOXZ ciere etsi eed s ee dias Depth profile G90 GO X40 Z 30 G2 X70 Z0 130 KO GUT S reete inerte pete nts D type contour 390 G0 X 70 X 15 ie eee tenete Plane profile G1 X105 Y5 X35 Y15 X70 TOY Zoot oc sista cis Sites des sn ek cows at A Depth profile G90 GO Y15 Z 30 End of pocket geometry definition Page 58 Chapter 11 2D AND 3D POCKETS Section 3D POCKETS EXAMPLES MP1166 Example 5 7 Z y X 30 39 In this example the island has 2 types of depth profiles A and B LE 2 contours are used to define the island the low contour A type and the high contour B type Lp LEG TOR1 2 5 TOL1 220 TOI120 TOK 1 0 G17 GO G43 G90 Z50 1000 M4 G5 G66 R200 C250 F300 S400 E500 33D pocket definition M30 N200 G67 B5 C4 I 25
310. ee main axes X Y Z as belonging to the work plane and the other as the perpendicular axis to the same MP033 When radius compensation is done on the work plane and length compensation on the perpendicular axis the CNC does not allow functions G17 G18 and G19 if any one of the X Y or Z axes is not selected as being controlled by the CNC On power up after executing M02 M30 or after EMERGENCY or RESET the CNC will assume that the plane defined by the general machine parameter as IPLANE is the work plane Note To machine incline planes function G49 must be used coordinate transformation See chapter 17 Incline planes on this manual Page Chapter 3 Section 4 AXESANDCOORDINA TESYSTEMS PLANESELECTION G16 G17 G18 G19 3 3 PART DIMENSIONING MILLIMETERS G71 OR INCHES G70 The CNC allows you to enter units of measurement with the programming either in millimeters or inches It has a general machine parameter INCHES to define the unit of measurement of the CNC However these units of measurement can be changed at any time in the program Two functions are supplied for this purpose G70 Programming in inches G71 Programming in millimeters Depending on whether G70 or G71 has been programmed the CNC assumes the corresponding set of units for all the blocks programmed from that moment on The G70 and G71 functions are modal and are incompatible The FAGOR 8055 CNC allows t
311. een customizing program or by the corresponding mnemonic when it is a PLC program PLC error file or PLC message file Comment associated to the program It is possible to associate a comment to a program in order to identify it more easily These comments must contain alphanumeric characters which will be entered in this mode of operation using the RENAME option as explained later on Programsize Itis givenin bytes and itindicates the size of the program text Please note that the actual size of a program is slightly larger since the memory space occupied by some internal variables header etc is not considered The date and time when the program was last edited or modified Attributes The attributes of each program show information about its source and usage There are the following fields m Indicates that the program is stored in EEPROM memory ndicates that the program is in execution either because it is the main program or because it has a subroutine being called from that program or another subroutine O Indicates that the program was originated by the OEM H Indicates that the program is hidden thus not being displayed in any directory Since a hidden program may be modified or erased if its number is known it is recommended not to select the Modifiable attribute when hiding a program in order to prevent the operator from changing modifying it or erasing it M Indicates that the program may be modi
312. een two consecutive digitized points mp1636 The CNC keeps the probe in constant contact with the surface of the model and it provides the coordinates of a new point after moving in space and along the programmed path the distance indicated by parameter L If not programmed or programmed with a value of 0 the canned cycle will assume that the model is not to be digitized Chapter 16 Section Page TRACING ANDDIGITIZING 3 D PROFILETRACING 47 CANNEDCYCLE E5 5 This parameter must be defined when digitizing a part besides tracing it Itindicates the chordal error or maximum difference allowed between the surface of the model and the segment joining two consecutive digitized points Itis given in the selected work units millimeters or inches ox 7747 Yon If not programmed or programmed with a value of 0 the chordal error will be ignored and a new point will be provided after moving the L distance in space and along the programmed path mp1637 G This parameter must be defined when digitizing the model besides tracing it Indicates the storing format for the digitized points in the program selected by means of the OPEN P statement G 0 Absolute format All points will be programmed in absolute coordinates G90 and defined by the X Y and Z axes G 1 Absolute filtered format All points will be programmed in absolute coordinates G90 but only those axes whose positions have chan
313. eere EI RUPES IRR AM ee eee tee 7 3 5 Mirmorimage G10 G11 G12013 G lA y aequ 9 7 6 Sealine OCON I ee me ene E e Rr ER Ee RR EU ere eer Rn E ere ee 11 7 6 1 Scaling TACtOE app Hee Til t Rm 12 T4 Scaling factor applied to ole OF MOTE ARES iussisse he t phe Fo Maa unnan MI PER PERRO URS 14 7 7 Futter ago CONT 37 Goss dp IURERU R 16 7 8 Slaved exis cancellation of slaved Axis iecore tie verbit Rte kp ropa eV pa dE re 18 7 8 1 edm ILICE NE TUTTI 19 7 8 2 Slaved ax CDS SUO EOD Ee eee a ene RI RE ee eee ee See ce ee ee 20 a Chapter 8 TOOL COMPENSATION 8 1 Tool radius compensation G40 G41 G42 sse 2 8 1 1 Activating tool radius CODYDORSIISQUI i aiceus chip pk aa CRUS ERbN ERIS RRIN ERES ERES MED RAD 3 S L2 Tool ralius compensation SECHONG ou aeo eo spat por theo SUPR RUE RU RC RM SEP ADEM ERMMN SP RPG MEE 6 8 1 3 Cancelling radius compensatii os covstis sce crewtiveceescasawanntaveceestioansiachtecaradivaviiachievarccaeavies 9 8 2 Tool length compensation 043 044 GIS wccsascscsssscsincsoxcsanenanestresannaunsaenesieedaneabacsanennen 15 a Chapter 9 CANNED CYCLES 9 1 De fhinibon ot 2 camne d eyele iua aede mne a v pe da Mad uU RE RUD ERE ARD ERIS RUD ER E RE DUAE 1 92 Canned cycle Area OF iminente sarena aM ERU EANA EANNA EAEE 2 9 2 1 G79 Modification of canned cycle parameters ascen tia chr tib the ba hne Eb RES eR 2 9 3 Camedd ele dnce ATO oionn aaa naNO EOE Aaa 4 9 4 General considerations siian e aa a cant R ERAR A 5 95 Mochinin
314. efines the distance from the starting point to the center along the abscissa axis Defines the distance from the starting point to the center along the ordinate axis With parameters X and Y the center of the circle is defined in the same way that I and J do this in circular interpolations G02 G03 Defines the angle formed by the perpendicular bisector of the chord with the abscissa axis and is expressed in degrees Defines the chord length When moving in G00 or G01 the sign indicates the direction counter clockwise clockwise Indicates how movement is made between machining points If it is not programmed the value C 0 will be taken C 0 Movement is made in rapid feedrate G00 C 1 Movement is made in linear interpolation G01 C22 Movement is made in clockwise circular interpolation G02 C23 Movement is made in counter clockwise circular interpolation G03 Defines the feedrate which is used for moving between points Obviously it will only apply for C values other than zero If it is not programmed the value FO will be taken maximum feedrate selected by the MAXFEED axis machine parameter Chapter 10 Section Page MULTIPLEMACHINING BY MEANS OFANARC 17 CHORD G65 Basic operation 1 Multiple machining calculates the next point of those programmed where it is wished to machine 2 Movement programmed by C G00 G01 G02 or G03 to this point 3 Multiple mach
315. eft arrow keys to select the desired size The currently selected size will be highlighted 2 Press ENTER to validate the selected step or ESC to quit this mode leaving the previous selection intact When editing a new page or symbol the CNC assumes the normal size by default Page Chapter 10 Section 8 GRAPHICEDITOR EDITINGCUSTOMSCREENS PAGES ANDSYMBOLS BACKGROUND COLOR With this option it is possible to select the background color over which the different graphic elements and texts will be edited It is not possible to select the background color when editing a symbol since it is an attribute of the page and not of the symbol Therefore when inserting a symbol into a page the symbol will take the background of that page If the desired background color is WHITE it is recommended to use a different color while creating the page since the cursor the drawing cursor is always white and will become invisible with this background color Once the complete page screen is created the background color can be changed to the desired one One of the color rectangles shown has another rectangle in it The inside rectangle indicates the selected main color and the outside rectangle indicates the selected background color To select the background color follow these steps 1 Use the right and left arrow keys to select the desired color among the 16 shown The CNC will show the background color being selected
316. em per line and 3 when using their associated mnemonics symbols In the latter case the generic denomination will be displayed when no mnemonic is associated to a resource Whenrequesting the status of a register bit the CNC will display only the requested bit on the corresponding line Page 14 Chapter 9 Section PLC MONITORING MODIFY WINDOW With this option it is possible to manipulate the active window the one selected by enlarging it reducing it clearing it or even eliminating closing it To do so the following softkey options are available ENLARGE _ Toenlarge the size of the window by one line every time this softkey is pressed REDUCE To reduce the size of the window by one line every time this softkey is pressed minimum 2 lines CLEAR To clear the contents of the active window CLOSE To close the active window the CNC will no longer display it ACTIVE WINDOW With this option it is possible to select between the PLC program and each one of the windows being displayed timers registers counters and binary data in order to operate with it Bear in mind that the operator can only operate with the active window Once the active window has been selected it Will be possible to Move the cursor if the PLC program is the one active or shift the display area with the up and down arrow keys Execute any command of the MODIFY WINDOW option Chapter 9 PLC Sectio
317. en completed the program will continue execution in block N40 Page 4 Chapter 14 Section PROGRAM CONTROLSTATEMENTS FLOW CONTROL STATEMENTS IF condition lt action1 gt ELSE lt action2 gt This statement analyzes the given condition which must be a relational expression If the condition is true result equal to 1 lt action1 gt will be executed otherwise result equal to 0 action2 will be executed Example IF P8 EQ 12 8 CALL 3 ELSE PCALL 5 A2 B5 D8 If P8 2 12 8 executes the mnemonic CALL3 If P8 lt gt 12 8 executes the mnemonic PCALL 5 A2 B5 D8 The statement can lack the ELSE part i e it will be enough to program IF condition action Example IF P8 EQ 12 8 CALL 3 Both action1 and action2 can be expressions or statements except for mnemonics IF and SUB Due to the fact that in a high level block local parameters can be named by means of letters expressions of this type can be obtained IF E EQ 10 M10 If the condition of parameter P5 E having a value of 10 is met the miscellaneous function M10 will not be executed since a high level block cannot have ISO code commands In this case M10 represents the assignment of value 10 to parameter P12 i e one can program either IF E EQ 10 M10 or IF P5 EQ 10 P12 10 Chapter 14 Section Page FLOW CONTROL 5 PROGRAM CONTROLSTATEMENTS STATEMENTS 14 5 SUBROUTINE STATEMENTS A subroutin
318. en two points of the trace To do this the following softkey options are available Find beginning Find End Find Trigger Find Time Base The cursor will position at the beginning of the trace being shown It will show the last section of the trace and the cursor will position at the end of it It will show the area of the trace corresponding to the trigger zone The trigger position will appear as a vertical red line over the trace The CNC will execute this option when a trigger occurs while analyzing the trace When pressing this key the CNC will request the cursor position with respect to the trigger point This value is given in milliseconds For example Having selected a Find time base of 1000 milliseconds the CNC will show the trace section corresponding to second prior to the trigger instant Ifno trigger occurred while analyzing the trace the CNC will assume that the indicated position is referred to the beginning of the trace Calculate Times With this option it is possible to find out the time between two points of the trace To do this follow these steps in order to set the initial and final points of the calculation Page Chapter 9 Section 36 PLC LOGICANALYZER Position the cursor at the initial point of calculation and press the MARK BEGINNING softkey to validate it Use the left arrow 39 66 right arrow page up and page down keys to move the cursor
319. en withdrawing from the thread by means of the machine parameter of the spindle SREVMOS it is possible to select whether the change in turning direction is made with the intermediate spindle stop or directly It is possible to program a dwell before each reversal of the spindle turning direction i e at the bottom of the thread hole and when returning to the reference plane Working in cartesian coordinates the basic structure of the block is as follows G84 G98 G99 X YZIKR G98 The tool withdraws to the Initial Plane once the hole has been tapped G99 The tool withdraws to the Reference Plane once the hole has been tapped XY 5 5 These are optional and define the movement of the axes of the main plane to position the tool at the machining point This point can be programmed in cartesian coordinates or in polar coordinates and the coordinates may be absolute or incremental according to whether the machine is operating in G90 or G91 Z 5 5 Defines the reference plane coordinate It can be programmed in absolute coordinates or incremental coordinates and in this case will be referred to the initial plane If this is not programmed the CNC will take the position occupied by the tool at that moment as the reference plane I 5 5 Defines tapping depth It can be programmed in absolute coordinates or incremental coordinates and in this case will be referred to the reference plane K5 Defines the dwell time in hundredths of a second
320. enter of the boss B5 5 Defines the safety distance Must be programmed with a positive value and over 0 J5 5 Defines the theoretical diameter of the hole Must be programmed with a positive value and over 0 This cycle allows holes to be measured with diameters of no more than J B E 5 5 Defines the distance which the probe moves back after initial probing Must be programmed with a positive value and over 0 C Indicates where the probing cycle must finish 0 Will return to the same point where the call to the cycle was made l The cycle will finish by positioning the probe over the center of the boss at a distance B from the programmed theoretical coordinate If this is not programmed the canned cycle will take the value of CO H5 5 Defines the feedrate for the initial probing movement Must be programmed in mm minute or in inches minute F5 5 Defines probing feedrate in mm min or inch min Page Chapter 12 Section 32 WORKING WITH A PROBE BOSS MEASURING Basic operation 1 Positioning over the center of the boss Movement of the probe in rapid G00 from the point where the cycle is called to the center of the boss The approaching movement is made in two stages Ist Movement in the main work plane 2nd Movement along the longitudinal axis upto a distance B from the programmed surface Movement to the first approach point This movement of the probe which is made in rapid G00 consists of
321. eparated by a comma Example Fagor Automation MX RT Following the header the file blocks should be programmed These will all be programmed according to the programming rules indicated in this manual After each block to separate it from the others the RETURN RT or LINE FEED LF characters should be used Example N20 G90 G01 X100 Y200 F2000 LF RPT N10 N20 N3 LF If communication is made with a peripheral device you will need to send the end of file command This command is selected via the machine parameter for the serial port EOFCHR and can be one of the following characters ESC ESCAPE EOT END OF TRANSMISSION SUB SUBSTITUTE EXT END OF TRANSMISSION Page Chapter 1 Section OVERVIEW 2 1 2 e CREATING A PROGRAM A CNC numerical control program consists of a series of blocks or instructions These blocks or instructions are made of words composed of capital letters and numerical format The CNC s numerical format consists of the symbols 4 thefigures0123456789 Programming allows spaces between letters numbers and symbols in addition to ignoring the numerical format if it has zero value or a symbol if it is positive The numerical formatof a word can be replaced by an arithmetic parameter in programming Later and during basic execution the control will replace the arithmetic parameter by its value for example If XP3 has been prog
322. eration When not setting K only block F is executed When not setting F there is no finishing operation S 0 9999 amp E 0 9999 Label number of the first block S and last block E defining the geometry of the profiles forming the pocket Both parameters must be set Programming example G00 G90 X100 Y200 Z50 F5000 T1 D2 Initial positioning M06 G66 D100 R200 I210 F300 S400 E500 Definition of irregular pocket canned cycle M30 End of program N100 G81 Defines the drilling operation IN200 2 iei Starts the roughing operation GOP N2105 eun End the roughing operation N300 G68 Defines the finishing operation N400 GO G90 X300 Y50 Z3 Starts the geometry description N500 G2 G6 X300 Y50 I150 JO End of geometry description Page 2 2D AND3D POCKETS Chapter 11 Section 2DPOCKETS Basic operation 1 Drilling operation Only if it has been programmed After analyzing the geometry of the pocket with islands the tool radius and the angle of the path programmed in the roughing operation the CNC will calculate the coordinates of the point where the selected drilling operation must be performed Roughing operation Only if it has been programmed It consists of several surface milling passes until the total depth programmed has been reached On each surface milling pass the steps below will be followed depending on the type of machining that has been programmed
323. erefore to end the generated program another block containing an M02 or M30 must be added Chapter 15 Section Page DIGITIZING CYCLES 1 15 1 DIGITIZING CYCLE IN A GRID PATTERN The programming format is as follows DIGIT 1 X Y Z I J K B C D F J X 5 5 Theoretical position value along the abscissa axis of the first digitized point It must be defined in absolute coordinates and it must coincide with one of the corners of the grid Y 5 5 Theoretical position value along the ordinate axis of the first digitized point It must be defined in absolute coordinates and it must coincide with one of the corners of the grid Z 5 5 Theoretical position value along the probing axis where the probe will be positioned before starting to digitize It must be defined in absolute coordinates When defining this position value both the maximum height of the part and the clearance to be maintained with respect to it must be taken into account Page Chapter 15 Section 2 DIGITIZING CYCLES DIGITIZING CYCLE IN A GRID PATTERN 1 5 5 Defines the maximum probing depth and it is referred to the position value assigned to parameter Z If a portion of the part is outside this zone the cycle will not collect the values of its points but it will continue with the digitizing cycle without issuing an error message S If aO value is assigned to this parameter the CNC will display the cor
324. ertinent calculations it will assign the new tool length value to its corresponding offset Chapter 5 Section Page JOG TOOL CALIBRATION 3 MDI With this function itis possible to edit and execute a block ISO or high level providing the necessary information by means of softkeys Once the block has been edited press to execute it without leaving this operation mode Attention When searching home G74 the CNC will maintain the part zero or zero offset active at the time USER When selecting this option the CNC will execute in the user channel the program whose number is indicated in the general machine parameter USERMAN To quit its execution and return to the previous menu press ESC Page Chapter 5 Section 4 JOG MDI USER DISPLAY SELECTION With this function it is possible to monitor the PLC by pressing the corresponding softkey Once in that mode operate as described in the chapter regarding the monitoring of the PLC Itis also possible to select with the corresponding softkey one of the following position value coordinate displays ACTUAL When selecting this option the CNC will show the current position of the axes with respect to part zero ACTUAL G00 G17 G54 X 00100 000 Y 00150 000 Z 00004 269 U 00071 029 V 00011 755 F03000 0000 96100 00000 0000 100 T0000 D000 NT0000 ND000 S 0000 RPM PARTC 000000 CY TIME 00 00 00 00
325. es the value defined for the roughing operation If there is no roughing operation it must be programmed R 45 5 Defines the coordinate of the reference plane and it is programmed in absolute values If there is a roughing operation and it is not programmed the CNC takes the value defined for the roughing operation If there is no roughing operation it must be programmed Page Chapter 11 Section 32 2D AND 3D POCKETS 3D POCKETS SEMIFINISH V 5 5 F 5 5 S 5 5 T 4 D 4 Defines the tool penetrating feedrate If not programmed or programmed with a value of 0 the CNC will assume 50 of the feedrate in the plane F Optional Defines the machining feedrate in the plane Optional Defines the spindle speed Defines the tool used for the semi finishing operation It must be programmed Optional Defines the tool offset number Optional Up to 7 miscellaneous M functions can be programmed This operation allows M06 with an associated subroutine to be defined and the tool change is performed before beginning the semi finishing operation Chapter 11 Section Page 2D AND 3D P KET 3D POCKETS 33 i dd j SEMIFINISH 11 2 3 FINISHING OPERATION This operation is optional It will be programmed in a block which will need to bear a label number in order to indicate to the canned cycle the block where the roughing operation is defined Example G66 R100 C200 F300 S4
326. ess 17 NENNEN Chapter 11 IRREGULARPOCKET CANNED CYCLE WITH ISLANDS 11 1 DC SES sco D A Spo M DR M OAM OR EURO a uU NE UA mE aU NER EVA A 2 ib 3 Dbwlliniu a i re M m 3 11 12 Roighine opero M M 6 11 1 3 Lana ROA m 9 11 1 4 Profile proptanumime moles iaceo orte daa som an qo ita sansa qure ivan RIS rau Mad Kon Rn MES 12 11 1 5 Titersect omot protiles M tT 13 11 1 5 Basnprorie intersection R Oheen EUER RR RUM REE ERRAR 13 11 15 22 Advanced profile intersection t KT ic cesisecccvsssuiiaencsuncasmeraieaiacoarcaaninesaancaeicauntnenedaacmean 14 1115 9 Resulime OAS iaces esis asian i benkn dea eoe pesi e aia eee 16 11 1 6 Profileprogramnniine SYNTAR e PA 17 11 1 7 ETO 19 11 1 8 Lara d n eu o I ui e 21 11 2 paier c 22 11 2 Roughine DUI TREE i o 0 D heme D 29 11 2 2 eror Td iri 34 11 2 3 Finishing ODER IO a ioco Feo E RD SRM A MUN RM A 34 11 2 4 Profile ort Contour BEAU ENE Lucae cr ret opas in va aden s tas Rim wavs dE ro tna IN RN bah ann GRE HRS 36 11 2 5 Pigile pio eran eles i P PUT 3T 11 2 5 Prosranuiup CRATES d aene esie vkvo kia her FE enen EE EA IR GRO ERIS ARTEYR TR ERA ER VN SRM Ve ERR 39 11 2 6 COmpositE protileS ded ET 42 11 25 Exampl ota composite SD packet aie coe ettet Root ai 45 11 2 7 Sacked Inl METTE a 10 0 0m 47 11 2 8 Profileprogramiming yBEIX Laos ois oee doo re REG Ea aa
327. est a new disk to be inserted The Floppy Disk Unit has a RAM memory to store the data while the disk is being replaced thus preventing the digitizing operation from being interrupted Chapter 8 Section Page DNC 3 From a PC and via the serial lines it is possible to perform the following operation Display the program directory of the CNC on the PC screen Copy programs from the PC into the CNC memory Copy part programs from the CNC into the PC Execute or simulate a program stored at the CNC or at the PC When the size ofthe PC program to be executed is greater than the one available at the CNC for data transmission itis referred to as execution of infinite program The CNC willrequest more data from the PC as it needs it when executing the infinite program Page Chapter 8 Section 4 DNC 9 PLC In this mode of operation itis possible to access the PLC to check its operation or the status ofthe various PLC variables It also allows editing and analyzing the PLC program as well as the PLC message and error files The accessible programs associated with the PLC are The PLC program PLC PRG The PLC error file PLC ERR The PLC message file PLC MSG The PLC program PLC PRG may be edited from the front panel by using the corresponding commands or it can be input from a computer or peripheral device via one of the serial ports RS232C or RS422 The PLC program will be stored i
328. est anynew features he may wish to integrate into his own machine To do this simply send us your full company address as well as the reference numbers model and serial number of the various CNC models you have Please note that some of the features described in this manual might not be implemented in the software version that you just obtained The features dependent on the software version are Tool life monitoring Probing canned cycle DNC Profile editor Software for 4 or 6 axes Irregular pockets with islands Digitizing Solid graphics Rigid Tapping Tracing TCP transformation due to technical modifications FAGOR AUTOMATION S Coop Ltda reserves the right to modify the contents of the manual without prior notice When purchasing a FAGOR 8055 GP CNC the following considerations musttaken This model is based on the FAGOR 8055 M CNC Mill model tis missing some of the features available at the FAGOR 8055 M CNC The list below indicates those features missing with respect to the Mill model CNC as well as the software options available for this model GP Features not available Electronic threading G33 Tool magazine management Machining canned cycles G8x Multiple machining cycles G6x compensation Probing canned cycles Toollife monitoring Irregular pockets with islands Digitizing Graphics Tracing Software options Software for4 or 6 axes DNC Rigid tapping G
329. et is other than zero the CNC will add it to the currently active zero offset Absolute zero offsets G54 thru G57 These zero offsets can be edited or modified in this operating mode from the keyboard from the PLC and from the part program by using the high level variable ORG X C To activate one of these absolute zero offsets the corresponding G function G54 thru G57 must be executed Page Chapter 6 TABLES Section ZERO OFFSET TABLE Additive zero offsets G58 and G59 These zero offsets can be edited or modified in this operating mode from the keyboard from the PLC and from the part program by using the high level variable ORG X C To activate one of these additive zero offsets the corresponding G function G58 or G59 must be executed The new additive zero offset will be added to the absolute zero offset currently active Once the zero offset table is selected the operator can move the cursor line by line with the up and down arrow keys The various available options are described next Once any of these functions is selected the CNC shows an editing area on the CRT where the cursor may be moved by using the up down and right left arrow keys Also the up arrow key positions the cursoroverthe first character ofthe editing area and the down arrow key positions the cursor over the last character EDIT With this option it is possible to edit a zero offset Once this o
330. eter PORGMOVE has a value of 1 the center of the arc will become the new polar origin Chapter 3 Section Page PROGRAMMING 9 AXES AND COORDINATESYSTEMS OF COORDINATES 3 5 3 CYLINDRICAL COORDINATES To define a point in space the system of cylindrical coordinates can be used as well as the Cartesian coordinate system A point in this system would be defined by The projection of this point on the main plane which should be defined in polar coordinates R Q Rest of axes in cartesian coordinates Examples R30 Q10 Z100 R20 Q45 Z10 V30 A20 Page Chapter 3 Section 10 AXES AND COORDINATESYSTEMS PROGRAMMING OF COORDINATES 3 5 4 ANGLE AND ONE CARTESIAN COORDINATE A point on the main plane can be defined via one of its cartesian coordinates and the exit angle of the previous path Example of programming assuming that the main plane is XY X10 Y20 Q45 X30 Q90 Y60 Q 45 X50 Q 135 Y20 Q180 X10 gt kd Point PO starting point Point P1 Point P2 Point P3 Point P4 Point PO If you wish to represent a point in space the remaining coordinates can be programmed in cartesian coordinates Chapter 3 AXES AND COORDINATESYSTEMS Section Page PROGRAMMING 11 OF COORDINATES 3 6 ROTARY AXES The types of rotary axes available are Normal rotary axis Positioning only rotary axis Hirth rotary axis Each o
331. eter A permits using a standard working acceleration and another one to be used when executing with Look Ahead The smaller the E parameter value the lower the machining feedrate When operating with Look Ahead itis a good idea to adjust the axes so their following error lag is as small as possible because the contouring error will be at least equal to the minimum following error When calculating the axis feedrate the CNC takes into consideration the following aspects The programmed feedrate The curvature and the corners The maximum feedrates of the axes The maximum accelerations If any of the circumstances listed below occurs while executing with Look Ahead the CNC slows down to 0 at the previous block and it recovers the machining conditions for Look Ahead in the next motion block Motionless block Execution of auxiliary functions M S T Single block execution mode MDI mode TOOL INSPECTION mode Ifa Cycle Stop Feed Hold etc occurs while executing in Look Ahead mode the machine may not stop at the current block several additional blocks will be necessary to stop with the permitted deceleration Function G51 is modal and incompatible with G05 G07 and G50 Should any of them be programmed function G51 will be canceled and the new one will be selected On the other hand the CNC will issue Error 7 Incompatible G functions when programming any of the following functions while G5
332. eters miscel laneous M functions leadscrew error compensation and cross compensation Chapter 12 Diagnosis Description of the Diagnosis mode It is possible to know the CNC configuration and run a system test Introduction 8 L In this manual an explanation is given of how to operate the FAGOR 8055 CNC by means of its Monitor Keyboard unit and the Operator Panel The Monitor Keyboard unit consists of The Monitor or CRT screen which is used to show the required system information The Keyboard which allows communication with the CNC allowing information to be requested by means of commands or by changing the CNC status by generating new instructions OVERVIEW Chapter 1 Section OVERVIEW Page 1 1 MONITOR INFORMATION LAYOUT The monitor is divided into the following areas or display windows EXECUTE SIMULATE JOG TABLES UTILITIES 1 This window indicates the selected operating mode as well as the program number and the number of active blocks The program status is also indicated in execution or interrupted and if the DNC is active 2 This window indicates the time in the hours minutes seconds format 3 This window displays the Messages sent to the operator from the part program or via DNC The last message received will be shown regardless of where it has come from 4 This window will display messages from the PLC If the PLC activates two or mor
333. ethods of definition IF PO P1 P2 P3 EQ P4 GOTO N100 IF A B C D EQ E GOTO N100 When using a parameter name letter for assigning a value to it A instead of PO for example if the arithmetic expression is a constant the statement can be abbreviated as follows PO 13 7 gt A 13 7 gt A13 7 Becareful when using parenthesis since M30 is not the same as M30 The CNC interprets M30 as a high level statement meaning P12 30 and not the execution of the miscellaneous M30 function The global parameter P100 P299 can be used throughout the program by any block irrespective of the nesting level Multiple machining G60 G61 G62 G63 G64 G65 and machining canned cycles G69 G81 G89 use a local parameter nesting level when active Machining canned cycles use the global parameter P299 for internal calculations and probing canned cycles use global parameters P294 to P299 Chapter 13 Section Page PROGRAMMINGINHIGH LEVELLANGUAGE GENERAL PURPOSE 7 VARIABLES 13 2 2 VARIABLES ASSOCIATED WITH TOOLS These variables are associated with the tool offset table tool table and tool magazine table so the values which are assigned to or read from these fields will comply with the formats established for these tables Tool offset table R L LK They are given in the active units If G70 in inches Max 3937 00787 If G71 in millimeters Max 99999 9999 If rotary axis in degrees
334. execution of a canned cycle cancels radius compensation G41 and G42 It is equivalent to G40 7 Iftool length compensation G43 is to be used this function must be programmed in the same block or in the one before the definition of the canned cycle The CNC applies the tool length compensation when the longitudinal perpendicular axis starts moving Therefore itis recommended to position the tool outside the canned cycle area when defining function G43 for the canned cycle 8 Theexecution of any canned cycle will alter the global parameter P299 Chapter 9 Section Page CANNEDCYCLES GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS 5 9 5 MACHINING CANNED CYCLES In all machining cycles there are three coordinates along the longitudinal axis to the work plane which due to their importance are discussed below Initial plane coordinate This coordinate is given by the position which the tool occupies with respect to machine zero when the cycle is activated Reference plane coordinate This is programmed in the cycle definition block and represents an approach coordinate to the part It can be programmed in absolute coordinates or in incremental in which case it will be referred to the initial plane Machining depth coordinate This is programmed in the cycle definition block Itcan be programmed in absolute coordinates or in incremental coordinates in which case it will be referred to the reference plane There are two functions which a
335. f the selected axis to be read or modified on the additive zero offset table indicated by the PLC Ifany ofthe PLCOF X C variables are accessed block preparation is interrupted and the CNC waits for this command to be executed to begin block preparation again Page Chapter 13 Section 10 PROGRAMMINGINHIGH LEVELLANGUAGE VARIABLES FOR ZEROOFFSETS 13 2 4 VARIABLES ASSOCIATED WITH FUNCTION G49 With function G49 it is possible to define a coordinate transformation or in other words the incline plane resulting from that transformation Read only variables associated with the definition of function G49 ORGROX X coordinate of the new part zero referred to home ORGROY Y coordinate of the new part zero referred to home ORGROZ Z coordinate of the new part zero referred to home ORGROA Value assigned to parameter A ORGROB Value assigned to parameter B ORGROC Value assigned to parameter C ORGROQ Value assigned to parameter Q ORGROR Value assigned to parameter R ORGROS Value assigned to parameter S Every time G49 is programmed the CNC updates the values ofthe parameters that have be defined For example when programming G49 XYZ ABC The CNC updates the following variables ORGROX ORGROY ORGROZ ORGROA ORGROB ORGROC Variables ORGROQ ORGROR ORGROS keep their previous values Read Write variables updated by the CNC once function G49 is executed When having a swivel or angled spindle machine parameter XFO
336. f this tool offset whenever the measurement error is equal to or greater than the tolerance L Depending on the axis the measurement is made with K the correction will be made on the length or radius value Tf the measurement is made with the axis longitudinal to the work plane the length wear K of the indicated tool offset D will be modified Tfthe measurement is made with one of the axes which make up the work plane the radius wear I of the indicated tool offset D will be modified Page Chapter 12 Section 14 WORKING WITH A PROBE SURFACE MEASURING 12 6 OUTSIDE CORNER MEASURING CANNED CYCLE A probe placed in the spindle will be used which must be previously calibrated by means of canned cycles Canned cycle for calibrating tool length Canned cycle for calibrating probe The programming format for this cycle is PROBE 4 X Y Z B F X 5 5 Theoretical coordinate along the X axis of the corner to be measured Y 5 5 Theoretical coordinate along the Y axis of the corner to be measured Z 5 5 Theoretical coordinate along the Z axis of the corner to be measured Depending on the corner of the part it is required to measure the probe must be placed in the corresponding shaded area see figure before calling the cycle A A Z E SS SS NN SS SS SS B5 5 Definesthe safety distance Must be programmed with a positive value and over 0 The probe must be placed with re
337. ference between two of its points The status area is divided in several vertical sections Each of them represents the amount of time established by the time base constant This constant determines the resolution of the logic signals and after being defined by the user can be modified at will The relationship between the time base and the signal resolution is inversely proportional in such way that the smaller the time base the greater the signal resolution is and vice versa Cycle window d te This window displays a series of vertical lines l Each one of them indicates the instant when a new PLC program cycle starts being executed It allows to maintain a relationship between the flow of the logic signals and the duration of each PLC execution cycle Information window This window provides general information about the trace being shown at the time The shown data is the following Trigger It shows the trigger condition set by the user to do the trace Time Base Indicates the time base set by the user and used to show the current trace Trace Status Indicates the current trace status The shown texts and their meanings are as follows Empty There is no calculated trace Capturing There is one trace in progress Complete One stored trace is available Chapter 9 Section Page PLC LOGICANALYZER 25 Cursor Offset Indicates the time difference in milliseconds between the cursor position
338. fied edited copied etc A program not having this attribute may be displayed in the program directory and executed but its contents may not be modified by the user X Indicates that the program may be executed A program missing this attribute cannot be executed by the user Only the letters of the selected attributes will be displayed in the attribute field in such a way that the ones not selected will be represented as Chapter 7 Section Page UTILITIES PROGRAM DIRECTORY 3 Example O X indicates that the program was edited by the OEM it will be displayed in the program directory not hidden it cannot be modified but it can be executed 11 50 14 PROG PROG PROG P000002 P000002 P000002 P000002 P000002 P000002 P000002 P000002 P000002 P000002 P000002 P000002 P000002 P000002 P000002 P000002 P000002 P000002 P000002 P000002 P000002 P000002 0022 Subroutines CAP INS DIRECTORY COPY DELETE RENAME PROTEC COMPACT CHANGE TION DATE 7 1 2 SUBROUTINE DIRECTORY This option sequentially displays all the subroutines defined in the part programs of the CNC as well as the number of the part programs where they are located If the part program containing the indicated subroutine is HIDDEN attribute H it will 7 1 3 DIRECTORY OF THE SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS PORT DNC In this mode of operation the CNC displays the program directory of the computer in DOS format Page Chapter
339. follows 1 Getacardboard box whose three inside dimensions are at least 15 cm 6 inches larger than those of the unit The cardboard being used to make the box must have a resistance of 170 Kg 375 Ib 2 When sending it to a Fagor Automation office for repair attach a label indicating the owner of the unit person to contact type of unit serial number symptom and a brief description of the problem 3 Wrap the unit in a polyethylene roll or similar material to protect it When sending the monitor especially protect the CRT glass 4 Pad the unit inside the cardboard box with poly utherane foam on all sides 5 Seal the cardboard box with packing tape or industrial staples Introduction 5 FAGOR DOCUMENTATION 8055 CNC OEM Manual 8055 M CNC USER Manual 8055 T CNC USER Manual 8050 DNC Software Manual 8050 DNC Protocol Manual FLOPPY DISK Manual Introduction 6 FOR THE 8055 CNC Is directed to the machine builder or person in charge of installing and starting up the CNC It is common to CNC models 8055 M and 8055 T and it has the Installation manual inside Is directed to the end user or CNC operator It contains 2 manuals Operating Manual describing how to operate the CNC Programming Manual describing how to program the CNC Is directed to the end user or CNC operator It contains 2 manuals Operating Manual describing how to operate the CNC Programming Manual describing how to program the CNC
340. for the roughing operation is G67 and it cannot be executed independently from the G66 Its programming format G67 ABCIRVFSTDM A 5 5 Defines the angle which forms the roughing path with the abscissa axis MP1105 If parameter A is not programmed the roughing operation is carried out following concentric paths It will be machined as fast as possible since it does not have to go over the islands MP1129 Chapter 11 Section Page 3D POCKETS 29 2D AND 3D POCKETS ROUGHING B 4 5 5 MP1136 MP1137 C 5 5 I 4 5 5 Defines the machining pass along the longitudinal axis depth of the roughing pass It must be defined and it must have a value other than 0 otherwise the roughing operation will be cancelled B B If programmed with a positive sign all the roughing will be performed with the same machining pass and the canned cycle calculates a pass equal to or smaller than the programmed pass If programmed with a negative sign all the roughing will be performed with the programmed pass and the canned cycle will adjust the last pass to obtain the total programmed depth If done with B the ridges will appear only on the pocket walls but if done with B they could also show up above the islands B B Defines the milling pass in roughing along the main plane the en
341. g error Function G38 is not modal so it should be programmed whenever a tangential exit of the tool is required Value R 5 5 should always appear after G38 It also indicates the radius of the arc which the CNC applies to get a tangential exit from the part This R value must always be positive Example If the starting point is X0 Y30 and you wish to machine an arc with the approach and exit paths in a straight line you should program G90 G01 X40 G02 X80 120 JO G00 X120 Page Chapter 6 Section 16 PATHCONTROL TANGENTIALEXIT G38 If however in the same example you wish the exit from machining to be done tangentially and describing a radius of 5 mm you should program G90 G01 X40 G02 G38 R5 X80 I20 JO G00 X120 Chapter 6 Section Page PATHCONTROL TANGENTIALEXIT G38 17 6 10 AUTOMATIC RADIUS BLEND G36 In milling operations it is possible to round a corner via Function G36 with a determined radius without having to calculate the center nor the start and end points of the arc Function G36 is not modal so it should be programmed whenever controlled corner rounding is required This function should be programmed in the block in which the movement the end you want to round is defined The R5 5 value should always follow G36 It also indicates the rounding radius which the CNC applies to get the required corner rounding This R value must always be positive Example
342. g in the desired number and pressing ENTER the cursor will position over that block which will then be selected quitting the search mode Chapter 9 Section Page PLC EDIT 5 REPLACE With this function it is possible to replace a character sequence with another throughout the selected program When selecting this option the CNC requests the character sequence to be replaced Once the text to be replaced is indicated press the WITH softkey and the CNC will request the character sequence which will replace the previous one Once this text is keyed in press the END OF TEXT softkey and the cursor will be positioned over the first occurrence of the searched text The search will begin at the current block The found text will be highlighted and the following softkey options will appear REPLACE Will replace the highlighted text and will continue the search from this point to the end of the program If no more occurrences of the text to be replaced are found the CNC will quit this mode If another occurrence of the text is found it will be highlighted showing the same replacing or not replacing options DO NOT REPLACE Will not replace the highlighted text and will continue the search from this point to the end of the program If no more occurrences of the text to be replaced are found the CNC will quit this mode If another occurrence of the text is found it will be highlighted showin
343. g managed Example There is a manual tool changer Tool T1 is currently selected and the operator requests tool T5 The subroutine associated with the tools may contain the following instructions P103 NBTOOL MSG SELECT T P103 AND PRESS CYCLE START Instruction P103 NBTOOL assigns the number of the tool currently being managed to parameter P103 Therefore P103 5 The message displayed by the CNC will be SELECT T5 AND PRESS CYCLE START PRGN Returns the program number being executed Should none be selected a value of 1 is returned BLKN Returns the label number of the last block executed GSn Returns the status of the G function indicated n 1 if itis active and 0 if not P120 GS17 assigns the value 1 to parameter P120 if the G17 function is active and 0 if not MSn Returns the status of the M function indicated n 1 ifitis active and 0 if not This variable provides the status of M00 M01 M02 M03 M04 M05 M06 M08 M09 M19 M30 M41 M42 M43 M44 and M45 functions Page Chapter 13 Section 26 PROGRAMMINGINHIGH LEVELLANGUAGE OTHER VARIABLES PLANE LONGAX MIRROR Returns data on the abscissa axis bits 4 to 7 and the ordinate axis bits 0 to 3 of the active plane in 32 bits and in binary 7654 3210 LSB Ordinate axis Abscissa axis The axes are coded in 4 bits and indicate the axis number from 1 to 6 according to the progr
344. g of the profile Attention Care must be taken to program G01 G02 or G03 in the block following the definition of the beginning as GOO is modal thus preventing the CNC from interpreting the following blocks as the beginnings of a new profile 4 Once the definition of the profiles has been completed a label number must be assigned to the last block programmed in order to indicate the canned cycle G66 the end of the geometric description Example G0 G17 G90 X 350 YO Z50 G66 D100 R200 F300 S400 E500 Description of cycle G0 G90 X0 YO Z50 M30 N400 GO G90 X 260 Y 190 ZA 5 Beginning of first profile GO X030 Y IO cese eai Beginning of another profile Gl G0 X 120 YOUR Beginning of another profile 32 ids N500 G 1 X 120 M90 iet eii End of geometric description Chapter 11 Section Page 2D AND 3D POCKETS 2DPOCKETPROFILES 17 Profiles are described as programmed paths it being possible to include corner rounding chamfers etc following the syntax rules defined for this purpose Mirror images scaling factor changes rotation of coordinate system zero offsets etc cannot be programmed in the description of profiles Nor is it possible to program blocks in high level language such as jumps subroutine calls or parametric programming Other canned cycles cannot be programmed In addition to the GOO function which has a special meaning the irregular pocket
345. g program selected by general machine parameter USEREDIT See section 4 1 1 This is edited in ISO code or high level language 4 1 1 EDITING IN CNC LANGUAGE A program will be edited block by block and each block can be written either in ISO code or high level language or it can be just a program comment Once this option has been selected the softkeys will change colors and they will appear over white background showing the information corresponding to the type of editing possible at that point Also editing help will be available at any time by just pressing the HELP key To quit this help mode press HELP again If ESC is pressed while editing a block the block editing mode is abandoned and the block currently being edited will not be added to the program Once the block has been edited press ENTER This new block will be added to the program after the one indicated by the cursor The cursor will position over the new edited block and the editing area window will be cleared so another block can be written To quit the block editing mode press ESC or MAIN MENU Page Chapter 4 Section 2 EDIT EDITING IN CNC LANGUAGE 4 1 2 TEACH IN EDITING It is basically identical to the previous option editing in CNC language except what regards the programming of position coordinate values This option shows the current position values of each one of the axes of the machine Itpermits to enterthe axes positi
346. g the same replacing or not replacing options TO THE END This function will automatically replace all the matching text from the current block to the end of the program without offering the option of not replacing it ABORT This function will not replace the highlighted text and it will quit the find and replace mode Page Chapter 9 Section PLC EDIT DELETE BLOCK With this function it is possible to delete a block or group of blocks To delete only one block just position the cursor over it and press ENTER To delete a group of blocks indicate the first and last blocks to be deleted To do so follow these steps Position the cursor over the first block to be deleted and press the INITIAL BLOCK softkey Position the cursor over the last block to be deleted and press the FINAL BLOCK softkey Ifthelastblock to be deleted is also the last one ofthe program it can also be selected by pressing the TO THE END softkey Oncethe first and last blocks are selected the CNC will highlightthe selected blocks requesting confirmation to delete them MOVE BLOCK With this option itis possible to move a block or group of blocks by previously indicating the first and last blocks to be moved To do so follow these steps Position the cursor over the first block to be moved and press the INITIAL BLOCK softkey Position the cursor over the last block to be moved and
347. ge Chapter 16 Section 22 TRACINGANDDIGITIZING TRACING CONTOUR DEFINITION Three dimensional programming examples Closed three dimensional contour G23 XYZ I8 J50 K75 NO 8 Three dimensional tracing definition G24 L8 E5 K1 Digitizing definition G27 S1 Closed contour definition G25 Deactivate tracing and digitizing Open three dimensional contour 50 e J A MM QR Ko X X G23 XYZ I20 J50 K45 NO 8 MO 5 Three dimensional tracing definition G24 L8 E5 K1 Digitizing definition G27 S1 Q80 R40 J25 KO Open contour definition G25 Deactivate tracing and digitizing Chapter 16 Section Page TRACING ANDDIGITIZING TRACING CONTOUR 23 DEFINITION 16 5 G25 DEACTIVATE TRACING The tracing function can be cancelled deactivated By means of function G25 which can be programmed in any block By selecting a new work plane G16 G17 G18 G19 When selecting a new longitudinal perpendicular axis G15 After executing an end of program M02 M30 After an EMERGENCY or RESET When cancelling the tracing function G23 the digitizing function G24 will also be cancelled if it was active Page 24 Chapter 16 Section TRACING ANDDIGITIZING DEACTIVATE TRACING G25 16 6 G24 ACTIVATE DIGITIZING Digitizing consists in taking capturing coordinates of the machine while tracing the model and sending them to a file previous
348. ged with respect to the previous digitized point will be defined G 2 Incremental filtered format All points will be programmed in incremental coordinates G91 and referred to the previous digitized point Only those axes whose positions have changed with respect to the previous digitized point will be defined If not programmed the canned cycle will assume a value of GO F5 5 Defines the sweeping feedrate It is given in mm min or inches min Page Chapter 16 Section 48 TRACING ANDDIGITIZING 3 D PROFILE TRACING CANNEDCYCLE BASIC OPERATION 1 2 3 The probe positions at the point set by parameters X Y and Z The CNC approaches the probe to the model until it touches it The probe keeps in constant contact with the surface of the model following it along the programmed path If itis to be digitized parameters L and E it will generate a new block per every digitized point in the program previously opened by means of the OPEN P statement Once the canned cycle has concluded the probe will return to the starting point This movement consists of Movement of the probe along the Z axis longitudinal perpendicular axis to the position indicated by parameter Z Movement in the main work plane up to the cycle s initial point parameters X Y Chapter 16 Section Page 3 D PROFILE TRACING TRACING ANDDIGITIZING CANNEDCYCLE 49 16 7 5 TRACING CANNED CYCLE WITH POLYGON
349. givencondition which must be arelational expression If the condition is true result equals 1 lt action1 gt will be executed otherwise result equals 0 lt action2 gt will be executed SUBROUTINE STATEMENTS Section 14 5 SUB integer Definition of subroutine RET End of subroutine CALL expression Call to subroutine PCALL expression assignment statement assignment statement Call to a subroutine Besides allows the initialization by means of assignment statements of up to 26 local parameters of this subroutine MCALL expression assignment statement assignment statement The same as PCALL but converting the subroutine indicated into a modal subroutine MDOFF Cancellation of modal subroutine PROBE expression assignment statement assignment statement Executes a probing canned cycle its parameters being initialized by means of assignment statements DIGIT expression assignment statement assignment statement Executes a digitizing canned cycle its parameters being initialized by means of assignment statements TRACE expression assignment statement assignment statement Executes a tracing canned cycle its parameters being initialized by means of assignment statements REPOS X Y Z It must always be used inside interruption subroutines and it facilitates the repositioning of the machine axes to the interrupti
350. gned to the machine parameter n of the indicated axes P110 MPY 1 assigns the value of the machine parameter P1 to arithmetic parameter P110 of the Y axis DFORMAT which indicates the format used in its display MPSn Returns the value which was assigned to the main spindle machine parameter n MPSSn Returns the value which was assigned to the secondary spindle machine parameter n MPASn Returns the value of the machine parameter n for the auxiliary spindle MPLCn Returns the value which was assigned to the PLC machine parameter n Page Chapter 13 Section E VARIABLES FOR 12 PROGRAMMINGINHIGH LEVELLANGUAGE MACHINEPARAMETERS 13 2 6 VARIABLES ASSOCIATED WITH WORK ZONES Variables associated with work zones are read only variables The values of the limits are given in the active units If G70 in inches Max 3937 00787 If G71 in millimeters Max 99999 9999 If rotary axis in degrees Max 99999 9999 The status of the work zones is determined according to the following code 0 Disabled 1 Enabled as no entry zone 2 Enabled as no exit zone Read only variables FZONE Returns the status of work zone 1 P100 FZONE assigns to parameter P100 the status of work zone 1 FZLO X C Returns the value of the lower limit of Zone 1 according to the selected axis X C FZUP X C Returns the value of the upper limit of Zone 1 according to the selected axis X C
351. has been selected as the end block of the program the CNC will stop after executing the complete canned cycle orthe indicated subroutine Ifthe selected block has a number of block repetitions the program will stop after doing all the repetitions indicated Page Chapter 3 Section EXECUTE SIMULATE BLOCKSELECTION ANDSTOP CONDITION 3 2 DISPLAY SELECTION With this option it is possible to select the most appropriate display mode at any time even during execution or simulation of a part program The display modes available at the CNC and which can be selected with softkeys are STANDARD POSITION PART PROGRAM SUBROUTINES FOLLOWING ERRORS USER EXECUTION TIMES All the display modes have a window at the bottom of the CRT which shows the history with the conditions in which machining is being done The information shown is as follows F and Programmed feedrate and selected feedrate OVERRIDE Sand Programmed spindle speed and selected spindle OVERRIDE T Number of active tool D Number of active tool offset NT Number of the next tool This field will be displayed when having a machining center and it will show the tool being selected but which is waiting for the execution of the M06 to make it active ND Tool offset number corresponding to the next tool This field will be displayed when having a machining center and it will show the tool being selected but which is waiting for the execution of the
352. he CNC off This kind of zero offsets established by program is very useful for repeated machining operations at different machine positions Chapter 4 Section Page REFERENCESYSTEMS 7 Example The zero offset table is initialized with the following values G54 X200 Y100 G55 X160 Y 60 G58 X 40 Y 40 G56 X170 Y110 G59 X 30 Y 10 Using absolute zero offsets G54 Applies G54 offset Profile execution Executes profile Al G55 Applies G55 offset Profile execution Executes profile A2 G56 Applies G56 offset Profile execution Executes profile A3 Using incremental zero offsets G54 Applies G54 offset Profile execution Executes profile Al G58 Applies offsets G54 G58 Profile execution Executes profile A2 G59 Applies offsets G54 G59 Profile execution Executes profile A3 Page Chapter 4 Section 8 REFERENCESYSTEMS 4 5 POLAR ORIGIN PRESET G93 Function G93 allows you to preset any point from the work plane as a new origin of polar coordinates This function must be programmed alone in the block its format being G93 I 5 5 J 5 5 Parameters I amp J respectively define the abscissa and ordinate axes of the new origin of polar coordinates Example Assuming that the tool is at X0 YO 30 Po 35 G93 135 J30 Preset P3 as polar origin G90 G01 R25Q0_ Point P1 in a straight line G01 G03 Q90 Point P2 in an arc G03 G01 XO YO Point PO i
353. he CNC requests the number of the tool pocket to be found Once the number is keyed in press ENTER DELETE With this option it is possible to delete one or more tool pockets off the table When deleting a tool pocket the CNC sets all its values to 0 To delete a tool pocket indicate its number and press ENTER To delete a group of tool pockets indicate the first one press the UP TO softkey indicate the last one to be deleted and press ENTER To delete all tool pockets press the ALL softkey The CNC will request confirmation and after pressing ENTER it will delete then all Page Chapter 6 Section 20 TABLES TOOLMAGAZINETABLE LOAD With this option itis possible to load the tool magazine table with the values received via any of the serial communications ports RS232C or RS422 To doso selectthe desired communications line by pressing its corresponding softkey The data transmission will start right when that softkey is pressed Press the ABORT softkey to cancel the transmission in mid run When the length of the received table is not the same as that of the current one general machine parameter NPOCKET the CNC will act in the following manner The received table is shorter than the current one The received tool offset values are modified and the remaining ones keep their original values Thereceived table is longer than the current one All current values are replaced and
354. he CNC starts the data capture at the very instant the user selects the option to execute the trace Then once the trace has been executed the trigger vertical red line will be positioned in the center of the trace Page Chapter 9 Section 30 PLC LOGICANALYZER 9 10 2 3 SELECTION OF TIME BASE By means of this parameter the user specifies the amount of time represented by each of vertical intervals Since the CRT width of these intervals is always the same the signal resolution will be established by this time base in such way that the smaller the time base the greater the signal resolution will be Example Having a Mark whose status changes every 2 milliseconds ens ens With a time base of 10 milliseconds it will appear as follows T0096 T0097 10 ms SSS With a time base of 20 milliseconds it will appear as follows l Ex EE ES 20 ms 4 With a time base of 4 milliseconds it will appear as follows The time base is given in milliseconds and the information window will show the selected value By default the CNC assumes a time base of 10 milliseconds Itis possible to set a time base equal to the frequency of the signal to be monitored and then change it to obtain a finer signal resolution when analyzing the trace Chapter 9 Section Page PLC LOGICANALYZER 31 9 10 3 EXECUTE TRACE Once having sele
355. he CNC will allow the modification of its attributes O OEM H Hidden or invisible M Modifiable and X executable After selecting the new attributes press ENTER to validate them Chapter 7 Section Page TILITIE USER PERMISSION 11 n OEM PERMISSION 7 5 3 PASSWORDS When selecting this option the CNC will display all the password types available with their mnemonic and defined codes Every time it is attempted to access any of the tables or operating modes which have been assigned a password the CNC will display a window requesting that password Once the password has been keyed in press ENTER The possible password types that can be selected are the following General access MASTERPSW This password will be required whenever attempting to access the UTILITIES PROTECTIONS and PASSWORDS modes OEM only access OEMPSW This password will be required whenever attempting to access the OEM permissions in the UTILITIES PROTECTIONS and OEM PERMISSION modes USER access USERPSW This password will be required whenever attempting to access the USER permissions in the UTILITIES PROTECTIONS and USER PERMISSION modes PLC access PLCPSW This password will be required whenever attempting to edit the PLC program as well as the PLC error and message programs It will also be required when attempting to compile the PLC program The PLC program will be displayed as long as it d
356. he available instructions are for assignment display enable disable flow control subroutines and for generating programs and screens Digitizing cycles It shows how to program the various digitizing cycles Tracing and Digitizing It shows how to program the various digitizing and tracing cycles Coordinate transformation It describes coordinate transformation It shows how to select incline planes It shows how to make movements along the tool axes It shows how to work with TCP Tool Center Point transformation A ISO code programming B Internal CNC variables C High level programming D Key codes E Programming assistance system pages OVERVIEW The FAGOR 8055 CNC can be programmed both at the machine from the front panel orfromexternal peripheral devices tape reader cassette recorder computer etc Memory available to the user for carrying out the part programs is 128 K expandable to 512 K The part programs and the values in the tables which the CNC has can be entered as follows From the front panel Once the editing mode or table required has been selected the CNC allows you to enter data from the keyboard From a Computer DNC or Peripheral Device The CNC allows data to be interchanged with a computer or peripheral device using RS232C and RS422 cables If this is controlled from the CNC it is necessary to preset the corresponding table or part program directory utilities you want to communicate with
357. he block contents have been modified press ENTER so the new contents replace the old ones Page Chapter 9 Section 4 PLC EDIT FIND This option is used to find a specific text within the selected program When selecting this option the following options will appear BEGINNING This softkey positions the cursor over the first program block which is then selected quitting the find option END This softkey positions the cursor over the last program block which is then selected quitting the find option TEXT With this function itis possible to searcha text or character sequence starting from the block indicated by the cursor When this key is selected the CNC requests the character sequence to be found When the text is defined press the END OF TEXT softkey and the cursor will be positioned over the first occurrence of that text The search will begin at the current block The text found will be highlighted being possible to continue with the search or to quit it Press ENTER to continue the search up to the end of the program It is possible to search as many times as wished and when the end of the program is reached it will start from the first block Press the EXIT softkey or the ESC key to quit the search mode The cursor will be positioned where the indicated text was found last LINE NUMBER After pressing this key the CNC requests the number of the block to be found After keyin
358. he display area being selected non colored rectangle With this option it is possible to enlarge or reduce the display area When selecting this option the CNC will show a window superimposed on the current graphics and another one overthe drawing atthe lowerright hand side ofthe screen These new windows indicate the new display area being selected Use the and keys to either enlarge or reduce the size of the new display area and the arrow keys to move the zoom window around to the desired location on the screen To return to the initial display area values while in this mode press the INITIAL VALUE softkey The CNC will display these initial values but without quitting the ZOOM mode Press ESC to quit this ZOOM mode without making any changes to the initial values Once the new display area has been defined press ENTER to validate the new values The CNC will keep the current graphic display When pressin the CNC will start or continue the execution or simulation of the P g selected part program and depending on the type of graphics being selected at the time it will behave as follows Page Chapter 3 Section 28 EXECUTE SIMULATE GRAPHICS SOLID The CNC will reset the graphics showing an unmachined block The drawing shown in the lower right hand side of the screen will appear changed and the cube with the colored sides will represent the new selected graphic area This graphic area will re
359. he feedrate in mm rev orinches rev selected by program Returns the Feedrate Override selected at the CNC This will be given by an integer between 0 and MAXFOVR maximum 255 This feedrate percentage may be indicated by the PLC by DNC or from the front panel and the CNC will select one of them the order of priority from highest to lowest being by program by DNC by PLC and from the switch Returns the Feedrate Override selected by DNC If this has a value of 0 it means that it is not selected Returns the Feedrate Override selected by PLC If this has a value of 0 it means that it is not selected Returns the Feedrate Override selected from the switch at the CNC Operator Panel Read write variables PRGFRO This variable allows the feedrate percentage selected by program to be read or modified This will be given by an integer between 0 and MAXFOVR maximum 255 If it has a value of 0 this means that it is not selected P110 PRGFRO assigns to P110 the of feedrate override selected by program PFRGFRO P111 sets the feedrate override selected by program to the value of P111 Chapter 13 Section Page PROGRAMMINGINHIGH LEVELLANGUAGE VARIABLES FOR 15 FEEDRATES 13 2 8 VARIABLES ASSOCIATED WITH COORDINATES The coordinate values for each axis are given in the active units Read only variables If G70 in inches Max 3937 00787 If G71 in millimeters Max 999
360. he first block S and last block E defining the geometry of the profiles forming the pocket Both parameters must be set G00 G90 X100 Y200 Z50 F5000 T1 D2 Initial positioning M06 G66 R100 C200 J210 M30 N100 G67 IN200 5 dettes F300 S400 E500 Definition of irregular pocket canned cycle End of program Defines the roughing operation Starts the semi finishing operation End the semi finishing operation Defines the finishing operation Starts the geometry description N500 G2 G6 X300 Y50 1150 JO End of geometry description Chapter 11 Section Page 2D AND 3D POCKETS 3D POCKETS 25 Basic operation 1 Roughing operation Only if it has been programmed It consists of several surface milling passes until the total depth programmed has been reached On each surface milling pass the steps below will be followed depending on the type of machining that has been programmed Case A When the machining paths are linear and maintain a certain angle with the abscissa axis Jt first contours the external profile of the part If the finishing operation has been selected on the cycle call this contouring is performed leaving the finishing stock programmed for the finishing pass MP1102 Nextthe milling operation with the programmed feed and steps If while milling an island is run into for the first time it will be contoured MP1103 After the contouring a
361. he programming of figures from 0 0001 to 99999 9999 with or without sign when it works in millimeters G71 This is called format 5 4 or from 0 00001 to 3937 00787 with or without sign if it is programmed in inches G70 This is called format 4 5 However and to simplify the instructions we can say that the CNC admits 5 5 format thereby admitting 5 4 in millimeters and 4 5 in inches On power up after executing M02 M30 or after EMERGENCY or RESET the CNC will assume that the system of units of measurement is the one defined by the general machine parameter INCHES Chapter 3 Section Page MILLIMETERS G71 5 AXES AND COORDINA TESYSTEMS INCHES G70 3 4 ABSOLUTE INCREMENTAL PROGRAMMING G90 G91 The CNC allows the programming of the coordinates of one point either with absolute G90 or incremental G91 values When working with absolute coordinates G90 the point coordinates refer to a point of origin of established coordinates often the part zero datum When working in incremental coordinates G91 the numerical value programmed corresponds to the movement information for the distance to be travelled from the point where the tool is situated at that time The sign in front shows the direction of movement Functions G90 G91 are modal and incompatible Example Absolute coordinates G90 XO YO Point PO X150 5 Y200 Point P1 X300 Point P2 X0 YO Point PO In
362. he user These customizing programs may utilize the Programming Statements and they will be executed in the special channel designed for this use The program selected in each case will be indicated in the following general machine parameters In USERDPLY the program to be executed in the Execution Mode will be indicated In USEREDIT the program to be executed in the Editing Mode will be indicated In USERMAN the program to be executed in the Manual JOG Mode will be indicated In USERDIAG the program to be executed in the Diagnosis Mode will be indicated The customizing programs may have up to five nesting levels besides their current one Also the customizing statements do not allow local parameters nevertheless all global parameters may be used to define them PAGE expression The mnemonic PAGE displays the page number indicated by means of a number or by means of any expression which results in a number User defined pages will be from page 0 to page 255 and will be defined from the CNC keyboard in the Grahic Editor mode and as indicated in the Operating Manual System pages will be defined by a number greater than 1000 See the corresponding appendix SYMBOL expression 1 expression 2 expression 3 The mnemonic SYMBOL displays the symbol whose number is indicated by means of the value of expression 1 once this has been evaluated Its position on screen is also defined by expression 2 column
363. heir associativity Priority from highest to lowest Associativity NOT functions negative from right to left EXP MOD from left to right from leftto right add subtract from left to right relational operators from left to right AND XOR from left to right OR from left to right It is advisable to use brackets to clarify the order in which the evaluation of the expression is done P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 P9 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 P9 The use of repetitive or additional brackets will not produce errors nor will they slow down execution In functions brackets must be used except when these are applied to anumerical constant in which case they are optional SIN 45 SIN 45 both are valid and equivalent SIN 10 5 the same as SIN 10 5 Expressions can be used also to reference parameters and tables P100 P9 P100 P P7 P100 P P8 SIN P8 20 P100 2 ORGX 55 P100 ORGX 12 P9 PLCMS5008 PLCM5008 OR 1 selects Single Block execution M5008 1 PLCM5010 PLCM5010 AND FFFFFFFE Frees feedrate Override M5010 0 PROGRAMMINGINHIGH LEVELLANGUAGE EXPRESSIONS 33 Chapter 13 Section Page 13 5 2 RELATIONAL EXPRESSIONS These are arithmetic expressions joined by relational operators IF P8 EQ 12 8 Analyzes if the value of P8 is equal to 12 8 IF ABS SIN P24 GT SPEED Analyzes if the sine is greater than the spindle speed IF CLOCK LT
364. hen displaying a page or symbol which has acall to anon existing symbol deleted or not defined that area of the page will appear blank However if this symbol is edited later the new representation assigned to the symbol will appear in all the pages and symbols in which it had been included Page 14 Chapter 10 Section GRAPHICEDITOR GRAPHICELEMENTS POLYGON A polygon is a closed polyline whose beginning and end points coincide After pressing the softkey the following steps will be taken 1 Place the cursor on one of the vertices of the polygon and press the ENTER key to validate it 2 Move the cursor to the following vertex of the polygon the CNC will show the line you are trying to draw Press the ENTER key to validate the line or the ESC key if you wish to abandon 3 Repeat step 2 for the remaining vertices Once all vertices are defined press the ENTER key and the CNC will complete the polygon or the ESC key if you wish to quit The maximum number of sides on the polygon is limited to 127 FILLED POLYGON After pressing this softkey follow the steps as in the POLYGON option but in this case after completing the definition of the polygon it will be filled with the color used for its definition FILLED CIRCLE After pressing this softkey follow the steps as in the CIRCLE option but in this case after completing the definition of the circle it will be filled with the color used for its
365. herefore the receiving unit must be previously set ready Press the ABORT softkey to cancel the data transmission in mid run MM INCHES Every time this softkey is pressed the CNC will change the display format of those parameters affected by these units from millimeters to inches and vice versa The lower right hand window will show the units currently selected Note thatthis change does not affect the general machine parameter INCHES which indicates the measuring units by default Page Chapter 11 Section 8 MACHINE PARAMETERS OPERATION WITH PARAMETER TABLES I 2 e DIAGNOSIS In this operating mode it is possible to know the configuration of the CNC as well as testing the system The CNC offers the following softkey options System Configuration Hardware test Memory test EPROM memory test User Chapter 12 Section Page DIAGNOSIS 12 1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION This option shows the current system configuration Once this option has been chosen two new softkeys will appear in order to select the hardware configuration or the software configuration of the system 12 1 1 HARDWARE CONFIGURATION This option shows the system configuration displaying the following information DIAGNOSIS CONFIGURATION OF THE CNC8055 C P U Power Supply CPU CNC Module Axes Module CPU PLC Input Output Module 1 Input Output Module 2 Input Output Module 3
366. hreading tool located at Z10 L X Ai l l l 77 KK d SS G90 G33 Z 100 L5 programmed threading M19 Spindle orientation G00 X3 tool withdrawal Z30 withdrawal movement exit from threaded hole You cannot vary the programmed feedrate F while function G33 is active nor the programmed spindle speed S Both functions are fixed at 100 Function G33 is modal and incompatible with G00 G01 G02 G03 and G75 On power up after executing M02 M30 or after EMERGENCY or RESET the CNC assumes code G00 or G01 depending on how the general machine parameter IMOVE is set Page Chapter 6 Section 20 PATHCONTROL THREADING G33 6 13 MOVE TO HARDSTOP G52 By means of function G52 it is possible to program the movement of an axis until running into an object This feature may be interesting for forming machines live tailstocks bar feeders etc Its programming format is G52 X C 5 5 After G52 program the desired axis as well as the target coordinate of the move The axis will move towards the programmed target coordinate until running into something If the axis reaches the programmed target coordinate without running into the hardstop it will stop Function G52 is not modal therefore it must be programmed every time this operation is to be carried out Also it assumes functions G01 and G40 modifying the program history It is incompatible with functions G00 G02 G03 G41 G42 G75 and G76
367. ial ports of the system A CNC symbol can be copied in another symbol or in one of the two serial ports of the system A file received via one of the two serial ports of the system may be copied into a CNC page or symbol depending on the type of file received Press ENTER to validate the copy command When the destination page or symbol already exists the CNC will allow to cancel the command or replace the existing one with the new one Chapter 10 GRAPHICEDITOR Section UTILITIES Page Example to copy page 22 in page 34 the keystroke sequence will be as follows COPY PAGE 22 IN PAGE 34 ENTER DELETE With this option itis possible to delete a page or a symbol To do this follow these steps Use the corresponding softkey to select the corresponding type of file PAGE or SYMBOL ndicate its number and press ENTER The CNC will request confirmation of this command RENAME With this option itis possible to assign anew number or comment to a page orto a symbol Use the corresponding softkey to select the type of file to be renamed PAGE or SYMBOL The CNC will request the new page or symbol number After this press the softkey TO Then use the corresponding softkey to select the type of field to be renamed New number With this option itis possible to assign a new name to a page or symbol To do thi
368. ide of this unit Do not manipulate the connectors with the unit connected to AC power Before manipulating the connectors inputs outputs feedback etc make sure that the unit is not connected to AC power Safety symbols Symbols which may appear on the manual WARNING symbol Ithas an associated text indicating those actions or operations may hurt people or damage products gt Symbols that may be carried on the product WARNING symbol Ithas an associated text indicating those actions or operations may hurt people or damage products Electrical Shock symbol It indicates that point may be under electrical voltage Ground Protection symbol It indicates that point must be connected to the main ground point of the machine as protection for people and units OP Introduction 4 MATERIAL RETURNING TERMS When returning the Monitor or the Central Unit pack it in its original package and with its original packaging material If not available pack it as follows 1 Getacardboard box whose three inside dimensions are at least 15 cm 6 inches larger than those of the unit The cardboard being used to make the box must have a resistance of 170 Kg 375 Ib 2 When sending it to a Fagor Automation office for repair attach a label indicating the owner of the unit person to contact type of unit serial number symptom and a brief description of the problem 3 Wrap the unit in a polyethylene roll or similar material
369. ields of this statement only the program number is necessary the rest of the fields are optional and their meanings are the following DNC1 2 is used to generate the program at a peripheral device or computer indicating A D the serial port being used to transfer data DNC1 or DNC2 If this parameter is not defined it will be assumed that the part program is to be generated at the CNC is used when the program to be generated already exists The CNC will proceed depending on which of these values has been selected If neither value is selected the CNC will display an error message when trying to open it If A the CNC will append add the new blocks created with the WRITE statement after the existing ones If D the CNC will delete the existing program and it will generate anew one Program comment Allows assigning a text or comment to the program being generated After that it will be displayed next to it in the program directory PROGRAM CONTROLSTATEMENTS GENERATINGPROGRAMS Chapter 14 Section Page STATEMENTS FOR 13 WRITE lt block text gt parameters having the following meaning The mnemonic WRITE adds after the last block of the program which began to be edited by means of the mnemonic OPEN P the information contained in lt block text gt as anew program block If ISO language with parametric programming is used within the lt block text gt all the parameters globa
370. ill be programmed in a block which will need to bear a label number in order to indicate to the canned cycle the block where the drilling operation is defined Example G66 D100 R200 F300 S400 E500 Definition of the irregular pocket cycle N100 G81 Definition of the drilling operation The drilling canned cycles that can be programmed are G69 Complex deep hole drilling canned cycle with variable step G81 Drilling canned cycle G82 Drilling canned cycle with dwell G83 Simple deep hole drilling canned cycle with constant step When defining the drilling operation the corresponding definition parameters must be programmed together with the required function In a block of this type only cycle definition parameters must be programmed without defining XY positioning as the canned cycle itself will calculate the coordinate of the point or points to be drilled according to the programmed profile and the roughing angle After the definition parameters auxiliary F S T D M functions can be programmed if so wished No M function can be programmed if it has an associated subroutine It is possible to program the M06 function in this block if it does not have an associated subroutine to make the tool change Otherwise the CNC will show the corresponding error If the M06 has an associated subroutine the drilling tool T must be selected before calling the cycle Examples N100 G69 G98 G91 Z 4 I 90 B1 5
371. in order to simplify explanations we can say that the CNC admits Format 5 5 meaning that it admits 5 4 in millimeters and 4 5 in inches Any function with parameters can also be programmed in a block apart from the number of the label or block Thus when the block is executed the CNC substitutes the arithmetic parameter for its value at that time Chapter 5 Section Page PROGRAMMING BY ISO CODE 1 5 1 PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS Preparatory functions are programmed using the letter G followed by 2 digits They are always programmed at the beginning of the body of the block and are useful in determining the geometry and working condition of the CNC Table of G functions used in the CNC Function M D v Meaning Section G00 T X Rapid travel nde p Pe Misia nian 6 1 G01 Linear interpolation sieer rir iA 6 2 G02 Clockwise helical circular interpolation 6 3 G03 Counter clockwise helical circular interpolation 6 3 G04 Dwell block preparation stop eeen TAS T2 G05 X Ro d corneei 5 xd queen Pim TAS EEEE EEEN 7 3 1 G06 i Absolute arc center coordinates eeeeee 6 4 G07 SQUATE CorNer ES 7 3 2 G08 i Arc tangent to previous path sesseeeeeeen 6 5 G09 Arc defined by three points 6 6 G10 Mirror image cancellation eene 7 5 Gil i Mirror image on X axi
372. in probe measuring canned cycles The cycle measures the deviation which the probe ball axis has with respect to the tool holder axis using a previously machined hole with known center and dimensions for its calibration u He ie The CNC will treat each measuring probe used as just one more tool The tool offset table fields corresponding to each probe will have the following meaning R K Radius of the sphere ball of the probe This value will be loaded into the table manually Length of the probe This value will be indicated by the tool length calibration cycle Deviation of the probe ball with respect to the tool holder axis along the abscissa axis This value will be indicated by the cycle Deviation of the probe ball with respect to the tool holder axis along the ordinate axis This value will be indicated by the cycle The following steps will be followed for its calibration 1 2 3 Once the characteristics of the probe have been consulted the value for the sphere radius R will be entered manually in the corresponding tool offset After selecting the corresponding tool number and tool offset the Tool Length Calibration Cycle will be performed the value of L will be updated and the value of K will be initialized to 0 Execution of the probe calibration canned cycle updating the T and K values Chapter 12 Section Page WORKING WITH A PROBE PROBE CALIBRATION 7 The pr
373. in r p m Active spindle speed at the CNC Spindle speed selected via DNC Spindle speed selected via PLC Spindle speed selected by program Spindle Speed Override active at the CNC Spindle Speed Override selected by program Spindle Speed Override selected via DNC Spindle Speed Override selected via PLC Spindle Speed Override selected from front panel Spindle speed limit in rpm active at the CNC Spindle speed limit selected via DNC Spindle speed limit selected via PLC Spindle speed limit selected by program Real Spindle position Between 999999999 ten thousandths Real Spindle position Between 0 and 360 in ten thousandths Theoretical Spindle position real lag Between 999999999 ten thousandths of a degree Theoretical Spindle position real lag Between 0 and 360 in ten thousandths of a degree spindle following error in Closed Loop M19 in degrees VARIABLES ASSOCIATED WITH THE SECOND SPINDLE Section 13 2 10 Variable Q SSREAL SSPEED SDNCS SPLCS SPRGS SSSO SPRGSO SDNCSO SPLCSO SCNCSO SSLIMI SDNCSL SPLCSL SPRGSL SPOSS SRPOSS STPOSS SRTPOS SFLWES m ON occ Qu d m ON ccc doo due uod az a m ON eds das ag de z Q Real spindle speed in r p m Active spindle speed at the CNC Spindle speed selected via DNC Spindle speed selected via PLC Spindle speed selected by program Spindle Speed Override active
374. inate axis and the distance will be taken along the abscissa axis Uu If programmed with a EN v of 0 the CNC will issue the aeons error Q5 5 Defines the angle of the incremental path e E m iil mp1634 It must be comprised between 0 and 45 both included If not programmed or if an one directional tracing is programmed D 1 the canned cycle will assume a value of QO Page Chapter 16 Section 30 TRACINGANDDIGITIZING GRIDPATTERNTRACING CANNEDCYCLE N 5 5 L5 5 Indicates how the grid is followed according to this code 0 The tracing is carried out in both directions zig zag 1 The tracing is carried out following the grid in one direction C DO mp1635 If not programmed the canned cycle assumes a value of DO Nominal Deflection Indicates the pressure kept by the probe while sweeping the surface of the model The deflection is given in the selected work units mm or inches and its value is usually comprised between 0 3mm and 1 5mm The tracing quality depends upon the amount of deflection being used the tracing feedrate and the geometry of the model In order to prevent the probe from separating from the model it is advised to use a profile tracing feedrate of about 1000 times the deflection value per minute For example for a deflection value of 1mm the tracing feedrate would be 1 m min If not programmed the canned cycle will assume a value of 1mm 0 03937
375. indle speed percentage selected by PLC If this has a value of 0 it means that it is not selected Returns the main spindle speed percentage selected from the front panel Page 18 Chapter 13 Section PROGRAMMING INHIGH LEVELLANGUAGE VARIABLES FOR THEMAINSPINDLE SLIMIT DNCSL PLCSL PRGSL POSS RPOSS TPOSS RTPOSS FLWES Returns in revolutions per minute the value established for the main spindle speed limit selected at the CNC This limit can be indicated by program by the PLC or DNC and the CNC selects one of these the one with the highest priority being that indicated by DNC and the one with the lowest priority that indicated by program Returns the main spindle speed limit in revolutions per minute selected by DNC If this has a value of 0 it means that itis not selected Returns the main spindle speed limit in revolutions per minute selected by PLC If this has a value of 0 it means that itis not selected Returns the main spindle speed limit in revolutions per minute selected by program Returns the main spindle real position value when itis in closed loop M19 Its value will be given in 0 0001 degree units between 990999999 Returns the main spindle real position value Its value will be given in 0 0001 degree units between 0 and 360 Returns the main spindle theoretical position value Its value will be given in 0 0001 degree units between 3999999999
376. ing Manual Chap 5 Execution time Estimates Operating Manual Chap 3 Part program storing in EEPROM memory Installation Manual Chap 3 Operating Manual Chap 7 Chap 12 Three cross compensation tables Installation Manual Chap 3 Appendix Operating Manual Chap 11 Axes jogging when setting leadscrew and cross compensation tables Operating Manual Chap 11 Subroutine associated with the tools Installation Manual Chap Possibility to FIND TEXT in the BLOCK SELECTION option Operating Manual Chap More double and triple size characters Operating Manual Chap Programming of the ERROR instruction by parameter Programming Manual Chap 14 Variables to access the rotation center ROTPF and ROTPS Programming Manual Chap 13 Appendix Version history M 1 FEATURE AFFECTED MANUAL AND CHAPTERS Variables to access the tracing probe DEFLEX DEFLEY and DEFLEZ Installation Manual Programming Manual Chap Chap 10 Appendix 13 Appendix General logic output indicating the status of the axes positioning loop LOPEN Installation Manual Chap 9 Appendix PLC Initialize a group of registers Operating Manual Chap 9 PLC New instructions Installation Manual Chap T PLC 200 symbols Installation Manual Chap New possibilities in irregular pockets with islands Programming Manual Chap Co
377. ing a new symbol it will position it at the upper left hand corner The cursor is white and can be moved around with the up and down arrow keys and the left and right arrow keys The cursor can also be moved by using the following keystroke combinations SHIFT gt Positions the cursor at the last column X638 SHIFT Positions the cursor at the first column X1 SHIFT D Positions the cursor at the first row Y0 SHIFT Positions the cursor at the last row Y334 It is also possible to key in the XY coordinates of the point where the cursor is to be positioned To do this follow these steps Press X or Y The CNC will highlight in the editing parameter display window the cursor position along the selected axis column or row Keyinthe position value corresponding to the point where the cursor is to be placed along this axis The horizontal position is defined as the X value between 1 and 638 and the vertical position as the Y value between 0 and 334 Once these coordinates have been keyed in press ENTER and the cursor will be positioned at the indicated coordinates The possible options to modify a page or symbol are CLEAR PAGE Allows the selected page or symbol to be deleted Once this softkey has been pressed the CNC will request an OK before executing the indicated operation If this operation is executed the CNC will only delete the page or symbol in the editing area and will keep wha
378. ing code 0 The tracing is carried out in both directions zig zag 1 The tracing is carried out following the grid in one direction DO D1 If not programmed the CNC assumes DO Nominal Deflection Indicates the pressure kept by the probe while sweeping the surface of the model The deflection is given in the selected work units mm or inches and its value is usually comprised between 0 3mm and 1 5mm The tracing quality depends upon the amount of deflection being used the tracing feedrate and the geometry of the model In order to prevent the probe from separating from the model it is advised to use aprofile tracing feedrate of about 1000 times the deflection value per minute For example for a deflection value of 1mm the tracing feedrate would be 1 m min If not programmed the canned cycle will assume a value of 1mm 0 03937 Chapter 16 Section Page TRACINGANDDIGITIZING TRACINGCANNEDCYCLE 51 WITHPOLYGONALSWEEP L5 5 This parameter must be defined when digitizing a part besides tracing it It indicates the sweeping step or distance between two consecutive digitized points NNNNNN mp1636 The CNC keeps the probe in constant contact with the surface of the model and it provides the coordinates of a new point after moving in space and along the programmed path the distance indicated by parameter L If not programmed or programmed with a value of 0 the canned cycle will assume tha
379. ing it at the CNC part memory it must be so indicated when defining the OPEN P statement Ttmustbe borne in mind that the generated program blocks are positioning only G01 X Y Z Therefore it is convenient to also include in such program the machining conditions by using the WRITE statement Once the digitizing process is over an end of program M02 or M30 must also be written by means of the WRITE statement Once the tracing cycle is over the probe will be positioned where it was before executing the cycle The execution of a tracing canned cycle does not change the history of the previous G functions Page Chapter 16 Section 28 TRACING ANDDIGITIZING TRACING amp DIGITIZING CANNED CYCLES 16 7 1 GRID PATTERN TRACING CANNED CYCLE The programming format for this cycle is as follows X 5 5 Y 5 5 Z 5 5 1 5 5 TRACE 1 X Y Z I J K A C Q D N L E G H F Theoretical absolute coordinate value along the abscissa axis of the first probing point It must coincide with one of the corners of the grid Theoretical absolute coordinate value along the ordinate axis of the first probing point It must coincide with one of the corners of the grid Theoretical coordinate value along the probing axis longitudinal perpendicular where the probe is to be positioned before starting the tracing operation It is given in absolute values and it must be off the model maintaining a safety
380. ing language is required The CNC only admits the data it is requesting thus no erroneous data can be entered The programmer has at all times the appropriate programming aide by means of screens and messages When selecting this option the CNC displays in the main window a series of graphic options selectable by softkey If the selected option has more menus the CNC will keep showing new graphic options until the desired one is selected From this moment the information corresponding to this option will appear in the main window and it will start requesting the data necessary to program it As the requested data is entered the editing window will show in CNC language the block being edited The CNC will generate all necessary blocks and it will add them to the program once the editing of this option is done and it will insert them after the one indicated by the cursor The main window will show again the graphic options corresponding to the main menu being possible to continue editing the program Page Chapter 4 Section 4 EDIT INTERACTIVE EDITOR 4 1 4 PROFILE EDITOR When selecting this option the CNC displays the following fields or windows EDIT P000123 11 50 14 DISPLAY ZONE 300 STARTING POINT X1 0 0000 Yi 0 0000 66 Enter ABSCISSA and ORDINATE of the starting point CAP INS x Y ABSCISSA ete AXIS AXIS r1 r2 F3 F4
381. ining G80 Cancels canned cycle G90 X0 YO Positioning M30 End of program Itis also possible to write the multiple machining definition block in the following ways G61 X700 K8 J60 D4 P2 005 Q9 001 G611100 K8 Y180 D4 P2 005 Q9 011 Chapter 10 Section Page MULTIPLEMACHINING INARECTANGULAR 7 PATTERN G61 10 3 G62 MULTIPLE MACHINING IN A GRID PATTERN The programming format of this cycle is as follows G62AB XI YJ PQRSTUV XK YD IK JD A 5 5 Defines the angle formed by the machining path with the abscissa axis It is expressed in degrees and if not programmed the value A 0 will be taken B 4 5 5 Defines the angle formed by the two machining paths It is expressed in degrees and if not programmed the value B 90 will be taken X 5 5 Defines the length of the machining path according to the abscissa axis 1 5 5 Defines the pitch between machining operations according to the abscissa axis K 5 Defines the number of total machining operations in the abscissa axis including the machining definition point Due to the fact that machining may be defined according to the abscissa axis with any two points of the X I K group the CNC allows the following definition combinations XI XK IK Nevertheless if format XI is defined care should be taken to ensure that the number of machining operations is an integer number otherwise the CNC will show the corresponding error code Y 5 5 Defines th
382. ining a contour for each side MP1167A When defining a contour for each side the following conditions must be met Each plane profile must contain its full corresponding side The plane profile and depth profile must start at the same point A B C D Defining contours which group sides having the same profile When grouping sides having the same depth profile the following conditions must be met Each plane profile must contain its full corresponding side Only one depth profile must be defined for each contour The plane and depth profiles of the contour grouping several sides must start at the same point The following figures the one on the left and the one on the right are defined by 2 contours grouping sides A C and B D Chapter 11 Section Page 2D AND 3D POCKETS 3D POCKETS 45 NDP ERY PROFILE EXAMPLE MP1167B The following figures are defined by 3 contours The one on the left only groups sides B D and the one on the right only sides A C SS KN KX RQ SZ KI ce XS ae 7 KM LL S e N N XK SOK XS 0 7A Ob PO ISO z ANA AW MP1167C Page Chapter 11 Section 2D AND 3D POCKET 3D POCKETS i E S PROFILE EXAMPLE 11 2 7 STACKED PROFILES When 2 or more profiles stack on top of each other the following considerations must be taken into account For cla
383. ining canned cycles G8x Rigid tapping G84 Multiple machining cycles G6x Tool radius compensation Probing canned cycles G40 G41 G42 Tool life monitoring Profile editor Irregular pockets with islands Digitizing Graphics Tracing iii INDEX E co o Section Version History M INTRODUCTION EE A E A E E A A E HE E A E O rererreere 3 Bloterial Ce tonning OCIS uode abonar dba GN dab andes era DISPARI D AVE R ERE PE DUE DE PORA 5 Fagor documentation for the 8055 CNC sees 6 Bail CONE Tm 7 a Chapter 1 OVERVIEW 1 1 Momtor ea TA BOE o2 prex ed pretia i braided aka ENARE EEA nA EK HER or EPOR UR 2 1 2 id gare T mee e A ANa 4 1 3 Oporatar panel FAG TT 6 az Chapter 2 OPERATING MODES 2 1 ld r p pr 3 N Chapter 3 EXECUTE SIMULATE 3 1 Block selection and stop Condition Lusia edicion teases trn tat Reap i Ebr RAS ES EMEN ER EH ARRA AS 4 33 Display selechon Lausocep oido maid e a qa Re pipa ba EAE i 3 21 Standard display Made cage FM 9 ENA lesse i Con od 10 3 23 Part procramdisplay mode tc beet iode trace red edited bed tuis Baguiibetdtus de biia 10 3 2 4 Subroutine display Mole sneren b avon ERU E EN PME E IE ADI DAV EDI E DU AAEN 11 3 49 Following eco display Mode accensis kii beas urbt brick e EPA HIE tE Ht E bra AER tH Me E eMt anda 14 326 Liner ais lay ModE PH 14 EN Ex cution time display Xubidle eese eipeit enses HY N GR PIX X ANI TERI EIL AER PATER RT inbi ERR dE 15 3 3 Mb ge Raine eRe 17
384. ining will perform the canned cycle or modal subroutine selected after this movement After completing multiple machining the tool will be positioned at the programmed point Programming example assuming that the work plane is formed by the X and Y axes that the longitudinal axis is Z and that the starting point is XO YO ZO G81 G98 G01 G91 X890 Y500 Z 8 I 22 F100 S500 Canned cycle positioning and definition G65 X280 Y 40 A60 C1 F200 Defines multiple machining G80 Cancels canned cycle G90 X0 YO Positioning M30 End of program Itis also possible to write the multiple machining definition block in the following ways G65 X 280 Y40 1430 C1 F200 Page Chapter 10 Section 18 MULTIPLEMACHINING BY MEANS OFANARC CHORD G65 I I e IRREGULAR POCKET CANNED CYCLE WITH ISLANDS A pocket is composed by an external contour or profile 1 and a series of internal contours or profiles 2 These internal profiles are called islands With this pocket canned cycle 2D and 3D pockets may be machined 2D pocket Upper left hand illustration Its inside and outside walls are vertical Its programming is detailed in the first part of this chapter To define the contours of a 2D pocket the plane profile for all the contours must be defined 3D pocket Upper right hand illustration When any of the inside or outside profiles and or islands is not vertical Its programming is detailed in the second part of this ch
385. ints assigned to these are numbered i e the numbering order of the points assigned to Q must be greater than that assigned to P and less than that assigned to R Example Proper programming P5 006 Q12 015 R20 022 Improperprogramming P5 006 Q20 022 R12 015 If these parameters are not programmed the CNC understands that it must perform machining at all the points along the programmed path Basic operation 1 Multiple machining calculates the next point of those programmed where it is wished to machine 2 Rapid rapid traverse G00 to this point 3 Multiple machining will perform the canned cycle or modal subroutine selected after this movement 4 The CNC will repeat steps 1 2 3 until the programmed path has been completed After completing multiple machining the tool will be positioned at the last point along the programmed path where machining was performed Chapter 10 Section Page MULTIPLEMACHINING INAGRID PATTERN 9 G62 Programming example assuming that the work plane is formed by the X and Y axes that the longitudinal axis is Z and that the starting point is XO YO ZO 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 1514 9 11 10 9 8 I L i X 100 G81 G98 G00 G91 X100 Y150 Z 8 I 22 F100 8500 Canned cycle positioning and definition G62 X700 I100 Y180 J60 P2 005 Q9 011 R15 019 Defines multiple machining G80 Cancels canned cycle G90 X0 YO Positioning M30 End of program
386. ion Add the desired comment Functions F S T D M or program comments may be added Press ENTER Press ESC to quit the MODIFY mode Page Chapter 4 Section 10 EDIT PROFILE EDITOR 4 1 4 6 DISPLAY AREA When pressing the DISPLAY AREA softkey the CNC shows the ZOOM ZOOM OPTIMUM AREA and enables the right left and up down arrow keys The zoom window area may be moved around using the right left and up down arrow keys ZOOM enlarges the image on the screen ZOOM reduces the image on the screen OPTIMUM AREA shows the whole profile on the screen Every time the display area is changed the values for the maximum and minimum coordinates for each axis appearing at the upper right hand side window DISPLAYED AREA are updated Press ESC to quit the DISPLAY AREA mode Chapter 4 Section Page EDIT PROFILE EDITOR 11 4 1 4 7 FINISH This softkey must be pressed once all the sections of the profile have been defined The CNC will try to calculate the requested profile by previously solving all the unknowns Ifit finds several possibilities for certain sections the CNC will show them for each section and the desired option framed in red will have to be chosen using the right and left arrow keys Once the whole profile has been solved the CNC will show the code of the part program currently being edited The ISO coded program for the edited profile
387. ion Manual Programming Manual Chap Chap 10 Appendix 13 Appendix General logic output indicating the status of the axes positioning loop LOPEN Installation Manual Chap 9 Appendix PLC Initialize a group of registers Operating Manual Chap 9 PLC New instructions Installation Manual Chap T PLC 200 symbols Installation Manual Chap New possibilities in irregular pockets with islands Programming Manual Chap Connector X7 of the AXES module Installation Manual Chap Support of the FAGOR Floppy disc unit Installation Manual Chap 1 Chap 3 Make the tool change cycle more flexible Installation Manual Chap 3 Improved error processing Operating Manual Chap 1 Date April 1993 Software Version 7 06 and newer FEATURE AFFECTED MANUAL AND CHAPTERS Limitless rotary axes Installation Manual Chap 3 Positioning axes in G01 Programming Manual Chap 6 Reference point shift Installation Manual Chap 3 Chap 4 Work zone variables R W from PLC Installation Manual Programming Manual Chap 10 Appendix Appendix Possibility to abort the PLC channel Installation Manual Chap 9 Appendix Movement until contact Installation Manual Programming Manual Chap Chap 3 Chap 11 6 Appendix Boring Mill graphics Installation Manu
388. ion to place the page reference point Press ESC to quit this option without making any changes and the CNC will show the previous menu Repeat these steps to perform more moves otherwise press ESC and the CNC will show Page 20 Chapter 10 Section GRAPHICEDITOR MODIFICATIONS I I e MACHINE PARAMETERS In order for the machine tool to execute the programmed instructions correctly the CNC must know specific data on the machine such as feedrates accelerations feedbacks automatic tool changes etc This data is determined by the manufacturer of the machine and can be entered via the keyboard or the serial port by setting machine parameters The FAGOR 8055 CNC has the following groups of machine parameters General machine parameters Axis parameters one table per axis Spindle parameters RS 422 and RS 232 C serial port configurations PLC parameters M miscellaneous functions Leadscrew error compensation one table per axis Cross Compensations between two axes for example Beam sag Xo X X X X X X X First the general machine parameters must be set as by means of these the machine axes are defined and therefore the Axis Parameter tables It must also be defined whether the machine has cross compensation and between which axes and the CNC will generate the corresponding cross compensation parameters By means of the general machine parameters the table lengths for the Tool Magazine Tools Too
389. ion with tangential entry Example If the starting point is XO Y30 and you wish to machine an arc the path of approach being straight you should program G90 G01 X40 G02 X60 Y10 I20 JO Page Chapter 6 Section 14 PATHCONTROL TANGENTIAL ENTRY G37 If however in the same example you require the entrance of the tool to the part to be machined tangential to the path and describing a radius of 5 mm you should program G90 G01 G37 R5 X40 G02 X60 Y10120 JO As can be seen in the figure the CNC modifies the path so that the tool starts to machine with a tangential entry to the part You have to program Function G37 plus value R in the block which includes the path you want to modify R5 5 should appear in all cases following G37 indicating the radius of the arc which the CNC enters to obtain tangential entry to the part Its value must always be positive Function G37 should only be programmed in the block which includes a straight line movement G00 or G01 If you program in a block which includes circular movement G02 or G03 the CNC displays the corresponding error Chapter 6 Section Page PATHCONTROL TANGENTIALENTRY G37 15 6 9 TANGENTIAL EXIT AT THE END OF A MACHINING OPERATION G38 Function G38 enables the ending of a machining operation with a tangential exit of the tool The path should be in a straight line GOO or G01 Otherwise the CNC will display the correspondin
390. irection Y S0 z S1 Z Z a X E Once the probe makes contact with the surface ofthe gage block the CNC moves the probe on the surface measuring the rest of the sides as shown below 1601 Attention AN The feedrate for these movements must be selected before executing function G26 The deviations of the probe along each axis X Y Z are stored internally to be used later as correction factors when executing a tracing operation G23 or one of the tracing cycles TRACE Whenever the display option for Following Error is selected in the JOG mode the right hand side of the CRT in the window for probe values will show the correction factor applied onto each axis the deflections of each axis and the total deflection Chapter 16 Section Page TRACING ANDDIGITIZING CALIBRATIONOFTHE 9 TRACINGPROBE Function G26 is not modal Therefore it must be programmed every time the tracing probe P000662 N FOLLOWING ERROR X 00000 00Z2 Y 00000 003 Z 00000 003 U 00000 001 V 00000 00Z2 S 00000 000 DEFLECTIONS FACTORS X 00000 000 X 00001 000 Y 00000 000 Y 00001 000 Z 00000 000 Z 00001 000 D 00000 000 F03000 0000 96100 S00000 0000 100 T0000 D000 NTO000 ND000 S 0000 RPM G00 G17 G54 PARTC 000000 CY TIME 00 00 00 00 1 l IMER 000000 00 00 MOVEMENT IN CONTINUOUS JOG CAP INS BLOCK STOP DISPLAY SELECTION CONDITION SELECTION
391. is mode If another occurrence of the text is found it will be highlighted showing the same replacing or not replacing options TO THE END This function will automatically replace all the matching text from the current block to the end ofthe program without offering the option of not replacing it ABORT This function will not replace the highlighted text and it will quit the find and replace mode Chapter 4 Section Page EDIT REPLACE 1 4 5 DELETE BLOCK With this function it is possible to delete a block or group of blocks To delete only one block just position the cursor over it and press ENTER To delete a group of blocks indicate the first and last blocks to be deleted To do so follow these steps Position the cursor over the first block to be deleted and press the INITIAL BLOCK softkey Position the cursor over the last block to be deleted and press the FINAL BLOCK softkey If the last block to be deleted is also the last one of the program it can also be selected by pressing the TO THE END softkey Once the first and last blocks are selected the CNC will highlight the selected blocks requesting confirmation to delete them Page 18 Chapter 4 Section EDIT DELETE BLOCK 4 6 MOVE BLOCK With this option it is possible to move a block or group of blocks by previously indicating the first and last blocks to be moved To do so follow these ste
392. is the starting point of the movement In other words instead of programming the coordinates of the center you program any intermediate point The endpoint of the arc is defined in cartesian or polar coordinates and the intermediate point is always defined in Cartesian coordinates by the letters LJ or K each one being associated to the axes as follows Axes X U A gt I Axes Y V B gt J Axes Z W C gt K In Cartesian coordinates G17 G09 X 5 5 Y 45 5 145 5 J 5 5 Polar coordinates G17 G09 R 5 5 Q 5 5 Ix5 5 J 5 5 Example Being initial point X 50 YO Y a 50 15 6 35 X i G09 X35 Y20 I 15 J25 Function G09 is not modal so it should always be programmed if you wish to execute an arc defined by three points Function G09 can be programmed as G9 When G09 is programmed it is not necessary to program the direction of movement G02 or G03 Function G09 does not alter the history of the program The same G01 G02 or G03 function stays active after finishing the block Attention Whenusing function G09 itis not possible to execute a complete circle as you have to program three different points The CNC displays the corresponding error code Chapter 6 Section Page PATHCONTROL ARCDEFINEDBY 11 THREE POINTS G09 6 7 HELICAL INTERPOLATION A helical interpolation consists in a circular interpolation in the work plane while mov ing the rest of the programmed axes A
393. isplaying the data in decimal hexadecimal and binary format The following instructions are available DW1 100 Decimal format Value 100 displayed in window 1 DWH2 100 Hexadecimal format Value 64 displayed in window 2 DWB3 100 Binary format Value 01100100 displayed in window 3 When using the binary format the display is limited to 8 digits in sucha way that a value of 11111111 will be displayed for values greater than 255 and the value of 10000000 for values more negative than 127 Besides the CNC allows the number stored in one of the 26 data input variables IBO IB25 to be displayed in the requested window The following example shows a request and later display of axis feedrate ODW3 4 60 Defines data window 3 IB1 INPUT Axis feed 5 4 Axis feedrate request DW3 IB1 Displays feedrate in window 3 Chapter 14 Section Page SCREEN CUSTOMIZING 17 PROGRAM CONTROLSTATEMENTS STATEMENTS SK expression 1 text1 expression 2 text 2 The mnemonic SK defines and displays the new softkey menu indicated Each of the expressions will indicate the softkey number which it is required to modify 1 7 starting from the left and the texts which it is required to write in them Expression 1 expression 2 expression 3 may contain a number or any expression which may result in a number Each text will allow a maximum of 20 characters which will be
394. it is not programmed the value C 0 will be taken C20 Movement is made in rapid feedrate G00 Cz Movement is made in linear interpolation G01 C22 Movement is made in clockwise circular interpolation G02 C23 Movement is made in counter clockwise circular interpolation G03 Defines the feedrate which is used for moving between points Obviously it will only apply for C values other than zero If itis not programmed the value FO will be taken maximum feedrate selected by the MAXFEED axis machine parameter P Q R S T U V These parameters are optional and are used to indicate at which points or between which of those programmed points it is not required to machine Thus programming P7 indicates that it is not required to do machining at point 7 and programming Q10 013 indicates that machining is not required from point 10 to 13 orexpressed in another way that no machining is required at points 10 11 12 and 13 When it is required to define a group of points Q10 013 care should be taken to define the final point with three digits as if Q10 13 is programmed multiple machining understands Q10 130 The programming order for these parameters is P Q R S T U V it also being necessary to maintain the order in which the points assigned to these are numbered i e the numbering order of the points assigned to Q must be greater than that assigned to P and less than that assigned to R Example Proper progra
395. iting parameter display window the cursor position along the selected axis column or row Keyinthe position value corresponding to the point where the cursor is to be placed along this axis The horizontal position is defined as the X value between 1 and 638 and the vertical position as the Y value between 0 and 334 Once these coordinates have been keyed in press ENTER and the CNC will position the cursor at the indicated coordinates Once this option is selected itis possible to modify the editing parameters at any time even while defining the graphic elements This way itis possible to edit texts of different size and color Press INS to access this menu Once in this mode press the corresponding softkey to modify those parameters Press INS again to quit this mode and return to the previous menu Itis also possible to insert one of the texts available at the CNC or a text previously keyed in by the user To do this the following softkey options are available Page Chapter 10 Section 16 GRAPHICEDITOR TEXTS USER DEFINED TEXT Follow these steps to insert the desired text 1 Press ENTER The CNC will display a text editing window The cursor within this window can be moved with right and left arrow keys 2 Type the desired text A rectangle will be displayed which will enlarge as the text is typed in the editing window thus indicating the screen space that this text will occupy
396. kwise at 1000 rpm To select the main spindle again execute function G29 From this moment on all the actions upon the keys or functions associated with the spindle will be applied on to the main spindle The second spindle keeps turning in its previous status Example 52000 The main spindle keeps turning clockwise but now at 2000 rpm The second spindle keeps turning counter clockwise at 1500 rpm Page Chapter 5 Section 6 PROGRAMM BY DE SPINDLESELECTION OG INGBYISOCO G28 G29 5 4 CONSTANT SPEED FUNCTIONS G96 G97 The FAGOR 8055 CNC through functions G96 and G97 allows you to maintain constant speed at tool center or maintain constant speed of the cutting point of the tool 5 4 1 CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED G96 When G96 is programmed the CNC takes the F5 5 feedrate as corresponding to the cutting point of the tool on the part By using this function the finished surface is uniform in curved sections In this manner working in function G96 the speed of the center of the tool in the inside or outside curved sections will change in order to keep the cutting point constant Function G96 is modal i e once programmed it is active until G97 is programmed On power up after executing M02 M30 or following EMERGENCY or RESET the CNC assumes function G97 5 4 2 CONSTANT TOOL CENTER SPEED G97 When G97 is programmed the CNC takes the programmed F5 5 feedrate as corresponding to the feedrate of the
397. l 0 30 048 8 38 056 SHIFT 3B 059 SHIFT 29 041 CAPS 30 048 CAPS 38 056 SHIFT CAPS 3B 059 SHIFT CAPS 29 041 1 31 049 9 39 057 SHIFT 21 033 SHIFT 24 036 CAPS 31 049 CAPS 39 057 SHIFT CAPS 21 033 SHIFT CAPS 24 036 66 2 32 050 2bE 046 SHIFT 22 034 SHIFT 3A 058 CAPS 32 050 CAPS 2E 046 SHIFT CAPS 22 034 SHIFT CAPS 3A 058 gt 3 33 051 2B 043 SHIFT 27 039 SHIFT 3E 062 CAPS 33 051 CAPS 2B 043 SHIFT CAPS 27 039 SHIFT CAPS 3E 062 lt 4 34 052 2D 045 SHIFT 5B 091 SHIFT 3C 060 CAPS 34 052 CAPS 2D 045 SHIFT CAPS 5B 091 SHIFT CAPS 3C 060 5 35 053 2A 042 SHIFT 5D 093 SHIFT 3F 063 CAPS 35 053 CAPS 2A 042 SHIFT CAPS 5D 093 SHIFT CAPS 3F 063 amp 6 36 054 2F 047 SHIFT 26 038 SHIFT 25 037 CAPS 36 054 CAPS 2F 047 SHIFT CAPS 26 038 SHIFT CAPS 25 037 7 37 055 3D 061 SHIFT 28 040 SHIFT 23 035 CAPS 37 055 CAPS 3D 061 SHIFT CAPS 28 040 SHIFT CAPS 23 035 Key Hexadecimal Decimal Key Hexadecimal Decimal ENTER 0D 013 Previous Page FFA5 65445 SHIFT 0D 013 SHIFT FFAS 65445 CAPS 0D 013 CAPS FFAS 65445 SHIFT CAPS 0D 013 SHIFT CAPS FFA5 65445 HELP FFF2 65522 Next Page FFAF 65455 SHIFT FFF2 65522 SHIFT CAPS FFF2 65522 CAPS FFAS 65455 SHIFT CAPS FFF2 65522 SHIFT CAPS RESET FFF3 65523 Uparrow FFBO 65456 SHIFT SHIFT FFB 1
398. l A if it is available E if it is worn out life expired and R if it has been rejected by the PLC Page 10 Chapter 5 Section PROGRAMM BY DE COMPLEMENTARY ais iil ha FUNCTIONS F S T D M 5 5 4 TOOL OFFSET NUMBER D By using function D4 the CNC FAGOR 8055 enables the application of the required offset to the selected tool To do this you have to program T4 D4 selecting the required tool and tool offset If you only program function T4 the CNC will take the tool offset indicated by the selected tool in the tool table The CNC has a tool offset table with NTOFFSET general machine parameter components The following is specified for each tool offset The nominal radius of the tool in the measuring units indicated by the general parameter INCHES the format being R 5 5 The nominal length of the tool in the measuring units indicated by the general parameter INCHES the format being L 5 5 Tool radius wear in the measuring units indicated by the general parameter INCHES the format being I 5 5 The CNC adds this value to the nominal radius R to calculate the real radius R I Tool length wear in the measuring units indicated by the general parameter INCHES the format being K 5 5 The CNC adds this value to the nominal length L to calculate the real length L K When tool radius compensation is required G41 or G42 the CNC applies as a compensation value
399. l Offsets and the miscellaneous M functions are defined By means of the Axis Parameters it is defined whether the axis has Leadscrew error Compensation or not and the length of the corresponding table Once the general machine parameters are defined press SHIFT RESET for the CNC to enable the required tables Chapter 11 Section Page MACHINE PARAMETERS 1 11 1 MACHINE PARAMETER TABLES The General Axis Spindle Serial ports and PLC tables have the following structure THEODPLY GRAPHICS RAPIDOVR MAXFOVR CIRINLIM CAP INS MM JAHTAA Where the parameter number is indicated the value assigned to it and the name or mnemonic associated with this parameter Page Chapter 11 Section 2 MACHINE PARAMETERS MACHINEPARAMETER TABLES 11 2 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION TABLES The table corresponding to the miscellaneous M functions has the following structure Miscellaneous Function Subrutine Customizing Bits M 0000 00000000 M 0000 00000000 M 0000 00000000 M 0000 00000000 M 0000 00000000 M 00000000 M 00000000 M 00000000 M 00000000 M 00000000 M 00000000 M 00000000 M 00000000 M 00000000 M 00000000 M 00000000 M 00000000 M 00000000 M 00000000 M 00000000 CAP INS The number of M functions in the table is defined by means of the general machine parameter NMISCFUN The follo
400. l and local are replaced by the numerical value which they have when the WRITE mnemonic is executed Examples for P1 10 and P2 20 WRITE G1 XP1 YP2 F100 gt G1 X10 Y20 F100 WRITE IF P1 NE P2 P3 P1 P2 gt IF P1 NE P2 P3 P1 P2 If the mnemonic WRITE is programmed without having programmed the mnemonic OPEN previously the CNC will display the corresponding error except when editing auser customized program in which case a new block is added to the program being edited Example of the creation of a program which contains several points of a cardioid whose formulais R B cos Q 2 Subroutine number 2 is used its A or PO Value of angle Q Bor Pl Value of B C or P2 Angular increment for calculation D or P3 Axis feedrate A way to use this example could be G00 X0 YO G93 PCALL 2 A0 B30 C5 D500 M30 Program generation subroutine SUB 2 OPEN P12345 Starts editing of program P12345 WRITE FP3 Selects machining feedrate N100 P10 P1 ABS COS P0 2 Calculates R WRITE G01 G05 RP10 QPO Movement block PO P0 P2 New angle IF PO LT 365 GOTO N100 _ If angle less than 365 calculates new point WRITE M30 End of program block RET End of subroutine Page Chapter 14 Section 14 PROGRAMCONTROLSTATEMENTS PROGRAMSTATEMENTS 14 7 SCREEN CUSTOMIZING STATEMENTS GRAPHIC EDITOR Customizing statements may be used only when customizing programs made by t
401. l tools which take more than one magazine pocket and whose codes are between 200 and 255 Every time a new tool is selected the CNC will check to see if itis worn out real life greater than the nominal life If itis worn out it will not select it instead it will select the next tool belonging to the same family in the tool table If while machining a part the PLC requests that the CNC rejects the currently active tool by activating the logic input TREJECT the CNC will put the reject indicator in the STATUS field and it will replace the tool with the next one belonging to the same family This tool change will take place the next time this tool is selected Page Chapter 6 Section TABLES TOOLTABLE Nominal tool life Indicates the machining time in minutes or the number of operations expected for the life of that tool The units for both the nominal and real tool lives is established by the general machine parameter TOOLMONT Real tool life Indicates the machining time in minutes spent by the tool or the number of operations performed by it The units for both the nominal and real tool lives is established by the general machine parameter TOOLMONT Tool Status Indicates the size of the tool and its status The size of the tool depends on the number of pockets that it occupies in the magazine and it is defined as follows N S Normal family 0 thru 199
402. lays the new softkey menu indicated WKEY Stops the execution of a program until a key is pressed WBUF text expression Adds the text and the value of the expression once this has been evaluated to the block which is being edited and in the data input window SYSTEM Ends the execution of user customized program and returns to standard CNC menu 10 APPENDIX D KEY CODES Each key can generate up to four different codes when pressed depending on the status of the SHIFT and CAPS functions Therefore when key A is pressed the following codes are obtained Hexad Decimal 61 097 If when key A is pressed no function is selected 41 065 If when key A is pressed the SHIFT function is selected 41 065 If when key A is pressed the CAPS function is selected 61 097 If when key A is pressed both functions are selected Key Hexadecimal Decimal Key Hexadecimal Decimal A 61 097 H 68 104 A SHIFT 41 065 H SHIFT 48 072 A CAPS 41 065 H CAPS 48 072 A SHIFT CAPS 61 097 H SHIFT CAPS 68 104 B 62 098 I 69 105 B SHIFT 42 066 SHIFT 49 073 B CAPS 42 066 CAPS 49 073 B SHIFT CAPS 62 098 I SHIFT CAPS 69 105 C 63 099 J 6A 106 C SHIFT 43 067 J SHIFT 4A 074 C CAPS 43 067 J CAPS 4A 074 C SHIFT CAPS 63 099 J SHIFT CAPS 6A 106 D 64 100 K 6B 107 D SHIFT 44 068 K SHIFT 4B 075 D CAPS 44 068 K CAPS 4B 075 D SHIFT CAPS 64 100 K SHIFT CAPS 6B 107 E 65
403. le machining understands Q10 130 The programming order for these parameters is P Q R S T U V it also being necessary to maintain the order in which the points assigned to these are numbered i e the numbering order of the points assigned to Q must be greater than that assigned to P and less than that assigned to R Example Proper programming P5 006 Q12 015 R20 022 Improperprogramming P5 006 Q20 022 R12 015 If these parameters are not programmed the CNC understands that it must perform machining at all the points along the programmed path Basic operation 1 Multiple machining calculates the next point of those programmed where it is wished to machine 2 Rapid traverse GOO to this point 3 Multiple machining will perform the canned cycle or modal subroutine selected after this movement 4 The CNC will repeat steps 1 2 3 until the programmed path has been completed After completing multiple machining the tool will be positioned atthe last point along the programmed path where machining was performed Page Chapter 10 Section MULTIPLEMACHINING INARECTANGULAR PATTERN G61 Programming example assuming that the work plane is formed by the X and Y axes that the longitudinal axis is Z and that the starting point is XO YO Z0 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 G81 G98 G00 G91 X100 Y150 Z 8 I 22 F100 S500 Canned cycle positioning and definition G61 X700 I100 Y180 J60 P2 005 Q9 011 Defines multiple mach
404. le program object even when that program source has been deleted or modified at the CNC The CNC will also display all the variable consultations at logic level 1 including those not being executed and the actions whose conditions are met To display the program from a specific line on press the L key followed by that line number and then press ENTER The operator can move the cursor around the CRT a line at a time with the up down arrow keys and a page at a time with the page up and page down keys The various monitoring options available are described next Once any of the those options has been selected the operator has an editing window where the cursor may be moved with the right and left arrow keys The up arrow will position the cursor over the first character of the editing window and the down arrow over the last one MODIFY THE STATUS OF THE RESOURCES The CNC has the following instructions to modify the status of the different PLC resources I 1 256 0 1 Alters the status 0 1 of the indicated input For example 1120 0 sets input 1120 to 0 I 1 256 1 256 0 1 Altersthe status 0 1 ofathe indicated group of inputs For example 1100 103 1 sets inputs I101 1102 and 1103 to l O 1 256 0 1 Alters the status 0 1 ofthe indicated output Forexample O20 0 sets output O20 to 0 O 1 256 1 256 0 1 Alters the status 0 1 ofthe indicated group of outputs For example O22 25z 1 sets outputs O22 thru O
405. le the indicated number of times If NO is programmed it will not execute the machining operation corresponding to the canned cycle The CNC will only execute the programmed move Page Chapter 9 Section 6 CANNED CYCLES The general operation for all the cycles is as follows Ifthespindle was in operation previously its turning direction is maintained If it was not in movement it will start by turning clockwise M03 Positioning if programmed at the starting point for the programmed cycle Rapid movement of the longitudinal axis from the initial plane to the reference plane Execution of the programmed machining cycle Rapid withdrawal of the longitudinal axis to the initial plane or reference plane depending on whether G98 or G99 has been programmed Below a detailed explanation is given of machining canned cycles assuming in all cases that the work plane is made up of the X and Y axes and that the longitudinal axis is the Z axis Chapter 9 Section Page CANNED CYCLES 7 9 5 1 G69 COMPLEX DEEP HOLE DRILLING CYCLE This cycle makes successive drilling steps until the final coordinate is reached The tool withdraws a fixed amount after each drilling operation it being possible to select that every J drillings it withdraws to the reference plane A dwell can also be programmed after every drilling Working in cartesian coordinates the basic structure of the block is as follow
406. lete rename etc DNC Allows communication with a computer via DNC to be activated or deactivated PLC Allows operation with the PLC edit the program monitor change the status of its variables access to the active messages errors pages etc Chapter 2 Section Page OPERATING MODE 1 GRAPHIC EDITOR Allows by means of asimple graphics editor the creation of user defined screens pages which can later be activated from the PLC used in customized programs or presented when the unit is powered on page 0 MACHINE PARAMETERS Allows the machine parameters to be set to adapt the CNC to the machine DIAGNOSIS Makes a test of the CNC While the CNC is executing or simulating a part program it allows any other type of operating mode to be accessed without stopping the execution of the program In this way it is possible to edit a program while another is being executed or simulated It is not possible to edit the program which is being executed or simulated nor execute or simulate two part programs at the same time Page Chapter 2 Section 2 OPERATING MODES 2 1 HELP SYSTEMS The FAGOR 8055 CNC allows access to the help system main menu operating mode editing of commands etc at any time To do this you must press the HELP key and the corresponding help page will be shown in the main window of the screen If the help consists of more than one page of information the symbol indic
407. ll display the corresponding error code and stop the movement of the axes Return of the probe in rapid G00 the distance indicated in E Movementofthe probe along the ordinate axis at the indicated feedrate F until the probe signal is received Withdrawal Movement of the probe in rapid G00 from the point where it probed to the real center of the hole Second probing movement Same as above Withdrawal Movement of the probe in rapid G00 from the point where it probed to the real center of the hole along the ordinate axis Third probing movement Same as above Chapter 12 Section Page WORKING WITH A PROBE PROBE CALIBRATION 9 7 Withdrawal Movement of the probe in rapid G00 from the point where it probed to the real center of the hole 8 Fourth probing movement Same as above 9 Withdrawal This movement consists of Movement of the probe in rapid G00 from the point where it probed to the real center of the hole Movementalong the longitudinal axis to the coordinate of the point along this axis from where the cycle was called Movement in the main work plane to the point where the cycle was called Once the cycle has been completed the CNC will have updated the T and K values corresponding to the tool offset selected at the time on the tool offset table On the other hand arithmetic parameter P299 returns the best value to be assigned to general machine p
408. lliseconds Italso shows the watchdog time forthis module selected by the PLC machine parameter WDGPER STATUS Provides information on the PLC program status indicating whether itis compiled or not and whether it is stopped or in execution When the PLC does not have its own CPU integrated into CPU CNC it will also indicate the time that the CNC s CPU dedicates to the PLC This value Will defined by the PLC machine parameter CPUTIME RAM MEMORY This section indicates the system s RAM memory available for the exclusive use of the PLC installed and it also indicates how much free memory there is The object program executable is obtained when compiling the source program and is the one executed by the PLC This section shows the date when it was generated and the RAM memory space it occupies size EEPROM MEMORY This section indicates the system s EEPROM memory available for the exclusive use of the PLC installed and it also indicates how much free memory there is Every time the command SAVE PROGRAM is executed the CNC stores the PLC program in this EEPROM memory in a pseudocode This section also shows the date it was saved and its size SOURCE PROGRAM This section indicates the date when it was last edited and its size The PLC source program is stored in the CNC s RAM memory Chapter 9 Section Page PLC STATISTICS 23 9 10 LOGIC ANALYZER The logic analyzer is especia
409. llow to select the type of withdrawal of the longitudinal axis after machining G98 Selects the withdrawal of the tool as far as the initial plane once the indicated machining has been done G99 Selects the withdrawal of the tool as far as the reference plane once the indicated machining has been done These functions can be used both in the cycle definition block and the blocks which are under the influence of the canned cycle The initial plane will always be the coordinate which the longitudinal axis had when the cycle was defined The structure of a canned cycle definition block is as follows G Starting point Parameters FSTDM NETE Itis possible to program the starting point in the canned cycle definition block except the longitudinal axis both in polar coordinates and in cartesian coordinates After defining the point at which it is required to carry out the canned cycle optional the functions and parameters corresponding to the canned cycle will be defined and afterwards if required the complementary functions F S T D M are programmed If a number of block repetitions is programmed the CNC will repeat the programmed positionings and the canned cycle machining operations the indicated number of times When programming at the end of the block the number of times a block is to be executed N the CNC performs the programmed move and the machining operation corresponding to the active canned cyc
410. lly indicated to perform the machine setup and to determine errors and critical situations in the behavior of the various signals With this option it is possible to analyze the behavior of the logic signals of the PLC according to a time base and some trigger conditions established by the user Up to 8 signals can be monitored simultaneously The results are displayed using a graphic interface to simplify the interpretation of the obtained data 9 10 1 DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK SCREEN The screen for the logic analyzer can be divided into the following display windows or areas 12 16 TRIGGER NOT ALARM Cursor Offset Time base 300 ms Trigger type CENTER Trace Status COMPLETE CAP INS VARIABLE TRIGGER TIME BASE EXECUTE ANALYZE SELECTION CONDITION TRACE TRACE T0094 1 Status window It displays the graphic representation of the status of each one of the selected signals The variable area shows the names or symbols of the logic signals to be analyzed Page Chapter 9 Section 24 PE LOGICANALYZER The status area shows the status of each variable in the shape of square waves The line corresponding to logic level 0 is shown with a thicker line aoe ee T0095 Also a vertical red line is displayed to indicate the TRIGGER point and a vertical green line indicating the cursor position The green cursor line can be slid right and left along the trace and it can be used to measure the time dif
411. lockwise M03 2 Rapid movement of the longitudinal axis from the initial plane to the reference plane 3 The hole is drilled Movement at working feedrate of the longitudinal axis to the programmed machining depth I 4 Dwell time K in hundredths of a second if this has been programmed 5 Withdrawal at rapid feedrate G00 of the longitudinal axis to the initial or reference plane depending on whether G98 or G99 has been programmed Programming example assuming that the work plane is formed by the X and Y axes that the longitudinal axis is the Z axis and that the starting point is XO YO ZO Ul YY nae ono Cereus E QM NC E point Sets polar coordinate origin Turn and canned cycle 3 times Cancels canned cycle Positioning End of program Chapter 9 Section Page CANNED CYCLES DRILLING G81 13 9 5 3 G82 DRILLING CANNED CYCLE WITH DWELL This cycle drills at the point indicated until the final programmed coordinate is reached Then it executes a dwell at the bottom of the drill hole Working in cartesian coordinates the basic structure of the block is as follows G98 G99 XY 5 5 1 5 5 K5 G82 G98 G99 X Y ZIK The tool withdraws to the Initial Plane once the hole has been drilled The tool withdraws to the Reference Plane once the hole has been drilled These are optional and define the movement of the axes of the main plane to position the to
412. long the program or quit by pressing either the ESC key or ABORT softkey The search can be done as many times as it is desired Once searched to the end of the program it will continue the search from the beginning When quitting the search mode the cursor will be positioned at the last matching text found LINE NUMBER After pressing this key the CNC will request the number of the line to be found Key in the desired line number and press ENTER The cursor will then be positioned at the desired line Once the desired starting block is selected press ENTER to validate it Page Chapter 3 Section EXECUTE SIMULATE BLOCKSELECTION ANDSTOP 2 CONDITION STOP CONDITION With this option it is possible to indicate the final execution or simulation block of the selected program This cannot be used when the CNC is already executing or simulating the selected program When selecting this option the CNC will show the following softkey functions PROGRAM SELECTION This option will be used when the final execution or simulation block belongs to a subroutine resident in another program When selecting this option the CNC will display the directory of part programs Select the desired program with the cursor and press ENTER Once this program is selected the CNC will return to display the program to be executed and the BLOCK SELECTION softkey will have to be pressed in order to display the selected program B
413. ly opened by the OPEN P statement Regardless of the type of the tracing being used manual one dimensional two dimensional or three dimensional the digitized points show the coordinates along the X Y and Zaxes There are two types of digitizing continuous and point by point Continuous Digitizing It may be used with any type of tracing Its programming format is G24 L E K The CNC captures points of the model depending on the value assigned to parameters L and E If L is not programmed the CNC will understand that a point by point digitizing is to be done Point by point Digitizing It may be used only when performing a manual tracing That is when the operator moves the probe by hand on and along the surface of the model Its programming format is G24 K The CNC generates a new point whenever the operator presses the READ POINT BY POINT softkey or whenever the PLC provides an up flank leading edge at the general logic input POINT of the CNC external push button The general programming format to activate the digitizing function is as follows G24 L5 5 ES S K L5 5 Indicates the sweeping step or distance between two consecutive digitized points A A mp1636 The CNC provides the coordinates of anew point after moving in space and along the programmed path the distance indicated by parameter L Ifnot programmed the CNC will understand that a point by point digitizing is to be done
414. main active until anew SOLID ZOOM or DISPLAY AREA is defined 3D The drawing shown in the lower right hand side of the screen will appear changed and with a superimposed rectangular window This window will represent the new selected graphic area and it will remain active until the point of view of the part is changed It is possible to use the COMBINED SECTION VIEW or SOLID views without modifying the selected graphic since they all use the same point of view The selected graphic area will be deactivated in the following circumstances When selecting one of the types XY XZ or YZ When selecting anew VIEWPOINT of the part When performing a new ZOOM in this mode When performing a ZOOM in SOLID mode Itmust be borne in mind that the new machining operation will be shown over the existing graphics To do it on an unmachined part use the CLEAR SCREEN softkey XY XZ YZ The drawing shown in the lower right hand side of the screen will appear changed and with a superimposed rectangular window The selected graphic area will be deactivated in the following circumstances When selecting another type of graphic When performing a new ZOOM in this mode Itmust be borne in mind that the new machining operation will be shown over the existing graphics To do it on an unmachined part use the CLEAR SCREEN softkey Chapter 3 Section Page EXECUTE SIMULATE GRAPHICS 29 3 5 4 VIEWPOINT In o
415. mber Besides it allows the parameters of this cycle to be initialized with the values required to perform it by means of assignment statements General considerations Probing canned cycles are not modal and therefore must be programmed whenever it is required to perform any of them The probes used in the performance of these cycles are Probe placed on a fixed position on the machine used for calibrating tools Probe placed in the spindle will be treated as a tool and will be used in the different measuring cycles The execution of a probing canned cycle does not alter the history of previous G functions except for the radius compensation functions G41 and G42 Chapter 12 Section Page WORKING WITH A PROBE PROBING CANNED CYCLES 3 12 3 TOOL LENGTH CALIBRATION CANNED CYCLE This is used to calibrate the length of the selected tool Once the cycle has ended the value L corresponding to the tool offset which is selected will be updated on the tool offset table To perform this cycle itis necessary to have a table top probe installed in a fixed position on the machine and with its faces parallel to axes X Y Z Its position will be indicated in absolute coordinates with respect to machine zero by means of the general machine parameters PRBXMIN Indicates the minimum coordinate occupied by the probe along the X PRBXMAX Indicates the maximum coordinate occupied by the probe along the X PRBYMIN
416. me or all three axes X Y and Z Besides the CNC takes into account the deflections of the probe when calculating the coordinates of the new digitized point The CNC does not take any points automatically while the probe is searching for the model or when it is off its surface Page Chapter 16 Section TRACING ANDDIGITIZING CONSIDERATIONS 16 2 G26 CALIBRATION OF THE TRACING PROBE This function executes an internal calibration cycle which permits compensating for the possible lack of parallelism between the probe axes and those of the machine It is recommended to perform this calibration every time the probe is installed on the machine it is changed or reoriented and every time the CNC is powered up In order to calibrate the tracing probe a gage block must be used which has its sides ground and perfectly parallel to the axes of the machine The CNC will treat the tracing probe as any other tool Therefore it must have its associated tool offset properly defined probe length and ball radius Once the offset of the tracing probe has been selected which must be installed on the longitudinal perpendicular axis must be positioned over the center of the gage block The programming format for this function is G26 S The S parameter indicates the direction of the part search along the perpendicular axis carrying the probe The possible values for this parameter are 0 Negativedirection 1 Positive d
417. med a value of 0 will be assumed Both amp ntersection types will be discussed later on V 5 5 Defines the tool penetrating feedrate Ifnot programmed or programmed with a value of 0 the CNC will assume 50 of the feedrate in the plane F F 5 5 Optional Defines the machining feedrate in the plane S 5 5 Optional Defines the spindle speed T 4 Defines the tool used for the roughing operation It must be programmed D 4 Optional Defines the tool offset number M Optional Up to 7 miscellaneous M functions can be programmed This operation allows M06 with an associated subroutine to be defined and the tool change is performed before beginning the roughing operation Page Chapter 11 Section 8 2D AND3D POCKETS 2D POCKETS ROUGHING 11 1 3 FINISHING OPERATION This is the last operation in the machining of an irregular pocket and its programming is optional It will be programmed in a block which will need to bear a label number in order to indicate to the canned cycle the block where the finishing operation is defined Example G66 D100 R200 F300 S400 E500 Definition of the irregular pocket cycle N300 G68 Definition of the finishing operation The function for the finishing operation is G68 and its programming format G68BLQ IRKVFSTDM B 5 5 Defines the machining pass along the longitudinal axis depth of the finishing pass fthis is not programmed or is programmed with a val
418. ments The digitized points are sent to the program in memory or via DNC previously opened with the following statement OPEN P expression DNC1 2 A D program comment This statement will also generate a new nesting level of subroutines TRACE expression assignment statement assignment statement The mnemonic TRACE calls the tracing cycle by means of a number or any expression which results in a number It also allows resetting the local parameters of such cycle by means of the assignment statements The digitized points are sentto the program in memory or via DNC previously opened with the following statement OPEN P expression DNC1 2 A D program comment This statement will also generate a new nesting level of subroutines Chapter 14 Section Page PROGRAM CONTROLSTATEMENTS SUBRUTINESTATEMENTS 11 14 5 1 INTERRUPTION SUBROUTINE STATEMENTS Whenever one of the general interruption logic input is activated INT 1 M5024 INT2 M5025 INT3 M5026 or INT4 M5027 the CNC temporarily interrupts the execution of the program in progress and starts executing the interruption subroutine whose number is indicated by the corresponding general parameter With INT1 M5024 the one indicated by machine parameter INT1SUB P35 With INT2 M5025 the one indicated by machine parameter INT2SUB P36 With INT3 M5026 the one indicated by machine parameter INT3SUB P37 With INT4 M5027 the
419. meter K has been programmed 6 Spindleturning direction reversal 7 Withdrawal at working feedrate of the longitudinal axis as far as the reference plane Once this coordinate has been reached the canned cycle will assume the selected FEEDRATE OVERRIDE and the SPINDLE OVERRIDE If rigid tapping is selected parameter R 1 the CNC will activate the general logic output RIGID M5521 to indicate to the PLC that a rigid tapping block is being executed 8 Spindle stop M05 This will only be performed if the spindle meachine parameter SREV M05 is selected 9 Dwell if parameter K has been programmed 10 Spindle turning direction reversal 11 Withdrawal at rapid feedrate G00 of the longitudinal axis as far as the initial plane if G98 has been programmed Page Chapter 9 Section 20 CANNEDCYCLES TAPPINGCANNEDCYCLE G84 Programming example assuming that the work plane is formed by the X and Y axes that the longitudinal axis is the Z axis and that the starting point is XO YO ZO Y 2mm Z Z 0 98mm WEEDS Tl M6 GO G90 XO YQ ZO tete eere e ertet Starting point G84 G99 G00 G91 X50 Y50 Z 98 I 22 K150 F350 S500 N3 3 machining positions G98 G00 G90 X500 Y500 oe eee ceesteeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeesaeeeees Positioning and canned cycle GOO Cancels canned cycle G90 XO YO isto RTL A eR Positioning MBO i5 mete t
420. ming manual Chap 5 7 and Appendix 3D Irregular pockets with islands Programming manual Chap 11 Possibility to choose beginning and end Installation manual Chap 3 of tool radius compensation Programming manual Chap 8 Anticipation signal for each axis Installation manual Chap 3 9 and Appendix High level block execution from PLC Installation manual Chap 11 Non rollover rotary axis now possible Installation manual Chap 3 Line graphics on GP models Optional Profile Editor on GP models Date February 1997 Software Version 11 04 and newer FEATURE AFFECTED MANUAL AND CHAPTERS Par metro general MACELOOK P79 Installation manual Chap 3 m xima aceleraci n en Look ahead Date April 1997 Software version 11 05 and newer FEATURE AFFECTED MANUAL AND CHAPTERS Definition of the delay associated with the digital Installation manual Chap 3 10 amp Appendix probe Programming manual Chap 12 13 amp Appendix Date February 1998 Software version 11 09 and newer FEATURE AFFECTED MANUAL AND CHAPTERS Cross compensation for an axis due to several axes Version history M 5 Date February 1998 Software version 13 01 and newer FEATURE AFFECTED MANUAL AND CHAPTERS Improved profile editor Operating Manual Chap 4 Machining in incline plane Installation Manual Programming Manual Chap Chap
421. mming P5 006 Q12 015 R20 022 Improperprogramming X P5 006 Q20 022 R12 015 If these parameters are not programmed the CNC understands that it must perform machining at all the points along the programmed path Page 12 Chapter 10 Section MULTIPLEMACHINING BOLT HOLEPATTERN G63 Basic operation 1 Multiple machining calculates the next point of those programmed where it is wished to machine 2 Movement programmed by C G00 G01 G02 or G03 to this point 3 Multiple machining will perform the canned cycle or modal subroutine selected after this movement 4 The CNC will repeat steps 1 2 3 until the programmed path has been completed After completing multiple machining the tool will be positioned atthe last point along the programmed path where machining was performed Programming example assuming that the work plane is formed by the X and Y axes that the longitudinal axis is Z and that the starting point is X0 YO ZO G81 G98 G01 G91 X280 Y130 Z 8 I 22 F100 S500 Canned cycle positioning and definition G63 X200 Y200 I30 C1 F200 P2 004 Q8 Defines multiple machining G80 Cancels canned cycle G90 X0 YO Positioning M30 End of program Itis also possible to write the multiple machining definition block in the following ways G63 X200 Y200 K12 C1 F200 P2 004 Q8 Chapter 10 Section Page MULTIPLEMACHINING xr oai 13 10 5 G64 MULTIPLE MACHINING IN AN ARC PATTERN The prog
422. movements of the X Y and Z axes Chapter 16 Section Page TRACING ANDDIGITIZING ACTIVATETRACING G23 11 16 3 1 G23 ACTIVATE MANUAL TRACING With this type of tracing the operator may move the probe by hand on and along the surface of the model to be traced During this type of tracing the deflection of the probe depends on the pressure that the operator exerts on to the probe Therefore itis advised to use this type of tracing forroughing operations or to use the digitizing function G24 so the CNC generates a program which compensates for the deflection of the probe mp1604 Manual tracing must be selected in the MDI option of the JOG mode and the programming format is the following G23 X Y Z X Y Z Define the axis or axes that will sweep the model Itis possible to define one two or three axes When more than one axis is defined they must be programmed in this order X Y Z If no axis is defined the CNC assumes the longitudinal perpendicular axis as the probing axis The probe will only be moved manually along the defined axes The rest of the axes must be moved by means of the JOG keys by using an electronic handwheel or by executing blocks in MDI mode For example If the tracing function is activated as G23 Y Z the probe may be moved by hand along the Y and Z axes To move it along the X axis either the JOG keys or an electronic handwheel must be used or execute blocks in MDI mod
423. n MONITORING Page 15 FIND This option will be executed regardless of which is the active window and it offers the following searching options BEGINNING This softkey positions the cursor over the first program block which is then selected quitting the find option END This softkey positions the cursor over the last program block which is then selected quitting the find option TEXT With this function itis possible to searcha text or character sequence starting from the block indicated by the cursor When this key is selected the CNC requests the character sequence to be found The CNC will consider a text found when it is isolated by blank spaces or separators Thus When looking for I1 it will not find or stop at I12 or 1123 but only at I1 When the text is defined Press the END OF TEXT softkey and the cursor will be positioned over the first occurrence of that text The search will begin at the current block The text found will be highlighted being possible to continue with the search or to quit it Press ENTER to continue the search up to the end of the program It is possible to search as many times as wished and when the end of the program is reached it will start from the first block Press the EXIT softkey or the ESC key to quit the search mode Page 16 Chapter 9 Section PLC MONITORING ACTIVATE DEACTIVATE SYMBOLS With this
424. n Manual Chap 3 Chap 11 Storing of EEPROM memory contents into an EPROM memory Operating Manual Chap 7 Tool calibration with a probe in JOG mode Installation Manual Operating Manual Chap 3 Chap 5 Interruption Subroutines 4 inputs Installation Manual Chap 3 Chap 9 Appendix Logic Analyzer for the PLC Installation Manual Operating Manual Chap 7 Chap 9 AC forward Installation Manual Chap 3 PLC Monitoring in JOG mode Operating Manual Chap 5 Execution time Estimates Operating Manual Chap 3 Part program storing in EEPROM memory Installation Manual Chap 3 Operating Manual Chap 7 Chap 12 Three cross compensation tables Installation Manual Chap 3 Appendix Operating Manual Chap 11 Axes jogging when setting leadscrew and cross compensation tables Operating Manual Chap 11 Subroutine associated with the tools Installation Manual Chap Possibility to FIND TEXT in the BLOCK SELECTION option Operating Manual Chap More double and triple size characters Operating Manual Chap Programming of the ERROR instruction by parameter Programming Manual Chap 14 Variables to access the rotation center ROTPF and ROTPS Programming Manual Chap 13 Appendix Version history M 1 FEATURE AFFECTED MANUAL AND CHAPTERS Variables to access the tracing probe DEFLEX DEFLEY and DEFLEZ Installat
425. n a single block up to 26 assignments can be made to different targets a single assignment being interpreted as the set of assignments made to the same target P1 P1 P2 P1 P1 P3 P1 P P4 P1 P1 p5 is the same as P1 P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 ee s The different assignments which are made in the same block will be separated by commas Chapter 14 Section Page PROGRAM CONTROLSTATEMENTS ASSIGNMENT STATEMENTS 1 142 DISPLAY STATEMENTS ERROR integer error text This statement stops the execution of the program and displays the indicated error it being possible to select this error in the following ways ERROR integer This will display the error number indicated and the text associated to this number according to the CNC error code should there be one ERROR integer error text This will display the number and the error text indicated it being necessary to write the text between quote marks ERROR error text This will display the error text only The error number may be defined by means of a numerical constant or an arithmetic parameter When using alocal parameter its numeric format must be used PO thru P25 instead of A thru Z Programming Examples ERROR 5 ERROR P100 ERROR Operator error ERROR 3 Operator error ERROR P120 Operator error MSG message This statement will display the message indicated between quote marks The CNC screen is provided with an
426. n a straight line G01 were vey If G93 is only programmed in a block the point where the machine is at that moment becomes the polar origin Attention The CNC does not modify the polar origin when defining a new part zero but it modifies the values of the variables PORGF y PORGS If while selecting the general machine parameter PORGMOVE a circular interpolation is programmed G02 or G03 the CNC assumes the center of the arc as the new polar origin On power up or after executing M02 M30 or after an EMERGENCY or RESET the CNC assumes the currently active part zero as polar origin When selecting a new work plane G16 G17 G18 G19 the CNC assumes as polar origin the part zero of that plane Chapter 4 Section Page REFERENCESYSTEMS 9 5 PROGRAMMING BY ISO CODE A programmed block in ISO language can consist of Preparatory functions G Axis coordinates X C Feedrate F Spindle speed S Tool number T Tool offset number D Auxiliary functions M This order should be maintained within each block although it is not necessary for every block to contain the information The FAGOR 8055 CNC allows you to program figures from 0 00001 to 99999 9999 with or without sign working in millimeters G71 called format 5 4 or either from 0 00001 to 3937 00787 with or without sign if the programming is done in inches G70 called format 4 5 Nevertheless and
427. n edition nonexistent program etc 8 This window displays the following information SHF Indicates that the SHIFT key has been pressed to activate the second function of the keys For example if ke 2 is pressed after the SHIFT key the CNC will understand that the character is required CAP This indicates capital letters CAPS key The CNC will understand that capital letters are required whenever this is active INS REP Indicates if it is insert mode INS or substitution REP mode It is selected by means of the INS key MM INCH Indicates the unit system millimeters or inches selected for display 9 Shows the different options which can be selected with soft keys F1 thru F7 Chapter 1 Section Page MONITOR INFORMATION OVERVIEW LAYOUT 3 1 2 KEYBOARD LAYOUT In accordance with the use of the different keys itcan be understood that the CNC keyboard is divided in the following way E Dre rs r Les Lee 07 C 1 Alphanumeric keyboard for the data entry in memory selection of axes tool offset etc 2 Keys which allow the information shown on screen to be moved forward or backward page to page or line to line as well as moving the cursor all over the screen The CL key allows the character over which the cursor is positioned or the last one introduced if the cursor is at the end of the line to be erased The INS key allows the insert or substitution mod
428. n the internal CNC memory together with the part programs and it will be displayed in the program directory of the UTILITIES mode next to the part programs The source program PLC PRG must be previously COMPILED in order to be executed This compiling operation generates an executable code which will be stored in the internal PLC memory Once the source program PLC_PRG has been compiled it is not necessary to keep it in memory since every time the PLC program is to be executed only the object program will be executed Once the proper operation of the PLC program has been verified itis advisable to SAVE it in the EEPROM memory so should the executable PLC program be lost the source program may be recovered and compiled On CNC power up the PLC will start the execution of the Object Program If not available it will automatically generate one by compiling the source program PLC_PRG existing in memory If no PLC PRG exists in memory the CNC will look for it in the EEPROM and after compiling it it will ask whether it is to be executed or not Ifno PLC_PRG is available at the EEPROM the CNC will show the corresponding error message Chapter 9 Section Page PLC 1 Object Program Source Program PLC PRGy EEPROM Program Generate Object Program j ERROR Message The PLC will always execute the object program existing in memory which might have nothing to do with the
429. nal axis to the coordinate of the point along this axis from where the cycle was called 3rd Movement in the main work plane to the point where the cycle is called Once the cycle has been completed the CNC will return the real values obtained after measurement in the following global arithmetic parameter P295 Inclination angle which the part has in relation to the abscissa axis This cycle allows angles between 45 to be measured If the angle to be measured is gt 45 the CNC will display the corresponding error If the angle to be measured is lt 45 the probe will collide with the part Chapter 12 Section Page WORKING WITH A PROBE ANGLE MEASURING 23 12 9 OUTSIDE CORNER AND ANGLE MEASURING CANNED CYCLE A probe placed in the spindle will be used which must be previously calibrated by means of canned cycles Canned cycle for calibrating tool length Canned cycle for calibrating probe The programming format for this cycle is X 5 5 Yx5 5 Z 5 5 PROBE 7 X Y Z B F Theoretical coordinate along the X axis of the corner to be measured Theoretical coordinate along the Y axis of the corner to be measured Theoretical coordinate along the Z axis of the corner to be measured Depending on the corner of the part it is required to measure the probe must be placed in the corresponding shaded area see figure before calling the cycle YES Z 7 m B5 5 Defines the safety distan
430. nal axis to the coordinate of the point along this axis from where the cycle was called Movement in the main work plane to the point where the cycle is called Once the cycle has been completed the CNC will return the real values obtained after measurement inthe following global arithmetic parameter P295 P296 P297 P298 P299 Inclination angle which the part has in relation to the abscissa axis Real coordinate of the corner along the abscissa axis Real coordinate of the corner along the ordinate axis Error detected along the abscissa axis Difference between the real coordinate of the corner and the programmed theoretical coordinate Error detected along the ordinate axis Difference between the real coordinate of the corner and the programmed theoretical coordinate This cycle allows angles between 45 to be measured If the angle to be measured is gt 45 the CNC will display the corresponding error If the angle to be measured is lt 45 the probe will collide with the part WORKING WITH A PROBE ANGLE MEASURING Chapter 12 Section Page OUTSIDE CORNER AND 27 12 10 HOLE MEASURING CANNED CYCLE A probe placed in the spindle will be used which must be previously calibrated by means of canned cycles Canned cycle for calibrating tool length Canned cycle for calibrating probe The programming format for this cycle is PROBE 8 X Y Z B J E C H F X 5 5 Theoretical coordinate alo
431. nd spindle If this variable is accessed block preparation is interrupted and the CNC waits for this command to be executed to resume block preparation Returns in revolutions per minute the 2nd spindle speed selected at the CNC This turning speed can be indicated by program by the PLC or DNC and the CNC selects one of these the one with the highest priority being that indicated by DNC and the one with the lowest priority that indicated by program Returns the turning speed in revolutions per minute selected by DNC If this has a value of 0 it means that it is not selected Returns the turning speed in revolutions per minute selected by PLC If this has a value of 0 it means that it is not selected Returns the turning speed in revolutions per minute selected by program Returns the Override of the 2nd spindle speed selected at the CNC This will be given by an integer between 0 and MAXSOVR maximum 255 This spindle speed percentage may be indicated by the PLC by DNC or from the front panel and the CNC will select one of them the order of priority from highest to lowest being by program by DNC by PLC and from the front panel Returns the 2nd spindle speed percentage selected by DNC If this has a value of 0 it means that it is not selected Returns the 2nd spindle speed percentage selected by PLC If this has a value of 0 it means that it is not selected Returns the 2nd spindle speed percentage select
432. nd the remaining times the tool will pass over the island withdrawing along the longitudinal axis to the reference plane and will continue machining once the island has been cleared M MP1104 Page 26 Chapter 11 Section 2D AND 3D POCKETS 3D POCKETS Case B When using concentric machining paths The roughing operation is carried out following paths concentric to the profile It will done as fast as possible without going over the islands if possible MP1129 2 Semi finishing operation Only if it has been programmed After the roughing some ridges appear on the external profile as well as on the islands themselves as shown in the illustration below With the semi finishing operation it is possible to minimize these ridges by running several contouring passes at different depths n 3 Finishing operation Only if it has been programmed It runs consecutive finishing passes in 3D Either inward or outward machining direction may be selected or both may be alternated ACER The CNC will machine both the outside profile and the islands by performing tangential entries and exits to them at constant surface speed MP1135 Attention If the spindle was stopped and no spindle turning direction is programmed it will start clockwise M03 Chapter 11 Section
433. ne of them can be divided into Rollover When their position reading goes from 0 to 360 No rollover When their position reading goes from 99999 to 99999 They are all programmed in degrees Therefore their readings are not affected by the inch mm conversion Normal rotary axes They can be interpolated with linear axes Movement in GOO and G01 Rollover axis programming G90 The sign indicates the turning direction and the target position between 0 and 359 9999 G91 The sign indicates the turning direction If the programmed movement exceeds 360 the axis will rotate more than one turn before positioning at the desired point Non rollover axis programming In G90 and G91 like a linear axis Positioning only Axes They cannot be interpolated with linear axes Movement Always in G00 and they do not admit tool radius compensation G41 G42 Rollover axis programming G90 Always positive and via the shortest path End coordinate between 0 amp 359 9999 G9 The sign indicates the turning direction If the programmed movement exceeds 360 the axis will rotate more than one turn before positioning at the desired point Non rollover axis programming In G90 and G91 like a linear axis HIRTH axes They work like the positioning only axis except that they do not admit decimal position values coordinates More than one hirth axis can be used but they can only be moved one at a time Page Chapter 3 Section 12 AXES
434. ng cycle by means of a number or an expression resulting in a number It also allows presetting its parameters with the desired values by using assignment statements General considerations All movements of these digitizing cycles must be made along the X Y or Zaxes and the work plane must be formed by two of these axes XY XZ YZ YX ZX ZY The other axis must be perpendicular to this plane and it must be selected as longitudinal axis The machining conditions for the digitizing cycle must be defined before calling it During the execution of a digitizing cycle the coordinates of the collected probed points are stored in a program This program must be opened before calling the cycle by means of the OPEN P statement If instead of storing the digitized data in the program memory of the CNC it is desired to send it out to a peripheral or computer via DNC it must be indicated so when defining the OPEN P statement It is advisable to indicate the machining conditions of the digitized program opened with the OPEN P statement by using the WRITE statement on the necessary blocks of the digitizing cycle Once the digitizing cycle has finished the probe will be positioned where it was before executing the cycle The execution of a digitizing cycle does not alter the history of the previous G functions It must be borne in mind that the program blocks generated by the digitizing cycle are all positioning blocks Th
435. ng the X axis of the center of the hole Y 5 5 Theoretical coordinate along the Y axis of the center of the hole Z 5 5 Theoretical coordinate along the Z axis of the center of the hole B5 5 Defines the safety distance Must be programmed with a positive value and over 0 J5 5 Defines the theoretical diameter of the hole Must be programmed with a positive value and over 0 This cycle allows holes to be measured with diameters of no more than J B E 5 5 Defines the distance which the probe moves back after initial probing Must be programmed with a positive value and over 0 C Indicates where the probing cycle must finish 0 Will return to the same point where the call to the cycle was made 1 Thecycle will finish over the measured point returning the longitudinal axis to the cycle calling point If this is not programmed the canned cycle will take the value of CO H5 5 Defines the initial probing feedrate in mm min or in inch min F5 5 Defines the probing feedrate in mm min or inch min Page Chapter 12 Section 28 WORKING WITH A PROBE HOLE MEASURING Basic operation 1 Approach Movement of the probe in rapid GOO from the point where the cycle is called to the center of the hole The approaching movement is made in two stages lst Movement in the main work plane 2nd Movement along the longitudinal axis Chapter 12 Section Page WORKING WITH A PROBE HOLE MEASURING 29 2 P
436. ng this function the tool moves according to the part coordinate system Inthe example on the left the part coordinates coincide with those of the machine and in the example on the right an incline plane is active G49 To move the tool according to the tool coordinate system function G47 must be used when programming a movement of the Z axis G01 G47 Z The movements programmed with G47 are always incremental Function G47 is not modal and it only acts within the block linear path where it has been programmed G47 can also be programmed while G48 and G49 are active Page Chapter 17 Section MOVEMENTACCORDINGTO 14 COORDINATETRANSFORMATION TOOL COORD SYSTEM 17 3 TCP TRANSFORMATION G48 When working with TCP transformation Tool Center Point the tool orientation may be modified without changing the position of its tip part coordinates Obviously the spindle must be swivel or angled and general machine parameter XFORM P93 set to a value other than 0 To orient the tool without changing its tip position the CNC must move several axes of the machine G48 cC wed X X Manaa d ENTE d PRSE d TCP transformation is activated and deactivated by function G48 G48 S1 TCP transformation ON G48 SO TCP transformation OFF TCP transformation is also turned off by programming G48 without parameters G48 is modal and it must
437. ng this key the CNC requests the number of the block to be found After keying in the desired number and pressing ENTER the cursor will position over that block which will then be selected quitting the search mode Page 16 Chapter 4 Section EDIT FIND 44 REPLACE With this function itis possible to replace a character sequence with another throughout the selected program When selecting this option the CNC requests the character sequence to be replaced Once the text to be replaced is indicated press the WITH softkey and the CNC will request the character sequence which will replace the previous one Once this text is keyed in press the END OF TEXT softkey and the cursor will be positioned over the first occurrence of the searched text The search will begin at the current block The found text will be highlighted and the following softkey options will appear REPLACE Will replace the highlighted text and will continue the search from this point to the end of the program If no more occurrences of the text to be replaced are found the CNC will quit this mode If another occurrence of the text is found it will be highlighted showing the same replacing or not replacing options DO NOT REPLACE Will not replace the highlighted text and will continue the search from this point to the end of the program Ifno more occurrences of the text to be replaced are found the CNC will quit th
438. ngs to correct deviations produced as a result of expansion etc Page Chapter 4 Section 4 REFERENCESYSTEMS ORG 54 ORG 55 ORG 56 ORG x57 G54 G55 G56 G57 ORG x58 G58 G92 ORG 59 G59 PLCOF x Offset of the PLC Zero offset Chapter 4 Section Page REFERENCESYSTEMS 5 4 4 1 COORDINATE PRESET AND LIMITATION OF THE S VALUE G92 Via Function G92 one can select any value in the axes of the CNC in addition to limiting the spindle speed COORDINATE PRESET When carrying out a zero offset via Function G92 the CNC assumes the coordinates of the axes programmed after G92 as new axis values No other function can be programmed in the block where G92 is defined the programming format being G92X C 5 5 Example i G90 X50 Y40 Positioning in PO G92 X0 YO Preset PO as part zero G91 X30 Programming according to part coordinates X20 Y20 X 20 Y20 X 30 Y 40 LIMITATION OF SPINDLE SPEED The spindle speed is limited to the value set by S5 4 by programming G92 85 4 This means that the CNC will not accept from this block onwards the programming of S values higher than the defined maximum Neither is it possible to exceed this maximum value from the keyboard on the front panel Page Chapter 4 Section REFERENCESYSTEMS 4 4 2 ZERO OFFSETS G54 G59 The FAGOR 8055 CNC has a table of zero offsets in which several zero offset
439. nnector X7 of the AXES module Installation Manual Chap Support of the FAGOR Floppy disc unit Installation Manual Chap 1 Chap 3 Make the tool change cycle more flexible Installation Manual Chap 3 Improved error processing Operating Manual Chap 1 Date April 1993 Software Version 7 06 and newer FEATURE AFFECTED MANUAL AND CHAPTERS Limitless rotary axes Installation Manual Chap 3 Positioning axes in G01 Programming Manual Chap 6 Reference point shift Installation Manual Chap 3 Chap 4 Work zone variables R W from PLC Installation Manual Programming Manual Chap 10 Appendix Appendix Possibility to abort the PLC channel Installation Manual Chap 9 Appendix Movement until contact Installation Manual Programming Manual Chap Chap 3 Chap 11 6 Appendix Boring Mill graphics Installation Manual Chap 3 WBUF programmable without parameters Programming Manual Chap 14 Date July 1993 Software Version 7 07 and newer FEATURE AFFECTED MANUAL AND CHAPTERS The GP model offers optional Tool radius compensation G40 G41 G42 Logic outputs of the key status Installation manual Chap 9 2 Version history M Date January 1994 Software Version 9 01 and newer FEATURE AFFECTED MANUAL AND C
440. ns of its mnemonic and will be separated according to their use into read only variables and read write variables 13 1 LEXICAL DESCRIPTION All the words which form the high level language of the numerical control must be written in capital letters except for associated texts which may be written in upper and lower case letters The following elements are available for high level programming Reserved words Numerical constants Symbols Chapter 13 Section Page PROGRAMMING INHIGH LEVELLANGUAGE LEXICAL DESCRIPTION 1 13 1 1 RESERVED WORDS The set of words which the CNC uses in high level programming for naming system variables operators control mnemonics etc are as follows ABS ACOS AND ARG ASIN ATAN ANAIn ANAOn BLKN CALL CALLP CLOCK CNCERR CNCFRO CNCSSO CYTIME DATE DEFLEX DEFLEY DEFLEZ DFHOLD DIGIT DIST X C DNCERR DNCF DNCFPR DNCFRO DNCS DNCSL DNCSSO DPOS X C DSBLK DSTOP DW EFHOLD ERROR ESBLK ESTOP EXEC FEED FIRST FLWE X C FLWES FOZLO X C FOZONE FOZUP X C FPREV FRO FZLO X C FZONE FZUP X C GGSA GGSB GGSC GGSD GMS GOTO GSn GUPn IB IF INPUT KEY KEYSRC LONGAX LUP a b MCALL MDOFF MIRROR MP X C n MPASn MPGn MPLCn MPSn MPSSn MSG MSn NBTOOL NXTOD NXTOOL ODW OPEN OPMODA OPMODB OPMODC OPMODE ORG X C ORG X C n ORGROA ORGROB ORGROC ORGROQ ORGROR ORGROS ORGROT ORGROX ORGROY ORGROZ PAGE PARTC PCALL PLANE PLCCn PLCERR PLCF PLCFPR PLCFRO PLCIn PLCMn PLCMSG PLCOF X C PLCOn PLCRn PLCS PLCSL PLCSSO
441. nsation X70 Z30 Applies compensation When G43 is programmed the CNC compensates the length in accordance with the value of the tool offset selected with code D or in its absence the tool offset shown in the tool table for the selected tool T Tool values R L I K must be stored in the tool offset table before starting machining or must be loaded at the beginning of the program via assignments to variables TOR TOL TOI TOK In the event of no tool offset being selected the CNC takes DO with values RO LO I0 KO Function G43 is modal and can be canceled via G44 and G74 home search If general machine parameter ILCOMP 0 it is also canceled on power up after executing M02 M30 or after EMERGENCY or RESET G53 programming with respect to machine zero temporarily cancels G43 only while executing a block which contains a G53 Length compensation can be used together with canned cycles although here care should be taken to apply this compensation before starting the cycle Chapter 8 Section Page G43 G44 G15 Example of machining with length compensation Z It is assumed that the tool used is 4mm shorter than the programmed one Tool length 4mm Tool number T1 Tool offset number D1 G92 X0 YO ZO coordinate preset G91 G00 G05 X50 Y35 S500 M03 G43 Z 25 T1 D1 activate compensation G01 G07 Z 12 F100 G00 Z12 X40 G01 Z 17 G00 G05 G44 Z42 M05 cancel compensation G90 G07 X0 YO
442. ntial entries and exits as well as corner rounding and chamfering It shows how to program electronic threading and movements against hard stop It shows how to program the feedrate as an inverted function of time Chapter 7 X Additional preparatory functions It shows how to interrupt block preparation and how to program a dwell It shows how to program a part in square corner round corner or with an automatic radius blend It describes how to program the look ahead mirror image scaling factor pattern rotation and the electronic slaving unslaving of the axes Chapter 8 Tool compensation It shows how to program tool radius and length compensation Chapter 9 Canned cycles It shows how to program the different machining canned cycles Chapter 10 Multiple machining Introduction 7 Chapter 11 Chapter 12 Chapter 13 Chapter 14 Chapter 15 Chapter 16 Chapter 17 Appendix Introduction 8 It shows how to program the different multiple machining cycles Irregular pocket canned cycles with islands It shows how to program the different 2 D and 3 D pocket canned cycles Working with a probe It shows how to carry out probing moves and how to program the probing canned cycles Programming in high level language It shows all the variables symbols operators etc to be used when programming in high level language Program control statements It shows the control sequences that can be used in high level language T
443. ntify the block and is only used when block references or jumps are made They are represented by the letter N followed by up to 4 figures 0 9999 It is not necessary to follow any order and randomly arranged numbers are allowed Iftwo or more blocks with the same label number are present in the same program the CNC will always give priority to the first number Although it is not necessary to program it by using a SOFTKEY the CNC allows the automatic programming of labels The programmer can select the initial number and the step between labels Page Chapter 2 Section CREATING A PROGRAM 2 1 2 PROGRAM BLOCK This is written with commands in ISO and High Level languages To prepare a program blocks written in both languages will be used although each one should be edited with commands in just one language 2 1 2 1 ISO LANGUAGE This language is specially designed to control axis movement as it gives information and movement conditions in addition to data on feedrate It includes Preparatory functions for movement used to determine geometry and working conditions such as linear and circular interpolations threading etc Control functions for axis feedrate and spindle speeds Tool control functions Complementary functions with technological instructions 2 1 2 2 HIGH LEVEL LANGUAGE This enables access to general purpose variables and to system tables and variables It gives the
444. o directions Main plane X Y and longitudinal Z Main plane Z X and longitudinal Y Main plane Y Z and longitudinal X Definition of lower work zone limits Definition of upper work zone limits Activate cancel work zones Activate tracing Activate digitizing Deactivate tracing digitizing Tracing probe calibration Tracing contour definition Second spindle selection Main spindle selection Feedrate as an inverted function of time Threadcutting Automatic radius blend Tangential entry Tangential exit Automatic chamfer blend Cancellation of tool radius compensation Right hand tool radius compensation Left hand tool radius compensation Tool length compensation Cancellation of tool length compensation Tool movement according to tool coordinate system TCP transformation Incline plane definition Controlled corner rounding Look Ahead Movement until making contact Program coordinates with respect to home Absolute zero offset 1 Absolute zero offset 2 Absolute zero offset 3 Absolute zero offset 4 Additive zero offset 1 Additive zero offset 2 Straight line canned cycle Rectangular pattern canned cycle QVO VON SV SON ON OS ER UOI UD ONU gos DANII INN 900000 OO O DD t da ee PLN NN HHH HEEL OOH lt Function Meaning Section G62 G63 G64 G65 G66 G67 G68 Grid pattern canned cycle 10 3 Circular pattern canned cycle 10 4 Arc pattern canned cycle Arc chord pattern canned
445. o do so the CNC will issue the corresponding error message The contouring path must be defined by means of function G27 tracing contour definition as described in this chapter Page Chapter 16 Section 18 TRACING ANDDIGITIZING ACTIVATETHRER DIMENSIONAL TRACING G23 The programming format is as follows G23 X Y Z 145 5 J 5 5 K 5 5 N5 5 MS 5 X Y Z Define the axes sweeping the model 1 5 5 J 5 5 K 5 5 N5 5 M 5 5 All three axes X Y and Z must be defined and in this order Defines the approach coordinate for X and it is referred to part zero Defines the approach coordinate for Y and it is referred to part zero Defines the approach coordinate for Z and it is referred to part zero Nominal deflection for the axes forming the plane Nominal Deflection for the longitudinal perpendicular axis The N and M deflection values indicate the pressure kept by the probe while sweeping the surface of the model The deflection is given in the selected work units mm or inches and its value is usually comprised between 0 3mm and 1 5mm The tracing quality depends upon the amount of deflection being used the tracing feedrate and the geometry of the model In order to prevent the probe from separating from the model it is advised to use a profile tracing feedrate of about 1000 times the deflection value per minute For example for a deflection value of 1mm the tracing feedrate would be 1 m min
446. o the tool coordinate system the CNC general logic input TOOLMOVE M5021 must be activated at the PLC Page Chapter 17 Section 2 COORDINATETRANSFORMATION Case b An incline plane has been selected G49 and the spindle is perpendicular to it If a Z axis movement is programmed G01 Z this axis will move according to the part coordinate system In this type of movements when the part coordinate system does not coincide with the machine coordinate system the CNC moves several axes in order to move the tool according to the part coordinates In the example the X and Z axes move To move thetool according to the machine coordinate system function G53 programming with respect to home must be used when programming the movement of the Z axis G01 G53 Z The Z axis will move with respect to home coordinates Function G53 is not modal and only affects the programmed movement In order for the jog movements to be carried out according to the machine coordinate system CNC general logic input MACHMOVE M5012 must be activated at the PLC Chapter 17 Section Page COORDINATE TRANSFORMATION 3 Case c Incline plane selected G49 and spindle not perpendicular to it If a Z axis movement is programmed G01 Z this axis will move according to the part coordinate system In this type of movements when the part coordinate system does not coincide with the machine c
447. ode and leave the original values intact Once the values have been modified press ENTER so the new ones replace the old ones Page Chapter 6 Section 8 TABLES TOOLOFFSET TABLE FIND This option is used to carry out a search in a table When selecting this option the softkeys will change their color to a white background and the following options will appear BEGINNING This softkey positions the cursor over the first tool offset which can be edited or modified in this mode and it quits the find mode END This softkey positions the cursor over the last tool offset which can be edited or modified in this mode and it quits the find mode TOOL OFFSET This softkey searches the desired tool offset and positions the cursor over it After pressing this softkey the CNC requests the number of the tool offset to be found Once the number is keyed in press ENTER DELETE With this option it is possible to delete one or more tool offsets off the table When deleting a tool offset the CNC sets all its values to 0 To delete a tool offset indicate its number and press ENTER To delete a group of tool offsets indicate the first one press the UP TO softkey indicate the last one to be deleted and press ENTER To delete all tool offsets press the ALL softkey The CNC will request confirmation and after pressing ENTER it will delete them all Chapter 6 Section Page TABLES TOOLOFFSET TABL
448. oes not have the H attribute assigned The values of the PLC resources active messages active pages and PLC statistics will be displayed without the need for this password and regardless of the H attribute However the password will be required to change the status of a resource or to execute a command to control the program execution It will also be required to save or restore the PLC program into and from the EEPROM memory Page Chapter 7 Section 12 UTILITIES PASSWORDS Screen customizing access to graphic editor CUSTOMPSW This password will be required to access the graphic editor to customize CNC screens Machine parameter access SETUPPSW It is possible to look at all machine parameter tables without the need for a password This password will be required to EDIT MODIFY INITIALIZE DELETE or LOAD the CNC table values except those of the serial lines since they are not protected Once the password option has been selected the CNC will display the following option softkeys Change password Select the one to be changed and enter the new one Delete password With this option it is possible to delete one or more passwords of the table To delete one password indicate it with its number and press ENTER To delete several passwords must be consecutive indicate the number of the first one to be deleted press the UPTO softkey indicate the number of the last one to be delet
449. of pocket geometry definition Chapter 11 Section Page 2D AND 3D POCKETS 3D POCKETS 53 EXAMPLES Example 3 In this example the island has 3 types of depth profiles A B and C A B B 3 contours are used to define the island A type contour B type contour and C type contour Y oe e SJ B KX Kon EEN EP A n B Ce A Page Chapter 11 Section 2D AND 3D POCKET 3D POCKETS Sidi EXAMPLES N200 N250 N300 N400 TOR1 4 TOI 0 TOR2 2 5 TOI2 0 G17 GO G43 G90 Z25 1000 M3 G66 R200 C250 F300 S400 E500 33D pocket definition M30 G67 B5 C4 I 20 R5 V100 F700 TIDI M6 Roughing operation G67 B2 1 18 R5 V100 F850 TIDI M6 Semi finishing operation G68 B1 5 L0 25 QO I 20 R5 V100 F500 T2D2 M6 Finishing operation GTI etn ttes nun ee Beginning of pocket geometry definition G0 G90 X0 YO ZO Outside contour plane profile G1 X105 Y62 X0 GIO XZ eines Depth profile G2 X5 Z 5 I0 K 5 G1 X7 5 Z 20 CLT AEE EN A type contour G90 GO X37 Y19 Plane profile G210 J12 GION Z isis eines Depth profile G0 Y19 Z 20 G1 Z 16 G2 Y31 Z 4 R12 End of pocket geometry definition Gf cus itn vais B type contour G90 GO X60 Y37 Plane profile G1 X75 Y25 X40 Y37 X60 GIO YZ eenias Depth profile G0 Y37 Z 20 G1 Z 13 G3 Y3
450. of the table out to a peripheral device or computer To do so press the softkey corresponding to the desired serial communications line The data transmission will start right when that softkey is pressed so the receiving unit must be ready before pressing this key Press the ABORT softkey to cancel the transmission in mid run MM INCHES This softkey changes the display of the measuring units for the linear axes from mm to inches or vice versa The selected unit will appear at the bottom right hand window Obviously the display of rotary axes will remain in degrees Chapter 6 Section Page TABLES ZEROOFFSETTABLE 5 6 2 TOOL OFFSET TABLE This table contains the values assigned to the tool offsets or in other words the dimensions of each tool to be used when machining a part RADIUS LENGTH RADIUS WEAR LENGTH WEAR 8 0000 50 0000 0 0000 0 0000 3 0000 50 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000
451. of the trace in this program takes place At the beginning of each PRG cycle Every time the periodic cycle PE is executed every 5 milliseconds 3 times while executing the PRG module Once while executing the PE module This way by means of the TRACE instruction the data capture can be done any time especially at those program points considered more critical This instruction must only be used when debugging the PLC program and it should be avoided once the PLC program is fully debugged Chapter 9 Section Page PLC LOGICANALYZER 33 9 10 3 2 MODES OF OPERATION The way the data is captured depends on the type of trigger selected This section describes the different types of trigger being used as well as the way the data capture is done in each case Trigger Before Trigger after Trigger center Trigger by Default The data capture begins as soon as the selected trigger condition is met that is when the trigger line shown at the information window changes its color The trace will be completed when the trace buffer is full or when the user interrupts it with the STOP TRACE softkey If interrupted before the trigger occurs the trace will be empty The data capture begins the instant the user presses the EXECUTE TRACE softkey The trace will be completed when the selected trigger condition is met or it is interrupted by pressing the STOP TRACE softkey If interrupt
452. ofthe longitudinal axis at the working feedrate G01 until the next incremental drilling according to B and R 5 Dwell time K in hundredths of a second if this has been programmed 6 Withdrawal at rapid feedrate G00 of the longitudinal axis to the initial or reference plane depending on whether G98 or G99 has been programmed If ascaling factor is applied to this cycle it should be borne in mind that this scaling factor will only affect the reference plane coordinates and drilling depth Therefore and due to the fact that parameter D is not affected by the scaling factor the surface coordinate of the part will not be proportional to the programmed cycle Programming example supposing that the work plane is formed by the X and Y axes that the longitudinal axis is the Z axis and that the starting point is XO YO Z0 Tl M6 G0 G90 X0 YO Z0 iiniescieeaoee ibt Starting point G69 G98 G91 X100 Y25 Z 98 I 52 B12 C2 D2 H5 J2 K150 L3 RO 8 F100 S500 MS Canned cycle definition ani m EET Canned cycle cancellation G90 XO Y ceetaceniesceturto ecaiois Ceca beoe iis Positioning hi5 m PE End of program Chapter 9 Section Page COMPLEXDEEPHOLE 11 CANNED CYCLES DRILLING G69 9 5 2 G81 DRILLING CANNED CYCLE This cycle drills at the point indicated until the final programmed coordinate is reached It is possible to program a dwell at the bottom of the drill hole Working in ca
453. ogram The M FUNCTIONS being executed in the program The number of TOOL CHANGES performed during the execution of the program Chapter 3 Section Page EXECUTE SIMULATE DISPLAY SELECTION 15 The position values for the axes of the machine It must be borne in mind that the display format for the axes is established by machine parameter DFORMAT and that real or theoretical position values will be shown depending on the setting of machine parameter THEODPLY Each axis has the following fields COMMAND Indicates the programmed coordinate or position which the axis must reach ACTUAL Indicates the actual current position of the axis TO GO Indicates the distance which is left to run to the programmed coordinate Page Chapter 3 Section 16 EXECUTE SIMULATE DISPLAY SELECTION 3 3 MDI This function is not available in the SIMULATION mode Besides if a program is being executed it must be interrupted in order to access this function It is possible to execute any block ISO or high level and it provides information on the corresponding format via the softkeys Once the block has been edited and after the key has been pressed the CNC willexecute this block without quitting this operating mode Chapter 3 Section Page EXECUTE SIMULATE MDI 17 34 TOOL INSPECTION This function is not available in the SIMULATION mode Besides if a program is being executed it mus
454. ogramming format for this cycle is PROBE 2 X Y Z B J E H F X 5 5 Real coordinate along the X axis of the hole center Y 5 5 Real coordinate along the Y axis of the hole center Z 5 5 Real coordinate along the Z axis of the hole center B5 5 Defines the safety distance Must be programmed with a positive value and over 0 J5 5 Defines the real diameter of the hole Must be programmed with a positive value and over 0 E 5 5 Defines the distance which the probe moves back after initial probing Must be programmed with a positive value and over 0 H5 5 Defines the feedrate for the initial probing movement Must be programmed in mm minute or in inches minute F5 5 Defines the probing feedrate Must be programmed in mm minute or in inches minute Basic operation i z Page Chapter 12 Section 8 WORKING WITH A PROBE PROBE CALIBRATION 1 Approach Movement of the probe in rapid G00 from the point where the cycle is called to the center of the hole The approaching movement is made in two stages Ist Movement in the main work plane 2nd Movement along the longitudinal axis Probing This movement consists of Movementof the probe along the ordinate axis at the indicated feedrate H until the probe signal is received The maximum distance to be travelled in the probing movementis B J 2 If after travelling that distance the CNC does not receive the probe signal it wi
455. ol at the machining point This point can be programmed in cartesian coordinates or in polar coordinates and the coordinates may be absolute or incremental according to whether the machine is operating in G90 or G91 Defines the reference plane coordinate It can be programmed in absolute coordinates or incremental coordinates and in this case will be referred to the initial plane If this is not programmed the CNC will take the position occupied by the tool at that moment as the reference plane Defines drilling depth Itcan be programmed in absolute coordinates or incremental coordinates and in this case will be referred to the reference plane Defines the dwell time in hundredths of a second after each drilling step until the withdrawal begins Should this not be programmed the CNC will take a value of KO A Page 14 Chapter 9 Section CANNEDCYCLES DRILLING WITHDWELL G82 Basic operation 1 If the spindle was in operation previously its turning direction is maintained If it was not in movement it will start by turning clockwise M03 Rapid movement of the longitudinal axis from the initial plane to the reference plane The hole is drilled Movement at working feedrate of the longitudinal axis to the bottom of the machined hole programmed in I Dwell time K in hundredths of a second Withdrawal at rapid feedrate G00 of the longitudinal axis to the initial or reference plane acco
456. ollowing examples Machine coordinate system X Y Zin the figures Part coordinate system X Y Z in the figures Tool coordinate system X Y Z in the figures Whennotransformation has been done and the spindle is in the starting position all three types of coordinates coincide Figure on the left If the spindle turns the tool coordinate system X Y Z changes Figure on the right If also an incline plane is selected G49 the part coordinate system also changes X Y Z Bottom figure Chapter 17 Section Page COORDINATETRANSFORMATION 1 Case a No transformation has taken place and the spindle is turned If a Z axis movement is programmed G01 Z this axis will move according to the part coordinate system which in this case coincides with machine coordinates Now to move the tool according to the tool coordinate system function G47 must be used when programming the movement of the Z axis G01 G47 Z The Z axis will move with respect to the tool coordinates In this type of movements when the tool coordinate system does not coincide with the machine coordinate system the CNC moves several axes in order to move the tool according to the part coordinates In the example the X and Z axes move Function G47 is not modal and only affects the programmed movement In order for the jog movements to be carried out according t
457. on point PROGRAM GENERATING STATEMENTS Section 14 6 EXECP expression DNC 1 2 Starts the execution of the program OPEN P expression program comment Starts generating a new program and allows it to be associated with a program comment WRITE block text Adds the information contained in block text after the last program block ofthe program which was being generated with OPEN P as a new program block CUSTOMIZING STATEMENTS Section 14 7 PAGE expression Displays the user page number 0 255 or system page number gt 1000 indicated SYMBOL expression 1 expression 2 expression3 Displays the symbol 0 255 indicated by expression 1 Its position on the screen is defined by expression 2 row 0 639 and by expression 3 column 0 335 IB expression INPUT text format Displays the text indicated in the data input window and stores the data input by the user in the input variable IBn ODW expression 1 expression 2 expression 3 Defines and draws a white window on screen 1 row x 14 columns Its position on screen is defined by expression 2 row and by expression 3 column DW expression 1 expression 2 DW expression 3 expression 4 Displays the numerical data indicated by expression 244 in windows indicated by the value of expression 1 3 SK expression 1 text 1 expression 2 text 2 Defines and disp
458. on the CNC or after pressing the sequence of SHIFT RESET keys the FAGOR logo will appear in the main window of the monitor or the screen previously prepared as page 0 by means of the GRAPHIC EDITOR If the CNC shows the message Initialize ENTER ESC it should be borne in mind that after pressing the ENTER key all the information stored in memory and the machine parameters are initialized to default values indicated in the installation manual On the lower part of the screen the main CNC menu will be shown it being possible to select the different operating modes by means of the softkeys F1 thru F7 Whenever the CNC menu has more options than number of softkeys 7 the character will appear in softkey f7 If this softkey is pressed the CNC will show the rest of the options available The options which the main CNC menu will show after turning it on after pressing the key sequence SHIFT RESET or after pressing the MAIN MENU softkey are EXECUTE Allows the execution of part programs in automatic or single block SIMULATE Allows simulation of parts programs in several modes EDIT Allows editing new and already existing part programs JOG Allows manual control of the machine by means of the Control Panel keys TABLES Allows CNC tables relating to part programs Zero Offsets Tool Offsets Tools Tool Magazine and global or local arithmetic parameters to be manipulated UTILITIES Allows program manipulation copy de
459. on values from the CNC keyboard as when editing in CNC language or also use the TEACH IN editing format as described next Jogthemachine axes with the jogging keys or with the electronic handwheel up to the desired position Press the softkey corresponding to the axis to be defined The CNC will assign to this axis its current physical position as the program position value Either position value programming methods can be used at any time while defining a block When the block being edited has no information empty editing area or window the ENTER key may be pressed in which case the CNC will generate a new block with the current position values of the axes This block will be added automatically to the program and it will be inserted after the block indicated by the cursor The cursor will position over the new edited block and the editing area will be cleared so another can be written When the position values of all the axes are not to be programmed in this fashion the CNC permits to select the desired axes To do this in this operating mode and within the EDITOR PARAMETERS option there is a soft key for TEACH IN AXES Chapter 4 Section Page EDIT TEACH IN EDITING 3 4 1 3 INTERACTIVE EDITOR This editor leads the operator through the program editing process by means of questions he she will answer This type of editing offers the following advantages No knowledge of the CNC programm
460. oncentrically a Se eee M Ms If not programmed a value of B 360 will be assumed To digitize a complete circle A and B must be assigned the same value or none at all so the default values are assumed AO B360 C5 5 Defines the digitizing step That is the distance between consecutive arcs and between consecutive points F5 5 Defines the probing feedrate in mm min or inches min Chapter 15 Section Page DIGITIZI YCLE DIGITIZING CYCLE IN AN 7 i Dee ARC PATTERN Basic operation 1 The probe is positioned at the point defined by parameters X Y and Z 2 The probe moves along the probing axis until touching the part 3 The CNC will generate a new block in the program previously opened with the OPEN P statement This block will indicate the position values of the X Y and Z axes at this point 4 The probe will follow the part along the programmed path generating a new block every time the probe touches the part 5 Once the cycle has finished the probe will return to the starting point This move consists of he probe returns to the axis position indicated by the Z parameter along the probing digitizing axis The probe returns to the work plane position indicated by the X and Y parameters Page Chapter 15 Section 8 DIGITIZING CYCLES DIGITIZING CYCLE IN AN ARC PATTERN 16 TRACING AND DIGITIZING 16 1 INTRODUCTION In order to clarify the terminology use
461. one indicated by machine parameter INT4SUB P38 The interruption subroutines are defined like any other subroutine by using the statements SUB integer and RET The interruption subroutines do not change the level of the local arithmetic parameters thus they can only contain global arithmetic parameters Within an interruption subroutine itis possible to use the REPOS X Y Z statement described next Once the execution of the subroutine is over the CNC resumes the execution of the program which was interrupted REPOS X Y Z The REPOS statement must always be used inside an interruption subroutine and facilitates the repositioning of the machine axes to the point of interruption When executing this statement the CNC moves the axes to the point where the program was interrupted The axes are repositioned one at a time tis not necessary to define all the axes only those to be repositioned The axes forming the main plane move together thus it is not required to program both axes since the CNC moves both of them with the first one The movement is not repeated when defining the second one it is ignored Example The main plane is formed by the X and Y axes the Z axis is the longitudinal perpendicular axis and the machine uses the C and W axes as auxiliary axes Itis desired to first move the C axis then the X and Y axes and finally the Z axis This repositioning move may be defined in any of
462. ong each axis X Y Z When accessing one of these variables POS X C TPOS X C DPOS X C FLWE X C DEFLEX DEFLEY or DEFLEZ block preparation is interrupted and the CNC waits for that command to be executed before resuming block preparation Page 16 Chapter 13 Section PROGRAMMINGINHIGH LEVELLANGUAGE VARIABLES FOR COORDINATES Read write variables DIST X C These variables allow the distance travelled by the selected axis to be read or modified This value is accumulative and it is very useful when it is required to perform an operation which depends on the distance travelled by the axes for example in their lubrication P1002 DISTX assigns to P100 the distance travelled by the X axis DISTZ P111 presets the variable indicating the distance travelled by the Z axis with the value of arithmetic parameter P111 If any ofthe DIST X C variables are accessed block preparation is interrupted and the CNC waits for this command to be executed to resume block preparation Chapter 13 Section Page E VARIABLES FOR PROGRAMMINGINHIGH LEVELLANGUAGE COORDINATES 17 13 2 9 VARIABLES ASSOCIATED WITH THE MAIN SPINDLE In these variables associated with the spindle their values are given in revolutions per minute and the main spindle override values are given in integers from 0 to 255 Read only variables SREAL SPEED DNCS PLCS PRGS SSO DNCSSO PLCSSO CN
463. oning OPEN P12345 Programreceiving storing digitized data WRITE G01 G05 F1000 G23 Z I 10 NI Tracing ON G24 L8 E5 K1 Digitizing ON G1 X100 Y35 Define tracing path G25 Cancel tracing and digitizing M30 Chapter 16 Section Page TRACING ANDDIGITIZING ACTIVATEDIGITIZING G24 27 16 7 TRACING AND DIGITIZING CANNED CYCLES The tracing digitizing canned cycles offered by this CNC are based on the types of tracing described earlier and they are the following TRACE 1 Tracing digitizing in a grid pattern TRACE 2 _ Tracing digitizing in an arc pattern TRACE 3 Profile tracing digitizing in the plane TRACE 4 3 DProfile tracing digitizing in space TRACE 5 Tracing digitizing with polygonal sweep They are programmed by means of the high level instruction TRACE The cycle number may be indicated either by anumber 1 2 3 4 5 or by an expression whose result is one of these numbers They all have a series of parameters defining the tracing path and the digitizing conditions To just trace the part without digitizing it the digitizing parameters must be set to 0 To digitize the model besides setting the digitizing parameters the following points must be considered Before calling the canned cycle itis required to open the program which will store the digitized data by means of the OPEN P statement Tf the captured data is supposed to be stored at a peripheral device or computer via DNC instead of do
464. ons ports RS232C or RS422 To doso selectthe desired communications line by pressing its corresponding softkey The data transmission will start right when that softkey is pressed Press the ABORT softkey to cancel the transmission in mid run SAVE With this option it is possible to send all the tool offsets of the table out to a peripheral device or computer To do so press the softkey corresponding to the desired serial communications line The data transmission will start right when that softkey is pressed so the receiving unit must be ready before pressing this key Press the ABORT softkey to cancel the transmission in mid run Page 24 Chapter 6 Section TABLES GLOBALANDLOCAL PARAMETERTABLE 7 UTILITIES When entering this mode of operation the CNC shows the directory of CNC programs which include Part programs and screen customizing programs The PLC program PLC_PRG if visible not hidden The PLC error file PLC ERR if visible The PLC message file PLC_MSG if visible The operator can move the cursor on the screen line by line with the up and down arrow keys and page by page with the page up and page down keys It also has several options which are described next Once any of these options is selected the CNC shows an editing area or window where the cursorcan be moved with the right and leftarrow keys Also the up arrow key will position the cursor over the first charac
465. ools and parts Functions G75 and G76 are not modal and therefore must be programmed whenever it is wished to probe It is not possible to vary the Feedrate Override while either G75 or G76 is active It stays set at 100 Functions G75 and G76 are incompatible with each other and with G00 G02 G03 G33 G41 and G42 functions In addition once this has been performed the CNC will assume functions GO1 and G40 Page Chapter 12 Section 2 WORKING WITH A PROBE PROBING 12 2 PROBING CANNED CYCLES The FAGOR 8055 CNC has the following probing canned cycles 1 Tool length calibration canned cycle Probe calibration canned cycle Surface measuring canned cycle Outside corner measuring canned cycle 2 3 4 5 Inside corner measuring canned cycle 6 Angle measuring canned cycle 7 Corner and angle measuring canned cycle 8 Hole measuring canned cycle 9 Boss measuring canned cycle All the movements of these probing canned cycles will be performed in the X Y Z axes and the work plane must be formed by 2 of these axes XY XZ YZ YX ZX ZY The other axis which must be perpendicular to this plane must be selected as the longitudinal axis Canned cycles will be programmed by means of the high level mnemonic PROBE which has the following programming format PROBE expression assignment statement This statement calls the probing cycle indicated by means of a number or any expression which results in a nu
466. oordinate system the CNC moves several axes in order to move the tool according to the part coordinates In the example the X and Z axes move To movethe tool according to the tool coordinate system function G47 must be used when programming the Z axis movement G01 G47 Z In this type of movements when the tool coordinate system does not coincide with the machine coordinate system the CNC moves several axes in order to move the tool according to the part coordinates In the example the X and Z axes move Function G47 is not modal and only affects the programmed movement In order for the jog movements to be carried out according to the tool coordinate system the CNC general logic input TOOLMOVE M5021 must be activated at the PLC Page Chapter 17 Section 4 COORDINATE TRANSFORMATION To move the tool according to the machine coordinate system function G53 must be used programming with respect to home when programming the Z axis movement G01 G53 Z Function G53 is not modal and it only acts in the programmed movement In order for the jog movements to be carried out according to the machine coordinate system CNC general logic input MACHMOVE M5012 must be activated at the PLC Chapter 17 Section Page COORDINATETRANSFORMATION 5 Case d Working with TCP transformation Tool Center Point When working with TCP transformation function G48 active the CNC allows changing
467. opped or not This option will show the following screen DIAGNOSIS MEMORY TEST CNC RAM Memory Kb gt User gt System EEPROM Memory Kb PLC RAM Memory Kb EEPROM Memory Kb CAP INS CONFIG HARDWARH MEMORY PROM USER URATION TEST TEST TEST CNC Itindicates the status of the RAM memory used by the system and what portion of it is available for the user This will be given in Kb It also indicates the EEPROM memory shared with the PLC and how much of it is available for storing the user customized pages screens and for the CNC part programs Also in Kb Machine parameter PAGESMEM indicates the of EEPROM memory dedicated to store user defined pages screens and symbols and machine parameter PLCMEM indicates the of EEPROM memory dedicated to store the PLC program PLC messages anderrors The remaining free EEPROM memory is dedicated to store CNC part programs Once the whole memory has been checked it will indicate the result of the test with O K or Error accordingly Chapter 12 Section Page DIAGNOSIS MEMORYTEST 7 PLC It indicates the status of the RAM memory available for the PLC This will be given in Kb It also indicates the EEPROM memory shared with the CNC and how much of it is available for storing the PLC program Also in Kb Once the entire memory has been tested the result of each test will be shown next
468. option it is possible to display in all available windows the symbols or mnemonics associated to the various resources The names of the resources may be displayed in two ways using their generic names I O M T C R by deactivating symbols or using their associated symbols by activating them When a resource has no mnemonic associated to it it will always be displayed with its generic name This softkey will toggle between ACTIVATE SYMBOL and DEACTIVATE SYMBOL every time is pressed in order to show which option is available START PLC When selecting this option the CNC will start executing the PLC program from the beginning including the CY1 cycle The CNC will ignore this command when it is already executing the PLC program FIRST CYCLE When selecting this option the CNC will execute only the initial cycle of the PLC program CY1 The CNC will ignore this command when it is already executing the PLC program SINGLE CYCLE When selecting this option the CNC will execute the main cycle of the PLC program PRG only once The CNC will ignore this command when it is already executing the PLC program STOP PLC This softkey interrupts the execution of the PLC program CONTINUE This softkey resumes the execution of the PLC program Chapter 9 Section Page PLC MONITORING 17 9 3 1 MONITORING WITH THE PLC IN OPERATION AND WITH THE PLC STOPPED It must be borne in mind that the CNC initializes all ph
469. ot moving and no turning direction is programmed it will p 5 8 prog start rotating clockwise MO In the pocket canned cycle with islands there are four coordinates along the longitudinal axis selected with G15 which due to their importance are discussed below 1 4 Initial plane coordinate This coordinate is given by the position which the tool occupies when the cycle is called MP1131 Reference plane coordinate This represents an approach coordinate to the part and must be programmed in absolute coordinates Part surface coordinate This is programmed in absolute coordinates and in the first profile definition block Machining depth coordinate This is programmed in absolute coordinates Conditions after finishing the cycle Once the canned cycle has been completed the active feedrate will be the last programmed feedrate the one relating to the roughing or finishing operation Likewise the CNC will assume functions GOO G07 G40 and G90 Page 4 Chapter 11 Section 2D AND 3D POCKETS 2D POCKETS 11 1 1 DRILLING OPERATION This operation is optional and in order to be executed it is necessary to also program a roughing operation It is mainly used when the tool programmed in the roughing operation does not machine along the longitudinal axis allowing by means of this operation the access of this tool to the surface to be roughed off It w
470. ould be taken to ensure that the numberof machining operations is an integer number otherwise the CNC will show the corresponding error code Defines the length of the machining path according to the ordinate axis Defines the pitch between machining operations according to the ordinate axis Chapter 10 Section Page MULTIPLEMACHINING INARECTANGULAR 5 PATTERN G61 D 5 Definesthe number oftotal machining operations in the ordinate axis including the machining definition point Due to the fact that machining may be defined according to the ordinate axis with any two points of the Y J D group the CNC allows the following definition combinations YJ YD JD Nevertheless if format YJ is defined care should be taken to ensure that the number of machining operations is an integer number otherwise the CNC will show the corresponding error code P Q R S T U V Theseparameters are optional and are used to indicate at which points or between which of those programmed points it is not required to machine Thus programming P7 indicates that it is not required to do machining at point 7 and programming Q10 013 indicates that machining is not required from point 10 to 13 orexpressed in another way that no machining is required at points 10 11 12 and 13 When it is required to define a group of points Q10 013 care should be taken to define the final point with three digits as if Q10 13 is programmed multip
471. ows the manufacturer to select up to 6 of them Moreover all the axes should be suitably defined as linear rotary etc through the axis machine parameters which appear in the Installation and Start up Manual There is no limitation to the programming of the axes and interpolations can be made simultaneously with up to 6 axes Page Chapter 3 Section 2 AXES AND COORDINATESYSTEMS NOME Une OFTHEAXES 3 2 PLANE SELECTION G16 G17 G18 G19 Plane selection should be made when the following are carried out Circular interpolations Controlled corner rounding Tangential entry and exit Chamfer blend Machining canned cycles Pattern rotation Tool radius Compensation Tool length compensation The G functions which enable selection of work planes are as follows G16 axis1 axis2 Enables selection of the desired work plane plus the direction of G02 G03 circular interpolation axisl being programmed as the abscissa axis and axis2 as the ordinate axis NW Y G Q Q j X U GI6XW G16UY G17 Selects the XY plane G18 Selects the ZX plane G19 Selects the YZ plane Chapter 3 Section Page PLANESELECTION 3 AXES AND COORDINATESYSTEMS G16 G17 G18 G19 The G16 G17 G18 and G19 functions are modal and incompatible among themselves The G16 function should be programmed on its own within a block LES The G17 G18 and G19 functions define two of the thr
472. perating in G90 or G91 Z 5 5 Defines the reference plane coordinate It can be programmed in absolute coordinates or incremental coordinates and in this case will be referred to the initial plane If this is not programmed the CNC will take the position occupied by the tool at that moment as the reference plane Page Chapter 9 Section 16 CANNEDCYCLES SIMPLEDEEP HOLEDRILLING G83 1 5 5 Defines the value of each drilling step according to the axis longitudinal to the main plane J4 Defines the number of steps which the drill is to make This can be programmed with a value between 1 and 9999 Basic operation 1 Ifthe spindle was in operation previously its turning direction is maintained If it was not in movement it will start by turning clockwise M03 2 Rapid movement of the longitudinal axis from the initial plane to the reference plane 3 Firstdrilling Movementat working feedrate ofthe longitudinal axis tothe programmed incremental depth in T 4 Drilling loop The following steps will be repeated J 1 times as in the previous step the first programmed drilling was done 4 1 Withdrawal of the longitudinal axis in rapid G00 to the reference plane 4 2 Longitudinal axis approach in rapid G00 to 1 mm 0 040 inch of the previous drilling step 4 3 Another drilling step Movement of the longitudinal axis at working feedrate G01 the incremental depth programmed in T 5 Withdra
473. points depending on the background color separated 16 pixels from each other The grid points will be white when the selected background color corresponds to one of the 8 upper color rectangles and they will be black when the selected background color corresponds to one of the 8 lower color rectangles Press this softkey again to get rid of the grid Every time the grid is displayed the CNC will reset the cursor advance step to 16 pixels Therefore the cursor will move from grid point to grid point every time the arrow keys are pressed to position it on the screen However the cursor advance may be modified afterwards by selecting it with the CURSOR ADVANCE softkey Page Chapter 10 Section 10 GRAPHICEDITOR EDITING CUSTOMSCREENS PAGES ANDSYMBOLS 10 3 GRAPHIC ELEMENTS Before accessing this option it is necessary to select the page or symbol to be edited or modified by means of the EDIT option of the UTILITIES mode of operation With this option it is possible to include graphic elements in the selected page or symbol The CNC displays a screen 80 columns wide 640 pixels for X coordinate by 21 rows high 336 pixels for Y coordinate When editing a new page the CNC will position the cursor in the center of the screen and when editing a new symbol it will position it at the upper left hand corner The cursor is white and can be moved around with the up and down arrow keys and the left and right arrow keys
474. polation G03 Defines the feedrate which is used for moving between points Obviously it will only have value for C values other than zero If itis not programmed the value FO will be taken maximum feedrate selected by the MAXFEED axis machine parameter P Q R S T U V These parameters are optional and are used to indicate at which points or between which of those programmed points it is not required to machine Thus programming P7 indicates that it is not required to do machining at point 7 and programming Q10 013 indicates that machining is not required from point 10to 13 orexpressed in another way that no machining is required at points 10 11 12 and 13 When it is required to define a group of points Q10 013 care should be taken to define the final point with three digits as if Q10 13 is programmed multiple machining understands Q10 130 The programming order for these parameters is P Q R S T U V it also being necessary to maintain the order in which the points assigned to these are numbered i e the numbering order of the points assigned to Q must be greater than that assigned to P and less than that assigned to R Example Proper programming P5 006 Q12 015 R20 022 Improperprogramming P5 006 Q20 022 R12 015 If these parameters are not programmed the CNC understands that it must perform machining at all the points along the programmed path Chapter 10 Section Page MULTIPLEMACHINING INANARCPAT
475. pping terms Fagor documentation for the 8055 CNC Manual contents Chapter 1 Overview It shows how to enter part programs from the keyboard or via DNC It indicates the protocol to be used in DNC communications Chapter 2 Creating a program It indicates the structure for a part program and all its blocks It shows the languages that could be used to program the parts ISO coded and High Level languages Chapter3 Axes and coordinate systems It indicates the nomenclature of the axes and how to select them It shows how to select the working planes work units type of programming system absolute incremental It describes the coordinates systems that could be used for programming Cartesian polar cylindric angle plus Cartesian coordinate It shows how to operate with rotary axes and how to define and use work zones Chapter4 Reference systems It indicates the machine reference home and datum points to be set at the CNC It shows how to program a home search how to program coordinates with respect to home how to preset coordinates zero offsets and polar origins Chapter5 Programming by ISO code It shows how to program preparatory functions for feedrate and constant speed as well as additional functions such as F S T D and M It describes how to select the main spindle or the auxiliary spindle Chapter 6 Path control It shows how to program rapid traverse linear circular and helical interpolations Itshows how to program tange
476. press the FINAL BLOCK softkey If the last block to be moved is also the last one of the program it can also be selected by pressing the TO THE END softkey Tomove only one block the initial block and the final block will be the same one Once the first and last blocks are selected the CNC will highlight the selected blocks requesting confirmation to move them Then indicate the block after which this group of blocks must be placed Press the START OPERATION softkey to carry out the move Chapter 9 Section Page PLC EDIT 7 COPY BLOCK With this option itis possible to copy ablock or group of blocks by previously indicating the first and last blocks to be copied To do so follow these steps Position the cursor over the first block to be copied and press the INITIAL BLOCK softkey Position the cursor over the last block to be copied and press the FINAL BLOCK softkey If the last block to be copied is also the last one of the program it can also be selected by pressing the TO THE END softkey Tocopy only one block the initial block and the final block will be the same one Once the first and last blocks are selected the CNC will highlight the selected blocks requesting confirmation to copy them Then indicate the block after which this group of blocks must be placed Press the START OPERATION softkey to carry out this command
477. pris E bra HERE A E PH ERE ed CA A HEURE NT 3 11 3 Operation with parameter HUES aineinaan eaoin oae Oi 6 EEE 7 DIAGNOSIS 9 Chapter 12 DIAGNOSIS 12 1 B osten gon SUPA Ta AE EA EEFE EA EUER DULL EEEE E 2 12 1 1 Hardware contour a CHI aces cacsaenease ones saenadencasnaneernasaveacasbanessanncdedersnanes qqenmeelanenenenentaned 2 EA w Miu S A e Aao ETT ET OO TD 4 2g Hardware c Nep 5 123 Eaa A eI E T A E EA A E A E E T 12 4 EDU USE Licini dde eb vidi DIM EIE HUS EO AER ISP ETUR CGU OR Diet CIE Gd om ea olo o CA o S RIN P eS tod SP DMO 9 12 5 O a E E E E E AE AN as an O N techs seduces paruit tedio t rcr Fu qtu Doe Us 10 12 6 Wii np NOTES Rr 11 VERSION HISTORY Date June 1992 Mill model Software Version 7 01 and newer FEATURE AFFECTED MANUAL AND CHAPTERS GP Model All Manuals lst page Reception of Autocad drawings Dedicated Manual Supplied with the software Auxiliary Spindle Live tool Installation Manual Programming Manual Chap 3 Chap 9 Appendix Chap 5 Chap 13 Tracing Installation Manual Program Manual Chap 1 Chap 3 Chap 5 Chap 14 Chap 16 Appen Profile Editor Operating Manual Chap 4 Interactive Editor Operating Manual Chap 4 TEACH IN Editing Operating Manual Chap 4 Software for 4 or 6 axes Installation Manual Programming Manual Chap 4 Chap 9 Chap 10 Appen Chap 3 Chap 13 Axes Controlled from the PLC Installatio
478. proaching movement is made in two stages Ist Movement in the main work plane 2nd Movement along the longitudinal axis 2 Probing Movement of the probe along the ordinate axis at the indicated feedrate F until the probe signal is received The maximum distance to be travelled in the probing movementis 3B If after travelling that distance the CNC does not receive the probe signal it will display the corresponding error code and stop the movement of the axes 3 Withdrawal Movement of the probe in rapid G00 from the point where it probed to the first approach point 4 Second approach Movement of the probe in rapid G00 from the first approach point to the second It is at a distance B from the first one Page Chapter 12 Section 22 WORKING WITH A PROBE ANGLE MEASURING 5 Second probing Movement of the probe along the abscissa axis at the indicated feedrate F until the probe signal is received The maximum distance to be travelled in the probing movementis 4B If after travelling that distance the CNC does notreceive the probe signal it will display the corresponding error code and stop the movement of the axes Withdrawal Movement of the probe in rapid GOO from the point where it probed for the second time to the point where the cycle was called The withdrawal movement is made in three stages Ist Movement along the probing axis to the second approach point 2nd Movement along the longitudi
479. programmed M02 M30 EMERGENCY RESET are not programmed or the CNC is not turned on or off Letter D means BY DEFAULT i e that these will be assumed by the CNC when turned on after executing M02 M30 or after EMERGENCY or RESET In cases indicated with it must be interpreted that the DEFAULT of these G functions depends on the settings of the general CNC machine parameters V means that the G function is displayed next to the machining conditions in the execution and simulation modes APPENDIX B INTERNAL CNC VARIABLES R indicates that the variable can be read W indicates that the variable can be modified VARIABLES ASSOCIATED WITH TOOLS Section 13 2 2 Variable TOOL Number of active tool TOD Number of active tool offset NXTOOL Number of the next requested tool waiting for M06 NXTOD Number of the next tool s offset TMZPn n tool s position in the tool magazine TLFDn n tool s offset number TLFFn n tool s family code TLFNn Nominal life assigned to tool n TLFRn Real life value of tool n TMZTn Contents of tool magazine position n TORn Tool radius R value of offset n TOLn Tool length L value of offset n TOIn Tool radius wear I of offset n TOKn Tool length wear K of offset n VARIABLES ASSOCIATED WITH ZERO OFFSETS Section 13 2 3 Variable ORG X C Zero offset active on the selected axis without including the additive Zero offset a
480. ps Position the cursor over the first block to be moved and press the INITIAL BLOCK softkey Position the cursor over the last block to be moved and press the FINAL BLOCK softkey If the last block to be moved is also the last one of the program it can also be selected by pressing the TO THE END softkey To move only one block the initial block and the final block will be the same one Once the first and last blocks are selected the CNC will highlight the selected blocks requesting confirmation to move them Then indicate the block after which this group of blocks must be placed Press the START OPERATION softkey to carry out the move Chapter 4 Section Page EDIT MOVE BLOCK 19 4 7 COPY BLOCK With this option itis possible to copy a block or group of blocks by previously indicating the first and last blocks to be copied To do so follow these steps Position the cursor over the first block to be copied and press the INITIAL BLOCK softkey Position the cursor over the last block to be copied and press the FINAL BLOCK softkey If the last block to be copied is also the last one of the program it can also be selected by pressing the TO THE END softkey To copy only one block the initial block and the final block will be the same one Once the first and last blocks are selected the CNC will highlight the selected blocks re
481. pter 16 Section Page TRACING ANDDIGITIZING 3 D PROFILE TRACING 45 CANNEDCYCLE A Indicates the tracing direction of the probe after positioning at X Y Z and having come down to the plane where the first tracing pass will be carried out seeking the model 0 Towards positive abscissa coordinates 1 Towards negative abscissa coordinates 2 Towards positive ordinate coordinates 3 Towards negative ordinate coordinates mp1661 If not programmed the CNC assumes AO C This parameter is related to parameter A It indicates the maximum distance the probe may move to find the model S Indicates the direction used to trace the model 0 1 The probe moves leaving the model to its right The probe moves leaving the model to its left mp1618 If not programmed the CNC assumes a value of S0 Q R 5 5 These parameters must be defined when the contour is not closed Define the initial point of the segment which indicates the end of the contour They are referred to part zero The Q coordinate corresponds to the abscissa axis and the R to the ordinate axis K2 K1 KO 8 K3 J 5 5 This parameter must be defined when the contour is not closed In other words when Q and R have been defined It defines the length of the segment which indicates the end of the contour If not programmed the CNC assumes an infinite value K This parameter must be defined when the contour is not
482. pter 7 Section Page OPERATION WITH EEPROM 15 UTILITIES MEMORY 8 DNC With this CNC it is possible to access this operating mode when at least one of the serial lines RS232C or RS422 is set to work in the DNC mode or to communicate with the FAGOR Floppy Disk Unit Machine parameter for serial lines PROTOCOL other than 0 When accessing this mode the CNC shows the following screen P0001110 NOOIJO 11 25 35 A MK 12 71 DNE 877 Status Active Status Active Operation Operation 3 H Error in last transmission 77 Wd Error in last transmission 7 Retries in last transmission Retries in last transmission Error in last tranamiasion Error in last tranamiasion b Operation Operation CAP INS DNC1 ON DNCI OFF DNCZ ON DNCZ OFF F4 F5 F6 F7 moos li The left hand side of the screen corresponds to serial line and the right hand side to serial line 2 In the example of the figure above serial line is used to communicate with a Fagor Floppy Disk Unit parameter PROTOCOL 2 and serial line 2 to communicate via DNC PROTOCOL 1 The upper area 1 indicates The status of the serial line Active Inactive The type of operation in progress Sending program Receiving program Sending directory Receiving directory etc The lower area 2 indicates the last operation and the type of
483. ption is selected the softkeys will change their color showing their type of editing option over a white background Also itis possible to get more editing assistance by pressing HELP Press HELP again to exit the editing assistance mode Press ESC to quit the editing mode and leave the original values intact Once the zero offset has been edited press ENTER to enter it in the table Chapter 6 Section Page TABLES ZERO OFFSET TABLE 3 MODIFY This option permits modifying the values of a selected zero offset Before pressing this softkey select with the cursor the zero offset to be modified Once this option is selected the softkeys will change their color showing their type of modifying option over a white background Also itis possible to get more editing assistance by pressing HELP Press HELP again to exit the editing assistance mode Press ESC or use the CL key to delete the text shown in the editing window which corresponded to the selected zero offset will be cleared so it can be re edited Press ESC again to quit the modifying mode and leave the original values intact Once the values have been modified press ENTER so the new ones replace the old ones FIND This option is used to carry out a search in a table When selecting this option the softkeys will show the following options BEGINNING This softkey positions the cursor over the first zero offset which can be edited or modified in thi
484. ption is selected the softkeys will change their color showing their type of modifying option over a white background Also itis possible to get more editing assistance by pressing HELP Press HELP again to exit the editing assistance mode Press ESC or use the CL key to delete the text shown in the editing window which corresponded to the selected tool will be cleared so it can be re edited Press ESC again to quit the modifying mode and leave the original values intact Once the values have been modified press ENTER so the new ones replace the old ones Page Chapter 6 Section 14 TABLES TOOLTABLE FIND This option is used to carry out a search in a table When selecting this option the softkeys will change their color to a white background and the following options will appear BEGINNING This softkey positions the cursor over the first tool which can be edited or modified in this mode and it quits the find mode END This softkey positions the cursor over the last tool which can be edited or modified in this mode and it quits the find mode TOOL This softkey searches the desired tool and positions the cursor over it After pressing this softkey the CNC requests the tool number to be found Once the number is keyed in press ENTER DELETE With this option it is possible to delete one or more tools off the table When deleting a tool the CNC sets all its values to 0 To delete a tool indicate i
485. questing confirmation to copy them Then indicate the block after which this group of blocks must be placed Press the START OPERATION softkey to carry out this command Page Chapter 4 Section 20 poke COPY BLOCK 4 8 COPY TO PROGRAM With this option it is possible to copy a block or group of blocks of one program into another program When selecting this option the CNC will request the number of the destination program where the selected block or blocks are to be copied After entering the program number press ENTER Next indicate the first and last blocks to copy by following these steps Position the cursor over the first block to be copied and press the INITIAL BLOCK softkey Position the cursor over the last block to be copied and press the FINAL BLOCK softkey If the last block to be copied is also the last one ofthe program itcan also be selected by pressing the TO THE END softkey To copy only one block the initial block and the final block will be the same one Once the first and last blocks are selected the CNC will highlight the selected blocks and will execute the command If the destination program already exists the following options will be displayed Write over the existing program All the blocks of the destination program will be erased and will be replaced by the copied blocks Append add the copied blocks behind the ones existing at the de
486. r FEATURE AFFECTED MANUAL AND CHAPTERS If while searching coded home the DECEL signal of the axis goes high the homing direction is reversed Installation manual Chap 4 A T function with associated subroutine may be programmed in a motion block Installation manual Chap 3 The TAFTERS parameter indicates whether the T function is executed before or after its associated subroutine Installation manual Chap 3 Function G53 without motion information cancels the active zero offset Programming manual Chap 4 The M function table allows interrupting block preparation until the M starts or ends Installation manual Chap 3 Operating manual Chap 11 Date October 1995 Software Version 9 09 and newer FEATURE AFFECTED MANUAL AND CHAPTERS MI9TYPE spindle parameter indicates whether or not the spindle is homed every time it switches from open loop to closed loop Installation manual Chap 3 Variables POSS and TPOSS always active whether in open loop or closed loop Installation manual Chap 10 Programming manual Chap 13 Leadscrew compensation tables allow slopes of up to 45 Installation manual Chap 3 Operating manual Chap 11 Date April 1996 Software Version 9 10 and newer FEATURE AFFECTED MANUAL AND CHAPTERS New spindle related variables RPOSS and RTPOSS Installation manual Chap 10 and Appendix
487. r pocket with islands Itcomes up when any of the programmed contours does not begin and end at the same point It may be because G1 has not been programmed after the beginning with GO on any of the profiles ERROR 1048 The part surface coordinate top has not been programmed in an irregular pocket with islands It comes up when the first point of the geometry does not include the pocket top coordinate Chapter 11 Section Page 2D AND 3D POCKET 3D POCKETS 61 Moe i ERRORS ERROR 1049 Wrong reference plane coordinate for the canned cycle It comes up when the coordinate of the reference plane is located between the part s top and bottom in any of the operations ERROR 1084 Wrong circular path It comes up when any of the paths programmed in the geometry definition of the pocket is wrong ERROR 1227 Wrong profile intersection in an irregular pocket with islands It comes up in the following instances When two plane profiles have a common section drawing on the left When the initial points of two profiles in the main plane coincide drawing on the right 2 es 1 p gt i Page Chapter 11 Section 62 2D AND 3D POCKETS ERRORS 12 WORKING WITH A PROBE The FAGOR 8055 CNC has two probe inputs one for TTL type 5V DC signals and another for 24 V DC signals The connection of the different types of probes to these inputs are explained in the appendix to the Installation and Star
488. racing digitizing Two dimensional tracing digitizing Three dimensional tracing digitizing All these tracing digitizing types are being described next Chapter 16 Section Page TRACINGANDDIGITIZING INTRODUCTION 1 Manual Tracing Digitizing It allows the operator to move the probe by hand on and long the surface of the model being possible to limit the manual movement of the probe to 1 2 or 3 axes With this type of tracing it is possible to capture points of the model to make parallel tracing passes two dimensional or three dimensional contouring roughing operations etc With this option it is possible to digitize the model either point by point or continuously The continuous digitizing is carried out by the CNC according to the values assigned to the digitizing parameters Function G24 To digitize point by point function G24 must be defined without parameters The point capture is carried out by the operator by pressing the READ POINT BY POINT softkey or by activating an external push button Page Chapter 16 Section TRACING ANDDIGITIZING INTRODUCTION One dimensional Tracing Digitizing Is the most common type of tracing When defining function G23 it must be indicated which axis controlled by the CNC sweeps the model The path to be followed by the tracing probe will be established by the other two axes by either programming it in ISO code or by jogging those
489. racing quality depends upon the amount of deflection being used the tracing feedrate and the geometry of the model In order to prevent the probe from separating from the model it is advised to use a profile tracing feedrate of about 1000 times the deflection value per minute For example for a deflection value of 1mm the tracing feedrate would be 1 m min Tracing examples for various contours G23 X Y IJ N G27 G23 Y ZIJN G27 i x Chapter 16 Section Page TRACING ANDDIGITIZING ACTIVATE TWO DIMENSIONAL 17 TRACING G23 16 3 4 G23 ACTIVATE THREE DIMENSIONAL TRACING With this type of tracing it is possible to perform three dimensional contouring There must always be a surface for the probe to touch The maximum slope of this sweeping surface depends on the sweeping feedrate and the nominal deflections The greater the sweeping feedrate the flatter the surface must be This type of tracing may be selected by part program or in the MDI option the JOG and AUTOMATIC modes Once activated the CNC will move the probe to the approach point I J K indicated when defining function G23 It then moves the probe until it touches the model and it maintains the probe in contact with the surface of the model at all times following the selected path Itmust be borne in mind that once this type of tracing has been activated the sweeping X Y Z axes may not be programmed or moved If attempted t
490. ram example The following customizing program must be selected as user program associated to the Editing Mode After selecting the Editing Mode and pressing the USER softkey this program starts executing and it allows assisted editing of 2 user cycles This editing process is carried out a cycle at a time and as often as desired Displays the initial editing page screen NO PAGE10 Sets the softkeys to access the various modes and requests a choice SK 1 CYCLE 1 SK 2 CYCLE 2 SK 7 EXIT NS WKEY Request a key IF KEY EQ FC00 GOTO N10 Cycle 1 IF KEY EQ FC01 GOTO N20 Cycle 2 IF KEY EQ FC06 SYSTEM ELSE GOTO N5 Quit or request a key CYCLE I Displays page 11 and defines 2 data entry windows N10 PAGE 11 ODW 1 10 60 ODW 2 15 60 Editing WBUF PCALL 1 Adds PCALL 1 to the block being edited IB 1 INPUT X 6 5 Requests the value of X DW 1 IB1 Data window 1 shows the entered value WBUF X IB1 Adds X entered value to the block being edited WBUF 4 Adds to the block being edited IB 2 INPUT Y 6 5 Requests the value of Y DW 2 IB2 Data window 2 shows the entered value WBUF Y IB2 Adds Y entered value to the block being edited WBUF 9 Adds to the block being edited WBUF Enters the edited block into memory For example PCALL 1 X2 Y3 GOTO N0 This sample program continues on next page Page Chapter 14 Section 20 PROGRAM CONTROL
491. rammed during execution the CNC will replace P3 by its numerical value obtaining results such as X20 X20 567 X 0 003 etc CREATING A PROGRAM IN THE CNC All the blocks which make up the program have the following structure Block header program block end of block Chapter 2 Section Page CREATINGAPROGRAM 1 2 1 1 BLOCK HEADER The block header is optional and may consist of one or more block skip conditions and by the block number or label Both can be programmed in this order CONDITION FOR BLOCK SKIP 1 2 3 These three block skip conditions given that and 1 is the same are governed by the marks BLKSKIP1 BLKSKIP2 and BLKSKIP3 of the PLC If any of these marks is active the CNC will not execute the block or blocks in which it has been programmed The execution takes place in the following block Up to 3 skip conditions can be programmed in one block These will be evaluated one by one respecting the order in which they have been programmed The control reads 20 blocks ahead of the one being executed in order to calculate in advance the path to be run The condition for block skip will be analyzed at the time when the block is read i e 20 blocks before execution If the block skip needs to be analyzed at the time of execution it is necessary to interrupt the block preparation by programming G4 in the previous block BLOCK LABEL OR NUMBER N 0 9999 This is used to ide
492. ramming format of this cycle is as follows G64 X Y B CFPQRSTUV I E X 5 5 Defines the distance from the starting point to the center along the abscissa axis Y 5 5 Defines the distance from the starting point to the center along the ordinate axis With parameters X and Y the center of the circle is defined in the same way that I and J do this in circular interpolations G02 G03 B 5 5 Defines the angular stroke of the machining path and is expressed in degrees 1 4 5 5 Defines the pitch angle between machining operations if G00 or G01 the sign indicates the direction counter clockwise clockwise K 5 Defines the number of total machining operations along the circle including the machining definition point It will be enough to program I or K in the multiple machining definition block Nevertheless if K is programmed in a multiple machining operation in which movement between points is made in GOO or G01 machining will be done in the counter clockwise direction Page Chapter 10 Section 14 MULTIPLEMACHINING IN ANARC PATTERN G64 C F 5 5 Indicates how movement is made between machining points If it is not programmed the value C 0 will be taken C20 Movement is made in rapid feedrate G00 C 1 Movement is made in linear interpolation G01 C22 Movement is made in clockwise circular interpolation G02 C23 Movement is made in counter clockwise circular inter
493. ramming syntax must comply with the following rules 1 The first profile defining block must have a label number to indicate to the G66 canned cycle the beginning of the geometry description 2 First theoutside pocket contour must be defined and then the contour of each island 3 When a contour has more than one depth profile the contours must be defined one by one indicating on each one the plane profile and then its depth profile 4 The first profile defining block of the plane profile as well as that of the depth profile must contain function GOO indicative of the beginning of the profile Care must be taken to program G01 G02 or G03 in the block following the definition of the beginning as G00 is modal thus preventing the CNC from interpreting the following blocks as the beginnings of a new profile 5 Thelast profile defining block must have a label number to indicate to the G66 canned cycle the end of the geometry description Example G66 R200 C250 F300 S400 E500 33D pocket definition NA400 GUT aineena Beginning of the pocket geometry description GO G90 X5 Y 26 ZO es Outside contour plane profile GIO XZ i aote heme nE Depth profile GO G17 ide Ru DH sIsland CG0 X30 Y 6 eie ette Plane profile G16 XZ o nien en oen Depth profile GO N500 G3 Y 21 Z0 J 5 KO End of the pocket geometry description Page Chapter 11 Section 2D AND 3D POCKETS 3D POCK
494. rate in the plane F Optional Defines the machining feedrate in the plane Optional Defines the spindle speed Defines the tool used for the finishing operation It must be programmed Optional Defines the tool offset number Optional Up to 7 miscellaneous M functions can be programmed This operation allows M06 with an associated subroutine to be defined and the tool change is performed before beginning the finishing operation Chapter 11 Section Page 3D POCKETS 35 2D AND 3D POCKETS FINISH 11 2 4 PROFILE OR CONTOUR GEOMETRY To define the contours or profiles of a 3D pocket one must specify the plane profile or horizontal cross section 3 and the depth profile or vertical cross section 4 of all contours even when they are straight up Y Since the canned cycle applies the same depth profile to the whole contour the same start point must be used to define the plane profile as for the depth profile D y E iL 14 Example of a 3D pocket MP1143 MP1144 3D contours with more than one depth profile are also possible These contours are called composite 3D profiles and will be described later on Page Chapter 11 Section 36 2D AND 3D POCKETS 3D POCKETS GEOMETRY 11 2 5 PROFILE PROGRAMMING RULES When programming inside or outside contours of an irregular 3D pocket with islands the following rules must be complied with 1 The profile in the m
495. rc COUNTER CLOCKWISE ARC Toedita counter clockwise arc MODIFY To Delete the last element of the profile Modify the data of any element of the profile Add a rounding on any corner of the profile Add a chamfer on any corner of the profile Adda tangential entry Add a tangential exit Add additional text to any section of the profile DISPLAY AREA To change the display area FINISH Itmustbe pressed when all the sections ofthe profile have been defined The CNC quits the profile editor and adds to the program the ISO code corresponding to the profile just edited Chapter 4 Section Page EDIT PROFILE EDITOR 7 4 1 4 3 DEFINITION OF A STRAIGHT SECTION When pressing the STRAIGHT LINE softkey the CNC displays DISPLAY AREA the data shown on the right margin of this page X 300 300 X1 Y1 Coordinates of starting point of the line Y 200 200 They cannot be modified because they correspond to the last point of the previous section STRAIGHT LINE X2 Y2 Coordinates of the end point of the section a en 3 X2 a Angle of the line referred to the abscissa axis M Q TANGENCY Indicates whether the line to be drawn is tangent to the previous section or not TANGENCY NO All these parameters need not be defined but all the known ones should be defined Et Er To define a parameter press the corresponding softkey key in the Ni NNOO desired value and press ENTER Nr
496. rder should be used G48 S1 Activate TCP transformation 349 Define the incline plane G01 AP298 BP297 Position the tool perpendicular to the plane eoi tiditins Start the machining operation singe caus ede Finish the machining operation G49 Cancel the incline plane G48 S0 Cancel TCP transformation M30 End of part program TCP transformation should be activated first because it lets orientthe tool without changing the position of its tip thus avoiding undesired collisions Page Chapter 17 Section 20 COORDINATETRANSFORMATION APPENDIX A ISO CODE PROGRAMMING Function Meaning Section G00 G01 G02 G03 G04 G05 G06 G07 G08 G09 G10 Gll G12 G13 G14 G15 G16 G17 G18 G19 G20 G21 G22 G23 G24 G25 G26 G27 G28 G29 G32 G33 G36 G37 G38 G39 G40 G41 G42 G43 G44 G47 G48 G49 G50 G53 G54 G55 G56 G57 G60 Xo X 0X X X X X X X oX Xo X X X X X X X Xo X X X X X X X Rapid travel Linear interpolation Clockwise helical circular interpolation Counter clockwise helical circular interpolation Dwell block preparation stop Round corner Absolute arc center coordinates Square corner Arc tangent to previous path Arc defined by three points Mirror image cancellation Mirror image on X axis Mirror image on Y axis Mirror image on Z axis Mirror image in the programmed directions Longitudinal axis selection Selection of main plane in tw
497. rder to use this option the CNC must not be executing or simulating a part program If so it must be interrupted This option can be used with any three dimensional graphics 3D COMBINED VIEW or SOLID and it allows to change the point of view perspective of the part by shifting the X Y and Z axes Whenselecting this option the CNC will highlight the current viewpoint on the right hand side of the screen Use the right and left arrow keys to rotate the XY plane around the Z axis up to 360 Use the up and down arrow keys to tilt the Z axis up to 90 Once the new viewpoint has been selected press ENTER to validate it If SOLID GRAPHICS was selected before or itis selected again the CNC will refresh the screen showing the same part but from the new viewpoint with new perspective When the selected type of graphics is 3D or COMBINED VIEW the CNC will maintained the current drawing The new viewpoint will be applied when executing the next blocks These blocks will be drawn over the existing graphics However the screen can be cleared by using the CLEAR SCREEN softkey in order to start drawing with an unmachined part To quit this mode without making any changes press ESC Page Chapter 3 Section 30 EXECUTE SIMULATE GRAPHICS 3 5 5 GRAPHIC PARAMETERS This function can be used any time even during part program execution or simulation With this function it is possible to modify the simulation speed an
498. rding to whether G98 or G99 has been programmed Programming example assuming that the work plane is formed by the X and Y axes that the longitudinal axis is the Z axis and that the starting point is X0 YO Z0 Tl M6 G0 G90 XO YO ZO ite eie ettet tes Starting point G82 G99 G00 G91 X50 Y50 Z 98 I 22 K150 F100 S500 N3 3 machining positions G98 G90 G00 X500 Y500 sseee Positioning and canned cycle C190 esee bip ep e eie EDO VOTO TR Cancels canned cycle 390 KONO so ae esee dete t eee ete ee tees Positioning MSO atonal aah nine toi dte OU iT End of program Chapter 9 Section Page CANNEDCYCLES DRILLING WITHDWELL G82 15 9 5 4 G83 SIMPLE DEEP HOLE DRILLING This cycle performs successive drilling steps until the final programmed coordinate is reached The tool withdraws as far as the reference plane after each drilling step Working in cartesian coordinates the basic structure of the block is as follows G83 G98 G99 X Y ZIJ G98 The tool withdraws to the Initial Plane once the hole has been drilled G99 The tool withdraws to the Reference Plane once the hole has been drilled XY 5 5 These are optional and define the movement of the axes of the main plane to position the tool at the machining point This point can be programmed in cartesian coordinates or in polar coordinates and the coordinates may be absolute or incremental according to whether the machine is o
499. responding error message J 5 5 Defines the length of the grid along the abscissa axis The positive sign indicates that the grid is located to the right of the X Y point and the negative sing indicates that the grid is located to the left of that point K 5 5 Defines the length of the grid along the ordinate axis The positive sign indicates that the grid is located above the X Y point and the negative sing indicates that the grid is located below that point B 5 5 Defines the digitizing step along the abscissa axis It must be programmed with a positive value greater than 0 C 5 5 Defines the digitizing step along the ordinate axis If programmed with a positive value the digitizing ofthe gridis carried out following the abscissa axis and if negative following the ordinate axis C co If a value of 0 is programmed the CNC will show the corresponding error message Chapter 15 Section Page DIGITIZI YCLE DIGITIZING CYCLE IN A 3 i Dee GRID PATTERN D Indicates how the grid will be swept according to the following code 0 It will be digitized in both directions zig zag 1 It will be digitized only in one direction If not programmed the cycle will assume a value of D 0 ex Em THY LM C C C C C C DO D1 DO D1 F5 5 Defines the probing feedrate in mm min or inches min Basic operation 1 The probe is positioned at the point defined by parameters X Y and Z 2 The probe moves
500. rity sakes refer to the drawing on the right which consists of 2 stacked profiles 1 and 2 MP1163 The base coordinate of the top profile 2 must coincide with the surface coordinate of the bottom profile 1 ms MP1163a 9 Ifthereisa gap between them the cycle will consider that they are 2 different profiles and it will eliminate the top profile when executing the bottom one MP1153b ZZ If the profiles mix the canned cycle will make a groove around the top profile when running the finishing pass MP1153c mem Chapter 11 2D AND 3D POCKETS Section 3D POCKETS STACKED PROFILES Page 47 11 2 8 PROFILE PROGRAMMING SYNTAX The outside profile and the inside profiles or islands which are programmed must be defined by simple geometrical elements such as straight lines or arcs The first definition block where the external profile starts and the last where the last profile defined ends must be provided with the block label number These label numbers will be those which indicate to the canned cycle the beginning and end of the geometry description of the profiles which make up the pocket Example G66 R100 C200 F300 S400 E500 Irregular pocket canned cycle definition N400 G17 Beginning of geometry description N500 G2 Y50 Z 15 I10 KO End of geometry description The profile prog
501. rnal profile totally contained within another internal profile cannot be programmed In this case only the most external profile will be considered m ta The canned cycle will verify all these geometry rules before beginning to make the pocket adapting the profile of the pocket to them and displaying the error message when necessary MP1115 Page 12 Chapter 11 Section 2D AND 3D POCKETS 2D POCKET PROFILES 11 1 5 INTERSECTION OF PROFILES In order to facilitate the programming of profiles the canned cycle allows the profiles to intersect one another and the external profile The two available types of intersection can be selected by parameter K 11 1 5 1 BASIC PROFILE INTERSECTION Kz0 When selecting this type the following profile intersecting rules are to be followed 1 The intersection of islands generates a new inside profile which is their boolean union Example eio The intersection between an internal and an external profile generates a new external profile as a result of the difference between the external and the internal profiles Example Pima L2 MP1116 MP1117 If there is an inside profile which has an intersection with another inside profile and with the external profile the canned cycle first makes the intersection between the inside profiles and then the intersection of these with the external profile te As a result of the intersection of
502. robing This movement consists of Movementof the probe along the ordinate axis at the indicated feedrate H until the probe signal is received The maximum distance to be travelled in the probing movementis B J 2 If after travelling that distance the CNC does not receive the probe signal it will display the corresponding error code and stop the movement of the axes Return of the probe in rapid G00 the distance indicated in E Movementofthe probe along the ordinate axis atthe indicated feedrate F until the probe signal is received 3 Withdrawal Movement of the probe in rapid G00 from the point where it probed to the theoretical center of the hole 4 Second probing movement Same as above 5 Withdrawal Movement of the probe in rapid G00 from the point where it probed to the real center calculated of the hole along the ordinate axis 6 Third probing movement Same as above 7 Withdrawal Movement of the probe in rapid G00 from the point where it probed to the theoretical center of the hole Page Chapter 12 Section 30 WORKING WITH A PROBE HOLE MEASURING 8 Fourth probing movement Same as above 9 Withdrawal This movement consists of Movement of the probe in rapid G00 from the point where it probed to the real center calculated of the hole Should CO be programmed the probe will be moved to the point where the cycle was called Ist Mo
503. rol of the machine is desired Once this mode of operation is selected the CNC allows the movement of all the axes by means of the axes control keys X X Y Y Z Z 4 4 located on the operator panel or by means of the electronic handwheel if available This mode of operation offers the following softkey options J gt J 4 b With the MDI option it is possible to modify the machining conditions type of moves feedrates etc being selected Also the CNC will maintain the ones selected in this mode when switching to EXECUTION or SIMULATION modes This operating mode offers the following softkey options Chapter 5 Section Page JOG HOME SEARCH 1 REFERENCE SEARCH With this option it is possible to perform a home search on the desired axis or axes The FAGOR 8055 CNC offers two ways to search the machine reference home Using the subroutine associated with function G74 The number of this subroutine will defined by the general machine parameter REFSUB By selecting the axis or axes to be referenced Once the Reference search function is selected the CNC will show a softkey for each axis and the softkey ALL If the ALL softkey is selected the CNC will highlight in reverse video the names of all axes and after pressing the key it will execute the subroutine associated with G74 On the other hand to search the reference anywhere from one to all axes a
504. rom the PLC DNC or by the SPINDLE keys and on the Operator Panel of the CNC This speed variation is made between the maximum and minimum values established by spindle machine parameters MINSOVR and MAXSOVR The incremental pitch associated with the SPINDLE keys and on the CNC Operator Panel in order to vary the programmed S value is fixed by the spindle machine parameter SOVRSTEP When functions G33 threading or G84 tapping cycle are executed the speed cannot be modified It functions at 100 of programmed S SPINDLE ORIENTATION If S 5 5 is programmed after M19 code S 5 5 indicates the spindle orientation position in degrees starting from the machine reference pulse from the encoder To carry out this function you need a rotary encoder coupled to the machine spindle If you do not have a reference switch the spindle moves at the turning speed indicated by the spindle machine parameter REFEED1 until the spindle is located at the point defined via S 5 5 If you have a ref switch the spindle moves at the turning speed indicated by spindle machine parameter REFEED1 until it reaches the switch and then at the one indicated by spindle machine parameters REFEED2 until the spindle is at the point defined via S 5 5 The REFEEDI movement until the reference switch is reached is always done provided M19 is programmed after the spindle has operated in open loop M3 M4 M5 This movemen
505. ror image on X axis Execution of subroutine machines b G10 G12 mirror image on Y axis Execution of subroutine machines c G11 mirror image on X and Y axes Execution of subroutine machines d M30 end of program Functions G11 G12 G13 and G14 are modal and incompatible with G10 G11 G12 and G13 can be programmed in the same block because they are not incompatible with each other Function G14 must be programmed alone in the block If function G73 pattern rotation is also active in a mirror image program the CNC first applies the mirror image function and then the pattern rotation If while one of the mirror imaging functions G11 G12 G13 and G14 is active a new coordinate origin part zero is preset with G92 this new origin will not be affected by the mirror imaging function On power up after executing M02 M30 or after EMERGENCY or RESET the CNC assumes code G10 Page Chapter 7 Section 10 ADDITIONALPREPARATORY FUNCTIONS MIRRORIMAGE G10G14 7 6 SCALING FACTOR G72 By using function G72 you can enlarge or reduce programmed parts In this way you can produce families of parts which are similar in shape but of different sizes with a single program Function G72 should be programmed on its own in a block There are two formats for programming G72 Scaling factor applied to all axes Scaling factor applied to one or more axes Chapter 7 ADDITIONAL P
506. rs or variables Variables associated with tools Variables associated with zero offsets Variables associated with machine parameters Variables associated with work zones Variables associated with feedrates Variables associated with position coordinates Variables associated with the spindle Variables associated with the PLC Variables associated with local parameters Other variables Variables which access to real values of the CNC interrupt the preparation of blocks and the CNC waits for each command to be performed before restarting block preparation Thus precaution must be taken when using this type of variable as should they be placed between machining blocks which are working with compensation undesired profiles may be obtained Example The following program blocks are performed in a section with G41 compensation N10 X50 Y80 N15 PI00ZPOS X Assigns the value of the real coordinate in X to parameter P100 N20 X50 Y590 N30 X80 Y50 Block N15 interrupts block preparation and the execution of block N10 will finish at point A Page Chapter 13 Section 4 PROGRAMMINGINHIGH LEVELLANGUAGE VARIABLES 50 80 Once the execution of block N15 has ended the CNC will continue block preparation from block N20 on As the next point corresponding to the compensated path is point B the CNC will move the tool to this point executing path A B As can be observed
507. rsors the section to be measured Also the right hand side of the screen shows The coordinates of those two cursors with respect to part zero The distance D between them and the components of this distance along the axes of the selected plane X and Y Thecursorstep corresponding to the selected display area Itis given in the work units millimeters or inches The CNC shows the selected cursor and its coordinates in red To select the other cursor press the or key The CNC shows the new selected cursor and its coordinates in red To move the selected cursor use the up down right and left arrow keys Also with the keystroke sequences Shift Up arrow Shift Down arrow Shift Right arrow and Shift Left arrow it is possible to move the cursor to the corresponding end To quit this command and return to the graphics menu press ESC Also if is pressed the CNC exits this work mode and returns to the graphics menu Page Chapter 3 Section 34 EXECUTE SIMULATE GRAPHICS 3 6 SINGLE BLOCK When actuating on this option the CNC toggles between single block mode and continuous run mode This function can be used at any time even during the execution or simulation of a part program Ifthe single block mode is selected the CNC will only execute one line of the program every time the is pressed The upper window of the screen will show the selected mode of operation If
508. rst select the corresponding window using the up and down keys and then use right and left arrow keys to select the desired color Once the desired colors have been selected press ENTER to validate the new choices or ESC to ignore the changes and leave this function with the original values intact Chapter 3 Section Page EXECUTE SIMULATE GRAPHICS 31 SOLID COLORS With this option it is possible to modify the colors used in the three dimensional solid graphics These colors will be considered when in execution or simulation and will only be used in SOLID graphics mode The available parameters are the following Color for the external X side Color for the external Y side Color for the external Z side Color for the internal X side machined side Color for the internal Y side machined side Color for the internal Z side machined side The CNC will show to the right of the screen a series of windows to select these parameters indicating as well the colors currently selected Among the various color choices the black one indicates that the machining operations done with this color will not be shown graphically invisible To modify any of these parameters select the corresponding field by using the up and down arrow keys and use the right and left arrow keys to select the color within the desired field or window Once the desired colors for the desired solid sides have been selected press ENTER to validate them
509. rtesian coordinates the basic structure of the block is as follows G98 G99 XY 5 5 1 5 5 K5 G81 G98 G99 X Y ZIK The tool withdraws to the Initial Plane once the hole has been drilled The tool withdraws to the Reference Plane once the hole has been drilled These are optional and define the movement of the axes of the main plane to position the tool at the machining point This point can be programmed in cartesian coordinates or in polar coordinates and the coordinates may be absolute or incremental according to whether the machine is operating in G90 or G91 Defines the reference plane coordinate It can be programmed in absolute coordinates or incremental coordinates and in this case will be referred to the initial plane Ifthisis not programmed the CNC will take the position occupied by the tool at that moment as the reference plane Defines drilling depth Itcan be programmed in absolute coordinates or incremental coordinates and in this case will be referred to the reference plane Defines the dwell time in hundredths of a second after each drilling step until the withdrawal begins Should this notbe programmed the CNC will take a value of KO ae COO ap G0 1 ge E Page 12 Chapter 9 Section CANNED CYCLES DRILLING G81 Basic operation 1 Ifthe spindle was in operation previously its turning direction is maintained If it was not in movement it will start by turning c
510. ry time arithmetic parameters are assigned to a subroutine Up to 6 nesting levels are allowed for local arithmetic parameters When the machining canned cycles G66 G68 G69 G81 G82 G83 G84 G85 G86 G87 G88 and G89 are active they use thesixthnesting eveloflocalparameters o get access to the various local parameter fables it is necessary to first indicate the corresponding level Level 0 thru level 6 When programming in high level language local parameters may be referred to as PO thru P25 or as letters A thru Z the Spanish character N cannot be used in such a way that A is the same as PO and Z is the same as P25 That is why the local parameter tables also show their associated letters in brackets next to their numbers However when editing the tables the associated letters cannot be used Once the parameter table is selected the operator can move the cursor over the screen line by line with the up down arrow keys and page by page with the page up and page down keys To edit or modify those values use the following options Once any of these functions is selected the CNC shows an editing area on the CRT where the cursor may be moved by using the up down and right left arrow keys Also the up arrow key positions the cursoroverthe first character ofthe editing area and the down arrow key positions the cursor over the last character Page Chapter 6 Section 22 TABLES GLOBALANDLOCAL PARAMETER
511. s seeeseeeeeeeneneeeen eene 7 5 G12 m k Mirror image on Y axis seseseeeeeereeereeerieerrsrrrerresrrrererere 7 5 G13 T Mirror image on Z axis eene 7 5 G14 Mirror image in the programmed directions 7 5 G15 m Longitudinal axis selection eeeee 8 2 G16 Selection of main plane in two directions 3 2 G17 d Te Main plane X Y and longitudinal Z ssss 3 2 G18 a x Main plane Z X and longitudinal Y s 3 2 G19 x Main plane Y Z and longitudinal X nsss 3 2 G20 Definition of lower work zone limits ssss 3 7 1 G21 Definition of upper work zone limits 3 7 1 G22 Activate cancel work zones eseescceeseeeeseeeesseeeeseeesaeers 3 7 2 G23 S ActlVate tracing iioii Dette DTI ERRAT 16 3 G24 Activate digitizing seesseeeeeeeeeeeen nennen 16 6 G25 Deactivate tracing digitizing eee 16 5 G26 Tracing probe calibration ccc eesceeeseeesseeeeseeeseeesneers 16 2 G27 Tracing contour definition cles eeseeeeeeeceseeeeeeeeneers 16 4 G28 d Second spindle selection eeeeeeee 5 3 G29 oe E Main spindle selection eene 5 3 G32 i Feedrate as an inverted function of time 6 14 G33 Y Threadcutting dene ee peers 6 12 G36 t Automatic ra
512. s G90 G01 G36 R5 X35 Y60 X50 YO G90 G03 G36 R5 X50 I0 J30 G01 X50 YO Page Chapter 6 Section AUTOMATIC RADIUS 18 PATH CONTROL BLEND G36 6 11 AUTOMATIC CHAMFER BLEND G39 In machining operations it is possible using G39 to chamfer corners between two straight lines without having to calculate intersection points Function G39 is not modal so it should be programmed whenever the chamfering of a corner is required This function should be programmed in the block in which the movement whose end you want to chamfer is defined The R5 5 value should always follow G39 It also indicates the distance from the end of the programmed movementas far as the point where you wish to carry out the chamfering This R value must always be positive Example G90 G01 G39 R5 X35 Y60 X50 YO Chapter 6 PATHCONTROL Section CHANFERBLEND G39 Page 19 6 12 THREADING G33 If the machine spindle is equipped with a rotary encoder you can thread with a tool tip via function G33 Although this threading is often done along the entire length of an axis the FAGOR 8055 CNC enables threading to be done interpolating more than one axis ata time up to 6 axes In the programming formatitis necessary to define the endpoint of the thread X C 5 5 and thread pitch L5 5 Example You wish to make a thread in one pass 100mm deep and with 5 mm pitch at X0 YO ZO using a t
513. s Chapter 3 Section Page EXECUTE SIMULATE DISPLAY SELECTION 11 This display mode shows the following fields or windows PCALL PCALL PCALL PCALL PCALL PCALL CALL COMMAND ACTUAL TO GO 00172 871 00172 871 00000 000 00153 133 00153 133 00000 000 00004 269 00004 269 00000 000 00071 029 00071 029 00000 000 00011 755 00011 755 00000 000 F00000 0000 96120 S00000 0000 96100 T0000 D000 NTO000 ND000 S 0000 RPM G00 G17 G54 PARTC 000000 CYTIME 00 00 00 00 TIMER 000000 00 00 CAP INS g g nformation on the subroutines which are active NS Indicates the nesting level 1 15 which the subroutine occupies NP Indicates the level of local parameters 1 6 in which the subroutine is executed SUBROUTINE Indicates the type of block which has caused a new nesting level Examples RPT N10 N20 CALL 25 PCALL 30 G87 REPT Indicates the number of times which remain to be executed For example if RPT N10 N20 N4 is programmed and is the first time that it is being executed this parameter will show a value of 4 M If an asterisk is shown this indicates that a Modal subroutine is active in this nesting level and this is executed after each movement PROG Indicates the program number where the subroutine is defined Page Chapter 3 Section 12 EXECUTE SIMULATE DISPLAY SELECTION The axis coordinates in real or theoretical values according to the setting of the THEODPLY machin
514. s G69 G98 G99 X Y ZIBCDHJKLR G98 The tool withdraws to the Initial Plane once the hole has been drilled G99 The tool withdraws to the Reference Plane once the hole has been drilled XY 5 5 These are optional and define the movement of the axes of the main plane to position the tool at the machining point This point can be programmed in cartesian coordinates or in polar coordinates and the coordinates may be absolute or incremental according to whether the machine is operating in G90 or G91 Z 5 5 Defines the reference plane coordinate It can be programmed in absolute coordinates or incremental coordinates in which case it will be referred to the initial plane If this is not programmed the CNC will take the position occupied by the tool at that moment as the reference plane Page Chapter 9 Section 8 ANNEDCYCLE COMPLEX DEEPHOLE CYCLES DRILLING G69 1 5 5 B5 5 C5 5 D5 5 H5 5 J4 K5 L5 5 R5 5 Defines the total drilling depth It can be programmed in absolute coordinates or incremental coordinates and in this case will be referred to the reference plane Defines the drilling step in the axis longitudinal to the main plane Defines to what distance from the previous drilling step the longitudinal axis will travel in rapid feed G00 in its approach to the part to make another drilling step If this is not programmed the value of 1 mm 0 040 inch will be taken If programmed with
515. s The cursor moving steps cursor advance in pixels The letter size to create the texts for the pages and symbols The background and foreground main colors for the graphic elements and for the letters One of the color rectangles shown has another rectangle in it The inside rectangle indicates the selected main color and the outside rectangle indicates the selected background color This window also shows The cursor position coordinates in pixels The horizontal position is indicated by the X value 1 thru 638 and the vertical position by the Y value 0 thru 334 Once one of the options GRAPHIC ELEMENTS TEXTS or MODIFICATIONS has been selected it will be possible to modify the editing parameters any time This way it will be possible to edit texts and shapes of different color and size Press INS to access this menu Once in this mode the CNC will show the softkeys corresponding to the various options to modify these parameters These options are described next Press INS again to quit this mode and return to the previous menu CURSOR ADVANCE With this option it is possible to select the cursor moving step in pixels 1 8 16 24 Follow these steps after pressing this softkey 1 Use the right and left arrow keys to select the desired step The currently selected step will be highlighted 2 Press ENTER to validate the selected step or ESC to quit this mode leaving the previous selection intact When editing
516. s key in the new number and press ENTER If the number already exists the CNC will show a warning message and will offer the option to press ENTER and continue with the operation deleting the existing one or to press ESC and cancel the operation New comment With this option it is possible to assign a comment to a page or symbol To do this enter the new text and press the END OF TEXT softkey Page Chapter 10 Section GRAPHICEDITOR UTILITIES Examples To rename symbol 14 as symbol 33 RENAME SYMBOL 14 ITO NEWNUMBER 33 ENTER To change the comment of page 44 RENAME PAGE 44 TO NEW COMMENT ELECTRICAL CABINET ENTER EDIT Select the user defined page or symbol to be edited modified or saved If the selected page or symbol already exists it will be stored in the EEPROM memory and it will be copied into the editing memory and it will be displayed in the editing area If the selected page or symbol does not exist the CNC will show a blank page Once the user page or symbol is selected it can be edited modified and later saved remaining active until itis saved SAVE softkey leaving the GRAPHIC EDITOR When making changes the CNC will ask whether the page or symbol is to be saved before selecting a new one another page or symbol is selected with this option
517. s as well as selecting their attributes Passwords With this option itis possible to define the passwords required to access the various CNC commands The attributes of each program show information about its source and usage There are the following fields O Indicates that the program was originated by the OEM H Indicates that the program is hidden thus not being displayed in any directory Since a hidden program may be modified or erased if its number is known it is recommended not to select the Modifiable attribute when hiding a program in order to prevent the operator from changing modifying it or erasing it M Indicates that the program may be modified edited copied etc A program not having this attribute may be displayed in the program directory and executed but its contents may not be modified by the user X Indicates that the program may be executed A program missing this attribute cannot be executed by the user Only the letters of the selected attributes will be displayed in the attribute field in such a way that the ones not selected will be represented as Example O X indicates that the program was edited by the OEM it will be displayed in the program directory not hidden it cannot be modified but it can be executed Page Chapter 7 Section 10 UTILITIES PROTECTIONS 7 5 1 USER PERMISSION When selecting this option the CNC shows the following option
518. s can be selected The aim is to generate certain part zeros independently of the part zero active at the time Access to the table can be obtained from the front panel of the CNC as explained in the Operating Manual or via the program using high level language commands There are two kinds of zero offsets Absolute zero offsets G54 G55 G56 amp G57 which must be referred to machine zero Additive zero offsets G58 G59 Functions G54 G55 G56 G57 G58 amp G59 must be programmed alone in the block and work in the following way When one of the G54 G55 G56 G57 functions is executed the CNC applies the zero offset programmed with respect to machine zero cancelling the possible active zero Offsets If one of the additive offsets G58 or G59 is executed the CNC adds its values to the absolute zero offset active at the time Previously cancelling the additive offset which might be active You can see in the following example the zero offsets which are applied when the program is executed G54 Applies zero offsets G54 gt G54 G58 Adds zero offsets G58 gt G54 G58 G59 Cancels G58 and adds G59 gt G544G59 G55 Cancels whatever and applies G55 gt G55 Once a Zero Offset has been selected it will remain active until another one is selected or until a home search is carried out G74 in JOG mode This Zero Offset will remain active even after powering t
519. s except when the tool is along the Z axis and the part is being machined on its negative side in the Z to Z direction P dil When simulating a part program the CNC analyzes the value assigned to the tool length in the corresponding tool offset If this value is positive the graphic display is performed on the positive side of the part in the to direction and if negative it will be performed on the negative side of the part in the to direction It must be borne in mind that the CNC will assume a value of LO as positive Also if no tool has been defined during execution or simulation the CNC will take LO and RO as default values Chapter 3 Section Page EXECUTE SIMULATE GRAPHICS 23 LINE GRAPHICS This type of graphics draws the tool path on the selected planes XY XZ YZ by means of color lines The possible types of line graphics are 3D Displays a three dimensional view of the tool path XY XZ YZ Display the tool path on the selected plane COMBINED VIEW This option divides the screen in four quadrants displaying in them the XY XZ YZ and 3D views simultaneously The generated graphics is lost in the following circumstances When clearing the screen softkey CLEAR SCREEN When deactivating graphics softkey DEACTIVATE GRAPHICS When selecting another type of graphics 3D XY XZ YZ COMBINED VIEW SECTION VIEW or SOLID It must be born in mind that when performing a
520. s mode G54 and it quits the find mode END This softkey positions the cursor over the last zero offset which can be edited or modified in this mode and it quits the find mode ZERO OFFSET This softkey searches the desired zero offset and positions the cursor over it After pressing this softkey the CNC requests the number of the zero offset to be found Once the number is keyed in press ENTER Page Chapter 6 Section TABLES ZEROOFFSETTABLE DELETE With this option it is possible to delete one or more zero offsets off the table When deleting a zero offset the CNC sets all its values to 0 To delete a zero offset indicate its number and press ENTER To delete a group of zero offsets indicate the first one press the UP TO softkey indicate the last one to be deleted and press ENTER To delete all zero offsets press the ALL softkey The CNC will request confirmation and after pressing ENTER it will delete all the zero offsets G54 thru G59 LOAD With this option it is possible to load the zero offset table with the values received via any of the serial communications ports RS232C or RS422 To do so selectthe desired communications line by pressing its corresponding softkey The data transmission will start right when that softkey is pressed Press the ABORT softkey to cancel the transmission in mid run SAVE With this option it is possible to send all the zero offsets
521. s of the outermost tracing arc It must be given a positive value greater than 0 Defines the radius of the inmost tracing arc It must be given a positive value If not programmed the canned cycle will assume a value of KO X Y i Defines the angle formed by the starting point of the tracing operation and the abscissa axis If not programmed the canned cycle will assume a value of AO Defines the angle formed by the other end of the arcs and the abscissa axis If not programmed the canned cycle will assume a value of B360 To trace around a complete circle A and B must be assigned either the same value or none Thus the canned cycle will assume by default AO and B360 Defines the distance between two consecutive tracing passes Itis programmed in millimeters or inches when defining circular paths RO and in degrees when linear paths R1 It must be set to a positive value greater than 0 Chapter 16 Section Page TRACINGANDDIGITIZING ARCPATTERNTRACING 35 D Indicates how the sweep is performed according to the following code 0 The sweep is carried out in both directions zig zag 1 The sweep is always carried out in one direction If not programmed the canned cycle assumes a value of 0 R Indicates the type of sweeping path to be used according to the following code 0 Circular path along the arc 1 Linear path along the radius If not programmed the canned cycle ass
522. s possible to program a dwell at the bottom of the machined hole Working in cartesian coordinates the basic structure of the block is as follows G86 G98 G99 X Y ZIK G98 The tool withdraws to the Initial Plane once the hole has been bored G99 The tool withdraws to the Reference Plane once the hole has been bored XY 5 5 These are optional and define the movement of the axes of the main plane to position the tool at the machining point This point can be programmed in cartesian coordinates or in polar coordinates and the coordinates may be absolute or incremental according to whether the machine is operating in G90 or G91 Z 5 5 Defines the reference plane coordinate It can be programmed in absolute coordinates or incremental coordinates and in this case will be referred to the initial plane If this is not programmed the CNC will take the position occupied by the tool at that moment as the reference plane 1 5 5 Defines boring depth Itcan be programmed in absolute coordinates or incremental coordinates and in this case will be referred to the reference plane K5 Defines the dwell time in hundredths of a second after each drilling step until the withdrawal begins Should this notbe programmed the CNC will take a value of KO Basic operation a m d GOO up GO w M03 7wM03 V M04 _A 04 rog G98 a a a I a a Kk HM DE g M05 7 Page Chapter 9 Section 24 BORING WITH RAPID CANNED CYCLES WITHDRAWA
523. s reached Itis possible to program in addition to milling pass and feedrate a final finishing step with its corresponding milling feedrate In order to obtain a good finish in the machining of the pocket walls the CNC will apply a tangential entry and exit to the last milling step during each cutting operation Working in cartesian coordinates the basic structure of the block is as follows G87 G98 G99 X Y ZIJKBCDHL V G98 The tool withdraws to the Initial Plane once the pocket has been made G99 The tool withdraws to the Reference Plane once the pocket has been made XY 5 5 These are optional and define the movement of the axes of the main plane to position the tool at the machining point This point can be programmed in cartesian coordinates or in polar coordinates and the coordinates may be absolute or incremental according to whether the machine is operating in G90 or G91 Zx5 5 Defines the reference plane coordinate When programmed in absolute coordinates it will be referred to the part zero and when programmed in incremental coordinates it will be referred to the starting plane P P Page Chapter 9 Section 26 CANNEDCYCLES RECTANGULARPOCKET G87 Tr EM Z G91 1 G91 i A A SEN KNX If this is not programmed the CNC will take the position occupied by the tool at that moment as the reference plane Thus the starting plane P P and the reference plane P R wil be the same I
524. s required and also in the required order In a block in which G74 has been programmed no other preparatory function may appear If the machine reference search is done in JOG mode the part zero selected is lost The coordinates of the reference point indicated in the machine axis parameter REFVALUE is displayed In all other cases the part zero selected is maintained so the displayed coordinates refer to this part zero If the G74 command is executed in MDI the display of coordinates depends on the mode in which it is executed Jog Execution or Simulation Page Chapter 4 Section REFERENCESYSTEMS 4 3 PROGRAMMING WITH RESPECT TO MACHINE ZERO G53 Function G53 can be added to any block which has path control functions It is only used when the programming of block coordinates relating to machine zero is required These coordinates should be expressed in millimeters or inches depending on how the general machine parameter INCHES is defined By programming G53 alone without motion information the current active zero offset is canceled regardless of whether it was originated by a G54 G59 or a G92 preset This G92 origin preset is described next Once a Zero Offset has been selected it will remain active until another one is selected or until a home search is carried out G74 This Zero Offset will remain active even after powering the CNC off Function G53 is not modal so it should be programme
525. s the compensation value Chapter 8 Section Page TOOL COMPENSATION 1 8 1 TOOL RADIUS COMPENSATION G40 G41 G42 Innormal milling operations itis necessary to calculate and define the path of the tool taking its radius into account so that the required dimensions of the part are achieved Tool radius compensation allows the direct programming of part contouring and of the tool radius without taking the dimensions of the tool into account The CNC automatically calculates the path the tool should follow based on the contour of the part and the tool radius value stored in the tool offset table There are three preparatory functions for tool radius compensation G40 Cancelling of tool radius compensation G41 Tool radius compensation to the left of the part G42 Tool radius compensation to the right of the part G41 The tool is to the left of the part depending on the machining direction G42 The tool is to the right of the part depending on the machining direction Tool values R L I K should be stored in the tool offset table before starting machining or should be loaded at the beginning of the program via assignments to variables TOR TOL TOI TOK Once the plane in which compensation will be applied has been chosen via codes G16 G17 G18 or G19 this is put into effect by G41 or G42 assuming the value of the tool offset selected via code D or in its absence by the tool offset shown in the tool t
526. s well as the total deflection D is set by axis machine parameter DFORMAT 3 2 6 USER DISPLAY MODE This option will execute the program which is selected by means of the general machine parameter USERDPLY in the user channel To quit this mode and return to the previous menu press ESC Page Chapter 3 Section 14 EXECUTE SIMULATE DISPLAY SELECTION 3 2 7 EXECUTION TIME DISPLAY MODE This option is available while simulating a part program and it will display the following fields or windows EXECUTION P000662 N TOOL POS TIME MACH TIME TOOL POS TIME MACH TIME TOOL POS TIME MACH TIME TOTAL TIME 00 00 00 M FUNCTIONS 0038 TOOL CHANGES 0 COMMAND ACTUAL TO GO 00172 871 00172 871 00000 000 00153 133 00153 133 00000 000 00004 269 00004 269 00000 000 00071 029 00071 029 00000 000 00011 755 00011 755 00000 000 F00000 0000 96120 S00000 0000 96100 T0000 D000 NTO000 ND000 S 0000 RPM G00 G17 G54 PARTC 000000 CY TIME 00 00 00 00 TIMER 000000 00 00 CAP INS BLOCK STOP DISPLAY MDI TOOL GRAPHICS SINGLE SELECTION CONDITION SELECTION INSPECTION BLOCK A display window shows the estimated program execution time at 100 of the programmed feedrate This display area shows the following information The time each tool TOOL takes to execute the positioning moves POS TIME as well as the machining moves MACH TIME indicated in the program The TOTAL TIME required to execute the complete pr
527. set 2 sirep ote erede 4 4 2 G60 2 Straight line canned cycle eee 10 1 G61 Rectangular pattern canned cycle sesss 10 2 G62 Grid pattern canned cycle ee 10 3 G63 T Circular pattern canned cycle 10 4 G64 Arc pattern canned cycle 10 5 G65 i Arc chord pattern canned cycle esessss 10 6 G66 s Irregular pocket canned cycle sssss 11 1 G67 Irregular pocket roughing ee 11 3 G68 T Irregular pocket finishing eee 11 4 G69 x Complex deep hole drilling eese 9 5 1 G70 i d Programming in inches eeeeeeeeene 3 3 G71 7 programming in millimeters eeeeenn 3 3 G72 ui kg General and specific scaling factor esses 7 6 G73 x Pattern rotations onnios sinniet e nnne 7 1 G74 Machine reference search eene 4 2 G75 X Probing until touching ee 12 1 G76 gi Probing while touching e 12 1 G77 ii B Slayed axis 5c ntco ee essi Hesse rore eros 7 8 1 G78 i i Slaved axis cancellation eee 7 8 2 G79 Canned cycle parameter modification 9 2 1 G80 Canned cycle cancellation eee 9 3 G81 T i Dilling cycle e eoBeRe tee Ion been 9 5 2 G82 Drilling cycle with dwell
528. sing a roughing operation and not programming the I and R parameters for the semi finishing operation When not using a semi finishing operation and not programming the I and R parameters for the finishing operation When parameter B has not been programmed in the finishing operation ERROR 1042 Wrong canned cycle parameter value It comes up in the following instances When parameter Q of the finishing operation has the wrong value When parameter B of the finishing operation has a 0 value When parameter J of the finishing operation has been programmed with a value greater than the finishing tool radius ERROR 1043 Wrong depth profile in an irregular pocket with islands It comes up in the following instances When the depth profiles of 2 sections of the same contour simple or composite cross each other When the finishing operation cannot be performed with the programmed tool A typical case is a spherical mold with a non spherical tool parameter J not equal to the radius ERROR 1044 The plane profile intersects itself in an irregular pocket with islands It comes up when any of the plane profiles of the programmed contours intersects itself ERROR 1046 Wrong tool position prior to the canned cycle Itcomes up when calling the G66 cycle if the tool is positioned between the reference plane and the depth coordinate bottom of any of the operations ERROR 1047 Open plane profile in an irregula
529. sitioned over the indicated parameter quitting this option INITIALIZE With this option itis possible to reset all the parameters of the selected table to their default values These default values are indicated in the chapter corresponding to machine parameters in the installation manual Chapter 11 Section Page MACHINE PARAMETE OPERATION WITH 7 ES PARAMETERTABLES LOAD With this option itis possible to load all the parameters of the selected table with the values received via the RS232 or RS422 serial ports To do this select the desired serial port by pressing the corresponding softkey The data transmission will start right when this softkey is pressed To cancel the transmission in mid run press the ABORT softkey When the length of the received table does not match that of the selected table the CNC will act as follows The received table is shorter than the current one Only the received parameters will be modified The received table is longer than the current one All parameters of the current table are modified and when the CNC detects that there is no more room it issues the corresponding error message since SAVE With this option it is possible to save all the parameters of the selected table into a peripheral device or computer Todo this select the desired serial port by pressing the corresponding softkey Note that the data transmission starts right when this softkey is pressed T
530. softkeys will change their color showing their type of editing option over a white background Also itis possible to get more editing assistance by pressing HELP Press HELP again to exit the editing assistance mode Press the ESC key to exit the block editing mode when writing a block and this block will not be added to the program Once the block has been edited press ENTER to add it to the program behind the block previously indicated by the cursor The cursor will be positioned at the new block just edited and the editing window area will be cleared In order to edit a new block Press ESC or MAIN MENU to quit the block editing mode Chapter 9 Section Page PLC EDIT 3 MODIFY This option permits modifying the contents of a selected program block Before pressing this softkey select with the cursor the block to be modified Once this option is selected the softkeys will change their color showing their type of modifying option over a white background Also itis possible to get more editing assistance by pressing HELP Press HELP again to exit the editing assistance mode By pressing ESC the information corresponding to that block and which was shown in the editing area will be cleared It will then be possible to modify its contents again To quit the block modifying mode press CL or ESC to clear the editing window and then press ESC again This way the selected block will not be modified Once t
531. spect to the point to be measured at a distance greater than this value when the cycle is called F5 5 Defines the probing feedrate in mm min or inch min Chapter 12 Section Page ITH A PROBE OUTSIDE CORNER 15 Lied curios S MEASURING Basic operation 1 Approach Movement of the probe in rapid G00 from the point where the cycle is called to the first approach point situated at a distance B from the first face to be probed The approaching movement is made in two stages Ist Movement in the main work plane 2nd Movement along the longitudinal axis 2 Probing Movement of the probe along the abscissa axis at the indicated feedrate F until the probe signal is received The maximum distance to be travelled in the probing movementis 2B If after travelling that distance the CNC does not receive the probe signal it will display the corresponding error code and stop the movement of the axes 3 Withdrawal Movement of the probe in rapid G00 from the point where it probed to the first approach point 4 Second approach Page Chapter 12 Section OUTSIDE CORNER 16 WORKING WITH A PROBE MEASURING Movement of the probe in rapid G00 from the first approach point to the second The approaching movement is made in two stages Ist Movement along the ordinate plane 2nd Movement along the abscissa axis 5 Second probing Movement of the probe along the abscissa axis at the indicated feedrat
532. sponds to the abscissa axis and the R coordinate to the ordinate axis When defining aclosed contour where the initial and final points are the same just program G27 S This parameter must be set when defining an open contour that is when Q and R have been defined It sets the length of the segment indicating the end of the contour K2 1 QR K1 KO mp1648 K3 This parameter must be set when defining an open contour that is when Q and R have been defined It sets the direction of the segment defining the end of the contour 0 Towards positive coordinate values of the abscissa axis 1 Towards negative coordinate values of the abscissa axis 2 Towards positive coordinate values of the ordinate axis 3 Towards negative coordinate values of the ordinate axis If not programmed the CNC assumes a value of KO Chapter 16 Section Page TRACING ANDDIGITIZING TRACING CONTOUR 21 DEFINITION Two dimensional programming examples Closed two dimensional contour mp1624 tad X G23 XY 150 J8 NO 8 Two dimensional tracing definition G24 L8 E5 K1 Digitizing definition G27 SO Closed contour definition G25 Deactivate tracing and digitizing Open two dimensional contour i X G23 XY 160 J20 NO 8 Two dimensional tracing definition G24 L8 E5 K1 Digitizing definition G27 S0 Q10 R25 J15 KO Opencontour definition G25 Deactivate tracing and digitizing Pa
533. st be stopped before attempting to save it If it is running the CNC will ask whether it is desired to stop it or not The PLC program must also be compiled before attempting to save it After saving the PLC program into the EEPROM memory the CNC will ask whether it is desired to run it or not Page Chapter 9 Section 20 PLC OPTIONS 9 7 RESTORE PROGRAM Press this softkey to restore recover the PLC program from the EEPROM memory where it was previously saved The PLC program must be stopped before attempting to restore it If itis running the CNC will ask whether it is desired to stop it or not After executing this instruction the new source program recovered will replace the one that the PLC previously had This new one must be compiled and started in order for the PLC to execute it 9 8 RESOURCES IN USE When selecting this option the CNC will offer the softkeys to select the table of resources used in the PLC program The following resource tables are available INPUTS 1 OUTPUTS O MARKS M REGISTERS R TIMERS T COUNTERS C Chapter 9 PLC Section OPTIONS Page 21 9 9 STATISTICS This option shows the PLC memory distribution the execution time of the various PLC modules the PLC program status and the date when it was edited PLC STOPPED GENERAL CYCLE TIMES ms RAM MEMORY bytes Minimun Cycle Maximun Cycle Average Cycle
534. stination program Abort or cancel the command without copying the blocks Chapter 4 Section Page EDIT COPY TO PROGRAM al 4 9 INCLUDE PROGRAM With this option it is possible to include or merge the contents of another program into the one currently selected Once this option is selected the CNC will request the number of the source program to be merged After keying in that number press ENTER Next indicate with the cursor the block after which the source program will be included Finally press the START OPERATION softkey to execute the command Page 22 Chapter 4 Section EDIT INCLUDE PROGRAM 4 10 EDITOR PARAMETERS With this option it is possible to select the editing parameters used in this operating mode The options or parameters available are described here and they are selected by softkeys 4 10 1 AUTONUMBERING With this option itis possibleto have the CNC automatically number label the blocks after the one being edited Once this option is selected the CNC will display the ON and OFF softkeys to either activate or deactivate this function Once this function is activated the following options will appear on the CRT STEP After pressing this softkey Enter the desired numbering step between two consecutive blocks and press ENTER The default value is 10 STARTING After pressing this softkey Enter the starting block number to be used on the
535. t indicated by program Returns the feedrate in mm minute or inches minute selected by DNC If this has a value of 0 it means that it is not selected Returns the feedrate in mm minute or inches minute selected by PLC If this has a value of O it means that it is not selected Returns the feedrate in mm minute or inches minute selected by program Read only variables associated with function G95 FPREV DNCFPR PLCFPR Returns the feedrate selected in the CNC by means of the G95 function This will be in mm rev or inches rev This advancecan be indicated by program by the PLC or DNC and the CNC selects one of these the one with the highest priority being that indicated by DNC and the one with the lowest priority that indicated by program Returns the feedrate in mm rev orinches rev selected by DNC If this has a value of 0 it means that it is not selected Returns the feedrate in mm rev or inches rev selected by PLC If this has a value of 0 it means that it is not selected Read only variables associated with function G32 PRGFIN Returns the feedrate in 1 min selected by program Also the CNC variable FEED associated with G94 will show the resulting feedrate in mm min or inches min Page Chapter 13 Section VARIABLES FOR 14 PROGRAMMINGINHIGH LEVELLANGUAGE FEEDRATES Read only variables associated with Feedrate Override PRGFPR FRO DNCFRO PLCFRO CNCFRO Returns t
536. t any time the selected operating mode main channel user channel PLC channel This information is given at the least significant bits with a 1 when active and with a 0 when not active or when it is not available in the current version bitO Program in execution bit 1 Program in simulation bit2 Block in execution via MDI JOG bit3 Repositioning in progress bit4 Program interrupted by CYCLE STOP bitS MDI JOG Block interrupted bit6 Repositioning interrupted bit7 Intool inspection bit8 Block in execution via CNCEXI bit9 Block via CNCEXI interrupted bit 10 CNC ready to accept JOG movements jog handwheel teach in inspection bit 11 CNC ready to receive the CYCLE START command execu tion simulation and MDI modes bit 12 The CNC is not ready to execute anything involving axis or spindle movement OPMODB Indicates the type of simulation currently selected This information is given at the least significant bits with a 1 indicating the currently selected one bitO Theoretical path bit 1 G functions bit2 GM S T functions bit3 Main plane bit4 Rapid Chapter 13 Section Page PROGRAMMING INHIGH LEVELLANGUAGE OTHER VARIABLES 25 OPMODC Indicates the axes selected by Handwheel This information is given at the least significant bits indicating with a 1 the one currently selected bitO Axis 1 bit Axis 2 bit2 Axis 3 bit3 Axis 4 bit4 Axis 5 NBTOOL Indicates the tool number bein
537. t be interrupted in order to access this function This operating mode allows all the machine movements to be controlled manually and enabling the axis control keys on the Operator Panel X X Y Y Z Z 4 4 etc Also the CNC will show the softkeys to access the CNC tables edit and execute a block in MDI as well as repositioning the axes of the machine to the position from where this function was called One of the ways to make the tool change is as follows Move the tool to the required tool change position This move may be made by jogging the axes from the operator panel or in MDI Gain access to CNC tables tools Tool offsets etc in order to find another tool with the similar characteristics Select in MDI the new tool as the active one Make the tool change This operation will be performed depending on the type of tool changer used It is possible to execute the tool change in MDI in this step Return the axes to the position where the tool inspection began REPOSITIONING Continue executing the program The CNC offers the following options by means of softkeys MDI Allows to edit blocks in ISO or high level except those associated with subroutines providing information on the corresponding format by means of softkeys Once the block has been edited and after the key has been pressed the CNC will execute this block without quitting this operating mode Page 18 Chapter 3
538. t is not made between consecutive M19s Chapter 5 Section Page COMPLEMENTARY 9 5 5 3 TOOL NUMBER T The FAGOR 8055 CNC enables you to select the tool or tools required for each machining operation via function T4 There is a tool magazine table whose number of components is established by NPOCKET general machine parameter specifying the following for each component The contents of the box indicating tool number or if the box is empty or cancelled The size of the tool N if it is a normal tool and S if it is special The status of the tool A if it is available E if it is worn out life expired and R if it has been rejected It also has a tool table The number of components in this table is established by NTOOL general machine parameter specifying the following for each component The offset associated with each tool family code 0 lt n lt 200 gt normal tool family code 200 n 255 special tool Nominal tool life calculated for this tool defined in terms of machining minutes or depending on the number of operations to be carried out This is selected by the general machine parameter TOOLMONI Real working life of the tool defined in machining minutes or depending on the number of operations carried out This is selected by the general machine parameter TOOLMONI The size of the tool N if it is a normal tool and S if it is special The status of the too
539. t is required to define a group of points Q10 013 care should be taken to define the final point with three digits as if Q10 13 is programmed multiple machining understands Q10 130 The programming order for these parameters is P Q R S T U V it also being necessary to maintain the order in which the points assigned to these are numbered i e the numbering order of the points assigned to Q must be greater than that assigned to P and less than that assigned to R Example Proper programming P5 006 Q12 015 R20 022 Improperprogramming P5 006 Q20 022 R12 015 If these parameters are not programmed the CNC understands that it must perform machining at all the points along the programmed path Basic operation 1 Multiple machining calculates the next point of those programmed where it is wished to machine 2 Rapid traverse GOO to this point 3 Multiple machining will perform the canned cycle or modal subroutine selected after this movement 4 The CNC will repeat steps 1 2 3 until the programmed path has been completed After completing multiple machining the tool will be positioned atthe last point along the programmed path where machining was performed Chapter 10 Section Page MULTIPLEMACHINING INASTRAIGHTLINE 3 PATTERN G60 Programming example assuming that the work plane is formed by the X and Y axes that the longitudinal axis is Z and that the starting point is XO YO ZO G81 G98 G00 G91 X200
540. t once without executing the associated subroutine the softkeys corresponding to those axes must be pressed After pressing each softkey the CNC will highlight the name of the selected axis If an unwanted axis has been selected press ESC to cancel that selection and return to select REFERENCE SEARCH Once all the desired axes have been selected press CJ The CNC will start the home search by moving all selected axes at once until the home reference switches for all axes are pressed and from then on the CNC will continue the home search one axis at a time Attention When searching home using the ALL softkey the CNC will maintain the part zero or zero offset active at the time However if the axes have been selected one by one the CNC will assume the home position as the new part zero PRESET With this function it is possible to preset the desired axis position value Once this option is selected the CNC will show the softkey corresponding to each axis After pressing the softkey of the corresponding axis to be preset the CNC will request the position value to be preset with Press ENTER after the value has been keyed in so the new value is assumed by the CNC Page Chapter 5 Section JOG REFERENCE SEARCH AND PRESET TOOL CALIBRATION With this function itis possible to calibrate the length of the selected tool by using a part of known dimensions for this purpose
541. t the model is not to be digitized ES 5 This parameter must be defined when digitizing a part besides tracing it Itindicates the chordal error or maximum difference allowed between the surface ofthe model and the segment joining two consecutive digitized points Itis given in the selected work units millimeters or inches n Lu mpi637 eA If not programmed or programmed with a value of 0 the chordal error will be ignored and a new point will be provided after moving the L distance in space and along the programmed path G This parameter must be defined when digitizing the model besides tracing it Indicates the storing format for the digitized points in the program selected by means of the OPEN P statement Page Chapter 16 Section 52 TRACING ANDDIGITIZING TRACING CANNED CYCLE WITHPOLYGONALSWEEP G 0 Absolute format All points will be programmed in absolute coordinates G90 and defined by the X Y and Z axes G 1 Absolute filtered format All points will be programmed in absolute coordinates G90 but only those axes whose positions have changed with respect to the previous digitized point will be defined G 2 Incremental filtered format All points will be programmed in incremental coordinates G91 and referred to the previous digitized point Only those axes whose positions have changed with respect to the previous digitized point will be defined If not programmed the canned cycle will
542. t up manual This control allows the following operations to be performed by using probes Programming probing blocks with functions G75 and G76 Several tool calibration and part measurement cycles by means of high level language programming Chapter 12 Section Page WORKING WITH A PROBE PROBING l 12 1 PROBING G75 G76 The G75 function allows movements to be programmed which will end after the CNC receives the signal from the measuring probe used The G76 function allows movements to be programmed which will end after the CNC no longer receives the signal from the measuring probe used Their definition formatis G75 X C 5 5 G76 X C 5 5 After G75 or G76 the required axis or axes will be programmed as well as the coordinates of these axes which will define the end point of the programmed movement The machine will move according to the programmed path until it receives the signal from the probe G75 or until it no longer receives the probe signal G76 At this time the CNC will consider the block finished taking as the theoretical position of the axes the real position which they have at that time Ifthe axes reach the programmed position before receiving G75 or while receiving G76 the external signal from the probe the CNC will stop the movement of the axes This type of movement with probing blocks are very useful when it is required to generate measurement or verification programs for t
543. t was previously stored in the EEPROM memory by means of the SAVE command Chapter 10 Section Page GRAPHICEDITOR MODIFICATIONS 19 DELETE ELEMENTS This option allows an element of the displayed page or symbol to be selected and then deleted To do this follow these steps 1 Place the cursor in the position to delete an element and press the ENTER key to validate it An area of between 8 pixels from the position indicated will be analyzed If the element to be deleted is a filled circle or a filled polygon the cursor must be positioned on a point on the circumference or external polygon periphery 2 Ifany graphic element or text exists in this area this will be highlighted and you will be asked if you wish to delete it Press the ENTER key to delete this element otherwise the ESC key Should there be several elements in this area the CNC will highlight them in succession and it will ask for confirmation before deleting any of them MOVE SCREEN With this option it is possible to reposition the whole page not its individual elements separately and it can only be used to move pages and not symbols It allows the entire page to be moved with the right left up and down arrow keys The center of the page is taken as a reference for this movement To do this follow these steps 1 The CNC will show the page with the cursor placed in the middle of the screen 2 Move the cursor to the posit
544. te the digitizing function G27 Define the tracing contour G25 Deactivate the tracing digitizing function It also offers the following tracing canned cycles TRACE 1 Tracing digitizing in a grid pattern TRACE 2 Tracing digitizing in an arc pattern TRACE 3 Profile tracing digitizing in the plane TRACE 4 3 D Profile tracing digitizing in space TRACE 5 Tracing digitizing with polygonal sweep About tracing While tracing the model the CNC only controls the movements ofthe X Y and Zaxes Thus the main plane work plane must be formed by two of these axes XY XZ YZ YX ZX ZY The other axis must be perpendicular to that plane and set as longitudinal axis The tracing probe must always be mounted on that perpendicular axis The tracing probe must be calibrated G26 every time it is installed on the machine it is changed or reoriented and every time the CNC is powered up Once function G23 is executed tracing the CNC maintains the probe in contact with the surface of the model following the selected path at all times When tracing automatically not by hand it is necessary to define the path to be followed by the tracing probe by either programming it in ISO code or by jogging the axes with the JOG keys or with the electronic handwheel To deactivate the tracing previously activated with function G23 execute function G25 When executing one of the tracing digitizing canned cycles it is not necessary to exe
545. ted type corresponds to a part program ora screen customizing program the CNC will request the number of the program to be copied Once keyed in press the IN softkey When a program from serial port 1 or 2 is selected the CNC understands that the one to be copied is the one coming from that serial port Once the program to be copied has been defined the CNC will request the destination program number indicating with the softkeys the types allowed in each case If the selected type corresponds to a part program indicate its number and press ENTER Example To copy program 12 into program 14 the key sequence will be as follows COPY PROGRAM 12 IN PROGRAM 14 ENTER If the destination program to copy into exists the CNC will display a warning message and it will offer the choice to either continue the operation with the ENTER key deleting the existing program or to cancel it with the ESC key leaving the existing program intact The destination program CANNOT be the last one executed by the CNC Also those programs containing subroutines CANNOT be copied since a subroutine cannot be defined in more than one program However a program containing subroutines can be copied by turning the subroutine defining block SUB13 into a comment SUB13 and then after having copied the program change the number of the subroutine SUB14 and turn the definition block back into
546. ter of this window and the down arrow key will position it over the last one Chapter 7 Section Page UTILITIES 1 7 1 DIRECTORY After pressing this softkey the CNC will show the following softkey options Display the program directory of the CNC Display the subroutine directory of the CNC Display the program directory of a peripheral device or computer 7 1 1 PROGRAM DIRECTORY TILITIES PROGRAM COMMENT SIZE TIME P000001 MOULD 1 000217 P000002 CNC SUBROUTINES gt 023705 P000003 lt MOULD 3 000009 P000010 CANNED CYCLE 000208 P000012 lt gt 000029 P000111 lt gt 000869 P000112 lt gt 000981 P000200 lt gt 002759 P000662 lt USER EDITING gt 000801 P009999 lt USER EXECUTION gt 009389 P022463 lt gt 000039 PLC_ERR lt gt 000026 PLC_MSG lt gt 000026 PLC_PRG lt gt 020634 14 programs 062800 free bytes CAP INS DIRECTORY COPY DELETE RENAME PROTEC COMPACT CHANGE TION DATE This option will display all visible programs stored in the CNC memory Therefore the program directory may contain Part programs Screen customizing programs The PLC program PLC_PRG The PLC error file PLC_ERR The PLC message file PLC_MSG Page Chapter 7 Section 2 UTILITIES PROGRAM DIRECTORY The program directory has the following definition fields Program number It will be defined by the user when it is a part program or a scr
547. tered format All points will be programmed in absolute coordinates G90 but only those axes whose positions have changed with respect to the previous digitized point will be defined Page 32 Chapter 16 Section TRACING ANDDIGITIZING GRIDPATTERN TRACING CANNEDCYCLE H5 5 F5 5 G 2 Incremental filtered format All points will be programmed in incremental coordinates G91 and referred to the previous digitized point Only those axes whose positions have changed with respect to the previous digitized point will be defined If not programmed the canned cycle will assume a value of GO Defines the feedrate for the incremental paths It is programmed in mm min or inches min mp1638 F H p gt gt If not programmed the canned cycle will assume the F value feedrate for the sweeping paths Defines the sweeping feedrate It is programmed in mm min or inches min BASIC OPERATION 1 2 3 The probe positions at the point set by parameters X Y and Z The CNC approaches the probe to the model until it touches it The probe keeps in constant contact with the surface of the model following it along the programmed path Ifit is to be digitized parameters L and E it will generate a new block per every digitized point in the program previously opened by means of the OPEN P statement Once the canned cycle has concluded the probe will return to the starting point This
548. th profile must be programmed Fortheoutside contourofthe pocket starting from the top or surface coordinate 1 Forthe inside contours islands starting from the bottom or base coordinate 2 f The depth profile must be open and without direction changes along its path In other Words it cannot zig zag MP1150 Examples LLAD The following examples cause geometry errors MP1147 MP1148 Page Chapter 11 Section 2D AND 3D POCKET 3D POCKETS i EOD eye S PROGRAMMING RULES 11 2 5 1 PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES Example of a pocket without islands 90 I Z Y PER z X 30 gt WY E LITITZ LL X TOR122 5 TOL1220 TOI120 TOK 120 G17 GO G43 G90 Z50 S1000 M4 G5 G66 R200 C250 F300 S400 E500 33D pocket definition M30 N200 G67 B5 C4 I 25 R5 V100 F400 TIDI M6 Roughing operation N250 G67 B2 1 23 R5 V100 F550 T2DI M6 Semi finishing operation N300 G68 B1 5 L0 75 QO I 25 R2 V80 F275 T3D1 M6 Finishing operation N400 GU I assai tH eR eR Beginning of the pocket geometry definition G90 GO X10 Y30 ZO seereis Plane profile horizontal cross section G1 Y90 X130 Y10 X10 Y30 GIO XZ eet hie in Sh A Sei Depth profile vertical cross section GO X10 ZO0 N500 G3 X40 Z 30 130 KO seen End of the pocket geometry definition Chapter 11 Section Page 2D AND 3D POCK
549. the inside profiles with the outside one a single pocket will be obtained which corresponds to the outside profile having the largest surface The rest will be ignored MP1118 MP1119 If the finishing operation has been programmed the profile of the resulting pocket must comply with all the tool compensation rules since if a profile is programmed which cannot be machined by the programmed finishing tool the CNC will show the corresponding error Chapter 11 Section Page 2D AND3DPOCKETS 2DPOCKETPROFILES 13 11 1 5 2 ADVANCED PROFILE INTERSECTION K 1 When selecting this type the following profile intersecting rules are to be followed 1 The initial point of each contour determines the section to be selected Boolean Subtragtion Ina profile intersection each contour is divided into several lines that could be grouped as Lines external to the other contour Lines internal to the other contour This type of profile intersection selects in each contour the group of lines where the profile defining point is included Thefollowing example shows the explained selection process The solid lines indicate the lines external to the other contour and the dashes 2 the internal lines The initial point of each Contour is indicated with an x g nu UO MP1124 Examples of profile intersections Boolean Addition ues i Fa
550. the location where that variable will be shown Once this option is selected the softkeys will change their background color to white and they will show the information corresponding to the editing type possible It is possible to analyze any logic signal of the PLC 13 B1R120 TEN 3 CDW 4 DFU M200 etc and it can be referred to by its name or by its associated symbol It is also possible to analyze logic expressions formed with one or more consultations which must follow the syntax and rules used to write the PLC equations M100 AND NOT I15 OR I5 AND CPS C1 EQU 100 Although it might seem difficult to understand the processing of expressions and consultations at a logic analyzer it should be borne in mind that it could prove very useful when it comes to finding out the status of a whole expression Itis not possible to use more than 16 flank edge detecting instructions DFU and DFD among all the selected variable definitions and trigger conditions By pressing the ESC key the variable being edited will be deleted From this point on that variable can be edited again Chapter 9 Section Page PLC LOGICANALYZER 27 Once the variable has been edited press the ENTER key The new variable will appear in the cursor position inside the variable area Only the first 8 characters of the selected variable or expression are shown even when it has more than 8 The cursor will position at the next variable which
551. the sum of the R I values of the selected tool offset When compensation of tool length is required G43 the CNC applies as a compensation value the sum of the L K values of the selected tool offset If no tool offset has been defined the CNC applies tool offset DO with R 0 L 0 I 0 and K 0 Chapter 5 Section Page COMPLEMENTARY 11 5 5 5 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION M The miscellaneous functions are programmed by means of the M4 Code it being possible to program up to 7 functions in the same block When more than one function has been programmed in one block the CNC executes these correlatively to the order in which they have been programmed The CNC is provided with an M functions table with NMISCFUN general machine parameter components specifying for each element The number 0 9999 of the defined miscellaneous M function The number of the subroutine which is required to associate to this miscellaneous function Anindicator which determines if the M function is executed before or after the movement block in which it is programmed An indicator which determines if the execution of the M function interrupts block preparation or not An indicator which determines if the M function is executed or not after the execution of the associated subroutine An indicator which determines if the CNC must wait for the signal AUX END or not Executed M signal coming from the PLC to continue the exe
552. the table do not necessarily have to correspond to the block being executed If the Execution Mode is abandoned after interrupting the execution of the program the CNC will update the parameter tables with values corresponding to the block which was being executed Whenaccessing the local parameter and global parameter table the value assigned to each parameter may be expressed in decimal notation 4127 423 or in scientific notation 223476 E 3 The FAGOR 8055 CNC has high level statements which allow the definition and use of subroutines which can be called from the main program or from another subroutine it also being possible to call a second subroutine from the second to a third etc The CNC limits these calls allowing up to a maximum of 15 nesting levels 26 local parameters PO P25 can be assigned to a subroutine These parameters which will be unknown for blocks external to the subroutine may be referenced by the blocks of this subroutine The CNC allows local parameters to be assigned to more than one subroutine 6 nesting levels of local parameters being possible within the 15 nesting levels of a subroutine Local parameters used in high level language may be defined either using the above format or by using the letter A Z except for N so that A is equal to PO and Z to P25 Page Chapter 13 Section 6 PROGRAMMINGINHIGH LEVELLANGUAGE GENERAL PURPOSE VARIABLES The following example shows these two m
553. this not be programmed the CNC will take a value of KO Page 22 Chapter 9 Section CANNED CYCLES REAMING G85 Basic operation 1 Ifthe spindle was in operation previously its turning direction is maintained If it was not in movement it will start by turning clockwise M03 2 Rapid movement of the longitudinal axis from the initial plane to the reference plane 3 Movement at the working feedrate G01 of the longitudinal axis to the bottom of the machined hole and reaming 4 Dwell if parameter K has been programmed 5 Withdrawal at working feedrate of the longitudinal axis as far as the reference plane 6 Withdrawal at rapid feedrate G00 of the longitudinal axis as far as the initial plane if G98 has been programmed Programming example assuming that the work plane is formed by the X and Y axes that the longitudinal axis is the Z axis and that the starting point is XO YO ZO TI M6 GO G90 XO YO ZO ssiri ti iiid Starting point G85 G98 G91 X250 Y350 Z 98 I 22 F100 S500 Cannedcycle definition eni LE PET Canned cycle cancellation GOO XO Y i onn lette eov etes Be tese besote ves e Dee Dt eeot uos e pee Positioning 1 lo es mc End of program Chapter 9 Section Page CANNED CYCLES REAMING G85 23 9 5 7 G86 BORING CYCLE WITH WITHDRAWAL IN RAPID G00 This cycle bores at the point indicated until the final programmed coordinate is reached It i
554. this variable is accessed block preparation is interrupted and the CNC waits for this command to be executed to resume block preparation KEY Returns the code of the last key accepted If this variable is accessed block preparation is interrupted and the CNC waits for this command to be executed to resume block preparation Chapter 13 Section Page PROGRAMMINGINHIGH LEVELLANGUAGE OTHER VARIABLES 29 KEYSRC This variable allows the origin of keys to be read or modified ANAOn possible values being 0 Keyboard 1 PLC 2 DNC The CNC only allows modification of this variable if this is at 0 This variable allows the required analog output n to be modified The value assigned will be expressed in volts and in the 2 4 format 10 Volts The analog outputs which are free among the eight 1 8 available atthe CNC may be modified the corresponding error being displayed if an attempt is made to write in one occupied If this variable is accessed block preparation is interrupted and the CNC waits for this command to be executed to resume block preparation Page 30 PROGRAMMINGINHIGH LEVELLANGUAGE OTHER VARIABLES Chapter 13 Section 13 3 CONSTANTS Constants are defined as being all those fixed values which cannot be altered by a program The following are considered as constants Numbers expressed in the decimal system Hexadecimal numbers PI D constant Read only ta
555. ting this function the CNC will display the following softkey options Type of graphic Display area Zoom Point of view Graphic parameters Clear Screen Deactivate graphics Xo X X X X X X One of the different ways that could be used to define graphics is the following 1 Define the DISPLAY AREA It will depend on the dimensions of the part and its coordinate values will be referred to the part zero being currently active 2 Select the TYPE OF GRAPHICS to be displayed 3 Definethe VIEWPOINT to be used This option is available in types of graphics such as 3D and SOLID 4 Select the drawing colors to be used by means of the GRAPHIC PARAMETERS Once the part program execution or simulation has been started it is possible to interrupt it and define another type of graphic or select another graphic display area by means ofthe ZOOM option Page Chapter 3 Section 20 EXECUTE SIMULATE GRAPHICS 3 5 1 TYPE OF GRAPHICS This FAGOR 8055 M CNC offers two types of graphics line and solid graphics They both are totally independent from each other in such a way that an execution or simulation performed in either one does not affect the other The CNC will show all the possible softkey options in order to select one of them The type of graphic will remain active until another type is selected or graphics are deactivated with its corresponding softkey or the CNC is turned off Every time atype of graphi
556. tion SO The sign indicates the counting direction and the 5 5 value is always considered to be absolute coordinates regardless of the type of units currently selected Example 1000 M3 Spindle in open loop M19 S100 The spindle switches to closed loop Home search and positioning orientation at 100 M19 S 30 The spindle orients to 30 passing through 0 M19 S400 The spindle turns a whole revolution and positions at 40 Page Chapter 5 COMP EMER ARY 14 PROGRAMMING BY ISOCODE FUNCTIONSFS T D M 5 5 5 10 M41 M42 M43 M44 SPINDLE SPEED RANGE CHANGE The FAGOR 8055 CNC offers 4 spindle speed ranges M41 M42 M43 and M44 with maximum speed limits set by the spindle machine parameters MAXGEARI MAXGEAR2 MAXGEAR3 and MAXGEAR4 If machine parameter AUTOGEAR is set so the CNC executes the range change automatically M41 thru M44 will be sent out automatically by the CNC without having to be programmed If this machine parameter is set for non automatic gear change M41 thru M44 will have to be programmed every time a gear change is required Bear in mind that the maximum voltage value assigned to machine parameter MAX VOLT corresponds to the maximum speed indicated for each one of the speed ranges machine parameters MAXGEARI thru MAXGEAR4 5 5 5 11 M45 AUXILIARY SPINDLE LIVE TOOL In order to use this miscellaneous function it is necessary to set one of the a
557. tion the CNC stores the PLC message file PLC_MSG in EEPROM memory PLC ERRORS When selecting this option the CNC stores the PLC error file PLC_ERR in EEPROM memory The selected program will be transferred from the CNC s internal memory into the EEPROM memory However that program will still be shown in the part program directory as any other program but with the attribute m It will be possible to execute it and even delete it from the EEPROM memory In order to delete it edit it copy it etc it must be brought back into the CNC memory using the MOVE FROM EEPROM softkey described next The programs stored in the EEPROM will keep all their original protection attributes O H M X Therefore the corresponding codes will be required in order to gain access to them 7 8 2 MOVE A PROGRAM FROM EEPROM MEMORY To accomplish this press the softkey MOVE FROM EEPROM The CNC will show the following options to be selected by softkeys PROGRAM With this option it is possible to save a program in EEPROM memory Key in the desired program number and press ENTER PLC MESSAGES When selecting this option the CNC stores the PLC message file PLC_MSG in EEPROM memory PLC ERRORS When selecting this option the CNC stores the PLC error file PLC_ERR in EEPROM memory The selected program will be transferred from the EEPROM memory to the internal memory of the CNC thus being treated as a regular CNC program Cha
558. tion cancels the active zero offset Programming manual Chap 4 The M function table allows interrupting block preparation until the M starts or ends Installation manual Chap 3 Operating manual Chap 11 Date October 1995 Software Version 9 09 and newer FEATURE AFFECTED MANUAL AND CHAPTERS MI9TYPE spindle parameter indicates whether or not the spindle is homed every time it switches from open loop to closed loop Installation manual Chap 3 Variables POSS and TPOSS always active whether in open loop or closed loop Installation manual Chap 10 Programming manual Chap 13 Leadscrew compensation tables allow slopes of up to 45 Installation manual Chap 3 Operating manual Chap 11 Date April 1996 Software Version 9 10 and newer FEATURE AFFECTED MANUAL AND CHAPTERS New spindle related variables RPOSS and RTPOSS Installation manual Chap 10 and Appendix Programming manual Chap 13 and Appendix Date July1996 Software Version 9 11 and newer FEATURE AFFECTED MANUAL AND CHAPTERS Machine parameter EXTMULT to be used when the feedback system has coded marker pulses Io Installation manual Chap 3 4 Version history M Date May 1996 Software Version 11 01 and newer FEATURE AFFECTED MANUAL AND CHAPTERS CPU TURBO Installation manual Chap 1 and 3 Look Ahead Program
559. tire pocket being performed with the given pass and the canned cycle adjusts the last illi milling pass uc MP1107 If itis not programmed or is programmed with either a value of 0 it will assume a value of 3 4 the diameter of the selected tool If programmed with a value greater than the tool diameter the CNC will issue the corresponding error Defines the total depth of the pocket and is programmed in absolute coordinates It must be programmed Page 30 Chapter 11 Section 2D AND 3D POCKETS 3D POCKETS ROUGHING R 5 5 Defines the reference plane coordinate and is programmed in absolute V 5 5 F 5 5 S 5 5 T 4 D 4 coordinates It must be programmed MP1108 Defines the tool penetrating feedrate If not programmed or programmed with a value of 0 the CNC will assume 50 of the feedrate in the plane F Optional Defines the machining feedrate in the plane Optional Defines the spindle speed Defines the tool used for the roughing operation It must be programmed Optional Defines the tool offset number Optional Up to 7 miscellaneous M functions can be programmed This operation allows M06 with an associated subroutine to be defined and the tool change is performed before beginning the roughing operation Chapter 11 Section Page 3D POCKETS 31 2D AND 3D POCKETS ROUGHING 11 2 2 SEMI FINISHING OPERATION This oper
560. to protect it When sending the monitor especially protect the CRT glass 4 Pad the unit inside the cardboard box with poly utherane foam on all sides 5 Seal the cardboard box with packing tape or industrial staples Introduction 5 FAGOR DOCUMENTATION 8055 CNC OEM Manual 8055 M CNC USER Manual 8055 T CNC USER Manual 8050 DNC Software Manual 8050 DNC Protocol Manual FLOPPY DISK Manual Introduction 6 FOR THE 8055 CNC Is directed to the machine builder or person in charge of installing and starting up the CNC It is common to CNC models 8055 M and 8055 T and it has the Installation manual inside Is directed to the end user or CNC operator It contains 2 manuals Operating Manual describing how to operate the CNC Programming Manual describing how to program the CNC Is directed to the end user or CNC operator It contains 2 manuals Operating Manual describing how to operate the CNC Programming Manual describing how to program the CNC Is directed to people using the optional 8050 DNC communications software Is directed to people wishing to design their own DNC communications software to communicate with the 8055 Is directed to people using the Fagor Floppy Disk Unit and it shows how to use it MANUAL CONTENTS The Programming Manual for the Mill model CNC contains the following chapters Index New Features and Modifications for the Mill Model Introduction Summary of safety conditions Shi
561. tool changer installed in the machine is executed 5 5 5 9 M19 SPINDLE ORIENTATION With this CNC it is possible to work with the spindle in open loop M3 M4 and with the spindle in closed loop M19 In order to work in closed loop it is necessary to have a rotary encoder installed on the spindle of the machine To switch from open loop to closed loop execute function M19 or M19 S 5 5 The CNC will act as follows If the spindle does not have a home switch the CNC changes the spindle speed until it reaches the one set by spindle machine parameter REFEED2 finds the marker pulse home and then orients the spindle to the position defined by S 5 5 f the spindle has a home switch the CNC modifies the spindle speed until it reaches the one set by spindle machine parameter REFEED1 Then it carries out the search for the home switch at this speed Next it looks for the marker pulse home at the speed set by spindle machine parameter REFEED2 and finally it orients the spindle to the position defined by S 5 5 If only M19 is executed the spindle is oriented to position SO after having found the home switch To now orient the spindle to another position program M19 S 5 5 the CNC will not perform the home search since it is already in closed loop and it will orient the spindle to the indicated position S 5 5 The S 5 5 code indicates the spindle orient position in degrees from the encoder s marker pulse posi
562. tool diameter the CNC will issue the corresponding error If programmed with a value of 0 the CNC will show the corresponding error Page Chapter 9 Section 28 CANNED CYCLES RECTANGULAR POCKET G87 D5 5 Defines the distance between the reference plane and the surface ofthe part where the pocket is to be made During the first deepening operation this amount will be added to incremental depth B If this is not programmed a value of 0 will be taken H 5 5 L 5 5 V5 0 Defines the working feedrate during the finishing pass If this is not programmed or is programmed with a value of 0 the value of the working feedrate for machining will be taken Defines the value of the finishing pass along the main plane Ifthe value is positive the finishing pass is made on a square corner G07 Ifthe value is negative the finishing pass is made on a rounded corner G05 If this is not programmed or is programmed with a value of 0 no finishing pass will be made Defines the tool penetrating feedrate Ifnot programmed or programmed with a value of 0 the CNC will assume 50 of the feedrate in the plane F Chapter 9 Section Page CANNEDCYCLES RECTANGULAR POCKET G87 29 Basic operation l If the spindle was in operation previously its turning direction is maintained If it was not in movement it will start by turning clockwise M03 Rapid movement of the longi
563. ts number and press ENTER To delete a group of tools indicate the first one press the UP TO softkey indicate the last one to be deleted and press ENTER To delete all tools press the ALL softkey The CNC will request confirmation and after pressing ENTER it will delete then all Chapter 6 Section Page TABLES TOOLTABLE 15 LOAD With this option it is possible to load the tool table with the values received via any of the serial communications ports RS232C or RS422 To do so selectthe desired communications line by pressing its corresponding softkey The data transmission will start right when that softkey is pressed Press the ABORT softkey to cancel the transmission in mid run When the length of the received table is not the same as that of the current one general machine parameter NTOOL the CNC will act in the following manner The received table is shorter than the current one The received tool values are modified and the remaining ones keep their original values Thereceived table is longer than the current one All current values are replaced and when the CNC detects that there is no more room for the other ones it issues the corresponding error message SAVE With this option itis possible to send the tool table out to a peripheral device or computer To doso press the softkey corresponding to the desired serial communications line The data transmission will start
564. tside profile Defines the total depth of the island and it is given in absolute coordinates If the island has a roughing operation it is not necessary to define this parameter since it has been programmed in that operation However if programmed in both operations the canned cycle will assume the particular depth indicated for each operation If the island has no roughing operation it is necessary to define this parameter Defines the coordinate of the reference plane and it is given in absolute values If the island has a roughing operation it is not necessary to define this parameter since it has been programmed in that operation However if programmed in both operations the canned cycle will assume the particular depth indicated for each operation If the island has no roughing operation it is necessary to define this pardneter Defines the type of profile intersection to be used 0 Basic profile intersection 2 Advanced profile intersection Page 10 Chapter 11 Section 2D AND 3D POCKETS 2D POCKETS FINISHING V 5 5 F 5 5 S 5 5 T 4 D 4 If the island has aroughing operation it is not necessary to define this parameter since it has been programmed in that operation However if programmed in both operations the canned cycle will assume the one defined for the roughing operation Ifno roughing operation has been defined and this parameter is not programmed the
565. tside profile as well as the inside ones or islands must be defined by means of simple geometric elements straight lines and arcs The profile programming syntax must observe the following rules 1 The block where the geometric description starts must have a label number This number must be assigned to parameter P when defining the canned cycle 2 The outside main profile or tracing area must be defined first No function must be programmed to indicate the end of the profile definition The CNC considers that the profile has ended when programming function G00 which indicates the beginning of a new profile 3 All the inside profiles may be programmed one after another and each one of them must start with function G00 which indicates the beginning of a profile Attention Be sure to program G01 G02 or G03 on the block following the one defining the profile since GOO is modal and the CNC might interpret the following blocks as beginnings of new profiles 4 Once the profiles have been defined assign a label number to the last programmed block This label number must be assigned to parameter U when defining the canned cycle 5 The profiles are described as programmed paths and may include the following functions G01 Linearinterpolation G02 Clockwise circular interpolation G03 Counter clockwise circular interpolation G06 Absolute arc center coordinates G08 Arc tangent to previous path G09 Arc
566. tudinal axis from the initial plane to the reference plane First deepening operation Movement of longitudinal axis at the feedrate indicated by V to the incremental depth programmed in B D Milling at the working feedrate of the surface of the pocket in steps defined by means of C as far as a distance L finishing pass from the pocket wall Milling of the L finishing pass with the working feedrate defined in H Once the finishing pass has been completed the tool withdraws at the rapid feedrate G00 to the center of the pocket the longitudinal axis being separated 1 mm 0 040 inch from the machined surface 7 Further milling runs until the total depth of the pocket is reached Movement of the longitudinal axis at the feedrate indicated by V up to a distance B from the previous surface Milling of anew surface following the steps indicated in paragraphs 4 5 and 6 Page Chapter 9 Section 30 CANNED CYCLES RECTANGULAR POCKET G87 8 Withdrawal at rapid feedrate G00 of the longitudinal axis to the initial or reference plane along depending on G98 or G99 has been programmed 1 G90 i Chapter 9 Section Page CANNEDCYCLES RECTANGULAR POCKET G87 31 Programming example assuming that the work plane is formed by the X and Y axes that the longitudinal axis is the Z axis and that the starting point is XO YO ZO TOR1 6 TOT1 0 T1 D1 M6 G
567. ue of 0 the CNC will perform a single finishing pass with the total depth of the pocket If programmed with a positive sign all the roughing will be performed with the same machining pass and the canned cycle calculates a pass equal to or lower than the programmed pass If programmed with a negative sign all the roughing will be performed with the programmed pass and the canned cycle will adjust the last pass to obtain the total programmed depth Lo p p E Un p dp Cop GOR Rs PCR dt Lp WU Wie L x5 5 Defines the value of the finishing stock which it is required to leave on the side walls of the pocket before the finishing operation MP1109 MP1110 If programmed with a positive value the finishing pass will be carried out in square corner G07 Chapter 11 Section Page 2D AND 3D POCKETS 2D POCKETS FINISHING 9 1 5 5 R 45 5 K 1 If programmed with a negative value the finishing pass will be carried out in round corner G05 If programmed with a value of 0 no finishing pass will be carried out Indicates the direction of the finishing pass If programmed with a value of 1 the finishing pass will be done in the opposite direction to the one programmed for the outside profile If not programmed or programmed with a value other than 1 the finishing pass will be done in the same direction as the one programmed for the ou
568. um height of the part and the clearance to be maintained with respect to it must be taken into account 1 5 5 Defines the maximum probing depth and it is referred to the position value 155 assigned to parameter Z If a portion of the part is outside this zone the cycle will not collect the values of its points but it will continue with the digitizing cycle without issuing an error message SN If a0 valueis assigned to this parameter the CNC will display the corresponding error message Defines the outside radius of the circular zone arc It must be a positive value greater than 0 K5 5 Defines the inside radius of the circular zone arc It must be positive If no value is programmed a value of 0 will be assumed by the canned cycle A5 5 Defines the angular position of the first digitizing point with respect to the abscissa axis If not programmed a value of A 0 will be assumed Page Chapter 15 Section DIGITIZING CYCLES DIGITIZING CYCLE IN AN ARC PATTERN B 5 5 Defines the angular position of the other end of the arc zone sector with respect to the abscissa axis When defining parameters A and B it must be borne in mind that the initial digitizing path is followed in the counter clockwise direction When not programming acomplete circle the digitizing paths will be followed in both directions in a zig zag manner and when programming a complete circle they will be scanned c
569. umes a value of 0 em Wy sii d r2 r3 N x ET CY 4 XY 4 LY v xy v RO DO RO D1 R1 DO R1 D1 mpi641 When selecting RO circular path When defining parameters A and B it must be borne in mind that the first sweep is always done counter clockwise The step C indicates the linear distance between every two consecutive passes It must be programmed in millimeters or inches When selecting R1 linear path The step C indicates the angular distance between two consecutive passes It must be programmed in degrees Parameter K inmost arc radius may be programmed with either positive or negative values WH J 5 K X Y D uis mpi642 R1 DO R1 DO fRiDlisselected unidirectional linear path the sweep will always be carried out from the inmost radius K to the outermost one J Page Chapter 16 Section 36 TRACINGANDDIGITIZING ARCPATTERNTRACING CANNEDCYCLE N 5 5 L5 5 E 5 5 Nominal Deflection Indicates the pressure kept by the probe while sweeping the surface of the model The deflection is given in the selected work units mm or inches and its value is usually comprised between 0 3mm and 1 5mm The tracing quality depends upon the amount of deflection being used the tracing feedrate and the geometry of the model In order to prevent the probe from separating from the model it is advised to use a profile tracing feedrate of about 1000 times th
570. unit will appear at the bottom right hand window Page 10 Chapter 6 Section TABLES TOOLOFFSET TABLE 63 TOOL TABLE This table contains the information concerning the available tools indicating the type of tool offset they have associated to them the family they belong to etc NOMINAL LIFE REAL LIFE N00000 0000 00 N00000 0000 00 N00000 0000 00 N00000 0000 00 N00000 0000 00 N00000 0000 00 N00000 0000 00 N00000 0000 00 N00000 0000 00 N00000 N00000 N00000 N00000 N00000 N00000 N00000 N00000 N00000 N00000 0000 00 N00000 0000 00 CAP INS MM ea a HE AME 0000 00 0000 00 0000 00 0000 00 0000 00 0000 00 0000 00 0000 00 0000 00 AARARAAAAADARDAARAAAAAD ZRZZ2Z2Z2Z22Z2Z22Z22Z222Z gt gt gt rrrrrrrrrrrre The length of this table number of tools is indicated by the general machine parameter NTOOL Chapter 6 Section Page TABLES TOOL TABLE H Each tool has the following fields Tool offset number associated to the tool Every time a tool is selected the CNC will take these values as the tool dimensions Family code This family code is to be used whenever an automatic tool changer is installed and it will allow to replace the worn out tool with another one of similar characteristics There are two types of families Those corresponding to normal size tools whose codes are between 0 and 199 Those corresponding to specia
571. unter 12 to 0 Alters the status 0 1 of the preset input of the indicated counter 1 thru 256 The counter will be preset with the 6699 value n if an up flank is produced with this instruction For example CPR 10 1000 1 sets the preset input of counter C10to 1 and also if an up flank has occurred being previously set to 0 the counter will be preset with a value of 1000 Presets the count of the indicated counter to the n value For example C42 1200 sets the count of counter C42 to 1200 Alters the status 0 1 of the indicated bit 0 31 of the indicated register 1 559 For example B5 R200 0 sets Bit 5 of register R200 to 0 Assigns the n value to the indicated register For example R 303 1200 assigns the value of 1200 to register R303 Assigns the n value to the indicated register group For example R234 236 120 assigns the value of 120 to registers R234 R235 and R236 Itmust be borne in mind that when referring toa single resource it is possible to do itusing its corresponding mnemonic For example STOP 1 is interpreted by the CNC as M5001 1 Page 12 Chapter 9 Section PLC MONITORING CREATE WINDOW This CNC allows the possibility of creating windows to display the status of the various PLC resources These windows will be shown overlapping the PLC program and the information displayed in them will be updated dynamically The options MODIFY WINDOW
572. us in the following circumstances When clearing the screen softkey CLEAR SCREEN When deactivating graphics softkey DEACTIV ATE GRAPHICS When redefining the part softkey DISPLAY AREA When redefining the new display area with a Zoom However when none of these steps are taken the Part graphics are maintained For example if a part program is simulated in solid graphics mode and then another one is simulated in line graphics mode the solid graphic display will be the one corresponding to the previous part program and not to the new one Page Chapter 3 Section 26 EXECUTE SIMULATE GRAPHICS 3 5 2 DISPLAY AREA In orderto use this option the CNC must not be executing or simulating a part program If so it must be interrupted The lower right hand side of the screen shows two cubes or two rectangles depending on the selected point of view Thecube whose sides are colored indicates the graphic area currently selected and the one drawn only with lines shows the size of display area being selected When the point of view shows a single cube side or when the selected type of graphics corresponds to one of the XY XZ or YZ planes the CNC will display two rectangles indicating the graphic area colored rectangle and the display area being selected non colored rectangle With this option it is possible to define the display area by assigning the desired values to maximum and minimum coordinates for
573. user a number of control sentences which are similar to the terminology used in other languages such as IF GOTO CALL etc It also allows the use of any type of expression arithmetic referential or logical It also has instructions for the construction of loops plus subroutines with local variables Local variable is understood to mean one which is only recognized by the subroutine in which it has been defined Itis also possible to create libraries grouping subroutines with useful and tested functions which can be accessed from any program Chapter 2 Section Page CREATINGA PROGRAM 3 2 1 3 END OF BLOCK The end of block is optional and may consist of the indication of number of repetitions of the block and of the block comment Both must be programmed in this order NUMBER OF REPETITIONS OF THE BLOCK N 0 9999 This indicates the number of times the block will be executed Movement blocks can only be repeated which at the time of their execution are under the influence of a modal subroutine In these cases the CNC executes the programmed move and the active machining operation canned cycle or modal subroutine the indicated number of times The number of repetitions is represented by the letter N followed by up to 4 digits 0 9999 The active machining operation does not take place if NO is programmed Only the movement programmed within the block takes place BLOCK COMMENT The CNC
574. vementalong the longitudinal axis to the coordinate of the point along this axis from where the cycle was called 2nd Movement on the main work plane to the point where the cycle was called Once the cycle has been completed the CNC will return the real values obtained after measurement in the following global arithmetic parameter P294 P295 P296 P297 P298 P299 Hole diameter Hole diameter error Difference between the real diameter and programmed diameter Real coordinate of the center along the abscissa axis Real coordinate of the center along the ordinate axis Error detected along the abscissa axis Difference between the real coordinate of the center and the programmed theoretical coordinate Error detected along the ordinate axis Difference between the real coordinate of the center and the programmed theoretical coordinate WORKING WITH A PROBE HOLE MEASURING 31 Chapter 12 Section Page 12 11 BOSS MEASURING CANNED CYCLE A probe placed in the spindle will be used which must be previously calibrated by means of canned cycles Canned cycle for calibrating tool length Canned cycle for calibrating probe The programming format for this cycle is PROBE 9 X Y Z B J E C H F X 5 5 Theoretical coordinate along the X axis of the center of the boss Y 5 5 Theoretical coordinate along the Y axis of the center of the boss Z 5 5 Theoretical coordinate along the Z axis of the c
575. ven in Kb It also indicates the EEPROM memory space being shared with the CNC and is available for storing the PLC program Also in Kb Chapter 12 Section Page DIAGNOSIS SYSTEMCONFIGURATION 3 12 1 2 SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION This option shows the software options available the software version installed and the identification code of the unit INSTALLED OPTIONS This section indicates the software configuration ofthe system and shows the following information The maximum number of axes which can be interpolated with the current CNC software version Allavailable software options SOFTWARE VERSION This section indicates the software versions corresponding to the CNC and the PLC IDENTIFICATION This section displays the identification code of the CNC This code is of the exclusive use of the Technical Service Department Page Chapter 12 Section 4 DIAGNOSIS SYSTEMCONFIGURATION 12 2 HARDWARE TEST This option checks the power supply voltages corresponding to the system and to the boards as wellas the internal temperature of the central unit It displays the following information HARDWARE TEST SUPPLY VOLTAGE volts r 45 4 40 45 60 440 5 60 13 40 416 80 13 40 16 80 3 00 3 90 VOLTAGES ON P C BOARDS 24 volts Axes O K Inputs Outputs 1 Error Inputs Outputs 2 Error Inputs Outputs 3 Error INSIDE TEMPERAT
576. viously The selection of tool radius compensation G41 or G42 can only be made when functions G00 or GO are active straight line movements If the compensation is selected while G02 or GO3 are active the CNC will display the corresponding error message The following pages show different cases of starting tool radius compensation in which the programmed path is represented by a solid line and the compensated path with a dotted line Chapter 8 Section Page TOOL RADIUS COM TODECOMPENSATION PENSATION G40 G41 G42 STRAIGHT STRAIGHT path COMPTYPE 0 COMPTYPE 1 Page Chapter 8 Section TOOL RADIUS COM 1 TOOLCOMPENSATION PENSATION G40 G41 G42 STRAIGHT CURVED path MPO83 COMPTYPE O COMPTYPE 1 Chapter 8 Section Page TOOL COMPENSATION TOOL RADIUS COM 5 PENSATION G40 G41 G42 8 1 2 TOOL RADIUS COMPENSATION SECTIONS The diagrams below show the different paths followed by a tool controlled by a programmed CNC with tool radius compensation The programmed path is represented by a solid line and the compensated path by a dotted line Page Chapter 8 Section 6 TOOL COMPENSATION TOOL RADIUS COM PENSATION G40 G41 G42 Chapter 8 Section Page TOOLCOMPENSATION TOOLRADIUS COM 7 PENSATION G40 G41 G42 Page Chapter 8 Section 8 TOOL COMPENSATION TOOL RADIUS COM PENSATION G40 G41 G42
577. wal at rapid feedrate G00 of the longitudinal axis to the initial or reference plane depending on whether G98 or G99 has been programmed Chapter 9 Section Page CANNEDCYCLES SIMPLEDEEP HOLEDRILLING 17 G83 If a scaling factor is applied to this cycle drilling will be performed proportional to that programmed with the same step T programmed but varying the number of steps J Programming example assuming that the work plane is formed by the X and Y axes that the longitudinal axis is the Z axis and that the starting point is XO YO ZO Y 550 T p X 550 R Z Z 0 98mm 22mm 1 22mm t 22mm T1 M6 G0 G9I0XO YO ZO i eee here eem Starting point G83 G99 G00 G90 X50 Y50 Z 98 I 22 J3 F100 S500 MA Positioning and canned cycle setting G98 G00 G91 X500 Y500 00 eee cece eeeesneeeeesneeeeeeseeeees Positioning and canned cycle anc Cancels canned cycle GOO XO Y Os si sitit eee HB Rd BERT Positioning MBO etie dede etie aote tee ete te ete tee taxes End of program Page Chapter 9 Section 18 CANNEDCYCLES SIMPLEDEEP HOLEDRILLING G83 9 5 5 G84 TAPPING CANNED CYCLE This cycle taps at the point indicated until the final programmed coordinate is reached The general logic output TAPPING M5517 will stay active during this cycle Due to the fact that the tapping tool turns in two directions one when tapping and the other wh
578. which was in the main window before requesting help The help menu can also be abandoned after pressing the ESC key to return to the previous operating option or the MAIN MENU key to return to the main menu Chapter 2 Section Page OPERATING MODE HELP SYSTEMS 3 CANNED CYCLES EDITING HELP Itis possible to access this help when editing a canned cycle It offers information on the corresponding canned cycle and an editing assistance for the selected canned cycle is obtained at this point For the user s own cycles a similar editing assistance can be obtained by means of a user program This program must be prepared with screen customizing instructions Once all the fields or parameters of the canned cycle have been defined the CNC will show the information which exists in the main window before requesting help The canned cycle which is programmed by means of editing assistance will be shown in the editing window and the operator can modify or complete this block before entering it in memory by pressing the ENTER key Editing assistance can be abandoned at any time by pressing the HELP key The CNC will show the information which existed on the main window before requesting help and allows programming of the canned cycle to continue in the editing window The help menu can also be abandoned after pressing the ESC key to return to the previous operating option or the MAIN MENU key to return to the main menu
579. wing error when it is operating in closed loop M19 When accessing one of these variables SPOSS SRPOS STPOSS SRTPOS or SFLWES block preparation is interrupted and the CNC waits for that command to be executed before resuming block preparation Read write variables SPRGSO This variable allows the percentage ofthe 2nd spindle speed selected by program to be read or modified This will be given by an integer between Oand MAXSOVR maximum 2595 If this has a value of 0 it means that it is not selected P110 SPRGSO assigns to P110 the 96 of the 2nd spindle speed selected by program SPRGSO P111 sets the value indicating the 2nd spindle speed seleceted by program to the value of arithmetic parameter P111 Chapter 13 Section Page PROGRAMMINGINHIGH LEVELLANGUAGE VARIABLES FOR 21 THE 2nd SPINDLE 13 2 11 VARIABLES ASSOCIATED WITH THE PLC It should be borne in mind that the PLC has the following resources Inputs Outputs Marks Registers Timers Counters I1 thru I256 O1 thru O256 M1 thru M5957 R1 thru R256 of 32 bits each T1 thru T256 with a timer count in 32 bits C1 thru C256 with a counter count in 32 bits If any variable is accessed which allows the status of a PLC variable to be read or modified I 0 M R T C block preparation is interrupted and the CNC waits for this command to be executed in order to restart block preparation Read only variables PLCMS
580. wing is defined for each The number 0 9999 of the defined miscellaneous M functions If an M function is not defined the CNC will show M The number of the subroutine to be associated with this miscellaneous function 8customizing bits x Bit 0 Indicates whether the CNC must 0 or must not 1 wait for the signal AUXEND signal of the M executed to resume program execution Bit 1 Indicates whether the M function is executed before 0 or after 1 the movement of the block in which it is programmed Bit 2 Indicates whether the execution of the M function interrupts 1 or not 0 the preparation of the blocks Bit 3 Indicates whether the M function is executed after calling the associated subroutine 0 or only the associated subroutine is executed 1 Bit 4 When bit 2 is set to 1 itindicates whether block preparation is to be interrupted until the M function starts executing 0 or until its execution is finished 1 The rest of the bits are not being used at this time Chapter 11 Section Page MACHINE PARAMETE MISCELLANEOUSFUNCTION 3 i TABLES 11 3 LEADSCREW ERROR COMPENSATION TABLES The tables for leadscrew error compensation have the following structure POSITION 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 PK PK PK PX SPS DK PX PX P P PX PX DX DX DS DK DX
581. xample for a deflection value of 1mm the tracing feedrate would be 1 m min If not programmed the canned cycle will assume the value of 1mm 0 03937 This parameter must be defined when digitizing a part besides tracing it It indicates the sweeping step of distance between two consecutive digitized points The CNC keeps the probe in constant contact with the surface of the model and it provides the coordinates of a new point after moving in space and along the programmed path the distance indicated by parameter L Page 42 Chapter 16 Section TRACINGANDDIGITIZING PLANEPROFILETRACING CANNEDCYCLE E 5 5 If not programmed or programmed with a value of 0 the canned cycle will assume that the model is not to be digitized This parameter must be defined when digitizing a part besides tracing it It indicates the chordal error or maximum difference allowed between the surface of the model and the segment joining two consecutive digitized points Itis given in the selected work units millimeters or inches ae 7747 gt If not programmed or programmed with a value of 0 the chordal error will be ignored and anew point will be provided after moving the L distance in space and along the programmed path mp1637 This parameter must be defined when digitizing the model besides tracing it Indicates the storing format for the digitized points in the program selected by means of the OP
582. xes of the machine as auxiliary spindle or live tool general machine parameter PO thru P7 To use the auxiliary spindle or live tool execute the command M45 Sx5 5 where S indicates the turning speed in rpm and the sign indicates the turning direction The CNC will output the analog voltage corresponding to the selected speed according to the value assigned to the machine parameter MAXSPEED for the auxiliary spindle To stop the auxiliary spindle program M45 or M45 S0 Whenever the auxiliary spindle or live tool is active the CNC will let the PLC know by activating the general logic output DM45 M5548 Also it is possible to set the machine parameter for the auxiliary spindle SPDLOVR so the Override keys of the front panel can modify the currently active turning speed of the auxiliary spindle Chapter 5 Section Page COMPLEMENTARY 15 6 1 6 PATH CONTROL The CNC FAGOR 8055 allows you to program movements on one axis only or several at the same time Only those axes which intervene in the required movement are programmed The programming order of the axes is as follows X Y Z U V W A B C RAPID TRAVEL G00 The movements programmed after GOO are executed at the rapid feedrate indicated in the axis machine parameter GOOFEED Independently of the number of axis which move the resulting path is always a straight line between the starting point and the final point Example Y 300
583. xiliary spindle Value assigned to machine parameter n of the PLC VARIABLES ASSOCIATED WITH THE WORK ZONES Section 13 2 6 Variable J Z e FZONE FZLO X C FZUP X C SZONE SZLO X C SZUP X C TZONE TZLO X C TZUP X C FOZONE FOZLO X C FOZUP X C AAADAAADAAAAAD AAADAAADAAAAAD Status of work zone 1 Lower limit of work zone 1 along the selected axis X C Upper limit of work zone 1 along the selected axis X C Status of work zone 2 Lower limit of work zone 2 along the selected axis X C Upper limit of work zone 2 along the selected axis X C Status of work zone 3 Lower limit of work zone 3 along the selected axis X C Upper limit of work zone 3 along the selected axis X C Status of work zone 4 Lower limit of work zone 4 along the selected axis X C Upper limit of work zone 4 along the selected axis X C VARIABLES ASSOCIATED WITH FEEDRATES Section 13 2 7 Variable FREAL Real feedrate of the CNC in mm min or inch min Variables associated with function G94 R R R W R R R W R R Active feedrate at the CNC G94 in mm min or inch min Feedrate selected via DNC Feedrate selected via PLC Feedrate selected by program Variables associated with function G95 FPREV DNCFPR PLCFPR PRGFPR Active feedrate at CNC G95 in m rev or inch rev Feedrate selected via DNC Feedr
584. y opened by means of the OPEN P statement 4 Once the canned cycle has concluded the probe will return to the starting point This movement consists of Movement of the probe along the Z axis longitudinal perpendicular axis to the position indicated by parameter Z Movement in the main work plane up to the cycle s initial point parameters X Y Chapter 16 Section Page TRACING ANDDIGITIZING ARCPATTERNTRACING 39 CANNEDCYCLE 16 7 3 PROFILE TRACING CANNED CYCLE ALONG A PLANE The programming format for this cycle is as follows X 5 5 Y 5 5 1 5 5 D5 5 B 5 5 TRACE 3 X Y Z I D B A C S Q R J K N L E G H F X Y Z Absolute theoretical coordinate value along the abscissa axis of the approach point It must be off the model Absolute theoretical coordinate value along the ordinate axis of the approach point It must be off the model Absolute theoretical coordinate value along the probing axis longitudinal perpendicular where the probe is to be positioned before starting the tracing operation It must be off the model at a safety distance from its outermost surface Theoretical coordinate value along the probing axis longitudinal perpendicular where the final tracing pass will be carried out Defines along the probing axis the distance between the Z position ofthe probe described above and the plane where the first tracing pass will be carried out
585. ysical outputs and the PLC resources on power up after the key sequence SHIFT RESET and after detecting a WATCHDOG error at the PLC The initialization process sets all resources to 0 except those active low They will be set to I During the monitoring of the PLC program and the various PLC resources the CNC will always show the real values of the resources If the PLC is on note that a program cycle is processed in the following way The PLC updates the real input values after reading the physical inputs from the electrical cabinet Tt updates the values of resources M5000 thru M5957 and R500 thru R559 with the values of the CNC logic outputs internal variables Executes the program cycle Tt updates the CNC logic inputs internal variables with the real values of resources M5000 thru M5957 and R500 thru R559 Jtassigns to the physical outputs electrical cabinet the real values of the corresponding O resources Tt copies the real values of resources I O M into their own images Page Chapter 9 Section 18 PLC MONITORING PLCIN OPERATIONPLCSTOPPED PHYSICALI REALI CNCLOGIC OUTPUTS M5000 5957 R500 559 M 5000 5957 CNCLOGIC R 500 559 INPUTS REALO PHYSICAL M OUTPUTS IMAGEI IMAGEO IMAGEM If the PLC is stopped it will work as follows The real values ofthe T resources corresponding to the physical inputs will be updated every 10 millisecon

fagor documentation for the 8055 cnc

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents